INFORMATION TO USERS

This manuscript has been reproduced &om the microfilm master. UMI
h s the text directly fiom the original or copy submitted. Thus, some
thesis and dissertation copies are in typewriter face, while others may be
fiom any type of computer printer.

The quality of this reproduction is dependent upon the quality of the

copy submitted. Broken or indistinct print, colored or poor quality
illustrations and photographs, print bleedthrough, substandard margins,
and improper alignment can adversely S e c t reproduction.

In the unlikely event that the author did not send UMI a complete
manuscript and there are missing pages, these will be noted. Also, if
unauthorized copyright material had to be removed, a note will indicate
the deletion.

Oversize materials (e.g., maps, drawings, charts) are reproduced by

sectioning the original, beginning at the upper left-hand comer and
continuing fiom left to right in equal sections with small overlaps. Each
original is also photographed in one exposure and is included in reduced
form at the back of the book.

Photographs included in the original manuscript have been reproduced

xerographically in this copy. Higher quality 6" x 9" black and white
photographic prints are available for any photographs or illustrations
appearing in this copy for an additional charge. Contact UMI directly to
order.

UMI
A Bell 62 Howell Information Company
300 North Zeeb Road, Ann Arbor MI 48106-1346 USA
3 13/761-4700 800/5214600
 T h i s dissertation has been 6442,852
microfilmed exactly as received

BUSH, Frederic W W a m , 192%-

A*G R A M U R OF THE HURFUAN LANGUAGE.

Brandeis University, Ph.D., 1964

Language and Literature, linguistics

University Microfilms, Inc., Ann Arbor, Michigan

 NOTE TO USERS

The original manuscript received by UMI contains pages with

poor print. Pages were rrlicrofilmed as received.

This reproduction is the best copy available

 A Dissertation

Presented to
The Faculty of the Graduate School of Arts and Sciences
Brandeis University
Department of Mediterranean Studies

In Partial Fulfillment
of the Reqtllsements of the Degree
Doctor of Philosophy

BY
Frederie Yi Pliam Bush
June 1964
 This dissertafion, directed and approved by
the candidate" Commit%ee, has been accepted
and approved by the Graduate Faculty of
Brandeis University in partial fnlfillment
of the requirements for the Degree of
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

' - Arts and ~ c i e n e e s y

/

!'/ Chairman
 It is a pleasure to aclxraowledga here my indebtedness
fo my teachers. To D s t ?Yi1Piam S e M o r of Fulier "I'heologi-
cai Seminary I owe my originai inspiration and interest in
linguistics and a thoroagh basic training, particularly in
the Sernitic langwages .
This study was undertaken at the suggestion of' Dr.
I

Cyrus B. Gordon, who has been my supervisor throughont. I

would like to express to him my thanks for his help and en-
couragement, as well as his continual inspiration aad sound
scholarship imparted through three years of class room in-
struction,
I wish to express thanks also t~ Professors Joseph de
Somogyi and Carleton T. Hodge who read the manuscript. I
would especially like to express my thanks to Dr. Hodge who
made many helpful comments and criticism^.^
I owe a special debt of gratitude to Professor E. La~osbe
of Strasbourg, France, who very generously made available to
me his exceedingly useful study of the new Ugaritic material
from Ugaritica V.
I would also like to exprrtss a wosd of appreciation to
Professor E o A. Speiser for his fundamental work Introduction
to Hurrian, through which I gained an insight into the com-
plexities; of Burxian Gramar an& withcjn* i~lzfch%his study
would nqt have been possible.
And finally, it is rith a deep sense of gratitude that
I e x i r e s s here my thanks to my wi'fe Jerel, not only for her
laBos and prowess exhibited in the typing sf both the sough
and final drafts of this dissertation, but a l s o for her help,
~mderstaniiing~and encouragement in its research and writing,
without :vhich it could no% have been done.
ACI(NOWLl3DGZhEPiTS 0 0 . ...... .... .
4 .
Page
iv
LIST OF AJ33REVIATIBNS USED . . . . . .... . 0 6 -wii
LIST OF SEEIOLS USED .. . .... ...... xxii

1.1 The purpose of the s t u d y . ..........

. . . . .. . .. . .. .. .. ..
1.2 The sources a v a i l a b l e f o r the Hurrian language
1.21 The Xiittannf Letter

. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
1 - 2 2 The rnaterial fson ~oghazlrzi
1.23Thelfari texts

. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...
1.24 The material from Ugarif
1=24P The alphabetic tex%s , , , , ,
1.242 The s y l l a b i c t e x t s

1.244 The vocabularies . . . . . . . .. .. .. ..

1.243 The -4ldcado-IIurrian b i l i n g u a l
a
1.2441 The Sumero-I-Iurrian vocabulary
1,2442 The Qx&irilingnaP vocakulary ....
.
1.26 T h e a a t e r i a l fromNtrztr. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
1.25 The Foundation Lion I n s c r i p t i o n from UrkiS
. .
1=27 The personal names
1.28Other sources . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. ..
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. ..
1.3.The main source f o r the Grammar ,
1.4 T r a n s l i t e r a f i o n and normalization
1 0 5 T h e alphabeti'c order

.
I I . 1XE m~GiACTERISTICSOF THE OHTIIOGBAPHIC SYSTXBIS
USED FOR ~ Y H X T I S GI I ~ X R I K N . . , IA-
2.1 The s y l l a b i c orthogra1:hies used f o r IXu~rrrrian . 14
graphiesusing i t . ........ .
2.11 The " ~ u r r o - 1 1 i t t i t e s y l l a b a r y and the ortho-
a 0 15
2.111 The d i s t i n c t i v e f e a t u r e s of the Burro-
H i t t i t e s y l l a b a r y as used f o r iikkadian
2.112 The d i s t i n c t i v e f e a t u r e s of the B u r r o -
.. 15
S i t t i t e syllabary a s used for Hurrian 18
2.1121 The orthography of the l i i t t a n n i Letter 18
ments from Ugarit ..........
2.1122 The orthography of the Hurrian docu-
22

rianbilingual.. . . ...
2.11221 The orthography of the Aklcado-Hur-
2.11222 The orthography of the Sumero-Rur-
22
 f i$
.. . . . ..
rian vocabulary = a

. ..... . .
2,11223 The orthography of the Q~adrilin~aZ
vocabulary. o . 0

2.11224 The orthography of the rest of the

. .. .. .. .. . ..
syllabic material from Ugarit
(l) The letter. a ,
-.
( 2 ) The religious tests 0

...
2.1123 The orthography of t k s material from
Nuzu, klalab, and ~oghazk6i
2,113 The origin of the Hrrrro-Xi "te syllabary
a 0

. ...... ..
2.12 The "~abylonian"syllabary an the orthogra-
phies using it 0 0 0

ian" syllabary. a..... ...

2-121 The distinctive features of the "~abylon-
a 8

. . . .. .. .. .. ..
2.122 The distinctive features of this syllabary
as ased for Hurria~
2,1221 The Hurrian texts from Xari e 0
8

2.1222 The Hurrian names from "~abylonian"

site^...^..........*..
2.13 Tlze orfaography of the Foundation Lion In-
scription from the Amad period .......
iansyllabary . ... . .. . .....
2.131 The distinctive features of the Old Akkad-
*

. . .. ... ... ... ... . .. ..

. .. .. .. ...
2.132 The orthographic features of the Harrian
inscription 0 0

2.1321 The stops

2.1322Theuse of the sign$. + 9

the sibilants . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .
2.1323 The problem of the representation of
I

. .. .. .. .. ... ... .. .. -
2,1324 The use of the vowel U
2.21 The alphabet . . . . . . . .-
2.2 The alphabetic orthography of Ugarit
2.22 The ortlhog~aphicpractices
*

3,l representation of the vowels

3-11 Tbevomafs [a), [ e l , and [i]
.. .. .. .. .. .. . . .
3.1?P Tbs a~big~fty cf th8 sfgxs for the [it] and
3,112 The vowels Cu] and [o]
3.113 The use of pleonastic vowels
. . . .. .. .. .. . .. . ..
C e ] ~ o w e l s . . . . . . . . . ~ . . . . ~ .

betic material from Ugarit ....... .

3.12 The representation of the vowels in the alpha-
302 The representation of the semivowq$s [y] and [a]
..
3,21 The representaficinef [ y j
. . . .
. . . . . .. .. ..
3.22 The representation of the semivowel Cg]
3.3 The representation of the stops
3.31 The inherent limitations of the syllabary
texts. .......... ...... .
3.32 The representation of the stops in the Hurrian
3.321 EIurrian texts written by Hurrian scribes
 3.322 fiarrian t e s t s ~ r r i t t e nby Semitic s c r i b e s 48
3.33 Xze r e p r z s e n l a t i o r of t h e s t o p s i n personal
occnrrixg i 2 rilcl,zidian t e x t s
3.331 Hurriaa ncaterisl o c c ~ ~ r r i nas
...
nanes, t e c h i c z l t e r n s , and lorn ~vords
g x~f,n~es,
0 4-8
t e c h n i c a l t e r n s , and g l o s s e s i n t 3 e
- : ~ ~ C ~ C Z I , ~ ? ~ . CtLe
f I i t t i t e sylla3asy ...... ..
E ~s t s which t:se t h e IIurro-
4-9
bySemiticscxibes.. . ....
3.332 IIurrian nanes i n ti1rlcadian t e x t s vrritten
o 4-9
a ~ tdh e i r p o s i t i o n a l voicing .. .. .
3.34. Ti'he e v i d e ~ c ef o r the H-crr r i n n s t o p phonemes
50

.. .. . . .. . . .. .
3=3,?-1T h e fsbial s t-in ~ 50
3 . 3 4 2 T h e d e n t a l s t o p Kt] 51
3.343 The p a l a t a l s t o p [IXI a a o 51
.. ..
3. 35 Conclusion: v o i c i n g of t h e s t o p s i s non-

. . . . - ..
nhonemicinIIurrisn. e e e e e e 51
3.351' The phonemic symbols f o r t h e s t o g s 53
3.36 The problem of s t o p c l u s t e r s 53

.. . . .
3 . 3 Doubling of the s t o p s i n I-Iurrian mst b e
taken as etymological doubling 54
3e38 The phonetic n a t u r e of t h e stops o J 55
cates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. -. .
3.4 The r e p r e s e n t a t i o n of t h e s i b i l a n t s and a f f r i -
57
3.41 The evidence of the a l p h a b e t i c t e x t s
3,42 The evidence of t h e s y l l a b i c m a t e r i a l . . . . 59 57
58
3.431 The s i b i l a n t phoneme [ s ]
3.432The11honeme Cz] ,
. . . . .
3047 The phonemic i n t e r p r e t a t i c r : of the evidence *
............. . . . 59
60
3044 The ambiguity of t h e s- zild z - s i g n s i n t h e
pezsonal names f ron a m g a r Bazar , TJippur ,
andAZStrr. * . . . . . . . . , . .. .. 61
* . 61
3.5 The r e p r e s e n t a t i o n of tho d e n t a l f r i c a t i v e L Q ]
3.51 The a l l o p h o n i c n a t u r e of t h e v a r i a t i o n g-2 . 62
does r e p r e s e n t l e n g t h . . . . . . . . .. .. 65
3.511 Double w r i t i n g of 5 i n t h e s y l l a b a r y
-
3.512 The d i s t r i b ~ f t i o nof 4 and Q at Ugarit
63

AldGLdiELil s c r i b e s . .. ....
3.51 3 The evidence of variZnt wrYticgs by
a 66

. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . ...
3.5'14 The evidence of the Foxmdatiou Lion
inscription 68
3.515 ConcI.usion. 69
3.53 The phonetic c h a r a c t e r of [8] . . . . . .. .. . .. 7270
3.52 The phonemic symbol f o r t h e d e n t a l f r i c z t i v e 70

3.61 Xvidence of i t s e x i s t e n c e ...........

3.6 The r e p r e s e n t a t i o n of t h e labial f r i c a t i v e
72
4 - -

labial f r i c a t i v e ..............
1-(;2 The a.l~p'h~ndc nature of iroioiug i n =&he
73
correspondences . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 74
3.621 The evidence of t h e a l p h a b e t i c - s y l l a b i c
73
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
3.622 The evidence of t h e ZIittanni L e t t e r
3.623 Conclusion
3.63 The ambiguity of tb5 orthograp3y
75
75
viii
 . . . . . .. .. ..
3*64 The phonetic quality of the labial fricative
3.7 The representation of the velar fricative
3.71 The evidence for the phoneme
fricative. .............. .
3.72 The allophonic nature of voicing in the vela2
3.73 The evidence of the Formdatioil Lion inscrip-
tion
3.74 Conciusion
. .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-
.

3.8 The representation of the liquids and nasals

. b O .

..
. . . . . . O . . . . .

'

nasals . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
3.81 The resonant qua.lity of the liquids and.
3.82 The distribution of the liquids
3=83SyflabisLandg . * . . . .- - - - +

Hrrrrian . . .-. . . . . . . . . . . .
3*9 The phonemic character of consonantal length in
@

4.1 The preliiniinary nature of the present statement

4.2 The elision and assimilation of the stem vow-el
of the nominal
~$..21 T h e elision of the stem vowel -a before ne
............. ..
4 - 2 2 The elision of the stem vowel 6 t h stems that
e i i d i n , ~ . a~ . . .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .
Lf.221qrith the stem vowel -a
4.222 tYifh the stem vowel - g / ~
- =
= . ... .
4.23 The change of fhe stern vowel -g/i to -g/g
before -be/-me and - z z i ... ...
4.24 The a s s i m i I Z t i ~ o fthe-/~ stem vowel to
the a-vowel of the nrominal associatives .
classmarkers ................
4.. 3 Elision 55dl assimilation of the verbal vocalic
4.31 The assimilation of tbe class marker after
prominal associative . ... .. . .
the negative -l&- to the -vowel of the
+

associative -omii r ..... .. ..

4..32 The elision of the class marker before the
e

- .
LL. 33 The elision of the transitive class :~;ar!rer
-I- b e f o r e the vol-mtativc snffi x -1- a

..
4.34 'l'se elision o f the intransitive class marker
-0- bcfoze the jussive suffix -2-/-en- o

the pronominal associatives .........

4.4 The elision of the agentive suffix -€J(g- before

tive Cf] ........ ........ .

4..5 The elision and assimilatioii of the labial Prica-
*
4.51 Tae elision of [f] after the 3rd perssn pos-
sessive s c ~ f f i s -z(y).- e e e = = + r 1 3 % 3

q., 52 The elision of the labial fricative [f ] after

the dental fricative f ~ ]
4.53 The assimilation of the labial fricative of
.........
the genitive sixffix -fe and the dative saf-
fix -fa to the 2nd person possessive suffix
- 2- . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . ~ .
 6 . 224 The i n d e f i n i t e p r o n o m ole-
6 . 225 The i n c l u s i v e pronoun beyar~mna
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 107
PO7
6.226 The extensive pronoun m-
6 . 2 d ~ h ~ ~. .~ . ~. .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 107
~ .a . l. ~
6 . 3 The nominal root-complements . . . . . . . . . . .
108

( 1) The
(2)
root-complement -%-. . . . . . . . . . ..lo9
The root-complement - a x t i - . . . . . . . . . . . 3.09
108

( 35 The r-jot.cotti;l i e ~ i e n t -
(4.) Theroot-complement -1;- . . . . . . . . . . . .
-~B;J- . . . a . m . . . . . . . . 7 q n

( 5 ) Theroot-comp1e1:leut -1- . . . . . . . . . . . .
lli
llli
( 6 ) Yae root-couplement a . * o o I l l
( 7 ) T l ~ e r o o t - c o m.........
....The.... . . . ......-. .~~lement
. ... . . . . .. . r
.
-g-
-p- . . . ..

. .

..... a s * s *

11 11 11
. . . . . . . . . . . .
IO\ A
....... ..-- e . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-2-
(9)
(10)
soot-colgvlement
root-complement
The
-
.
-8-
.
-@1-.
6.~7. The nominal s u f f i x e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . 112
112

6-41 General considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

113
L
.
A 0
<.c g l a r a l i z i n g s u f f i x f o r the pronominal and
niy-
~ 1 ~ s
relational suffixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
u,' .L>L.
a 9The ~ l x i r a i i z a t i o nof the pronominal strf f i v e s
1 114-

6 . ~ 3The ;3rononinal s u f f i x e s . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 114-

6 4 - 2 2 The p l u r a l i z a t i o n of the r e l a t i o n a l s u f f i x e s
115
6.431 The pronominal s u f f i x paracigm
' > . ~ 1 3 2 ~ieirsttperson
~e
6.433 The second nerson
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ::6116
115

6 . 434 The t h i r d personI

5.p. ... . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . .. 117
The b ~ x a t i o n a ior case 11 s u f f i x e s
. . . .. .. . . 113
I

~3.u.1The r e l a t i o n a l s u f f i x p a r a i g m 119
.
6 ~ 4 . 2The zero-suff i x form of the nominal
6 . 4421 The form of t h e zero-suff i x form . .. 119 121

..
6.4422 Ifhe f u n c t i o n of the zero-suffix form
6 u.3 The agentive suf f is -88- N -8 /Y -nee- m -n$
6 a 3 1 The f o r m of the agentive s u f f i x . . . . .. 124
a
121

125
6.4432 The f u n c t i o n of the agentive s u f f i x * 125
-
6 - n The
.ri~44.1
~ ~genitive s u f f i x - f e - - - = - ~ - e -
-=-
The form of the g e z t i v e s u f f i x
. . . . . . . . . .. .. ..
N-ge-
.. .. 126
126
(a) '1'1~3 form
(b) The form
{ c ; T h e Torn1 -g-
-=-. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 127
127
126

(d) The w r i t i n g -p-ve-

( e ) The form
. . . . . . . . . . . .
-=- . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1128
28
(fj The p l u r a l form -&-
. . 129
6.4442 The f u n c t i o n s of t h e g e n i t i v e s u f f i x
129

. . . . . . . . . . . . 129
(a) To form modifiers expxessing possession
or a~pwrtenance
...................
(3) The g e n i t i v e - g e n i t i v e " p r e p o s i t i o n a i "

~ o b r n e d t h e verb . . . . . . . . . . .
m h - ~ ~ n n
..,,.,.I. 2.39

6.445
(c) by
. . . 132
form of t h e G t i v e s u f f i x . . . . 132
dative suffix
The -fa-N-E-
132

( a ) The form -fa- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

6.~51 The
...
The w r i t i n g -a-na- . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
(b8Theform-z- . . . . . . . . . m o m . . 123
(c!
 G.q452
. . . . . . . . . . .
The function of the dative suffix . . . . 133
( d ) The plural form -€&- 133
(a) Th6 expression of advantage or benefit
. . . . . . . . . . . 134
. 133
. . . . . . ... ... ... ... ... 135
(b) The phrase alamu-fa
(c) The construction
id) Governed by the verb 135
6 . 4 - The directive suffixtn.-.&-- -
6.4461~hefasrnofthedirectivesuffix
a
.
6 . ~ 6 2The function of the directive suffix
. . .. . 1-36
136
136
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 136
.a) Exprzssing motion towards, actually or
logically 11
( 5 ) Expressing the force of belonging to" 138
phrase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
( c ) T)IP da-ki~e-di4~c-kFve ' ' p r e p ~ s i t ~ n a a 2 1 "
. The phzase x-fa et-i-ta . . . . . . . . . 141
phrase x-fa ay-i-ta . . . . . . . . . 1Al
B The

. The phrase x-fa fur-i-ta . . . . . . . . 142

8.

D o The phrase x-fa ap-i-ta . . . . . . . . . 142

C

6. 4-7 The comitafive suffix - 2 ~ - m - - u r a - . . . . . 142

2.4471 The form of the cornitative suffix . . . . 142
I! The locative suffix - y a - d - 5 - . . . . . . . 14.3
6.4t72 The function of the comitativ!: suffix 143
. 4Lt8l The form of the locative saffix . . . . . 144
6 . g 8 2 The fmcfion
6.~49The "stative" suffix -a- . . . . . . . . . . 145
the locative suffix
~f . 2.44
6 - 4 - 3 1The form of the stazive suffix . . . 145
6.4492 The f~mctianof the stative suffix . . 146
- . 146
The use of the compormd form -= . . . . 147
(a) The use of the cornpormd forms -&/-ma
6 . 5 The anaphoric suffixes -= and -=
(b)
I1
. . . . . 148
i.451 The basic 1I
meaning of the particles: one"
.
6 -52 ~herrsesof the suffix -ne one" . . . -=
na ones" . . . . . . . .I1 m a . . . . . 1..49
. . ..
149
.
2.4421 Tbe relationsi or anasoric uses of
...........
A Its use as an anaphoric suffix-connective
149

. i n nominal phrases
sentence level . . . . .-=
........
B Its use as an anaphoric particle on the
149
153
154
6.4522 The derivational uses of
6-453 The uses of the suffix -na "ones"
6.4531 The relational ases o f-na
. .
. . . . a .

....... . . .
157
157
6.4432 The derivation~lnses of-a - a . a . . .
6.46 Theadjectival suffixes . . . . . .-a . . .. .. .. ..
1/59
103
6.461 The adjectival suffixes -be and
6.4611 The form of the suffix=
6.4612 The function of the suffixes
.... .. .. .. .. ..163
163
163
..... T h e f n ~ m-he = =
.A.
.
B.Theform.&.
C The co~~pormd
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
= = = = a

forms -&/-&a
a e

164
164-
G

.
D m The forms i n - w . . . . m e . . . . . .165
E Other possible suffixes containing -&
-a. . . . . . . . .
.. .
165
6.462 The adjectival suffix
6.463 The "adverbial" suffix -= . . . . . . . . . 166
166
 6.4.631 The f orrt of t h e s a f f i x . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 167
. . .
5.4632 The f u n c t i o n of t h e s u f f i x
.
lalag lag
. . . . .
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 163
b The Xlittami L e t t e r 168
168

C. The vocabularies 163

. . . . . . . . 169
D e The p o s s i b i l t y of a r e l a t i o n a l s n f f i s f o r c e
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 170
6 . ~ 7The " i n f i n i t i v a l " snff i x - t m e
b . 4 7 l ~ h e f o r m o f the s u f f i x 170

.
5.5 The ncminalizing s c f f i x -=. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 171
6.472 The f m c t i o n of the s u f f i x
172
6 jl The f o r a of the s u f f i x
Ga52 The f-mction of tlie strffis . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 172 172
uf . 521 I-ts f-cmc.t;ior' t ~ i t hnominals
6.522 I t s frmc-bion i n nc?mir?alizing ~rerbai,forms . 173
173

7.1 General considerations

7.2 T h e v e r b a l root
7.3 The verbal c l a s s e s
. .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
177
177
177
7.~.'d'Be~rerbalsuffixes . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
y . ~ f i The verbal root-coar~ple~lzents
173
173
- . . . . . . 1 7 9
( 1) '?he root-coc~~lement
(la) The zco%-cornple2?ent -%-
-=-
-%-n-)

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
-ZX-
186
( 2 ) The root-conipiement
( 3 ) The root-conpleme~t -=- . . . . . . . . . . .
( A ) T h e r o o t - c o r q l e m e n t .@-- ...........
181
181
181
( 5 ) The root-co?nnle;ncnt .%--, .%., -
and-&- . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. ..
( 5 ) The root-co~19le:nent .ill..
1'32

( 7 ) T h e root-complement ...........
$81 The root-complement -I?- a . o m s e a . o o . 1 8 3
-rrl(l)- 133
183

-=-
( 3 'I'her~ot-c0~;3letnent-2- . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 183
18Li.
( 1 0 ) The -roo-l;-co1~31emerrt
(11) The root-coi~pleiaezt -rdrar-
(123 The root.co:.i.l~~le.neat
7
.........
..m. . . . . . . . . .
186
186
(14-j T!le root-con~plemelzt
7,(.2 TBe Lense s c f f i x e s
-=-.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
-a-
( 1 3 ) The root-coluplen~errt 187
187
187
. ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
e a 0 a a 5 0

7.1'21 The indicatiorz of present te;zse 188

7.4.22 The i n d i c a t i o n of p a s t tense 188

. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. ..
7.423The i n d i c a t i ~ ~ ofrrttzre ? tense 199
7.424 T h e natnre of t h e I I tense" involved 193
7.425The element .iinpa. 193
7 - 4 3 The i n d i c a t o r s of t h e t r a n s i t i v e and i n k r a n s i -
.
7 4Jr
.............
t i v e verbal c l a s s e s
~ ~ ~ p h ~ l o gd i i v~i sai nLn ~f the Ilurrian
194
verbal i n the expression of mood ......
7.45 The r e l a t i o n a l s u f f i x e s of the i n d i c a t i v e mood 139
198
7.4.51 The negative of %he i k ~ d i c a f i v enood .
7.4511 The n e ~ a t i v eof t h e agentive c o n s t r a c t i o n
199
- 7 - . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . aoa
7.Lr5111 T h e i'orr:~ of' the szrf'f i x . . .. 200

xiii
 7.45112 The use of the suffix . . . . . . . . 201
7.4512 The negative of s~bject-actioncon-
tra.nsitive. -I&- . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 201
struction. both transitive and in-
7.45121 The form of the srrffix 202
........ 203
7.4513Thenegativesuffix -= . . . . . . . 205
7.45122 The use of the suffix
~~
mood . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 206
7.452 The agentive suffixes in the indicative
205
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 206
7.4521 The agentive suffix paradigm
7.4522 The first person
7.4523 The second person
7.4524 The third person . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 208
7.4525 The plural of the agentive suffix 208
207

7.46 The relational suffixes of the non-indicative

moods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
7.461 The vocalic class markers. -f- transitive.
-= .intransitive . a . O . . . . . . . . . 209
7.462 The-expression of the negative in the non-
indicative moods . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
formandmeaning . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 213
7.463 The non-indicative mood suffixes. their
7.463~The volunfative or purposive suffixes
213
7.4631 r 'L1he form zf the suffixes . . . .
. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2ld
2?,A
7.46312~heuseofthesnffix
7.4632 The "modal" suffixes 216
..
7.46321 The jussive suffixes
k The suffix -g-/-m- . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 217
1 The form of the suffix
216
216
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 219
2 The problem of the representation of
the plural 217
..
.
3 The ase'of the suffix
H The suffix -%-/-w-
C The suffix
. . . . . . . . a ,228
- a - / - ..........
~- 228
7-46 322 The suffix of contingency ---
.. . . . 223
B The use of the suffix
7.47 The non-indicative
. . . . .. .. ....... .. 230
A The form of the suffix . . . . a . O . . 230
230

7.A71The 1111 vo1untative"mo~d . . . . . . . . . 230

m o ~ d sof Rurzian
............. 231
7.472The jussive"mood
704721 The simple jussive mood . . . . . . . . . 231 231

. .. .. .. ... ..... ... ... ..... ... 233

7.4722 The 'iheigh+je~8f3'1 jnssiv8 rneec? +
7. 6,723 The "polite" jussive mood 232
7.4.73 The contiogent moods 232

. . .. . . . . .234.
7.4731 Siqsle contingency
7.4732 The mood of ob1igai;ion or duty 234
7-48The qnestion of voice in IIurrian
VIII. THE PMTICLES: THX3.H FORM AND FUPaCTTON . 235 0

Genera? cqqsidezatfons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

8.1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
8.3 The particle classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
8.2Thepalcti-cle.ro&
..

xiv
 8.4 Particles exhibiting -s/-g stems
(1)au.
.........
239
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...239
.....................239
( 2 cur-
(3)panu-
(4)QWO-
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 240
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
(5) unto-
8-5Particles exhibiting -his stems . . . . . . . . . 240
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. e24.I
. 241
241
(1) ala0e-
( 2 ) s . .
( 3 ) ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e.2A2
(4)a - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ....... .. ....0 .. .. ......2. . 2 4433
(7) pati- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
(8)patmami- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 .
( 9 ) ather possibilities .............. 24.4
8.6 Particles exhibiting -2 stems . . . . . . . . . . 24-4-
(I) inna- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(2) =a-
( 3 ) Q&a-
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .. .
. .
. .
241.

. 245
245
8.7 Particles exhibiting consonant stems . . . . . . . 246
(1) anam- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
(2) an- . . . . . . . . . e . . . . . . . . .= . * 2 4 6
( 3 ) z=. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2ik6
(4)?e?ca~z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
(5) tiQQan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
(6) zdian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.8
8 . 8 T h e r e l a t i v e p a r t i ~ . l e ~ . / ~ . . . . . . . . . . . 248
A . Relative adjective function . . . . . . . . . . . 248
B . Kelative pronotm function . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
I;; . T ~ I E
ASSOCIATIVXS: T ~ I A Foaai
AND FLJNCTPON . . . . . 252
9.1 General considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . ~252 .
c l e - _ n - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
9.2 The associative predicative and copulative parti-
9 . 3 The pronoruiiia~ associatives . . . . . . . . . . . 253
9-31 The pronominal associative paradigm . . . . . . 253
9.3211heformof thesuffixes . . . . . . . . . . . 253
9.321 The form of the Tirst person singular -=a- 254-
3.322 The form of the fisst person plrrral -til(I)a 254
3 .323 The secoocl persm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
9.324 The third person sing~lsz . . . . . . . . . 255
9.33 The uses of the pronominal associatives . .
9.325 The fort71 of*the third person plural -l( 1)a- 258
9.331 Their function as subject . . . . . . . . . 261
. 261
7.332 Their f ~ m c t i o aas goal . .
9.4. The connectives * J
. .. ..
and -I& . . . . . . . . . 262
= = 262

9 . 4 1 T l l e c o n n e ~ t i v e . - ~ F.~ . . . . . . . . . . . 263
-%/-an

9 - 4 2 The connective -man . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

- . . . . . . . . . 268
.
9.5 The associative -=Tllre-
9.6 The associative .nin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
-xan
9.7 The associative -~nrr, a t n m . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
9.8 T h e associative .- . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 273
9.F The associative suffix -2
270

9-10 The associative -nni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

A .. PriinarySonrces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
azd Leuicogra~hy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B Studies Bearing on Burrian Orthography. Grammar.
C . Studies Bearing on Hurrian i-Iistory. Culture. and 406
ChronoZogy . . . . . . . . . . . o m . . -.4.1 8

xvi
 LIST OF ko3REVIATIONS

The Annual of the American Schools of Orienfal

sosearche
3. Labat, Lshkkadien de 3oghaz-lcaie

K a Balkan3 Ankara arkeoloji mczesinde bulmZa

~opazkilyfabletleri , Istap1hct, 1948*
-
Af 0 Archiv ffxr .@r$entforschunge

-
&i"Y I3 \Ye von Soden, Aklcadisches Yaradworterbuch,

-
M A kmerican Journal of Archaeologx.
AJSL
P
American Journal of Semitic&neuacres ~ n d
Literatures,
Auvi
- des L e t t =
A . F'i.net, L'~i~~radien de Marie
An Or AnaPecta Orientalia*
C'> .*
Arch Or Archiv Orients-ai
-
AT Dm J Wiseman, The Alalakh Tablets.
BASOR Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental
2esearcLG
J e Friedrich, " ~ i l e i n e~ e i t r s ~zur
e Charritischen
~rammatik,"b ~ l A ( e )42/2,
~ 1939,
E o Forrer , ~ognazk8i-~este
in Umschrift,
~ ~ ~ Y D 41-42
OG /
( 1922-20)J,
1

--C44-;0 Chicago hssyriar, Dictionary.

PAT C. -Ge m n Brandanstein, "ZLX Chnln~ischenaxs
xvi i
 den as-~chainra- ex ten," ZDi?IG 91( 1937) : 555-76.
Comtes Rend~rsde ~ ' ~ c a d 8 r n ides
e Inscrintions
e t Belles Lettres.
11
E. LarocSe, Catalogue des Textes S i t f i t e s ,
111, 11 ;:as 15 f a s c . Go(1957): 30-89.
C. 3. Gordon, he D i a l e c t of the Muzu TaSlets, 11

cz
- 7 ( ;933! : 32-63, 2i5-232,

Xnudzton, Die E l A~:~marna

Taf e l n .
11. Kronasser , Etymologie der hethitisclzelz
Sprache, 'Ariesbaden: Sarrassomitz, 1363.

- P. ? f a Purves, he Early Scribes of F u z i , 1:

IUSL 57( 1940) : 162-187

-
GAG 3. von Soden, G r ~ m d r i s sder ~iIdcadischenG r a : l ~ -

ma%ik.
G. S~iiraiin,A Grarx~ar of the.4lkadian T a b l e t s

forrnd. a t U g a r i t , 'iJr?prrblished Ph.3, D i s s e r t a t i o n ,

Yialtha!n: Drandeis UniversiLy, 1962.
P a M. P ~ r r v e s , "11urriali Conscnantal P a t t e r n , 11
IQST. 5,917
.#-
9/11 \#
\ - / - r e
: 378-404,

E. A. Draffkorn, Iiurrians a116 Ilr~rrmiana t A l a l a Q ,

Uz~ptrblishedP12.D. D i s s e r t a t i o n , Philadelahis:
University of Pern~sylvania, 1959.
I . J . Gelb, Ifurzians and S r r b a r i a ~ s .
-
.
iiarvard S e m i t i c Series.
I-Iagia Tr iada.
J . Friccirich, l I e t k i t i s c h e s ';?'orterbnch.
-I b i d Y
a
2 . ~ r e d z ; l z r ~ l ~ sth.e f

II. 3ozir~~,rrt,
BI. Gig, 9. G. Gr.rterbock, Istanbul
arlreolo;ji cdze1er inde be~lrnlan~ o z a z k l j y

-
tabletlerinden secne
"
m e t i n l e r , 3 v o l s . , Istmibul:
l34-4, we-7, 1954.
X. A . S p e i s e r , Introdr~@iont o Ilusrian.
-
T& ~ Q Z T % ? ? , = sf
C~ +ha
v i r v
hr*an<
- - i i i ~ ~ & W - ' a
nV L- Lz S i---.+ri
I3ULu-L
l 0-e.: -*--
L3UUIGkl.~.

J oc~rnalo f C~meif
orm SStudiese
Journal of Z m t i a n Archeologye
J o i n t X:inedi%i$g.. vff th tlie I raq -?,iirsecim at PTrrzi.

--
The Journal of t h e Paleseine G r i e n t a l Society.
J orrrnal of :Yorld History.
J, F r i e d r i c h , K l e i n a s i a t i s c h e ~ ~ r a c - k a d e n ~ m & l e s .
Lei l s c h r i f t t e s t e arrs ~ o ~ l ~ a z k t j i ~
The t r a n s l i t e r a t i o n of BIL by ICnudtzon i n ..
~ e i t r a e eznr h s s g r i o l o e i e 4(1902) : 134ff.
Kei l s s h r i f twrlrunden aus ~ophazk6i.
L a ~ ~ p u a ~ -ofistic
e. S o c i e t v of
A z e r i ca .
3;itteilmnieen der B l f o r i e ~ L a l i s c h e l = ,
Gesellschaft.
!litteilunren der Deatschen Orient-Gesellschaft,
The Xiittanni L e t t e r Prom the T e l l . el-Amaraa
tablets.
B e Landsberger and R , 'r, H a l l o c l r , "I)ZS !roi:abrrlar
S" ,Ii isterialen zing Src~~crischep
Lexikon I1I .
B . Lancisberger , l s l a t @ r i a l e nZ r S r m e r ischen Lexi-
-
Xron V. -
The S e r i e s gAi?-ra, = Q'z~b~llw.Tablets 1-1%~.
XI?:
- ( e 1G
:>:'d.J% 'iitteilmszen der Vorderasistisch ( f ron 1322
:iKp3tisch) ex~csellss?i3ft.
-
RYJA
- Uerkooz, The Nuzi Dialect ofxd.:adian.
-i I. $ a G e l b , P. !,I. Purves, A. A. Xacsae, Nuzi
Pe r sona l Na~xes .
-
0AT;/G I. J . Gelb, Old BIdcadian 17ritinr and Gra~m,ar_.
-
OLZ O r i e n t a l i ~ t i ~ sL
~ iht e, ~
ratarzeitmg.
Orientalia.

-
PZQ P a l e s t i n e Exnloration Q ~ a r t el yr e
-
PITCP A. T. Cla.y, Personal Xa~11esfrom Cmsiforn Doca-
meats of the Cassite Period.

-
P3U i i Ch. Virollea~cZ,Le Talais R ~ : ~ a dl t U z a r i t , 11.

-
P2rJ I11 J . ?Totrgayrol, L e P a l a i s lioysl d l ~ J r r s r i t ,111.

PSVY Peremeaziatski> Sbornik: Vogrosy S e t t o l a i i i

I;:.crslrito_loaii, Lfoscon: I z d a t e l ' s"cvo VostoEi~oj
i i t e r a t u r y , 1961.
2eviie d ' k ~ s s ~ r i o l o &ei te dtkrch60io,zie Orientale.
- h i t t i t e e t asia~xique.
Revue
I1
X. Lsroche, Becherches sur l e s noms des d i e m
hittites,
st
=\7 fasc. ~!+6(1?46-?-7):7-13?.
-
3ii F. Thtrrearr-"Sangin, Le Syl l a b a i r e Accadien
Schr . The c m e i f orm facsimile of the ;,Tittanni Letter
found i11 t e x t ?To. 200 of 0. Schroeder, Die Ton-
t a f e l n von el-Amarna.
-
SL A. Deimel , S'~a11er
isches Lesikon.
Ug. ii-E B i l e The i~ld~ado-14urria
b i l i n g u a l from Ugarit.
ZTalg?l~.
~. The a l p h a a e t i c 3 u r r i a n t e x t s from Ugari-i;*
XX
Ug. Ut~ad. Voc. The qrradrilingnal vocalsulary f r o ~ nTJgarit.
-ug.
- 5-11 Voc. The Smero-Ilurriazz a r o c a ~ ~ ~ ~l'rom
l a r y Usari t
3g. syll. The s y l l a a i c Enrriaz t e x t s f r o m Ugarit.

-
-yr a
b11,! C. 11. Gordoil, I j ~ a rtii c t : a a ~ ~ a l .
&y Vorderasiatiscl~e~ c h r itdenlmales,
f Berlin:
S t a a t l i che Ifuseen, TJorclerasiat-ische Ahtei l ~ m g .

--
!7J,TDOG Y i ssecschaf X c i m L A GLz u A A "--- --- ds'L
b.LALuaGGLL

Deutschen C r i e n t - G e s e l l s c h ~ f t .
::;Z ~ Q .iiener Z e i t s c h r i f t f u r d i e Kmmde des !:orgen?k~des,

-
ZA Z e i t s c h r i f t f u r A s s y r i o l o ~ i eund vcrr~andte
Gebiete.
23: IG Z e i t s c h r i f t der Derrtschen ~forgecl%ndischen
Gesellschaft.
 L I S T OF SE7iD3OLS USED

comes from
becomes
separates a1lomorphs
separates suffix morp?~ernesin phonemic tran-
scription
+ separates associative morphemes in phonemic
transcrip3ion
C 1 indicates nhonemes in the text
C. a 61 indicates broken or uncertain readings in the
transliteration
indicates scribal omissions in transliteration
and in phonemic transcription.
indicates scribal plusses in transliteration
and in phonemic transcription
indicates &n unusual or nofenorthy reading of
tbe crmeifortn text

xxii
 1.1 The purpose of this study is to set down, in as
concise, clear, and usable terms as is possible in the present
state of interpretation, what is known about Husrian gramare
Although it was the earliest of the three important cuneiform
languages of Near Eastern antiquity (i.e. Hurrian, Hittite
and ~garitic).to be mearthed in recent decades, Hurrian has
been the slowesf to yield resuits to the efforts sf scholars
to interpret its grammar and lexicography. The reasons for
this have been simple -enough. Hurrian belongs t o no known
language group, as do Hittite and Ugaritic, and hence no ad-
vmce insight into its structure and lexicography has been
possible. ' Frrrther , the accidents of discove~yhave yielded
but o@e very short bilingaal, so that attempts at decipherment
have perforce been limited to the combinatory method. Never-
theless, ~snsiderabieprogress 'nas been made, even to fhe
point where it has been possible to use the Hurslm tex* of
the bilingual mentioned above to shed light on art obscure
reading in the accompanying AHcaiiian text.* However, all
the studies to date, including E , A. ~peiser's fundamental
Introdaction to ~ n r r i a n ,have
~ necessarily partaken mare of
the natare of analyses aimed at, as Speiser puts it, "deter-
mining first the great majority of the facts . . . not with-
out some speculation and rather than succinct
descriptions of grammatical features. Fnrtheg , since
laas published, several studies have appeared, notable among
which is the treatment of the ALrkado-Hurrian bilingual from
Ugarit by E. Laroche. These have elucidated further gram-
matical forms, the most important of which has been the ze-

it seems propitior~sto attempt a descriptive account of the

facts of the language as they are ncrw known (or can be firmly
elucidated on the basis of the known facts), not only as a
11
conlpte rendut'of the present stage of understanding but
also as a practical tool for the use of the student.
1.2 The sources available for the Hurrian language
come from widely separated locations and dates, and they
exhibit widely varied subject matter. Since Speiser's enu-
meration of the sources (IH $7) considerably more-has been
found, so that a brief catalogue will be presented here:
6
l.2P xhe bfittanni Letter. This well-lmown letter
was found among the Tell El Amaraa tablets unear-thed In
II
1987* ~geiser's c b s e r v a t i ~ nI n 1941 that i f consfifu-bes
our principal source for the study of ~ u r r i a n "is
~ still
true todap8 The letter, from TuSratta, King of Mittanni,
to Amenophis HII, dates from the last years of the latter's
long reign, ca. 1370 to 1356 B,n.,9 ~ E C iisals
I -it3 the a w e
problems of diplomacy as the Akkadian letters of the Tugratfa
dossier.
1.22 The mategial cram ~ogha~lc8h. Several Burrian
 3
texts have been found among the Hittite texts recovered
fron~-the excavations at ~ o ~ h a z k ofrom
i 1906 on, and Aurrian
passages have not infrequently been f0-8 scattered among
the Hittite texts themselves. They date froni approximately
the same period as the Mittanni Letter. A list of all the
Hurrian texts and Hittite texts containing Hurrian passages

has been d r a m up by E m Laroche as part of his exceedingly

useful " ~ a t a l -
o ~ udes
e textes hittltes. "lo The vast majority
of these texts are of 8he nature of omens, conjurations and
rifcxals of TZE~OUS fypes; a very Tew a r e hisforico-niyfh-
ological in natnre. Consequently, their interpretation is
exceedingly difficult and they are still virtually untrans-
latable. 111
1.23 The Mari texts. Among the Old Babylonian texts
from Bfari seven Hurrian texts W e been found. 12 These date
from the beginning of the eighteenth century B.C., and
thus are the oldest Hurrian texts cve possess excepf f o r the
Fonndzltion Lion Inscription from Urkig, dating from the late
AI&M peried; The confents of these short t e x t s are of a
religious nature, except for the seventh, which is a frag-
ment of a letter appa~entlybetween two kings, one of whom
may have been Zimri-Lim himself. l3
9,24 -
The =aterial fro;;; U~arit. This ancient city h;l.s

been singularly productive in the varied quality of t h e

Hurrian texts unearthed there. These have been the following:
1.241 The alphabetic texts, Among the Ugarltic
 4
texts unearthed in the first campaigns were found a few
Hnrrian texts written in the same alphabetic cuneiform. 14
Only one is not short, md fragmentary.l5 3ue to the alpha-

betic crn~eiformscript in which they are written, these

texts have been particularly helpful in the eluciclation of
Bwrrian phonemics. I-Iowever,since they are largely written
yif;khZt T T G : : ~ ~ ? ~ ,:f CorrrG 35 fJcne
%-&la the ji;sjr- "f inier-

preting them. This is now no longer the case. In the twenty-

fourth carnpaign in 4961 eight rather weil preserved tablets
in alphabetic IIurrian were found in the priest's house.
16

These are largely of fhe same reiigioas genre as the earlier

11
tablets. Two texts of a "mixed character, consisting of
Burrian divine names in a Semitic text, were also forrmd. 1'7
Thanks to the penetrating study of these tests by 14. E. Laroche
in "~ocumentsen Pangae hourrite provenant de Xas Shamra,
111. Textes hourrites en cm6iformes alphabetiques," Ugaritica
V (not yet published but which I have beex pzivileged to use
in the form sf unpaginated galley proofs through the genero-
sity of bi. Laroche), the older texts have been largely clari-
Liedo
L, Laroche a l s o i z c l ~ d c sa transliteration of "ce new

texts. In this same volume will appear a collated translit-

eration of the older texts by A, Herdner (??os. 166-185).
1.242 The syllabic texts. The archaeological cam-
paigns at Ugarit previous t n the e c m d Yfcrld ':;'a,- ?cnC .the

two campaigns of 1950-51 produced six small fragments of

Burrian texts written in syllabic cuneiform. l8 The first
is apparently a letter from a high official at Carchemish to
Ugarif* The rest ass of a religious nature and include
lisfs of enmerated objects* This body of maferia1,has ~ P S O
beec considerably increased by recent excavationso During
the nineteenth campaign in 1955, pieces of some thirty or
more badly broken tablets were recovered. These have greatly
illuminated the character of the tablets, including the nams
.,*
,,Q -,..-..--
JFivGArez
1
va
&
I
.
-
,
~ u v
a
,
,
~ LUI
C
-r-,-
WUVEU
rr---
CUCY -W- S- K
- ~ S -W.SX L & ~ P Pf ~ u r r i ~ n s )
- - a & ~ -

and the names of the scribes whc wrote them (semitesb.

These ase jpubliskted and stndied by hl. E o Lasoche in " ~ o c n -
ments en langue hourrite provenant de S s s Shaara, 11. Textes
hourrites en cun6iformes syllabiques," Uaaritica V (also Pnade
available to me through the courtesy of hf. ~aroche) .
1.243 The Akkadio-Hurrfan bilingual. One of fhe
!most important Hurriim texts yet found af Ugasif has been
fhls short bilingual of some nineteen lines, divided as
follows: four Akkadian translated by five lines of Husrian
and then four more lines of Akkadian translated by six of
~urrian.'~ The genre is that of "ethico-religious maxims
very close to 'wisdom sayings. "120 Although it has not greatly
enriched our Bnrrian vocabalazy, it has made %he meanings of
several words considerably more precise and grammatically
has yielded one very helpful morpheme--a negative which had
not hitherto been recognized. hfost important, it has con-
clr_rsivel;y=,PQT& $he ge=crs? acznracjr of t;b g~ii-iificai

structare thus far elucidated by the combinafory method.

1.244 The vocabnlaries. Ugarit has also yielded
two vocabularies, one a bilingual, Sumerian and Harriaxn,
 5
and the second a quadsilinguaf, Sumarian, Hurrian:, Akkadian
and Ugaritic.
1.2441 The Smnero--Hrirr
iam ~ocabular~. This vocab-
ulary includes part of the second fablet of the series garera=
1)ubul€u, running from e0entlry number 44 to entry number
2>6 of the clefinitive edition of ~ a n d s b e r ~ e r although
,22

v i t h significant omissions, additions and differences o f

order. It is not as helpfnl as xigbf at first glance appear,
for the words contained do not for the most part occur either
in the international diplomatic correspondence of Tagratta
nor in %he religious texfs of Ugasit, Mari and ~oghazkoi.
Further, there seems to be considerable dialectal difference
between the Hurrian of Ugarit and that of ~oghazkoiand the
Mittami Letter.
1 2 2 The Quadr i1 inaual Vocabulary. In the twen- ,

tieth and twenty-first campaigns of n956 and 1958, a large

nutnber of pieces of a polyglot vocabnlary were discovered,
from which have been reassenbled parts of two tablets of a
vocabulary in four languages, S-mesian, Amcadian, Harrian
ar,d Ugaritico2 3 The vccabnlzry follows the oi-de; of the
vocabulary h o r n as and hence its order and contents
are b o r n to a large extent, and many of the incomplete
lines ixl the first two columns could be restored. 25 The
facsimi2e.s are t.0 he pcbliskred by 2 + Neugz-yrel ir, ",-,~f
6"% -, -
f ca

V (nos, 130ff.). A most useful study of the Ife~rriancolramn

is presented by Id. E. Laroche in " ~ o c m e n t sen langue hourrife
provenant de Ras Shamra, I. VocabalaFse qaadrilingue de Ras
 7
Shamra: la colonne hourrite,1I in Zgarit;ica V which I have
also been able to use in unpaginated galley proofs through
the kindness of hi. Larochee These texts have prodaced several
very helpful new meanings and firmly established several old
ones.
1-25 The Foundation Lion Inscription from Urkig. In
" ~ doc~ment
n de fsndation hur-zite," @ A2(19A8? : 1-20, A.
Farrot and J . Norngayrol published a fomrrdatioz deposit, ac-
quired by the Louvre on the antiquities market, ~onsisfingof
the upper torso of a fierce lion whose fore paws rest on a
small rectangle holding a limestone tablet. On the tablet i k
engraved an inscription of some twenty-five lines, in Rurrian,
written in characteristic cuneiform signs dated by Nongsyrol
26
to the earlydlrkadperiodca. 2370-2300B.C., but most
likely belo~lging to late Akkad times 2250-2150 B.C. or
possibly Ur 111, E. 2100-1950 B.C. (see $2.113 below).
The inscription records the dedication of a temple by Tigari
27
(or perhaps Tigatall, enda-n28 of Urki3. Thus this tablet
represents the oldest Hurrian yet recovered, being from fwo
hmdzed to sevaa 'rlup~dredyears older than the fexks from
hlari (depending on the date accepted) and approximately six
hmd.red t o a thousand years older than the material from the
Amarna age. As a result of this important find, it appears
-&hztthe Hsrrims had a'AIG2r..Y'y.
-- w
% -.,.-
u r r v w c 3u A*--
but: ----
G W G ~ ~ " O F Msyiia-

bary and aiZapted It for the purposes of their own Ian-xge

in AIilcad times; hence, it seems that they were not, as once
thought, barbariaas who arrived late on the Mesopotamian
 8
scene 29 Although the evidence is yet very tenuons and in-
conclusive, it appears possible that the Bnrrians not only
were firmly ensconced in Northern Mesopotamia, specifically
the gabur triangle, since late Old Akkadian tines, 5uf had
also developed a high level of civilization and cultural
attainment. 30
1.26 he zs,terisP fr~iii
Wusn. klJ.L----L
+rl O U U U E & l i i
--
LIU
A..7-*-A-
OCZIULC; L S

have been found written in the IfTJrrian language among the

volminous finds unearthed at this ancient site near modern
KFrkuk, it has long been established by the personal names
%hat the great majority of the inhabitants were native
speakers of Harrian. Conseqxcently much light has been thrown
on the social and legal practices of the Hursians (or at
least their eastern branch). Presumably many of these same
customs will be found at home in the hlittanni state itself
and, probably to a lesser degree, in the western Hurrian
states, when and if documents are found depicting life these
in similar detail. Not infrequently Hnrrian terms appear in
the AMi;~xliantextsV3' and although most are technical terms,
there a r e a few instances \&ere RarrPan vocabulary is used
in a contest which greatly clarifies the meaning.32 The
hybrid expression x - m a epegu, w b s e the x stands for a
Burrian and sometimes even an Akkadian word, is noteworthy
f s this regard; There are alsc clear j.=d$catf=ns cf E~xrf=lr;
substrattm in the non-Akkadian constructions that are fre-
qneloitly met* These have been Prelpfnl in presenting corollary
evidence of the passim1 charactcr of the Hnrrian verb.33
However, as with the vrrcahrlla~ics from Ugarit, the great
majority af the wards found do not occur in the religious
vocabulary of the texts from Mari, Ugarit and ~ o ~ h a z k o i ,
noz in the literary, diplomatic idiom of the Miftanni Let%sr.
1.27 The personal names. The most important source
omtside of those already mentioned is the proper names which

sive period of time. The ~ o s productive

t soarce, of course,
is that of Nnzu, the great majority of whose onomasticon is
published in the exceedingly useful Nuzi Personal Names. 34
The most comprehensive survey of Hurrian names for both pro-
venance ai;C! chronology is still Hurrians-and Subarians by
I. J. Gelb. 35
A. source of Hurrian personal names which %re exceedingly

important for the problem of Hurrian phonemics (see 9 3;332

and 3.513) is found in Akkadian terfs from a number of sites. 36
These inklude ChiigAr Bszor in the Mori period,37 AIIur in
the Middle Assyrian period,38 Nippur in the Middle Baby-
lonian period,39 and Dilbat in the Old Babylonian
Ia28 HurrPzn nzms and matezlal have arrmeared a% a
few other sites, relatively unimportant for gramatical
42
purposes, such as Chagar Bazar ,41 Qibtna, Tell ~ a ' a m a k ~ 4 ~
and a few glosses in the Amarna Letters.44
1.3 The main source for the zra=ar=
- The pzi=cip=,?

source for the grammar of Hurrian is still today the Mittanni

Letter from the Amarna correspondence. This is due f s the
fact that it I s by far the longest connected fexf that we
 10

possess, it is in a good state of preservation, and its

general subject matter is considerably PlPminated by nine
other letters from Tugratta to the Egyptian court, (five to
Amenophis PIP, one Qlo AmenophisP widow Teye, and three to
Amenophis PV), which are in Akkadian and which discuss the
same general t0~ics.45 Very helpful for specifio and rm-
iambjrrxnrrs nninka
0---- r-----
nf grammar =d vnca%.r_riary
are +.he b&2adn-
Hurrian Bilingual and the QaWrilingtzl Vocabulary from
Ugarit; somewhat lass useful is the Snmero-Ir,=rilan Voeab-
ulary from the same site. Although some very helpful lexical
informaf ion has been forthcoming from the ~ e ~ h a z k &mater
i boP ,46
the texts themselves are largely unintelligible due t o their
technical religious vocabulary and consequently can only
serve as ancillary sources for Hurrian grammar until such
Bime as w e can h e f t e r csn-tral %he V C C ~ ~ U ~ S P Ipz~kvlea.
JI The!
same is true of the religious texts from Mazi and Uga~Pt.
ConseqwenfPy, a primary rule must be that no forms from
these unintelligible contexts ( o r , for that matter, from un-
intelligible contexts from the Miftartni Letter itself) can be
nsed as primary evidence for the g~apnmatical s*ructure of fhe

language as it now stands. Thus our source, in the main, is

the Mittanni Letter supplemented by the Ug. A,-H. Bil., the
Ugo Quado Voc. and the material from Boghazkoi
I = 4 Trazsliters~i~ns~C1,ng~%a!.i~a?ie=- TkY: r)r~bl,eiii
of transliteration is a knotty one. The phonemes of Hurrian
differ (often rieaically) from the phonemes of Akkadian for
which the camnonesf values were assigned to the cuneiform
signs. To use the value which is correct for Hurrian would
often obscure the orthographic evidence being ci$sd or would
be cumbersome, necessitating the use o f large subscripts
(e. go kug far GU) . Consequently, the commonest values of
the signs according to the system inaugurated by Thurem-
Dangio will be used in transliteration. However, whenever
s i g n =,resents s free choice c?f prlm,liry ~ r l l u e sthe
~ 8al~e

that best fits the requirements of Hurrizn phonemics will be

chosen. E o g . the sign ID can represent, without diacritics
or subscrip%s, id, it, -
ed and & (and of course it and in
Akkadian). For the ligature I plus A, will be used in-
stead of s. The sign PI which is used exclusively to re-
present ~ a , =, BBf or - m, - whenever fhe
will be written as w
following vowel is not indicated orthographically, i.e. when
the i'oiloiiiirng sfg n is of %be form G +or or" the form VC with
indeterminate vowel (e.6. the sign AH). The only apparent
4
zxcepfisn to tbis rule is in the frequent sequence -la-wa-u-,
for here fbe evidence is strong fhat this orthography re-
presents the doubled voiceless labial spirant -ff- followed
by the semivowel [u]
m
and the above writing with -9-
does not
prejudge the case. The signs IB andl W will be transliter-
ated as iw/gand respectively whenever the s i p (PI )
follows contiguously. Presumably, this could also be stated
fsi AEi bnt no ex&inpies of this sign with imediafely foliowing
are known to me. The point at which the use of the common-
est values of the signs is most misleading for Bnrrian phe-
nemics is the representation of the stops. XI will 5 e seen
 12
($3.35 below) that voicing of the stops is non-phonemic in
flurrian, i.e the phones 21 and E, a and 2 , and g and _k are
simply variants of the same phoneme respectively, the con-
ditions under which any par-t;icularphone will occur being
rigorously Getermined by the phonetic environment; [see $3.3221.
Consequently the differentiation between voiced and voice-
less s%upoC which eke AAkkado-Srnneria syllabary fg CZ-

pable47 is superfluous f o r pnzposes of writing X-Iurrian.

Indeed, since voicing of the stops is phonemic in English
also, the same is true of the English alphabet, and which-
ever letter one chooses, whether the voiced or the voice-

less, it implies a distinction which is not valid for

Burrian. Perforce, we shall use the synbols for the voice-
less stops, i.e. g , &, and f j recognizing, however, that the
Rnrrian phonemz is voiced or voiceless according t o the re-
qtiirernents of Rurriari phonetic law.
I n the yhonemic fzsnscriptisa of Burrian a problem

arises in the representation of the labial stop and the

labial fricative. Very often the script is ambigdous and
we sizply do n o t l a o w si this point which of the two is
mean$. When this occurs the symbol -2- will be used. \Wen
the semivowel is certain, the symbol -2- : ~ i i lbe rlsed,
-
In normalization the morphemes which function on the
be separafed by dashes; while those enclitic
l v ~ r dLevel % i f %
elements, termed "associatives,1t which stand af fhe end of
the word bat function on the sentence level, will be sep-
arated by plus signs, e.g. tat-qlcar-oC-i+ll.a,+an, "love-?-
past-transit ive-vesb+they+andl' (ML 1: 9) .
1.5 The alphabetic ordes. The following alphabetic
order will be used for the Rurrian phonemes in this study:

b y L P k y P y m y q y o, 12,
2, eyf , - ry8, 4 , 5!, 3, 2, E Y X Y 5 -
As noted above, the symbol 2 is not a phoneme bat represents
either the labial fricative f or the labial semivowel 2 in
those cases in which the or thogsaghy is ambf g n o ~ ~ s ~
 1 1 ' ~THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE ORTHOGRAPHIC SYSTEMS
USED FOR WRITING HUnRZAN

Fortunately for the elucidation of its phonetics,

Hurrian has come down to us written in two differant ortho-
graphic systems: the cuneiform syllabary of the Mesopotamian
sphere and the cuneiform alphabet of ~~arit.' The great
strides that have been liiade in the rmderstaa4in.g of Hurriara
phonemics have been made possible by comparisons between
these two orthographic systems. Because it is considerably
more complex, we shall examine the syllabic orthography first.
2.1 The syllabic orthographies used for Burrian.
The orthography2 of the syllabic Hurrian mafarial is far from
uniform. Aside from the short Foundation Lion Inscription
which is written in the Old Akkadian syllabary, there are
two syllabaries mainly employed to write the syllabic Hurrian
material we possess. The bulk of if is wriften in the " ~ u r r o -
~it-tite"
syllabary best knom from the Tell El-Amarna and
~ o ~ h a e k otablets
i and the remainded in the "~abylonian"
script such as is used at Mari.
In order to assess the implications and the signif-
icance of the evidence that these systems present for the
phonemes of Hurrian, it is necessary first to determine
what are the distinctive features of each system as it is
 15
used for Akkadian, where the phonemes represented are re-
latively certain; then the distinctive features of each
system as used for Hurrian must be elucidated. When this
has been done, the evidence of both can be assessed and com-
pared with each other and with that of the slphabetic mate-
rial to establish the phonemes of IIarsrian. Consequently we

syllabary as used for Akkadiaz-4 and then we shall ascertain

what orthographic practices can be discerned in its use for
Hurrian in the various texts we possess. When the charac-
teristics of the orthographic systems have been thus deter-
mined, we shall then be able to examine these orthographic
systems to ascertain the phonemes of the Hrxrriau language
and how they are orthographically represented.
2.11 '
The "Burro-~ittits" syllabary an& the ortho-
graphies using it. The syllabaries in use at the geo-
gsaphic locations where Huerian names, terms, and social
customs abound, namely ~ u z u ~, l~a l a l and
6
~ , ~Ugarit, plus
the syllabaries of marn no,^ and I3oghazk*i,t! can be roughly
g r c q e d as one s y s t e m , even though each possesses i%s own
idiosyncxacies. Eeeause of its prevalent use in the Hurrian
and Hittite areas we shall call it the Hurr~-Bi+stf4asylla-
bary.
2,111 of fhe Eurro-3iftite
The diaffnetfvz.'fe~farcs
s~!labary as used for Akkadiaq. These are the following:
(a) The lack of special signs for the emhaticso
The signs for the emphatics are either absent or only sparsely
used. This practice is far from uniform. At Nuzu and
Alalab the signs for the emphatics 0% all classes are com-
pletely absent, the sign Q A being a conveniently short
variant for & and at Ugarit they occur infrequently in
all .classes,'' and in the b r n a texts they are not infre-
quent. l1 It is significant to observe that. the decreasing
freqt,'rncy 0% ~ 8 ~f
5 vusruw
*%--a -4 -- rr rJ. 4 i i ~ Z Y S Z SiSti6
~ *c

-&he increasing influence of Burrian culture and percentage

of Husrians in the population at the sites in question. 12
(b) The value of the s i ~ nPI. l3 ~lmostin-
variably in all these sites, and with complete uniformity
at the Hurrian sites, tlae sign PI has the valere 5 plus a
vowel, i . e . w a , we, w i , or me
(c) The use of the signs for the sibilants. The
values af %he signs for the sibilants pattesa with those of
the Old Akkadian syllabary rather than wifh those of the
later Old Babylonian syllabary. Thus the set of signs which
represent same- plus vowel in Old Babylonian are most often
simple variants for the set (representing etymological
i g l and t 4 3 ) plus vowel in the Hurro-Hittite syllabary. Con-
comitantly, the occurrences of the phoneme [&] which derive
from proto-Semitic _4 A) are invariably representea
- (~rabio
by the set of signs & plus vowel, never aleernating with the
sef; 2 plus vowel. Both these facts can be explained only
if the Burro-Hittite syllabary is nltimately traced back to
the orthographic practices of fhe Old Al&Mfm sy?1a%ary,
for it is here that the set of signs 3 plus vowel represented
 17
the Akkadian descendent of proto-Semitic & and 3. 14 Again
the completeness of this usage varies from source to sonroe
in a manner analogous to that noted for the emphatics above.
It is virtually complete at ~ n z u where
, ~ ~ the set 2 pius vowel
is almost invariably a variant of the set -$ plus vowel, ety-
mological samelih being representea by the set g plus vowel.
-39~eyer,
A t aGzl=@, w&za.~-
3m.m a
w
m-a?i
3nuwza
-Lww+
wcaw
c.<mn4+4-a~+
JL&LPIL LUWAZW
---maw
UU-UP*

of occurrences where etymological szlrmekh is represented by

the set 2 plus vowel. l6 At Ugarit the set oi signs plus
vowel is asecl. as a variant of the set plus vowel only in
the third feminine singular pronominal suffix, in certain
personal names, and in a few other very sporadic occurrences,
while the set 5 plus vowel occurs sporadically for etymo-
logical smekh. l7 In the Amarna texts, on the other hand.
t h e use of the s e t 2 plus vowel f o r the s e t 3 plus vowel is
very exceptional,18 and it is not Pound at all at ~o~hazkai.l9
Note again the correlation between this phenomenon and the
presence of a large Hurrian population and influenceB
(d) -The indiscriminate use sf the siens for the
voiced and voiceless s f o ~ s ~ In the syllabaries in use af
all these sites this indiscriminate use is present to a marked
degree. 20 Eve= in the Amarna texZs this phenomenon is rride-
spread and is present in texts of wide17 divergent origin. 21
Pinis practice is markedly diiffezmt from f5at of contemporary
Midldle Babylonian ;;md inaeed 0 ld Babylonian as we1 1, for t h e ~ e
the signs for the voiced and voiceless stops are carefully
distinguished. As Thureau-Dangin pointed out2* and as others
 18
have emphasized since,23 this probably harks back to the
failure of the Old Akkadian syllabary to distinguish voiced
and voiceless stops zather than being due to linguistic
s.rabs.t;rattsn.Now this is obviously very much to the poinf
where the linguistic substratum did phoneaic~llydistinguish
voiced and voiceless stops (0.g. West Semitic) , but it is

stratum i n northern Mesopotamia and northern S y r i a , with

its single set af stop phonemes in which voicing is non-
phonemic, must have had a strong influence in inhibiting the
orthographic distinction which dereloped further south in
Assyria and Babylonia proper.24 Evidence in favor of this
is the fact that this indiscriminate use is much more com-
plete and widespread in just those sites where Hussian

2.112 The distinctive features of' the Hurro-Hittite

ssllabany as ussd for zzfting EIurrian. Having determined
the features of this syllsbary as used for AWacBian, we shall
now ascertain what orthographic practices can be discerned
i n I t s use for Xnzrlano For pumpsses of description the
Hursian phonemes yet to be established in cbapfer three are
hais assumed so that the orthographic characteristics may
be meaningfully described. What is thus lose in orderly
grocedgre will 5e =ere thsn INSq fcr in ciarfty of pres-
entation,
2.ll21 The orthography of the Mittami Letter.
Although it uses the Hurro-Hittite syllabary, the ortho-
 19
graphy of the hfittanni Letter is markedly different from
that of the Amarna corpus in general and indubitably has
been so modified for the express purpose of writing Hurrian. 25
Because of its importance as the prime witness for Hurzian
grammar the syllabary of the Mittanni Letter is set forth
in the chart on the following pages. Only the CV and VC

note that several of its features are the same as those ob-
served f o r writing Akkadian above. Thus the signs for the
emphatics are completely absent,26 and the sign PI is used
exclusively for 5 plus a vowel. However, the most important
distinctive feature of the Hurro-Hittite syllabary as used
for writing Akkadian at all these sites, namely the indis-
criminate use of the signs for voiced and voiceless stops,
simply is not found in the Mittami Letter. Rather, its
system of signs for the stops is rigorously consistent and
reveals only one set of signs in use to represent the stop
phonemes. There is not one instance of departure from the
consistent pattern in the whole letter of some five hundred
lines.27 The system employed for the stops has been dia-
gramed in the chart. Note: for the phoneme Cp/b] PA is
used exclusively, BA never occurring; B@ , BI , and BU h ~ v e
no variant possibilities.28 For the phoneme ct/d] TA is
used exclusively, DA n e w r occurring; TE has no variant
possibilities; TI is used exclusively, DP never occurring;
and DU is used exclusively, TU never occurring.29 For the
phoneme [k/g] W is used exclusively, GA never occurring;
-
I

1
--
-,-I_.__
1
i
I
TEE SYLLABAiIY QF 'LTHX BIITTAPTNI LETTEit
......-.
-.

-
-5
-. ...............................................................
-........
1
I
I
....................

.... ---
-
-2
...

.....
/ ...........................
-i-
i
II -"-
- CV S I G N S
..T-
......

I
i
--

-3
....-...

-
-.-- -.-

- .i h
1 -n
Ylr
-
TJ'
I
I
I I I
/:BZ = pe = L ( u ( - ~=) prr
;i
t
-. . -1 ...... .. ....
I r i
I / I i I
4
'"!
1 I -,.f
-ill
T T \
= .
cu U U \ -41
.A .
.
U~.
TT
/
= $U
-..-- *
i
i
---
t --..--- -

- . --g. ! . .... ..... ---.- -. -; ..-.-.-.-....

I i
hi

.
- 1 -- ................ + ..... ... ----
!
1
I

!
k ; Kk = kd-. jr iI L K I = k--
i-j EU = ko-
-. -
i/ 1
.
1 : LA
;.-I-
LI-E I
c! ....
LI
i
/ La(-U) LU( -5)
.......................... .-
!'
!j
II
m : BI A iI j: XE i
-.-------- ..--.....-.--. -. i-.L.-...-...-..-...-.. .
. . .........................
! / i
1
1 !

n ; NA
' I
TSI-E
ii 1i.r xn(-g) NU ( -8)
i! i 1
!
.. - ............................. I ..*: ......................... ........................ :- ................................
I j
1 1 I

p PA = pa-i j i
i PI=w
... ,. .......................-.........-... .-...... !......
i
j .I I
i
2.A AI-3 i
.-. .
. ...-.............
I
i . .
,
i [SI-E 1
.-..r-.-....... .......... ..........

......

. --4 ..-.

PI =wa 1 PI = we
Notes:
Parentheses, ( ) , i n d i c a t e optional elements.
Square b r a c k e t s , [ 1, i n d i c a t e orthographies t h a t do n o t
occur, but w o ~ ~ lbe
d expected from those that do occur.
The limes i n the t a b l e of CV signs connect t h e s e r i e s
of s i g n s used to represent t h e s t o p s .
KI and GP are both used, but their use proves to represem't
a difference in vowel not consonant , GI representing &/=
and KI -kJgi; KU and GU are both used for $he same purpose,
KU representing lc/m and GU &/me
30 A prorrinent
-. feature of
the orthography of the Mittanni Letter is the phonemic con-
trast between doable andl single writing in the stops, the
--
dental fricative, and the labial frlcafive- we shall see
in chapter three that this proves to constitute consonantal
length which is phonemic in Hurrlan. These disfinctive
orthographic methods set the orthography of the Mittanni
Letter apart from the other syllabic systems used for
writing Hurrian.
2,1122 The orthography of the Hurrian documents from
Ugarit. These texts use the same Hurro-Hittife syllabary
as do the Akkadian docments from the same site. However,
their orthographic practices differ in general from that of
the Mittanni Letter in several details. First of all their
orthography is not consistent. 31 This is not snrprising
since Hurrian was only a secondary langaage at Ugarit and
the texts that have been found are of divense origin and
contento Farther, it is highly probable that most of them
werrs w r i t t e r , by scribes far ~ h o mEfcrrisn was =st their

nat ive language. 32

.z ,1 1.i'2p The orthography of the A1&adlo-Harrian bilingualo
(1) Both the Akkadian and the Hurrian portions are
inconsistent in the use of the signs for the voiced and the
voiceless stops. Only one clear example is present Pn the
Huriian portion of the bilingual (i.e. e-ni-ta- line 19
versus e-en-ni-6a- line.5, e-la-me-ni-da line 6 etc.), but
this is sufficient to preclude basing any phonemic con-
clusions on fhe use of the signs for the stops in the light
of the indiscriminate use sf them in the Akkadian of Ugarit
in general,33 in the Akkadian portion of the bilingual in
?* m
1-eI
-..%-&<--l..-
ref.-.ICiuaaL 24 --A
IOU ;fin Bhe ether Hnrrian texts from Ugarit."
However, it can be noted that in the great majority of cases
initial and doubled stops are represented by the signs for
the voiceless stops and intervocalic stops are represented
by the signs for the voiced stops. 36 These two tendencies
can be very plausibly explained by the hypothesis that this
text was written by a scribe whose language did phonemically
distingerish the voiced and voiceless stops and who, con-
seqnently, would ''hear" the positional variation of voicing
in Hurrian and yet was using a syllabary wi%h a strong
tendency to use the signs for voiced and voicelzss stops
indiscriminately.
(2) Doubling is not consistentPy used. 37
( 3) The sign PI represents _w plus a vowel.
(4)The phoneme represented in the syllabary by -&
&ppe;zrs doubled in $he same grammatical element in which if
is donbled in the Mittanni Letter. 38
(5) The combination of the second person singular
psonomixial suffix and the dative suffix - w / ~ is written
-ib-ba- very siaiilar to the manner in which it is represented
in the Mittaxmi Letter. 39
 24
2,11222 The orthography of the Smero-E.Iursia;m vocab-
ulary, This is often amblg-i~oasandl hence difficullt t o
assess because of the broken state of the text andl the
difficulty of its interpretation.
(1) With but a few exceptions the S-H Voc. distin-
guishes voiced and voiceless stops according to the pattern
-
urr=suu
+ - -
r u UUF
. . a G ~A L. Y , uarncs~y, -v-u i-c-e- ~- e s sia ini-
o l p u a u c ~~ ~
----.r--

tial position or when doubled, voiced in intervocafic

position or when contigdrous with 1, xu, or ge The doubling
of stops is not orthographically indicated, but now that
the negative -@- has been identified from the Akkadian
bilingual, the post vocalic -e-must be construed as
representing a doubled sound and hence voicelesso40 It
is indeed probable that each of the few examples of post-
A1
vocalic volcePess stops should be taken as doubled.'+* Note
that the three examples of initial u-42
do not indicate
a voiced stop since fhe sign PI represents only _w plus a
vowel. For the voicing of the sfops after 3 , no&@ an-bal-
gi, 2 : 3 3 . This great regularity in the pattern of voicing
in the stops is very plausibly explained if the scribe spoke
a language which did phonemically distinpish the voiced
and irofceless stops azid hence vouPd 'lhear?'and record the

non-phonemic positional pattern in the voicing of the Hurrian

stops.4'3
( 2 ) Doubled consonants in general are not ortho-
graphically indicated. See the comments for the stops
above. 44
 25

( 3 ) The sign PPI represents y plus a v0sre1.4~

(4)Sibilants are indicated by s-signs, z-signs,
and -
$-signs as in .the Mittanni Letter,
2,11223 The orthography of the Quadrilinpnal Vocab-
ulary. I have not had access to either the facsimilies
nor a transliteration of the Quadri lingual Vocabulary. I
can only note that if the nsrmaPizafions of the study of
Mo Laroche in Ugaritica '4 sepresent the actual orthography
93' the text, then it also agrees vith the positional voicing

mentioned above.
2.11224 The orthography-of the rest-#ofthe syllabic
material from Ugarit. The rest of the sylllabic Hurrian
material from Ugarit displays two types of text. Text one
is a letter from the ~ r i n c eor seine other high fmctianary
of Caschemish to Ugarit; the remaining texts (two through
thirty-one) are a type of religious composition consisting
of a connected text followeii by an enumeration of objects.
The orthographies of the two types of text are markedly
different. ,-
(1) The leftere Although the Letter is very
short and badly preserved, it seems to be written with the
same orthography as the Mi%fanni Letter* Thus, it regularly
distinguishes length in the dental fricative;46 it uses both
U and I$, being the only place outside the Mittanni Latter
where this distinction is ~naintained;~~
it uses only one s e t
of signs for the stops, namely the set with the voiceless
consonant ;48 and it possibly distinguishes length in the
 labial .fricative.49 These striking agreements in ortho-
graphy befween the Mittanni Letter and this letter from
Caschemish suggest the existence of an official inter-
national diplomatic Burrian orthography, probably insti-

-, . gated by the corresponc%ence sf the Mittaani empire.

(2) The religions texts* Apart from two pecnl-

that of the A-H B i l . First there is indiscriminate nse sf

the signs for the voiced and voiceless stops. 50 Second one
finds the sign ZU used for the norma! double 2 in the name
Te-zu-ub-be, 2:1, 11 ( 7 ) . Siiiice .these signs can represent

both and z in the A U m l i a a n texts from Ugarit, it seems very

probable that it represents g here and we have another example
here of the use of s by Semitic scribes to represent the
phoneme [Q] as at several Akkadian sitese5'
The twenty-five new texts found in 1955 have largely
restored the format of this genre of religious texts.52 Far-
titularly interesting is the last line, reconsfructed by Me
Lasoche from the broken ends of the texts. It reads as fol-
lows: annu zammagga nifkabli (or natkibli) xaluzi za DIMGIR.
MES TA x SU y, where x and g represent personal names. As
Laroche notes, this final line defines the contents cf the
tablet. After -
annu "this" the next three Hurrian words are
impossible to analyze, bat the following phrase DINGER.
-
MES reveals the religious nature of the contents of the tab-
lets. Following this comes the name of the author and of
11
the scribe, i.e. igtu X sat Y* for so and so, hand of so
 27
and so." The four names preserved following igfu are
Hnrrian: Taggih-i ~x+i&a) , Urhiyz,
- and Anmr.iya, =hereas
the two names preserved following& c are Semitic: Xpsali
and barapi. Of the eight tablets preserving the scribe's
names, I~galfwrote five of them, Ammurapi wrote two, and in
one only the final syllable of the name has been preserved.
4
rurJ
a
u r ~
I
uJ U~
.
U W D=
-KJCJUUG
~
- UIY~UL~
~
3:----A-
~
&%-A.
nab m e scribes
A%-
sf these
texts were Semites who were able to write Hurrian for z
Hurrian clientele. However, it must be noted that these
t e x t s do not reveal the pattern of positional voicing that

we have noted in other f e x f s for which a Semitic nationality

was posited for the scribe. Rather, their orthographic fea-

tures follow, in general, those of the Akkadian texts from
Ugarit, st least in the indiscriminate use of the signs for
the vcised itnc? ssfcefess O~GPS.

2,1123 The orthography of the material from Nuzur,

Alal*, and ~ o g ~ a z k ~ i . Except foi the material from
~ o g h a z k ~ iwhere
, independent texts in Hcrrian and passages
P g IInrrisn wffhin the Hittite tests have been found, %he

HurrPan P ~ o mthese sites occurs as groper names, technical

terms, and a very few glosses. 53 Gonsequetty their ortho-
graphy differs little from that of the Akkzdias or Hittite
contexts in which %hey are imbedded. The basic features are
these e,9 tBs Ifnrto-Hfff'rfa s y l l ~ i 3 P r 's~ --A=
e t furbu. muuvc
-.---- 1 2
'. n - *
1 dtz.11~-
-
2.112). The dental fricative [Q] is written with &signs
with irregular indication of consonantal length. Hurrian
[s] is indicated largely by g - s i g n s , exclusively so at Nuzu. 54
 28
The labial fricative is indicated by an alternation of !
! and

signs-
2.113 The oriain of the Hurro-Hittite syllabary.
After having exwined the orthographic systems which use this
syllabary to write both Hurrian and Akkadian, it will be help-
ful briefly to consider what can be ascertained abont its
origin. If Plas been emphasized s b o ~ s ,passim, that the dis-
%in@&ive features of the Hunrs-Hittite syllabary are found
in Old Akkadian orthography, but not, in general, in either
the contemporary Middle Babylonian or Middle Assyrian sylla-
baries, ncr even in the Old Babylonian syllabary.55 These
features are: (a) the exclusive use of the sign PI as
plus a vowel; (b) the use of the s e t of signs 3 plus a vowel
as a simple variant of the set 3 plus vowel, at Nuzu and a
s t r o n g t e ~ d e n c yin this regard at Alalab, Aiarna, &ad

I3oghazk&i goes back to the Old Akkadian use of these signs

to represent [g] oad [$I; ( c ) the use sf the $-signs to re-
presenf the Hrrsriaa dental fricative [Q] can plausibly be
connected with the Old Akkadian use of these signs t o repre-
A; (d) ihe in-
sent the Akkaian descendent eP prsts-Semitic -
discriminate use of the signs for the voiced and voiceless
stops in the whole corpus of Hurro-Hittite Akkadian material
traces back to the Old Akkadian tendency toward the same prac-
tice; ( e ) yet the use in the Mittanni Letter of a single set
of signs for the stops &?so traces back to the regular use
in the Old Akkadian syllabary of only one s e t of signs to re-
psesent the stops; ( 9 ) the Hurro-Hittite syllabary largely
 29
lacks separate signs for the emphatics as does the Old Aldrad-
i%l sgiiabary. These numerous agzeements befwesn the Russo-
Hittite syllabary arid the Old Akkadian syllabary, agreements
which are not found in the Old Babylonian and later sylla-
baries, can only be explained if the Hurro-Hitliite syllabary
originated either in the Old Akkadian syllabary ifself or in
one of its Pafer derivatives which still retained these fea-
tures. The evidence we possess thus far permits only the
most general statement, but several izx2ependent indications
do point to the Late A M r a or Ur III period, First, we know
from the F~mc%afion
Lion Inscription that a Hurrian State in
Upper Mesopotamia, possibly of a high degree of cultural at-
.,/
t a i ~ l m e n t ,had
~ ~ already borrowed the cuneiform syllabary and
adapted it far the purposes of writing Hurrian in Old Ak-
kaddiar? times. Although Nonga:fne? p ~ s f t i ~ e ' adates
y the
iwcrip&ion to "at leas& the beginning GI the Oynasty of
A~.&w," 57 bath von ~ o d e n ~ ~
and ~ ~ dated
have
y e l b it to the
Late Akkad period and Gelb dues so on epigraphic grounds.
Note also that Parrot very positively dates the figure of the
lion to the epocb sf Uz P I P , Larsa, or Ba~ykon1 on the basis
of its style and the type of foundation deposit t b t it repre-
sents. 60 Fti~i'ner, two other items possibly point in this
same direction. First, the well-known Samarra tablet, which
records %he dedication of a temple by ArfrSen king of Urkis
and Nawar, was dated by Thureau-Dangin to this same general
period;61 and second, there exists a cylinder seal, dating
to the same period, on which is inscribed the name d ~ i ~ a r i ,
king of Kargar. 6 2 Thus it would seem likely that Noogayrol's
dates are t o o high ar;G fb~-k$53 &a&e of thz firsf zecorded
borrowing of the cuneiform syllabary by the Hurrians must be
dated to Late AkkW times at the easiest and possibly Ur
1 1 1 . ~ Secondly,
~ the choice of certain ideograms in the Bit-
tite syllabary has led to the dating of its borrowing to this
e a h~- On the wi&sly-held a s s ~ p $ i c =ehst Hit-&ftes

obtained their knowledge of tho cuneiform syllabary from the

Hurrians, this also suggests circa Ur I11 as the date of
b~rsowing.65 Thirdly, the use of the set of signs plus a
vowel to represent Husrian Csl means that the syllabary of
the Mittami Letter must go back at the earliest to a period
when these signs no longer exclusively represented Semitic
~i/gas they do in the AMrad period proper but had begun to
-
be used for Semitic samekh as The earliest period
that this usage occurs with any frequency is Ur 111. 67
FinSiPy l-k can be noted fh&t the marked dbffsze~ossbs-
tween the orthography of the Fomdafion Lion Inscription
and that of the Ifitfami Letter would seem to indicate that
the latter is not a development of the former but stems from
a separate Hurrian borrowing of the cuneiform syllabary.
2.12 The " ~ a b g ~ o n i asyllsbaxy
~" cmd the orfhcn~aphies
using it. Alongside the large amount of material written
in the Burro-Hittite sylliibba~ydescribed above, a small
amount of raterial has been discovered written in the syl-
labary in use at Mari and in Babylonia proper. The Mari
material is found in the Hurrian texts described in $1.23
above, whereas the material from Babylonia proper occurs as
personai nmes in -tex%sof' the Old Babylonirn pcriodi fro=
Dilbat, in Lexts of the Mari period from Chagar Bozar, in
texts of the Middle Babylonian period from Nigpur, and in
texts from the Middle Assyrian period from Ai5gnr. 68
The orthography of all these texts is basically the
s o ~ e ,2% less* i~ $h.=.sefea';nzes whj.c'n affect %he writing
of Hurrian.
2.121 The distinctive features of the "~abglonian"
syllabary. The most distinctive features of this.syllabary,
in contra-distinction to the orthographic practices of the
Harro-Hittite syllabary, are the following: (a) %he signs
for the voiced and voiceless stops arep in general, ttare-
fully distinguished, although there are exceptions;69 (b)for
the ernhatics Q A is in use, but not QI or QU and special
SU are in sporadic use; ( c ) although the
signs for S I a ~ d
writing of the sibilants presents the most variations, the
set of signs 2 plus a vowel is generally used for e$lymological
samem. I t s occasional use for 3 has been ascribed to Amor-
rite influence.^' As in the Bmro-Hittite syllabary the sign
PI has the value _w plus a vowel.
2,122 The distiioctive feotnres sf this syllabary as
---
U J - F ~for Surrian. ltiurrian texts using
The on~y'strictly

this syllabary are the seven short and broken texts from
kiasi. Since they are largely mtranslafable, their phonemic
evidence is very hard to assess, particularly for the Hurrian
phonemes that are not present in Akkadian* The Hurrian per-
sonial names from Akkadian sites present several interesting
arid informative a%erra*,ionsin %he represeatation cf these
same phonemes. These will be briefly described here.
2,1221 The Hurrian texts from Mari. (a) The stops.
The striking thing about the signs for the stops in the texts
frorn Mari is their differentiation according to voice. With

inter-vocalic stirps are voiced as they are after r, _my and

-.
n No examples occur after 1. Donbled stops are voiceless.
The phonemic interpretation of these facts is given in $3.32-
3 * 3 4 below. (b) It seems very probably that the dental frica-
tive is represented by the &signs, for the only lexical and
grammatical elements involving this phoneme that can be iden-
tified with any confidence do so. Thus, te-gta-ba-am 1:34,
Gi-mi-i-e-ni-ii ii 3 6 , e-ni-iG 1: 33, a.8-ti-ni-i24:2 5 , pa-na
na-&.pug 5:8 etc.7I (c) The labia: fricative is rendered by
the PI sign in the cases that can be identified with reason-
able certalrty , s=g e Ku-ma-ar-we- 5: 4,Si-mi-gi-e-ni-s-na
5: 10, and S[a]-act]-$i-la pa-ar-4i-s-aE 6:13, which seems
to represent the first person pronominal suffix which is
spelled -iw-wa- in the Eittanni Leftes! (cf. IH $53).
2.1222 - Hnrzia~names from
The 11
Babylonian11 sites.72
(a) The Stops. P t is in 'kui- "----'--
n u r ~ names
~ ~ u f ~ s these
~ i Akkadian
sites, written by Semitic scribes, that the positional voicing
of the stops in Hurrian is mas* abundantly and clearly attestedo
The evidence is set forth with ab~mdantexamples by Purves in
the two articles cited in note seventy-two above. It is also
 33
important to note thaf the doubled stops axe written double
with considerable regxxlarify in fSesz t e x t s This has impsr-
tant repercussions for the problem of consonantal length, sf.
$ 3.9 below. (b) The dental fricative. Another important
abersan-8,orthography in these texts occurs in the representa-
tion of the dental fricative. With great regularify the
VCliC~s
f ~ r s~f ph==e~e wrf-en with g-afgna, s&
although the voiceiess form is nsprally rendered with &signs,
there are a significant number of occurrences in which it is
rendered by the -
s-signs which, it mnsf be noted, are used to
render Semitic samekh in the Akkadian texts from these sites.
Cf . " ~ urrian Consonantal pattern" pp. 385-387. The phonemic
importance of this is set forth in $3.513 below. ( c ) The

labial fricative. In initial position E-signs are used to

represent this phoneme, forming a significant witness to the
voicelessness of this phoneme in initial position, cf. $3.621.
2.13 The orthography of the Foundation Lion Inscrip-
tion from the Akkad period. This inscription is written in
;sn orthography whish, in general, agrees with that sf the con-
temporary Akkadian documents. Its shortness, however, pre-
cludes any ve&y general statement on the subject.
2,131 The distinctive feafures of the Old A k k ~ l a a

- ~yllabary.7~ These h a ~ abeen mentioned previously in connec-

tion with the Hurro-Hittite syllabary and its origjn, $2.111
above, (a) The set of signs which later represents the em-
phatic~is completely absent. 74 (b) The sign PI represents
wa, s,
- -
a ~ u
i or - . 7 (c)
~ The set of signs ij plus a vowel re-
 -
presents the Akkadian descendent of proto-Semitic 4
- (~sabic
f very regularly, whereas the set of signs later used to
designate 2 (samekh) plus a vowel is used for the Akkadian
descendent of proto-Semitic 3 (Arabicv) and 76
(Arabic .,;i~).
(d) When we come to the stops, it musf be emphasized, in the
light of its implications for Hurrian phonemics, that the Old
&Ei6iZn syiiabary n o t ecly did not differentia&e a-i; any time
- - between voiced and voiceless stops but also used regularly
only one set of signs for syllables beginning with a stop.
This is exactly the practice of the Foundation Lion Inscrip-
tion and of the much later Yittanni ~ e t t e r . Thus,
~~ BA repre-
- and pa,78
sents both ba - - and -
BI represents both bi pi ,79 DA
- and taV8O
represents both da - TI is the only sign used for a
and ti since DI is used only with the value s$. *" AS an ex-
ception to the general rule, TXT occurs far more commonly
than DUO GA is used for ga and fs the complete exclusion
~ and K I are both in coormon use as are GU and W.
of K A . ~ GI
2,132 The orthographic features of the Hurrkan in-

-
scription. As noted above the inscription is too short to
permit a full statement on the subject.
2.1321 The stogs. The representation of the stops,
although Ilm,ited, agrees fully wi%h t h e system set fozth f s ~
Akkadian above. The same set of signs is used: B A Y DAv and
TI occur both initially and medially and GA is used mediahly,53
BE occurs in the word written in-u-be and i-na-u-be (lines
23-24). It is used only very rarely in the 441&adiaz texts.
2.1322 The use of the sign $. This sign was trans-
 35
litezated by Nougayrol as 2 Con the basis of its interpre-
tation as 3 by Albrigkat in a no&e Ir?. EGcQR 77!Fehs 1940):
84
221, and interpreted by him as representing the voiced
velar fricative later represented by single intervocalic 4
in the syllabary and by 2 in the alphabetic material from
Ugarit. The voiceless velar fricative is zepresented by the
sign HA,
'2
However, in OAWG, p. 2 5 , and sign number pe
88f., Gelb has shown that, of a11 the values suggested for
this s i ~ only
, the value 3 can be established on the basis
of reasonably certain etymologies. This value expresses a
stronger onset than any of the other vowels due to its osi-
gin in Semitic _h (Arabic y2 ) .85 If this tnrns out to be
substantiated as the phonemics ef Old Akkadian become more
certain, it will be difficult to interpret this "onset,I1
3 -
descendea f ron fhe p r a t e - S e ~ l i t i cv~ieelessr=~.m=ealf rica-
rt

tive, as representing the voiced velar fricative of Hurrian,86

while the sign for the velar fricative of Akkadian repre-
sents the voiceless velar fricative of Hurrian, The solnfion
awaits more evidence for both languages from the Old Akkadian

2,1323 The problem of the repsesenfation of fhe sibi-

lants. This is a difficult problem. The Akkadian usage
is not uniform and consistentg8 and the inscription is too
short t o provide sufficiea* evidence. In Old Akkadian the
phonemes isl, [z], and C?] are a11 represented by the set
of signs later used p~imariiyt o represent Czl (i.e. the
set 3 plus a vonel). Since the Hurrian phonemes [s] and
[a] are represented in the late? Hurrian texts by the s i a s
for the Akkadian phonemes Cs] and Cz] respectively, the
absence of the set 3 plus vowel in the Foundation Lion in-
scriptlon.caz be safely intsr~reeedas neaaing thaf 30

examples of the Hurrian phonemes [ a ] and fz] occur there.

This leaves only the dental fricative represented
[€I] by
.d.%.e
UuG r u - g u w l u g- sfgins:
Fa? la-2-
SA, OY
AS, is,
- Y
STJ and SI. FOP &be pho-
nemic implications of this usage see $3.514.
2.1324 The use of the vowel U e The occurrence of
the vowel U in our tablet is striking in view of Gslb's
demonstration that it rarely ever interchanges with d or
b , which represent _u and )rr respectively in the Akkadian

texts. 89 Thus it must have had o quality quite different

from these two sounds. Fcr Akkadian Gelb decides in favor
of
J . T~ in view of its use to represent the prefix in the third
person of D-stem verbs. 90 The use of U in the Mittanni
Letter to represent a rowel different from d can now be
clearly %raced to the fact that it did not represent simple
[ra] in the Old Akkadian syllabary from which the Mitl&ami
Letter syllabary is ultimately descended. Hence it was free
to be adapted by the Hurrian scribes for their own purposes.
2.2 The alnhabetic orfhography of U~arit. These
texts are of prime importance for the problem of Hnrrian
phonemics because they are written in an alphabet that is
capable of differentiating several phonemes which were
written ambiguously in the syllabic material. This will
become apparent as we discuss the phonemes of Hurrian.
 77
2.21 The alphabet, The alphabet used for the Hurrian
tzr&s is the same as that of t h e Ugarfkie texts except that
certain signs do not appear, and the frequency of appearance
of ofher signs is markedly different. The signs used for
Ugirritic which do not appear in Harrizn are k ~ , ~gl9 - q,
t, -
92

b, and those which are only very sporadically or ura-

and -
osr-i-i-?=?jv at$este& are 9
93 saG -.-
LUX~, in the main,
agrees with the phonetic evidence of the syllabic material
which shows no evidence of the existence of these phonemes

Due to the richness of the sounds distinguished in

Ugaritic, the alphabet is capable of distinguishing several
sounds whLch could not be distinguished in the syllabary.
g and
Thus - 2 are used to represent morphemes for which the
syiiabary had only 4 available, and -
-t and -
d are used to
-
represent morphemes for which the syllabary could only use
.
- The significance of this will be noted in the discussion
of the phonemes of Hurrian in chapter three.
Two features of the Hurrian alphabet are particularly
noteworthy. First one finds a s~llallbut significant number
9 sign: qs4
of uses of the - - (167 A 14,15), s?r
- (167 A 13)

all are in obscure context (see83.4). Second, the sign d

-
occurs with very low frequency in the Ugaritic texts and is
rased for the remnants of the proto-Semitic -
_d that for some

reason did not shift, to - However, it is used with high

frequency in the Hnrrfan texts as the voiced counterpart of
5.
- Here it alternates with 3 in the represeatafion of this
phone (sze $3.512).
The three aleph signs, '-9a -
) i t .-'u, are used in the
Hnrrian texts. Since there is no evidence for snch a glot-
fal catch in Hurria~,they must represent vowel letters.
Consequently they will be transcribed simply as g z i 8 _Uo

Ugaritic texts96 is used with the value f in Hurrian.

2.22 The osthographic practices* First it must be
noted that the orthography is basically consonantal, The
vowel signs are used regularly only in initial position. 97
The few examples of medial and final vowels occur only in
unidentified words for which no syllabic correspondences
have been established. Consequently their use remains in
doubt. Laroche suggests that they might represent diphthongs
after the analogy of S;kuiika=&u$k.98 Consonantal doabling is
not orthogsaphicaIly indicated, as in the practice in the
Ugarlfic texts, and in Semific consonantal oxthography in
general. This means &bat it is not possible to conclude from
syllabic-alphabetic correspondences that the double writing
in the syllabary represents voicelessness in the phoneme
-iu~oPved;
-- fsr tkre alpbabetic sources are csrltpletsPy srs-

biguous as to consonantal length.

Finally, the positional voicing nolied for the stops in
the syllabic or-i;hographiesdiescribed previously, is fomG
consistently in the alphabetic fexts. Further, and most
important, it is here seen to extend also to the der,fa? and
 39
velar fricatives ana [$Ie 99 The significance of this for
the phonemic strnctnre of Burrfan i s noted in ehaptzz fhmee
($$3.512 and 3.71-3.72).
 IIaving described the orthographic systems in which
liurrian has come down to us, we shall now examine these sys-
tems to determine what the phonemes of Hurrian are and how
they are represented in these orthographies.
3.1 T h e e n t a t i o n of the vowels. The ortho-
graphic systems used for Hurrian were limited in their capa-
bilities for the representation of the Hurrian vswels. The
alphabet of Ugarit is basically consonantal ,' and the sylla-
bary could represent the vowels of Akkadian itself only im-
perfectly.
3.11 The vowels [al, [el, and [il. The Hurr ian
texts employ the Akkadian vzwel signs A, E, and I with such
regularity as to indicate that the Xurrian vowels fell gener-
ally into the same sound range as the AFradian. This is es-
pecially true in the Mittanni Letter. Here the only incon-
sistency seems to be in the alternations -mar/-me-, -
-lla-/
-- - a - - These varisats seem to occur at random
with no observable semantic difference nor conditioning fac-
tor. This may be interpreted as an indication that certain
varieties of Hurrian [a] were close to ~kkadian[el. 2
3.111 The ambiguity of the signs for the [a] and [el
vowels. Due to the inability of the inherited syllabary to
40
 41
render the vowel re] (cf. $3.113 below), much ambiguity is
present in the signs involving -I-. Consequently an efp-o-
logical I-vowel can only be assumed when a significant n m -
ber of readings with supplemental -A- occur, e.g. ti-i-@a-n-
(ML 3: 8,20,22,24,27; 4:49) , and convezsely even a single oc-
currence of a sign involving -g- or the use of a supplemental
e - y ~ w ~~125+u
- l be +"Ira-
v-n~u. -.
WJ
..I 3-
wrx
A
g -m
2 2u -
~* ~
%G2 -- -a
w u ~ uW -A---1
L g G
g --a -ml
U V I E ~ UI U W a K S ~ Y L
v--- u-- -S-r

In the Mlttanni Letter a method was developed for distin-

guishing the two vowels in one izstzzce =here A I A ~ d i s zo r t k o -
graphy was incapable of so doing. Since Hurrian possessed
only one set of stop phonemes, there were wailable two sets
of signs to represent them, the voiced and the voiceless.
In the case of the palatal stop [k] the sign GI was used to
represent & and the sign KI t o represent This was not
necessary fez the labia? s t o p Cp] since BE i;as availa51e4 nor
for the dental stop [t] since TE was available. Cf IH $26.
For some suggestions as to the quality of Hursian [ i ] see

-p7.
3,112 The vowels ful and [ol. Contrary to the basic
correspsndence sf' B u r t i a ~ [aj, [el, and Ci; with &He corres-
ponding vowels of Akkadian, the 2-signs in HurrPm represented
two varfsrifs or tyyes as opposed to the single 3-rowel of
Akkadian. This is clearly seen from the Mittanni Letter
where the two -signs U and ff, which are free variants in
AkkExlian, contrast sharply in usage. One is never a variant
of the other in ~therwiseidentical forms, but, on the con-
trary, one or the ofher is used consistently in a number of
stems and grammatical elementse fur the^, in the case of fbe
stops, in a manner exacfly aa?ogoers t o tkne nse of KI 3ad GI
to represent and & (cf. $3.111 above) , KU only takes d
as a suppLementary vowel, while GU only takes U as a supple-
mentary vowel .5 Since d can represent the semivowel Cul,
Speiser concludes (B $31) that it must be a s o m d close
to T h i s ~ o n l dexplain the nearly exclusive use of d
in those Akkadian texts where Hurrian words appear as proper
names or technical teams (i.e. Nuzu, APalalf, Chagar ~azar)
or where the writers spoke a Semitic language (i.e. Mari and
gari it) . Turning to U, the value Co] suggested by ~ o r k Oin
/

& it27 and 30) can

1909 and tentatively adopted by Speiser (
I
now be more firmly adopted due to the clear evidence of an
o-vowel in Urartea~,cP. I. M. Diakonoff, "A Comparative
-
-
Szrvey cf %;41e Illurriaxi aad fjrartean Lsng-ilages," PSVX, pp.
3?0-3~1.~ For its use in the Foundation Lion Inscription and
0 ld Akkadian see $I 2 . 1 3 24; .
3,183 T h e use sf pleonastic vowels. In the syl-
labary, as mentioned above, the vowels _a, f , and _u can be
i u r l y differentiated, but the vowel 2 could czlp be im-
L.~-I

perfectly represented in the most advanced stage of the

syilabarym8 Since this vowel is p h o ~ e m i c in Bnrrian (wbe~e-
as it is not so in Akkadian) ,9 the Hurriam scribes frequently
sought to represent their 2-vowel mambiguously. Conse-
quently, with the signs E l , Hi, R I , I B , ID, f G , a ! , IM, I R ,
and IS, the Mittanmi Letter frequently adds a pleonastic
10
E or I to avoid ambiguity, e.g. 6-ni-e-it-ta, ML 3: 21.
 43
Similarly the 2-vowel and the 2-vowel mentioned above
11
( $3.112) cenld n o t be distinguishecl by %the syllabary, so

the addition of pleonastic U and fl vowels frequently occur

0
in order to avoid ambiguity, e.g. Eta]-a-nu-u-8a-a-u, ML 1:
70, versus ta-a-nu-ga-a-6,ML 1:58. 12
Certain words are invariably written with pleonastic
VUWOAY
- G---- V though
1
~ the preceding CV sign is mambiguous,
e . g e the fwo very frequent words %e-e-ni- "brother" and

ta-a-n- "to do." This might possibly indicate length but

this is most uncertain. 13
Here also must be mentioned the inexplicable cor-
relation between the elision of the pleonastic a-vowel of
the connective associative -an and the single writing of a
preceding normally doubled consonant. l4 This is partic-
uiariy noticeable with t h e pronominal associatives -tllla
"we" and - L a "they." Thus we get either -til-la-a-an or
ti-la-an. PBis phenomenon occurs also with the ageneive
relational suff ix15 regularly written in the syllabary with
-
-5E- in intervocalic position. Thus one gets 8e-e-nl-iw-
wa-Ga-an (ML 4:14,57). With the morpheme which indicaSes
plurality with the bound forms,16 oormally written -g- in
intervocalic position, one g e t s u-u-mi-i-ni-fw-~a-ag-8a-2-zn,
(ML 3: 109) "for our lands" and i-i-ri-i-in<-ni> -iw-wa-ag-
Ha-a[-an] (ML 3: 123) "for our 7!117 No satisfactory ex-
planation has yet been suggested.l8 With all clue reserve I
-
suggest the following: perhaps the writings -2-an and ,-an
represent the syllable an (written -+an) and simple syllabic
n (written
- -%Is I-& certainly seems plausible that con-
sonartal l a g + - hw~vouldbe l h s t before syllzbic -
z. BGT-
ever, it does not explain why consonantal length would
secondarily arise before the syllable -%.Further, I have
not been able to observe any morphological difference be-
tween the t a ~forms nor any conditioning factor.
FinalByl"initia1 pieonastie vc!wnls (i,g, V-VC) a,re en-
countered in the ~ o ~ h a a k smaterial.
i This is probably a
carry over from the frequent identical practice in Hittite
\

waiting. 19
3.12 The representation of the vowels in the alpha-
-
betic material from Ugarit. Although the Ugaritic alphabet
was basically consonantal, it had developed three forms of
the consonant 'aleph corresponding to 3,3,and h e 20
Since thems is ns evidence of a gioffai stop similar to
;aleph in Hurrian, these signs must be inferprefed as vowel
letters. Unfortunately for our interpretation of the alpha-
betic Murrfaii, fexfs, the scribes could not break with theim
consonantal principle and so used these signs in the vast
m a j a ~ i t yof cases to represent initial vowels only. The
sign 2 served to represent the e-vowel as well as the r-
vowel. 21 Presumably the g-sign would a l s o represent %%a
9-vowel buf no zsrtain examples of this have been noted.
In -
IH $23, Speiser noted thst g and _u were used initially
only, with me -
single exception of tr_rt;k. This must now be
modified with the new texts found in 1961, published in
Ugaritica V. In ehese texts the majority of occurrences are
 45
initial but there are a significant number of medial occur-
rknces ~f s,&, s , and even f e>ccrrrrences of -
1. fn
Ugaritica V, Part I I I C, $7,Larocbe makes the very plausible
suggestion that these represent diphthongs*22 He cites the

- which occurs with the variant writing tw-&k

example of -&uAk, P

- 1: 98).
and represents syllabic d * ~ a - o ~ - k a(ML To this
{s7i-s nf- ---
hzf-, \ - 1 4 - - 9 - V 7 T, n- c7 ,1A , c r r : A;
saoril& be &I&&h -e (2
tJ
~7 $~: 2 ) BI.,~ L.t: s

which indubitably represents ha:$-nee

3.2 The representation of the semi-vowels [y] and

-
[w]. Except for the sign P I , which was used for E plus any
vowel, and the ligature I plus A, which commonly represented
ya in Akkadian, the syllabary possessed no special signs for
these phonemes. Further, the sign PI was also used to repre-
sent the labial fricative, both voiced and voiceless, so
that considezzble amaiguify and uncertainty offen exists.
3.21 The representation of '&I, Alongside the liga-
ture for YA, initial g- can also be wrltfen 2-i-, e.g. i-i-al-
(ML 1:96,98 etc.), i-i-e- (ML P:54), and probably a l s o i-i-irn-
(blL 2: 9 8 ) and i-i-urn- (EffL2:99). A syllable closing -y is
- or
also written -i-i- -I-,e . g . al-la-i (ML 1:62), at-ta-i-
wu-u.3 (ML 3:67), and at-ta-i-i-we, (ML 1:87). Cf. $$32-33.
The fairly frequent e-ti-l-&-e- (ML 4:19,22,25,28 e t c . ) pro-
bably represents etiye, cf. $4.51.
3.22 he representation of the semivowel b1.24 Here
the evidence is edmpiicated by the fact that the PI sign can
be used not only for the semi-vowel [ g ] but also for the
labial fricative [f]. That this is so can be seen from variant
writings with JI/@ and IT, cf. f3.6 below. A decision as to
which phoneme is presenf in any given? word earn only be made
after a significantly large number of occurrences have been
observed at more than one site. The latter provision is
necessary to ensure that the uniformity of testimony is not
Simply due to consistent scribal practice.25 Any reasonably
s i , c i f i r z ~ tn-&jer cf ~~rtiiig s
aP$b or 2 mar br;

taken as presumptive evidence that the phoneme involved was

the labial fricative if] and not the semivowel [rrle The
.> most
common words that involve [ g ] with reasonable c e r t a i n t y are.
the following: Bat~8ka(YL d'~a-u8-ka- 3: 98, Ug. quzk 61:6,
tlv-&k
- 34: 2, Bogh. d*~a-vnr,-u8-qa-KUB X X V I I 29
-
4:15) ; ewri
" lord" (11L ew-ri-is 1: 85 etc. , Ug. -
iwrn 28 rev. 9), awarrn
"field" (a-wva-ri-rue Ug. S-Ii Voc. 4: 25, -- Ug. 4:4,30)
Compiete ambiguity exists in the representation of a
final labial, whether semivowel, fricative, or stop, for the
syllabary possessed only %he signs &, IB, and UB for this
purpose. Reasonable certainty that i f ] is intended can only
be attained in the blittawi Letter with the double writings
-ir-wa- and -mv-way cf. 93.622 below.
Whether the forms -&and a& of the genitive and
dative relational past;icles respectively, (used with the
nominals sku- and antu- and with any nominal after the first
person pronominal suffix -iw-w+-), represent the semivowel
[d or the labial f ~icativeif 1 is a vexing paablem. From
the comparative evidence for the genitive and dative re-
lational particles ii'hich these writings represent, the pho-
 47
nelce involved would appear to be [f 1, cf . 5 6.4441 (b) below.
Further, in most other cases the particles appear in the
form W;4, (i.e. the sign PI). For a suggestion as to the
representation of [u] by the use of the sign fl, see $3.63.
3.3 The representation of the stops. It is in the
representation of its stop phonemes that Eurrian practice de-
z a r t s ~ e s knckfccak,Zy frcm that sf ns;~~?
frckadiz~c:sZae &zG
0-

at first glance, from the point of' view of Aldradian ortho-

graphic practice, seems to present utter chaos. I-lowever,
there is a very systematic and consistent method in the
representation of the stops in purely Hurrian texts, and
the resulting phonemic pictrrre adequately accounts for the
indiscriminate use in the Akkadian texts of the period.
3.31 The inherent limitations 0-f the syllabary. As
?las hsen Gs
noted in cletai! above [$j2elll ( c ) , 2.111 (d), and
2.1131, the Hurro-Hittite syllabary is derived from Old
Akkadian orthography and is independent of either Middle
Sabylonim, Middle Assyr f m , or 0 ld Eabylorrian orthography.
One of %he marked features cf Old Akkadian orthography is
the indiscriminate use of the signs for the voiced and voice-
less stops, combined with the regular use of only one set of
signs to represent the labial, dental, and palatal stops re-
spectively* This origin helps to account for the fact that
in the Akkadian material from NuZU, AlalaQ, ~ o ~ h a z k a iand
,
Tell El-Amarna, there is a very marked indiscriminate use
of the signs for the voiced and voiceless stops. 26
3*32 The representation of the stops in the Hurrian
texts. When one turns, however, to the Hurrian texts from
this period, the situation is quite different. Two clear
orthographic practices can be distinguished, one found in
Hurrian texts written by Hurrian scribes, and the other found
in Rurrian texts written by Semitic scribes.
3.321 Hurrian texts written by S~mrrianscribes. In
the Mittanni Letter f r ~ mthe Tell El--b,'~!arcat a b l e t s %here is
no indiscriminate use of the signs for the stops, even though
it is prevalent ic the rest of the Amarna aaterial. Hather,
one finds that a single set of signs has been adopted to rep-
resent the stops (cP. $2.121 above) and this practice is
followed with complete consistency. We also noted this same

practice in the short letter from Carchemish to Ugarit (cf.

02.1224 (1) and a strong tendency in this regard in
the Al&zido-I3uxrian Bilingual f r o m Ugarit [cf. $2.11221 above]. 25
3.322 Burrian texts written by Semitic scribes.
In the Hurrian texts from hiari,29 in the Sumero-Hurrian
31 and alpha-
Vocabulary from vgarit ,30 and in the syllabic
be ti^^^ texts Prom Ugarit, a distinction & made between the
voiced and voiceless stops. This distincffsn, fiarthermore,
is not the random use of the contemporary Akkadian material.
Rather, one fir?ds the following distinct pattern: single stops
are voiced in inter-vocalic position, when post voca1ic in
final position, and when contiguous with the liquids and
33
nasals; d3~912i?stops are invariably voiceless. GI. -
I$
${47-51 and 76-78.
3.33 The representation of the stops in personal names,
 49
technical terms and &an words occurring'in Akkadian texts.
This material, although of the most incidental value for
Hurrian morphology, contains some very significant evidence
for the phonemic character of the Uurrian stops and the
dental fricative.
3.331 Burrian material occurring as names, tec=ical
terms, and glosses ir?, the__A@c@adag texts which use the Hurro-
Wittite syllabary. In this naterial, principally from Euzu
and Alala;S, the same indiscriminate use of the signs for
voiced and voiceless stops i s fo-md in the IIurrian names and
words as occurs in the Alikadian material in which they are
i~nbedded. This is to be expected, for the two sets of stop
signs were free variants.
3.332 Eurrian names in Akkadian tex- written by
Semitic scribesc In %%o very i~pn;iortantarticles, 3A ?. M e
Puxves has shown that fhe same positional variation of the
voiced and voiceless stops as was noted for the Husrian
texts written hy S m i t i c scribes ( cf. 63.322
U
abore) 35 is
found with great regularity in the Eurrian perso~alnames
a c c t ~ r r i n gin ~1Id.iadiant e x t s ~iri3Le11
by Semitic scribes fron~

Chagar Dazar in -ibe Xari period, from 3i L5at in the 0 ld Baby-

lonia? period, from A53r;ir and Nippwr in the Middle Assgrisn
arrd Babylonian perio3s, and from the first generation of Ak-
kadian scribes at Nuzu, 36 Although there might be some equi-
vocation over the Semitic nationality of %he scribes of some
of the Htrrrian docments so interpreted above, there can be no
dorxbt whatsoeYer tha-t;these texts were mxitterm by native
 3,34 The evidenceAor %he Hcrriaz stop p h o n e ~ e sm d
their nositional voiciny. In the light of the full doc-
umentation of the evidence in = $47-51, only a sroxxiary will
be presented here. Since the Ug. alph. texts, the AIrlcadian
texts from Bfari, the Ug. S-H Voc., and the PIurrian names
from Babylonian sites a l e the only soxrces rv'hich are capable
of orthographically indicating the positional variation of the
Burrian stops, evidence from these sources only will be cited.
3.341 The labial ston [rile Due to the existence ir
Burrian of a labial fricative for xhich no separate signs
exist in the cuneiform syllabary or in the alphabetic system
of IJgarit, the signs for the labial stops llad to do double
38
duty; consequently there is considerable ambiguity in es-
fablishing the existence of tne stop in ariy given instance.
Since the existence of the labial fricative is'indicated by
the alternation of the symbols for the stop and the semi-
vowel ,39 the labial ston can only be considered certain when
a significant nrrmber of occurrences can be observed without
such alternates with h and preferably in more than one site.
Cf. Z_li_ $48. I

In the U g . alph89etic texts, the blari texts, and the Ug.

- is used initially (in the syllabic texts the only
S-H Voc. n

distinction possible is In the pair PA-BA), whereas occurs

medial'iy.
When 2 occurs medi2lPy in the alphabetic texts from
Ugarit, it can represent either the doubled stop,4' (eSg.
 51

-
irGp 4:42 which represents alphabetic d ~ r g a ~ n1
i(
W 27 1
2:23) or it can represent the labi-alfricative [cf. $3.52
below and la $49(d) 1.
3.342 The dental stop [t 1. Here the syllabary has
a separate sign for all CV possibilities except de, hence
there is little ambiguity in establishing the pattern of
voicing with this stop.
In the Ug. alphabetic texts, the bfari texts, and the
Ug. S - 8 Voc., 4 is used initially; inedially occurs inter-
vocalically and after the liquids g and! L and the nasals
m and g; in all other medial positions and when doubled, t
-
occurs. Since there are considerably more examples possible
with this stop than with the others, this positional vari-
ation will be established fully in the table on the fol-
lowing pageo
3.343 The palatal stop [k]. In the Ug. alphabetic
texts, the Mari texts, the Ug. S-H Voc., and the Hurnian
49
Eaznes from Babylonian sifes, only & is used initially.
Cf. Q $50a. Kedially in inter-vocalic position and after
t h e Liquids ar_d nasals g is f o m d o In ail other medial
positions and when doubled, & occurs. Cf. 850b.
3.35 Conclusion: Voicing of the stops is allo~honic
in Hurrian. These facts can only be explained on the
inference that voicing of the stops was not phonemic in
Ruxaian, but was ca~zsedby certain contignons voiced somds.
Consequently this positional voicing was not apparent to
native speakers of IIurrian; they were aware of only a
 The Positional Voicing of fhe Denfal Stop Et 1
-.-. ...... - --
.--....... -.
^7____---- --f 1
I
/ Ug. alph. 1 Mar i ~arnes~~

-
166:55,/ta-di 3:2
(a) 2 5 7 etc. 1
1

(b) 1 lanrb-n-d
166: 4 etc.
Ku-ma-ar-wa
5:4 I
Ta-dl-ba-bu ESN: 172

I
(d) i68:10
kid-n etc. i ----

55 etc. 1 ag-ti-ni-ig 4:25 I

1 atn47 a-fa-i-ta 5: 548 A-gi-it-ie ESN: 176
/
(a) in initial positionP' (b) in inter-vocalic posi-.
tion?2 (c) when contiguous with -+-. (d) when contiguous with
- --,".--
1- e when
- contiguous with -uJ-.@
. (f) when contiguous with
-n-, (g) when contiguous with other consonants than the liquids
b 45
and nasals. (h) when d ~ u led 0

single set of stop phonemes. When they wrote Akkadian they

were not capable of recognizing consistently the phonenic
difference between the voiced and voiceless stops, and this,
combined-with the inherent Pimitations of t h e syllabary i f -
self, produced the completely indiscriminate use of the signs
for the voiced and voiceless stops at those sites where
 53
Huarian penetration was most pronounced such as Nuzu and
Aiaiag. On the other hand, native speakers of Akkadian or
West Semitic
. --
(~gariticor Amorite), to whom voicing of the
stops was phonemic, could easily "hear" the pattern of
voicing of the stops in Hurrian speech and consequently so
- .
wrote the sounds they heard, particularly m e n using the
"B2&:y".snia&syi pabary ef. *&ari om aip'mbet of UgarPtic,

which systems faithfully distinguished the voiced and voice-

less stops. 50
3.351 The phonemic symbols for fhe Hnrrian stops.
As a result of the fact that voicing is non-phonemic in the
Hurrizz stops, the distinction of voice is superfluous in
phonemic transcription or" f h e language; consequently we
shall use the symbols [ P I , [t], and Ck] to represent- them.
3-36 The problem of stop clusters. On the basis
of tsb-d, V g . 4:56, and nbdp-d, Ug. 50 obv. 4, it is possible
to conclude that the stops are voiced after other stops, as
Speiser does iu $77. Iiowever , note ibtc, Ug. 4:35, which
a1
equals syllabic ---.. HSS X 231 rev. 5, and ak-tu-
Lu-ub-tu-bi,
--
uk-krr, Mari 6:9. These involve %he identical pairs of con-
sonants as the above exampleso Further, Purves has noted
sevezal exawpies sf vsiceiess staps after ofher stops fa the
Hurrian personal names written by Seaitic scribes at several
Babylonian sites. 51 (Cf. 9 3.332 above) . Finally, there is
a simple and readily apparent explanation for the voicing
of the directive particle in the above example* Since the
directive particle -tb prefixes a -
u-vowel when added to con-
 54
sonantsY5' as Speiser himself notes (z
$ 1 5 3 ) , the voicing is
obviously t e be explained as ciue to fnis vowel, i.e. TeGub-
-
uda and madig-uda. m c e , there is no evidence which cantra-
diets the rule that homogeneouss3 consonant olusters are voice-
less.
3.37 The doubling of the stops in Hurrian must be
5=.ysexl
&-'I---- zs ' & s i ~ ~ ~ a i ~ # . <~m
gluwl
~ -=
- '2
iiz2--
L L u U U .&UP
~ . . ,.. IU
,
,
T- TTT
p. 4.iy A,-.

a. yu, S 2 e i s e z

suggests that "the single writing of the stop in the Mari ex-
ample (i.eo a-ta-i-ta 5:5) suggests that the sound was not
double e-bymologically;the double writing in the main sylla-
bary need express no more than lack of v0ice:'~4 However, one
also finds at Mari the fprm g[a]-act]-ti-la ( 6 : 13) ,55 which
shows that a -
t written double elsewhere could be so written
at Xari. There are also several examples of the negative
element -I&-, always wrifien double in %be Mittanni Letter,
e.g. e(?)-7-an-&-ku, (6:3 ) , a-1[u?l-u[k:-ku ( 6 : 6 ) , 3a-al-pu-
-
du-uk-ku (6:8), ak-tu-uk-ku ( 6 : 9 ) , -klu-xu-uk-ku ( 7 : 6 ) , ar-itrr-
uk-krr (7:17) and du-ni-ik-ki (7: 2 0 ) , send only one possible
example of it written singly, viz* pa-an-di-kCu (7:21)4 ALL
* these double writings appear in texts six and seven, whereas
along with a-ta-i-ta in text five, note also pa-pa-na-&x-ug
[ 5 : 8, cf. 549(3)], - - a (5:12), azid gs-%a-&i-en (5: 19)
All of these examples from text five can only be explained
as doubled stops, hence voiceless. It would appear, then,
%bat %he single -
t of a-fa-i-fa must be attributed to a dif-
ference in scribal pracfice between text five and texts s i x
and seven. 56 Now, although double writing in the main syl-
labary need express no tnore than lack of voice, this double
writing
.- at Mari can oniy mean etymological dou-bling,since

lack of voice could be expressed by the syllabary. Further,

note the voiceless double writing of stops resulting f ~ o mthe
assimilation of the suffix -Q to the first consonant of the
second part of the name at Nippur, e.g. ~rikkazu>&b-kazu. 57
--
5'ina.lly
- =ntp_ tk_p f ~ z ~ s
7
ZI.,~ +YQ= if: Yg. z?php
-

?,lo. As is sllown inB6.4441 (e) ( c f . also 93.9, note 128

thereto), this represents the product of the assimilation of
the labial fricative to t h e ia"uiai stop, ice. xeQ0ob-fe >.
*~eBBob-be > TeBGop-ve. Bhsn this is compared with & ~ e - e - c g -
gu-u-up-p& (BIL 2 : 7 7 ) , it can be seen that the product of the
assimilation is not only a doubled stop, but the doubled

3.38 The honetic aaaxure of the s t o p s e In IH $77

Speiser presents s s m e evidence that the stops in l i u r r i a ~Z Z ~

composite sounds. He uses as part of his evidence the voicing

of the directive particle -ta
- after -
Ttb and Nbdg at Bgarito
However, this is atypical as is shown above ( $ 3 8 3 6 ) 3 and
p r o b a b l y simply rsf l e c t s a 2-conaecting vori'el b e f are t h e
suffix. Further, Speiser's interpretation of the unique d ~ -
e8-Zu-ubb'a-dal from Dilbat as due to an attempt by the scribe
to render some such composite s o m d has been given a far more
plausible explanation by Purves in ''8urfian Consonanta1 Pattern,"
U S L 58( 1941) ; 381 = P ~ r v e sshews by sevzzal lines of evidence
that the two elements of Kuri-ian names were not run together,
but that a pause existed between themo Thj-s is frequently shown
when'the first element ends in a consonant and the second
with a vowel, by using a VC sign at the end of the first
element and beginning the second either ,with a vowel or
another VC sign, e . g . - nku-zu-uQ-a-ri
A-ga-ab-e-li, - ,
f~i-lum-al-la-ietc. Since these names are all written
by Semitic scribes, it is very plausible to suppose that fbe
ssri'be y r ~ t e~~s&&'zeal,
hearc-]. pause as an 'aPenb

and so wrote it. 58 Furthe;, the fact that Surrian did not
tolerate doubled voiced stops,buf only doubled voiceless
s t o p no longer can be taken to favor a com;posite nature of
%he stops since this same paftern is evident with the fri-
catives also (see below).
Eow, the fact that the three fricatives of Hurrian
(the labial, the dental and the velar) exhibit .this exact
same pattern is s-cxgge~tive~Perhaps spiranfizatioo was a 11011-

phonemic feature of the single voiced IIurrian stops, whereas,

in initial position, when doubled, and in homogeneous con-
s o ~ a n tclusters, the stops were not only voiceless but also
non-spirantized. Although this is pure conjecture, if does
bring -iq another very suggestive possibility. This pattern
of non-pkonemic, inter-vocamkicspirantizafion which is lost
when the consonants are doubled immediately brings to mind
53
the very similar pattern of the Hebrew stops. This is a
phonemenon which is unique among the Semitic languages, and
hence it seems likely that it is dne t~ s o ~ ce x t e r i o r in-
fluence* Perhaps this development is due to the influence
of Hurrian during the formative period of the Aramaic and
m
 57
Canaanite dlialezts during the latter half of the second nil-
60
lenlxm. Phonetic shifts and developments such as this d m
to the influence of another langaage which forms a substratum
or adstratum are not rmknown, cf. the phonetic influence of
Smer ian upon Aldcadian during the period,between late BMrad
and early Old Babylonian times. Thfs remains, hmever , the
most tentative of suggestions.
304 The rearesentation of the sibilants and affricates.
In J ~ 58(1938):
S 175-193 and in 940-46,Speiser presents
the evidence upon which he bases his conclusion that Ilurrian
possessed four sibilant phonemes which he transcribes as Csj,
[z], [B], and [El. That two phonemes exist, which we shall
62
represent by [s] and [z], seems clear, but we shall see be-
low that the evidence is heavily in favor of the existence of
a dental. fricative with voiced and voiceless allophones, rather
than two separate phonemes. The alphabetic inaterial used five
signs for these sounds, 2 , 2 , 2, 2 .
-, a ~ - a,
d but the syllabary
had to make do with only three sets of signs, namely the s-
signs, and the 3-signs, and the 3-signs.
3.41 The evidence of the alphabetic t e x t s . In the
alphabetic texts from Ugarit both the 2-sign and..:the
22-si@
are used, as has been zecognized shce - 15064 However, the
65
y , which was highly doubtful when III. rvas wivritten,
use of -
must now be recognized as established, for it occurs in the
new texts from Ugaritica V a small but significant number of
times. Note - qqr (167 A: 13) , -
QSQ (167 A: 14,15) ,66 - bsl ( 160:
15) ,67 ~rb(n) (285:35) , and ~ r t d(285:6). 8 1 1 are in obscure
context and no p o s s i b l e s y l l a b i c equivalents have been noted.
i;everthelless, i f remains a good p o s s i b i l i t y that t h i s i n d i -
c a t e s t h e existence i n Hurrian of a phoneme other than the
s i b i l a n t [s/z].
3.42 The evidence of t h e s y l l a b i c m a t e r i a l . I n fhe
s y l l a b i c material using t h e PIurro-Hittite s y l l a b a r y azxl t h a t
using t h e Babylonian s y l l a b a r y , both 3- and z - s i g n s occura
Now t h e Z u r r o - H i t t i t e s y l l a b a r y d i d not i n general have a
separate s e t of s i g n s f o r AI.;icadiai~ [ s ] , Czl, the Z k
s e t Being used t o r e p r e s e n t a l l three. The s e t o f s i g n s 9
2 ---
-lJrus 2 vowel f s f r e q ~ e n f i ya silnpie variant of t h e s e t b p i s

a vowel [ c f . 2.111 ( c ) 1, t h i s usage being almost ~ X C ~ T T S ~ T - e

a t ru'uzu. " Consequently t h e evidence f r o m these s i t e s i s

aiii~iguousand gives l i t t l e information about the Hurrian s i b i -
1a n t phonemes 63 . F o r t u n a t e l y the w r i t i n g of Anrriaa names
by Akkadian scribes from Babyloniarr s i t e s once agair, throws
some Light on the problem. Here one f i n d s t h a t words w r i t t e n
with. in-itial z o r clotfile a, at; Xuzu appear w r i t t e n w i t h i n i t i a l .

-s and double 5 a t Kippur. The evidence i s doc-mented by

The evidence of the hlittanni Letfer i s a l s o s i g n i f i ~ a n f ~

Xerc one f i n d s S-signs used i n i n i t i a l p o s i t i o r j 7 0 medial p s i -
tion,7' b u t not doubled. The -
z-signs a r e used i n i t i a l l y , ?*
i n medial p o s i t i o n , 7 3 an8 cloublede7' I t m u s t be en~phasizecl
here agaio t h a t we n ~ x r s t carefally d i s t i n g u i s h between t e x t s
w r i t t e n by Semitic s c r i b e s and those w r i t t e n by n a t i v e 3ur- A

rians. I n the former g-signs very probably r e p r e s e n t the

 59
voiced allophone of the Rrrrrian sibilant, as well as the
Burrian affricate (see below).
3.43 The nhonemic interpretation ~f t3e evidence.
This evidence is quite a~nZ,iguows. It can be tzken to indi-
cate that two separate sibilant phonemes existed, differing
by voice only. llo.rvever,to establish this, the presence of
c 2% T i6-1
m a r A+ +V ?nrro+ rr4-f-hon 1-.n 4rr-rrnrrrl an l n C +U rm?--rrrm+~rl P n r
*
-
U .llL.zO V UJ,W J - X U & UV A $ j I I V A GLL V A A - 1 LU1WUUVLLL1W G U 1 V L

Further, note that, if the sibilmts [ s ? 2 ~ 5[z! existeG as

separate phonemes, then they form the only voiced-voiceless
pair of phones in the langaage which are not allophones. The
pattern 09 voiced-voiceless aiiopnones established for the
other fricatives is strongly against this. What then do
these two sets of signs (i .e. the 2 and the g ) represent?
Although the evidence is yet far from clear and unambigrrous,
it mould appear thaf one represents a sibilant ph~nemeCs]
while the other represents an affricate [ts] , both phonemes
exhibiting voiced and voiceless allophones according to the
positional criterioa established for the other fricatives.
However, vhich is which is open to some doubt. Although [s]
is regarded as the sibilant in this study, note that 13urrian
m- It
rejoice" appears in Urartean as p i y z e "joy,
I1
cf.
D i a l r u n o f f , PSVXs p . 3806
3.4.31 The sibilant nhoneme [sl. The existence of
this phoneme can be seen by "te use of signs that represent
Semitic sa;rtel& 2nd z a ~ i nat Xfari ( e . g . -i-si 5: 1 , 5 ; ,tzs_u-df-
i3 5: 6; ma-ru-sa 5: 1 5 ;
- and bi-in-zu-ru-u4 6:7), the Babylon-
ian sites (cf. Purves, pp. 397-400) and $he Ugar i tic
alphabetic t e x t s ( e e g . A: 53, uscq 106: 3 , and Qzaz 4.: 24).
A t Nuzu I-Iurrian [ s ] is represented by the pcrlyyhorzor~s-
z-signs
( c f . note 68). That t h i s i s s o i s seen by t h e w r i t i n g of
Burriarz names by R'Ldcadian s c r i b e s a t Nippur. Thus the colmon
r o o t w r i t t e n z i - i l - i n names a t Nuzu and ~Irhichoccurs i n the
cornon I I u r r i a i term zilifcuQlu "witness" w a s i n a l l probabil-
i t ~ a-
lxczase
r
1- .
of t h e i ~ r i t i n g al-i-i-te-&Q af T!inpxzr.
76

The u s e of both 2- axd g-signs by the Semitic s c r i b e s of the

Xari texts77 a ~ the
d U g a r i t i c a l p l ~ a b e t i ct e x t s e s t a b l i s h e s
t h e b a s i c phonetic value as a s i b i l a n t . 78 Evidence f o r t h e
p o s i t i o n a l voicing of t h e yboaeme can be see11 i n the combined
piuzu-Winpur
- evidence noted above where occurs i n i t i a l l y at
Nippur f o r i n i t i a l g a t Nuzu, and i n c e r t a i n cases of double

,,
L-r +LA
uILG fsct t h a t the ;-sign appears i n initial p o s i t i o n i n '"

t h e U g . alpb. t e x t s but not t h e z-sign.79 I n the ilittanni

L e t t e r only one symbol i s used f o r t h e phoneme, i.e. the S -
signs. Since iiiL was w r i t t e n by I-Irrrrian s c r i b e s , the alllo-

phonic voiced-voiceless a l t e r n a t i o n was not n o t i c e a b l e t o them0

3.432 Tile r~honerne [ z i . The evidence f o r t h i s phoneme

is iii'il~hharder t o i n t e r p r e t because of the ambiguity of t h e

mrifing sysfens. Thus t h e Hurriam t e x t s w r i t t e n 5y Semitic
s c r i b e s use g-signs f o x the voiced allophone of t h e s i b i l a n t
[s] ( c f . 53.431 above), and t h e Xurrian nanes w r i t t e n by
illdiac?iCL~ s c z i b e s fsom BakyPonian s i t e s use g-signs f o r t h e

voiced allophone of the d e n t a l f r i c a t i v e C Q ] ( c f . $ 3 . 5 below.

I f the 2-signs i n t h e RIittanni L e t t e r represent a silsi-
 Ga
lant phoneme with voiced and voiceless allophones like the
other fricatives, as it was intespreted above, then what do
the g-signs in the Elittanni Letter represent? Blthoxgl~sur-
s in the
mises only are possible at this point, the use of -
80
Cg. alph. texts (see $3.41 above) suggests an affricate h~l.
No alphabetic-syllabic correspondences have been established
*--A --..----
.~Gu:uu v r ~ v-
7-
g g . yuz r.uc_r;
A
ng - is
- - - I -L1
r;fih-$ r 4
~ ~ i _ . e iz t h e Z i -
a 577
&--

yhabtic texts that could be interpreted as a voiced variant

s (say ? ) ; azd note that, in the Hurrian names occurring
of - -
in Aldcadian texts from Nippur and ASSur in the Ziicidle Babyl-
onian and T:iiddie Assyrian per iocls , wri %%en in a syllabary
s, there have been noted no
that did have separate signs for -
exa~nplesof the frequent names using 3 at IlTuzu written mith -
9.
3 e 4 4 The an5iauity of the s- and z-signs in the ner-
sonal ncmes from Chagar Bazar, K i p ~ n razd AS$urb A$
t# 4 AhAS-
u G G

sites naqe elemei~tswritten with L n at Nuzu occur l~vith-

s-

signs in initial position and. 5-signs in intervocalic posi-

tion arid after Q and g. See m, p. 391 for exampies. These
result from ~ispronrmciationon the part of Semitic scribes
of the iiurrian dental fricative [el. See $3.51 below.
3.5 The revresentation of the dental fricative [QI.
In $$a-46 Speiser introduces two sepaxate phonezes which
he gives the symbols [s] and [z] and which he treats as sibi-
lants. However, the evidence is preponderantly in fayor of
sizlgle phoizeme i ~ i t hvoieet'; ~ n ivoiceless
i aiiop'uones as miti1
the stops above and as mas posited for the sibilant Is] and
t h e affricate [ z ] above. As will become evident, it seems
bett,er to treat the phoneme now under consideration under the
general heading of a fricatlre.
3.51 The allophonic nature of the variation
In his article "Phonetic Method in Hurrian 0rtho~ra~11~.;"
Lanp 16 (1940): 319-340, Prof. Speiser sets forth his
arguments for interpreting double 3 in the Hurrian syllabic
n r ~ s b i-
--:21-
l g zs --
_rgp~egt3.~ticu b - S&S e n e r ~ +e % i c hccr,-asp~&&
8 V Q ~ C P , ~ ~~

to the 4
- sign in the Ugaritic alphabetic texts, and single 3
in the syllabic material as representing a voiced phoneme
which corresponds to %he sign that is now recognized as 5
in the Ugaritic alphabetic texts. These correapondences
are based on several very clear examples:
A. Initial -5- and double -3- equals -2-.
-
Ugar it ~ittann;' Letter

-
tutk o r ~ v ~ I34:2,
,
106 rev.
6i:6,
s
d~a-u?i-ka-a-wa61L 3: 9%
d~i-mi-giIL 4:122 etc.
- 4:38,
g 50:3

-
tsbt 4:12,56; -
106 rev. 10~1.1 %e-e-e&-Ziu-na-ag M L 1: 76 e t c .
occur in the ?:{itfami L e t t e r 'r~here
Abundant exii~i~ies
4 in ttb&) occurs
the ageaftive suffix (represented by the final - -
as -3-
as soon as EL following suffix places it in inter-
vocalic position (cf. %i-li-ya-a?$-8a-a-aa ML 1:83 etc.).
B. loter-vocalic single -$- equals -a-.
-
tgarit Bii ttami Letter

@a-a-gu-li-e-eS at ~oghazkoi
1 : 1 1 3 etc.

Thus far the evidence is quite clear and unambiguous.

 63
But not so what follows. These facts can be interpreted in
two different ways. The most obvious interpretation is that
which Speiser adopts. In the light of the fact that the
Ugaritic texts employ two signs, differing by voice, the
syllabic intervocalic dotrblilng can be taken to indicate
voicelessness. Thus we Bave two separate phonemes differing
I-.--
w , -.,--a--
VV1bG. S P C ~ S . ~ ~ pPii~si"uZys-iiggests $bat $he i q a l s e

for the development of this orthographic method of' indicating

voicelessness came from observation of the fact that the
stops are invariably voiceless when doubled. However, a
less obvious interpretation is also possible. It is important
to note that the Ugaritic alphabetic texts do not orthograph-
ically indicate doubled consonants. Keeping this in mind, it
is possible to conclude that the double writing of the syl-
labary represents length wbf ch cannot be ~rfhcrgraphicallly
represented in the alphabetic textso But m a t to do with the
two different signs used by the alphabetic tests? In "~urrian
Consonantal Pattern,II AJSL 58(1941) : 3'78-404, P. Fiiii. Purves
attempts to establish a 'IFattern" in the whole consonantal
strwctrrre af Burrian in which voicing is not phonemic, (in
just the same aanner as me Bave already established for the
stops above), .by examining the evidence contained in Hurrian
names written by Akkadian scribes at Nuzu, Kippus, Dilbat,
A5gux and Chagar Bazar. After discussing the sittration with
the stops he turas t o the phoneme represented by the &signs
in the syllal3ary. Here he notes that the AMradian scribes
frequently represent this phoneme by z-signs but only when
 64
intervocalic or after the liquid m: or the nasal g. 82 Priority
must also be accorded Dr. Farves in noticing that the sign 2
-
is exclusively used in initial position in the Ugaritic texts,
a fact which the writer hadl noticed before he had access %o
Dr. ~urves'articleo Further, although the Akkadian scrLbes
usually write initial 5 as 9, there are a significant number
of examples where it is represented by s.83 Consequently,
Purves concluded that the phoneme represented by 3 had non-
phonernfc voiced and voiceless variants whose distribution is
identical with the voiced and voiceless variants of the stops.
When all the evidence is examined, it is stsongly in
favor of the secood interpretation. Note the following con-
siderations.
3.511 It cannot be substantiated that double writing
Y
of g in the syllzbary does naf represent length. S~jeiser
concln&es that the double writing of the syPl&bary did not
represent length on the basis of the writing i;e--3u-ba-am
af
Mari; for if it did, he cornclucles, Mari would have resorted
to double writing (B p. 33). But this is far from certain.
. . -...--,.
As has been shoim in discnssing the st-ymslogical doubling o f
the stops in $ 3 . 3 7 . doubling is inconsistently represented by
@
the Akkadian scribes of Mari. F'urther, note px-13-8i-la
(5:l4) versus pf-iii-di-in (5:16) and pf-?$i-i~-ti-di-en(5:
1 7 ) , and note pa-az+ge (6:2 0 ) and 69i-&3 ( 3: 15). I t must be
emphasized %bat--tiiese are KKkadian scribes and that cowonantal
doubling is inconsistently written so in the Akkadian texts
of Mari. '4 Further note that this name Teisnb is not in-
frequently written with double in Hurrian names from the
85
other Alckadian sites that have been mentioned above, (note
.
e .go Te-es-Su-ub-'a-dal at ~ilbat) And finally, as Pnrves
nofes, the final ~f the first name element which occurs in
some names (whatever its grammatical function), usually as-
similated at Nuzu when the second element began with gin. 86
The product of tfiis assimilation is regularly written with
double 3.
3.512 The distribution sf 3 and at Ugarit. hi0 st
instructive, however, is the positional variation of the signs

-t and 887
- in the alphahetic texts from Ugarit. Bere the num-
4 is striking.
ber of examples of initial - From the alphabetic
Hurrian word list of Laroche in Ugaritica V there are sone
fwentg-nine different words beginning with 2
- that occur some
eighty-six times in these texts. Statistically this fits in
with the large number of words in hiL and the large number of
name elements at Nuzu that begin with 3. However, it must be
noted that there are a smal!.:but significant nmbes of words ir,
the Ugasitic texts that begin with 3. Thus note Sbn? 1. ( 6 ~ :
8), (285: 1 9 , -
Zkl (153:109 269+297:4, 273: ! j 9 235: 15), and

-
3ktd89 (167 A: 5,7).90 If these are all examples of initial
2, it would appear that the 3-sign is here used as a variant

- and
This positional variation in f - can be verified
by s e v e r a l &&3: -
det;ail:: a f s ~ +The Eame trtt?: ( 6 0 : 1) c m bg
plausibly interpreted as Sar-teggub, wel'l known from Nuzu,
while the name iwrdr (54:l) can also be very nlarxsibly inter-
 64
preted as ~wi/ar-Sarri.92 If these interpretations are cor-
rect, we have this samii'positional variation in the same name
element Sarri "king." The second name probably represents
Ewj;Sarri with syllabic g , and.hence the voicing of the initial
consonant in the second element. And finally, note the forms
gdnAt and ~cllr#] in 50:9- Zere the morpheme which forms
It
the pl-ma1 of the relational or ease" suffixes appears as
-
-t-.
- In the syllabary it is always mri-hten singly in inter-
vocalic position a ~ dat Ugarit it always appears as -a-
- in
forms other than the directi've suffix above, e.g. trg-n-cr
. . --
= -
attff-n-dr (Ut? 4: 50ff. ) In -
I B $74 Speiser attributes
%

this to a process of partial assimilation- Bornever, it i s

better explained as an example of the voicelessness of con-

sonant clusters in Burrian when the consonants involued.:be-
long to this class, as noted by Purves, m, p a 4QOf Thus
- in the divine name $w~k/&-ng-ka, -$t-
note -SIC- - in -
a&t~.-/
agtuwi- "female, It
-3-
in a3Qlrn from the new alphabeiic
texts, etc.
zhother difficalty now introdrrced by the new alpha-
betic texts, is the altesnatior, sf the sign. - (~aroche's!I,)
and the sign 5 (Laroche's Z2,) in the representation of
the voiced variant of the dental fricative. Thus, note

- -
at% (278:16) , btrt atd (285:11), and even -
a= ( 168:8, 169: 13);
and agig (643 A: 15), but tlgl3 (643 A: 1 3 ) . Since the dif-
ference between the two is simply the -verticalwedge in the
-:-sf@, and this sign is far more common in the Semi%ic

-
texts than the a-sign, this alternation can be ascribed to
the scribal habits of the Semitic scribe.
3.513 The evidence of variant writings by Akkadian
scribes. As noted above, name elements written with by
the Hurrian scribes at Nuzu are written with z at certain
Akkadian sites whenever the phoneme is intervocalic or occurs
after 1 or r. 93 Further, although these same scribes usually
--- _
r r ~ ag-signs
-
ir, ? = i g f s ? posit$o.ii,94 oca-e&oisiiy they rise
-s-
signs in this position,95 e.g. Sambiya and Kel-Samba at Nuzu
occurs at lVippur as Sambi and Sambih-ari;
-- Sellu at Nuzu is

-Sellum or -.Selli at Nippur and most noteworthy is the form

fags-zi-ib-~i-rni-~a at Cnagar Bazar. 4 at
Here the initial -
Ugarit appears as -
s in the well known divine name Simiga.
Again, Nuzu Snmm- as in Summi~aand Summi-genni appears as
su-um-ge-en-ni at N ippur and as Sum-mi-te-8u-ub at Aggur.
Finally, as Speissr himself paints oaf i n JMS 36(P438): i 7 9 ,
the word -
&bl appears in two contexts in the Ugarific alpha-
botic texts (4:27,33) while once, in identical context, sbl
occurs. This possibly exhibits this same phenomenon.
Finally, the anomalous form Te-zu-ub-be in Ug. H.
2 : P,11(?), (cf. Laroche, PRU I I I , p. 330) most likely rep-
resents ~e-sd-ub-be,and the form ~e-&-su-ub from an Assyrian
text cited by Tbnraau-Dangin [ ~ ~ r r if a2 ( ? 9 3 1 ) : 2 5 3 , n. 31
most certainly represents a misspelling due to Akkadian mis-
pronunciation of the Hurrian fricative.
f f n ~ s tbe emphasized that this varia~twriting of
3 with 2 in intervocalic position and after - r and with
n and -
-s in initial position, exhibits exacfly the same distribution
 68
sf the y~oicedand voiceless aspects of this phoneme as the
3 and g- at Ugari t
use of -
3.514 The evidence of the Foundation Lion Inscription.
In $2.132 (c) it was mentioned that the signs SA, &, IS, SU
and SI mzst represent the dental fricative in this iriscription.
The signs &' and I S present no problem, being the only VC signs
which existarZ t-c r q z e s e r , $ t h e dl&-&fan ira~ie$ie.c-sr" thf:a -

phoneme. That they are used for the Hcrrian dental fricative
I s clearly seen in the name element Ti-ig- (line 1) and in the

agentive suffix particle om Lu-ba-&a-ga-a3 (limes 9 and 13).

Now, as hzs Seen brought o a t in $2.131, %here existed two
types of Akkadian 3, orthographically at least, one repre-
sented by the 3-signs, coming from proto-Semitic t,
- and the
other represented by the 2-signs and coming from proto-
Semitic $/g. Both s e t s of sigris occur in cur iosoription,
bat there is no observable pattern to them. S A occurs only
i n the word 3a-a&-rar-in (line 10) which Nougayrol has suggested
might be csmectei? with the well-horn name element h k r -
at Nuzu. -
Since s'nkr- is joined almost entirely with divine
nanes, a meacing "protect, bless" (which is c e r f a i n from the
context of the Foundation Lion Inscription) fits very well.
Further, un-noticed as yet has been the phrasa from Ugarit:
tgren p m p @ (4:35).
- The word tgr* irary plausibly represents
tugruwi-ne and the meaning "beneficent" fits very well as a
-
divine e ~ i t l n e t ~Tha -
s-sims OCCG~. in B;i-s~-ln {line 17) and
si-di-in (iine 2 5 ) . Now Qr-su-in, clearly meaning "hear"
from context, immediafely brings to mind the common rnnt
- ba- at Ugarit.
bag- which appears as - Thus it avonld appear
that the Foundation Lion Inscription witnesses two dental
fricative phonemes, using the $signs which represent the
Akkadian form of proto-Semitic 4
- in Old Akkadian for the
voiceless fricative which appears as 3
- at Ugarit, and the
s-signs which represent Akkadian g/g in Old Akkadian for
-

conclnsion is not required by the evidence. First what dif-

ference merewas in the pronunciation of the two sets of
signs in Akkadian is far from clears96 However, whatever
the liifferences were they were ail voiceless ad hence fit
poorly for distinguishing a voiceless and voiced dental
fricative. Note the second word si-di-in of our inscription.
To follow the above line of argument would require SI- to
rspresent a voiced sound while a l l t h e evidence zl~e have
collected shows that, even if tw ~honemesexisted, only fhe
voiceless variety was permitted in initial positioa. Finally
-
sid- "to cerrse" n i ~ sbe w
t connected with $idax-mi 1I
curse" frcm
the Ug. Quad. voc.97 which possibly occurs as tdr in the
7

alphaaetic t a x t s (4:30), Consequently i t seems best t o Sake

these two sets of signs as homophones as Nougayrol does. 98
3.515 Conclusion. As a result of the above con-
siderations it seems best to provisionally conclude that
there is but one phoneme represented by the 2-signs in the
syllabic iilateriai. This phoneme had positional voiced anu
voiceless variants, voiceless in initial position and in
consonant clusters, but voiced in intervocalic position and
 70
when contiguous with the liquids and 11 and the nasals _m and
n.
- IIowevcr, when doubled, the phoneme was voiceless, as the
alphabetic and syllabic correspondences show. This pattern,
then, is identical to that established with the stops above.
3.52 The.phonemic symbol for the dental fricative.
As with the stops me again face the problem of using a symbol
-...
irr
-L,.-.....2
p u u L x = ' a I b
. 4.l.n--a-2-4.1
UI -iaua
A- mt.1
~ I U I ~I 1 1
a%. ;
1 ~
I,.---r-4.
1UUGJ
1 ~ 11" u
a-+r
III
.31*-*
8
~ U I I ~ G veiced
or voiceless distinction which is not pertinent for this
phoneme in Hurrian. Not only is this disadavantage present
with the symbol 2,
- bat it also implies a similarity between
the Semieic and *he Hurrian phonemes which is far from certain.
Speiser's spbols 5 and z have the same disadvan-tage, as well
as implying a sibilant. Consequently, we shall adopt the
symbol [ Q ] for the dental fricative in phonemic transcription
in this study.
3.53 The nhonetic character of the ohoneme&].
It is impossible, of course, to be precise about phonetic
values solely from orthographic evidence. Only general con-
clnsions can be reached. The fact that the Enrrians chose
-&signs to represent this phmeiiie %ells vexy iiftle since they
were the only signs in this whole range available after the

-s-signs and the -

z-signs m&re used for Hurrian [s] and Cz]
-pespectiay+ 99 Tbe signs used by Sercitic scribes, h ~ ~ e ~ e r ,
are of mare help. That the phonetic value was not Cs] is
-I-...--
Yrauwrr UY the
L--
fact that the Semitic scribes o f 'J'gasritdici not
represent it by their 3-sign. loo Their choice of the A-
- and
-d-signs, the TJgaritic descendents of proto-Semitic h] and
 71
[dl, a voiceless and voiced pair of dental fricafives,101
suggests that the sotmd was in the dental fricative
This is further confirmed kvhen we note the variant writings
of the Akkadian scribes. The sounds 3 and g are exactly the
mispronnnciations that would be expecfzd fxon a speaker of
a language which did not possess dental fricatives. Observe,
fnr
a
*-=a-1-
ua-rll_Firci,
2-
nls AL
sphese;
irue ~ ~ 1 6 6 6 ~ r% the trge nf -s and bby

native speakers of French in attempting to pronounce the

102
English voiceless and voiced interdental fri~atitves~
Independent corollary evidence of this is given by the
Egyptian rendering of TegSub as ~lb-su-pi.~'~ The fact that
the Akkadian scribes at these sites used s for the voice-
less form of the Hurrian phoneme (t~suallyusing s) far
less often than they used g for its volced counterpart is
easily explainede Since the Alkl-&iian is V O ~ C ~ ~i-i;
~ 1-s
S S

much closer to the Hurrian voiceless dental fricative than

it was to the voiced. It would appear that the use of 9-
s i p s for Xurrian [€I]reflects the scribes know-
ledge of 13urrian scribal trwditions. Rote th2t all but two
of -the exarfipies of the use or' 2-signs for come 'from
Nippur in the Middle Babylonian era where the scribes would
be least familiar wi%h Rurrian orthographic methods. Finally,
if it is established that the Burxian phonemes [s] and [z]
are sibilants which do not partalce of this pattern of allo-
-L -- -
puuuic voiced and voiceless variants, (although this is very
doubtful), then this also suggests that [Q] is in the fricative
range. Consequently, we have not included it among the
sibilants in our classification.
 - of the labial fricative.
3.6 The representation
The labial fricative is the most difficult of the Hurrian
phonemes to establish. Due to the nature of the evidence,
ambiguity exists both as to its phonetic and phonemic

3.61 Evidence-of its existence. Alongside the

E P % ~ V O W B ~qJ
irrl ( ._$3.22) and the labial stop ! 8 3.341)
5P

there exists in Hurrian a third labial range (cf. $3.341).

Since the labial stop and the labial resonant are alrea6y
established, there remains only some type of labial fricative.
For a c l e a r presentation sf the evidence establishing the
existence of the labial fricative, see $52-53. Basically,
its presence is indicated by alternate writings with and
g/g, vacillation existing even in the same source as to
which of the extant l a b i a l s ~ ~ . b o tl os a s a t o repr'esent the
fricative. I t s existence can be illustrated by the foiiuiring
examples:
(1) The divine name ~/l?iSaEapbi:
Ug. alphabet: -
pddp&104 4:35.37
dP
eophazk8i: ( i - )5a-ap-Qi and ~ f - g a -( i - )&-ap-bi
-
(2) T h e word i v / ~ a ~ r "to
- be good"
Mari: -
parb- ~ogh.: pa$r-
Ug. S-H Voc.: pa-gi-ri-e 2 : 2 2 M.L.: waw-

Akk. sites: pa-a&ri Ch. B. -

Nuzu: wagr-
- m, p, 274
c3) rnL6
ILL=
-"--,a
V T / ~ Z I X ~ -It
n v ~ u ,,
right (hand).. .
105
Am. sites: Ba-an-di- Nippur

~ o ~ h a z k:o i pa-an-t i -
 (4)The divine name ~tmarb/wi
U g o alph.: l m b 4.: 6ffe B ogh: lamar-me/kumar -bi
Xar i : h-ma-ar -we 5: 4 Nuza: 1ccnnnrtve, cf. ~ ~ ~ 106 1, 1
p* 99ff.
(5) The genitive suffix - w e / a

ijg. S-Z VQC+:

I- k a e - n ~ - ?2 :~10
~ ACT
IILJJ . -
s
...-
--
-me-:-
t~ % S . ~ - & L U

blar i: Si-mi-gi-ni-w 5: 10 Nuzu: -we passim

3.62 The allophonic nature of voicing in the labial
fricative. Although the evidence is slight and some~hat
difficult to interpret, it seems that the labial fricative
also possessed allophonic voiced and voiceless forms as did
the other .fricativesand %he stops. This conclnsion is based
on the following observations.
3,621 ,The evidence of fhe alghabetic-sgllak,ic cox-
respondeoces . Xn !$%-53 Speiser sets forth his evi-
dence for concluding that there are two separate labial frica-
tive phonemes which h e writes Cfl and ~~spec*ively~
bases his conclusion on the use of 2- and Q-sips for these
phoneiaes in t'ira Ugaritic alphabetic tex-i;sand upon variant
writings with g-signs in the Chagar B w a r texts where voice is
distinguished in the g/& signs. He also uses the principle
that double writing in the syllabary of the hfittanni Letter
represents voicelessness in the morpheme -I=- to which tve shall
+rrnn
Yw.LIJ. frr a ;;zomei-,t. XGT, zjLi-tiiongii the evidience is far too ten-

uous and limited to be certain, it can be noted in the table

above that the three certain examples of the labial fricative in
 74
initial position are voiceless and the two certain examples
of it rnedially, one in intervocalic position and the other
106
after g , are voiced. This is strikingly in line with the
pattern of positional voicing estsblisheO for the dental
fricative and the stops above.
3.622 The evidence of the Mittanni Letter. In If.I
,n'c.2 Prof. Spelszi a ~ t e st h e s e m a ~ t i cGiZZerense Between %he
pair at-ts-i-i-~nx-ug"by thy father" and at-ta-iw-m-ug "by
my father,! I in which the difference in the pronominal suf-
fixes is represented by the difference between -=-and -w-,
Tnen the agentive suffix -ais replaced by the dative suffix
-=,one obfains af-ta-i-ip-pa "for thy father" and at-ta-
#
iw-we-8-a "for my father." Since -ip-pa- represents a doubled
so-md, he concludes that -iw-m-;-a also represents a doubled
-c o m i i nzmely fhe dczblad f ~ ofr the~ single s o w ~ ~written
d
- ~ v - , since there is no reason to suppose that it is a %ripie

labial. On this basis he sees up the pair -=-= [f ] and

-z- = [v]. But in the light sf the phonemic character of

consonantal length with the stops and the dental fricative
(r-f. gg3.37 and 3.51 1 above) and the positional variation of
the voicing of the labial fricative noted above, -m- could
be interpreted as -=-, and -_w- as -v-. From the pattern
it would be voiceless when doubled, as with the stops and the
dental fricative. What then do tpe writings -ip-pa- and
, ,.. .,
; .s,rv.r ,
r ;-a represent? The Esrm -ip-pa- comes from the
.
F

second person pronominal srcffix -g (cf $6.433) plus the

dative suffix -e(cf. 66.445) and would represent -if-fa. 1 07
 75
Nom, - i ~ - ~ 3 - 6 -comes
a fro!* the first person pronominal suffix
- (cf
-iff . 5 6.432) plus the dative suf'f ix -fa, and would rep-
resent the dotrble labial fricative followed by the semivowel.
rl 4
ihat a
%
- can represent the semfvo~reiis clearly seen from
its use to represent the genitive and dative particles added
to words ending in -y , e. g. an-du-6-a (XL 3: 83) lo' . Perhaps
t h e s e n i ~ ; ~ q ezis csadifi=nsd i n t&e ease of 2 -*
-Iw . --=--
<
..
A
- .-. Gj'
: L--

an anaptyctic 2-vowel inserted to avoid a triple la3ial.

3.623 ~oncl~~sion. Although all the evidence that
is reasonably clear suggests that the labial fricative has
voiced voiceless allophones as do the stops and the
dental fricative, the evidence is so slight and the ortho-
graphic representation of this s o ~ m dis so ambiguous %hatthe
ques-tion remains rmdecided. However, $he paf'tern of voiced
a i ~ dvoice'less a l i o r ~ i ~ o a et vsi f i l the ot'nef fricai;ives iznd fhe

roborative evidence which exists, that such is the case here

also. Consequently the labial fricative !vill be so treated
in this work and the symbol [f ] will be adopted to regresent it.
3.63 The ambizuity of the ortho~ra~hy. A 1thongh the
existence of the labial fricative [f] a ~ d
the senivowelCg]
can be ascertained by comparative evidence in a few cases,
the majority of the occurrences remain quite ambiguous. Only
the following can be no::.::
1. In the cases in iv3ich the labial
fricative can be clearly estal~lished,the sign (PI) is
used at Nnzt: lo9 and in the iilittanni Letter, the only sites
where we can feel certain that the texts were written.by
Hurtians. In corroboration note %hat writings with 2-signs
predominate in the texts written by Akkadian scribes from
Chagar Bazar , Nippur, and Mari , at least in ini-tialposition,
Consequently, it remains possible thatkvoras written with
-
w in the hlittannf Letter represent the fricative. Further
in A'-u r-i u- ulreciiion
evi&enee " ' -- - is the use of the sign in the
Mittanni Letter and at Nuzu. We have mentioned above that
the genitive, normally wri*ten -we-, an.d the dative normally
written -=-in the illittanni Letter Secorne -hand -= 0

PIG
respectively when added to aerds that end in a _u-vowel.
Apparently the fricative lost its spiraatization and became
the semivowel after the vowel g. Now one also finds initial
-
0
a-a- d
in a-a-du-ra-an-na- (ML 1: 65, 2: 15, 3: 68,691 , 6-a-naC
, . ,-.
( h i i 2 : i v y )\ ;
A
mediaily it occurs in a-6-a-a-ar-he-
~ - X I - T ~ - G ~ - (xL 2. *-*, , - 2 a u
. I 3 1 k" &-.z-..<----b-*7.
lUlJ Q \
4.u/ , -- 3-A
a u A W L , uG"- (XL 2 :
90), Note that a-6-un-ni- contrasts with a-we-en-ni- (hlL
$17 eeti.). b d finally note that certain wor=?s are written
regularly with initial =-. 4 0
The word u-u-r- actually con-
- the first meaning "desire,
trasts in meaning with --&-P-,
11
hold dear" whilethe.secondmeans occur, be present." The
verb usually taken as s-come, arrive"
1I
occurs six times
4 e
written u-a-n- and seven times written &-. Note also
6-6-ui-ga (31L 4:68). Contrast these words with the word
-
untu "now then" which occurs soae dozen times, and the root
9- "to be true" which occurs seven times, both of which
never prefix a G-vowel . Further, several names at Nuzrr
 77
- (NPN,
begin w i t h -x-a-- p. 2701, note p a r t i c n l a r l y t h e came
#

flaataz- int tar (m,p. 170). ?<ow, s i n c e -g- appzrently 4

r e p r e s e n t s t b e semivowel i n the v a r i a n t forms of t h e g e n i t i v e

and d a t i v e s u f f i x e s mentioned above, the s~xslsicionis s t r o n g ,
i n view of t h e g r e a t r e g a l a r i t y of iviittanni orthograpl~y,that
the semivowel i s !newt i n the other occurrences of t h i s
-&* .Jixfg
-..-2&2-- ..-I-..
a &zVs rfn lL J
l -
a ...---a
1
""G&U
MA..-
::lFwtj faen? ~ ~ -
%y= yi
gF= $ ~
r e s e n t s the l a b i a l f r i c a t i v e . I I o ~ ~ e v e rt h
, e evidence i s f a r
112
f ron c e r t a i n .

3.64 The r ~ h o n e t i cq u a l i t y of t h e labial f r i c a t i v e .

Such evidence a s t h e r e i s suggests t h a t t h e Burrian s o ~ m d
i s a bilabial f r i c a t i v e r a t h e r than labio-dental as our t r a n s -
s c r i p t i o n Cf] suggests. F i r s t one f i n d s not only E- and g / ~ -
s i p s used for t h i s sound a t Nuzu 512%also occasionally t h e
a-signs.
- Cf . ESarQi-Sexmi
- beside \ ~ a r ~ i - / % ~ a ~ r i - ~ e n n i , and

f!q/innirke beside fllinnirke (althongh t h i s n a m i s lilcely not

~ u r r i a n ) . Although i t is r e l a t i v e l y scarce among the Rrxr-
r i a n names, t h e nse of p s i g n s i s not infreqxxent i n s p e l l i n g
Aldradian words containing v. Cf. rnu-?4e-el-mr1: alongside
- - - 11
surveyor" f r o m t h e Semitic root lta~fi;
aa3 ar,d
bra-qar-bsli alongside za-qar-b6li (cf .my p. 170). Second,
t h e change from f r i c a t i v e t o semivowel a f t e r the vowel 'J

( c f . $4: 55) a l s o s t r o n g l y suggests a b i l a b i a l f r i c a t i v e .

3.7 The r e p r e s e n t a t i o n of the v e l a r f s i c a $ i v e e
Qnce again due t o t h e p a a c i t y and the ambiguity of the evi-
dence, u n c e r t a i n t y e x i s t s as t o the phonemic c h a r a c t e r of t h e
velar fricatives.
 3.71 The evidence for the xihoneme. The complex
problem of the velar fricatives has been studied at length
in $54-59. With all the complexities and anomalies in
the defails the basic facts are clear: Hurrian possessed two
velar fricative sounds distinguished as voiced and voiceless
respectively. This can be clearly seen from alphabetic and
#..-.-----,.-a-----.
%. . - 3 qb.2
a,ynrcL.ulb bu+rc;apvlxue;ur;cj. -LA-
WUGII
7..
2 m--
;fppesils f ~ ithe syllabic
material in initial position or doubled, the Ugaritic alpha-
betic texts use $; whereas, when the syllabic material s h o w
a single intervocalic Q, or one next to 1, the alphabetic
texts use g. Bepresentafive examples are as follows:
(A) Initial position
Syllabic forms U g . alphabetic forms

e a t BNDH ,114 p. 48f. A: 56f.

$udena di3udellura W-DII, p . 49f. hdn Y -
bdlr q: 32f.
Dasarai bazuleg C M T , p. 553 fi,dr bald 4 passim
A ,

( B ) Intervocalic posit ion

d ~ g g u b galbaQ.3 A I O r 1 2 , p. 1 2 7 tqa gab; 4: off.

Ol~ubtuQi cf. IH, p . 48 PapQ lbti 4;35ff.

CC) ;I)cs.rrbled
1

enna tur-ina enna a 3 t W i n a in trbn in a t t m 4:5fiff.

cf. C m T , p. 567f.
(D) The root-complement -uQli/tQuli
- -1 i passim115 w r g l m vs. @rn, cf. C. H.
Gordon, Uh,J 5.9 and Glossary
numbers lO7la and lO7lb.
Further, the full orthography of the Mittanni Letter
writes certain stems and grammatical elements consistently
 8 , cf. JEJ $ 5 6 .
either with single or double -
3.72 The allophonic nature of voicinc in the velar
fricative. Whether these two sounds constitute two
separate phonemes or one phoneme with voiced and voiceless
allophones which occur according to the positional criterion
noted for the stops and the other fzicatives above, cannot be
definitively decided as yet.
TT
nuwGver,
-
---.----
it can be noted again
that the voiceless sotmd occurs initially at Ugarit in some
thirty-two different irords,'16 whereas % occurs but once in
the inexplicable form ~ l ~ l iL1.lJ 4:
, 35. Secondly, in clus-
ters of bom~geiI&oI?sconsonants, &is used, e . g . age- (278:3)
-
a a - k49/g49
- - (278:8, 166: 61), syllabic keSQi;
F ~ (166:
Q 35,37, etc.) , syllabic d ~ / ~ i 3 a 5 a p ~ GbrSyid
i;
(274:15) , syllabic GubruShi ; and agr~@nd (274:14) , syllabic
a%raE@i - 118 I,Au,ever
X,..", ; when c~ntigtxous th the Pigaids z ~ d
-.-.
I~-s&~s, ~ n l y
occurs, e.g.
A X @ f r./ n--
\LIU~+Z\-J/: l3,lj) , syllabic
galp-; aExthlld
-u (274: 14.)~syllabic a$rugQi-; and nr& ( 166: 58) ,

syllabic nirbippa. I t also occurs in initial position only

in the Foundation L i o n Inscxipfioc.
One difficulty that either phonemic construction
m ~ ~ sface
t is the fact that the adjectival suffix appears as
-
-
both syllabic -b-/alphabe tic -E- and as syllabic +&-/alpha-
nlq
betic -Q-, with no certain ciifference in meaning, nor any
discernable phonological conditioning factor that could ac-
c o ~ m tfor such an alternation.. It can only be noted that

- as indicating length which is

the interpretation of -@-
voiceless does open the possibility that the doubling arises
 120
fro= an assimilated element.
3.73 The evidence of the Fotmdation Lion Inscri~tion.
In $2.1322 the interpretation of Hougayro-1 that the sign 8
represented the voiced velar fricative was discussed. It
was noted that his interpretation that it represented " a ~ i n
in the Akkadian material has not been substantiated; rather
~ traced with confideace only Lo $, the voiceless
it c 2 be
laryngeal fricative, in a few roots. This presents a diffi-
cnlty in interpretiog it as the voiced form of the pl-ronerne
represented by &,
- the sign used for the Akkadian voiceless
velar fricative.
" -
If ~ougayrol's interpretation is substantiated by
f ~ t u r eevidence from the Old Akkadian period, then it would
appear that there are or were two velar fricative phonemes
in the Harrian of that period. However, the facts are too
few and their interpretation t o e ran-cer%aintc u s r $ h i s csn-
struction with =y confir2ence.
3.74 Conclasion. As th2 above disznssion shows,
the question as to the existence of one or two velar fri-
cative pbonewes rezliains ~nldecided. 'riowever, as with %he
labial fricative, all the evidence that is reasonably clear
suggests that the velar fricative has non-phonemic voiced
and voiceless positional variants as do the stops and the
dental fricative. Although much remains yet a!nbiguous or
rzinferpre%ed, t h e znafegy ef %he p s i t i zna? variatf on f otmd
above for the other fricatives and the stops is strong. Con-
sequently we shall here so treat it and! the symbol [IJsill
]
 81
b e adopted to represent it.

3.8 -
The representafion of the liquids and nasals.
Here both the syllabary and the alphabet were adequately
sguipped to represent both the liquids g and 1 and the nasals
m and g.
-
3.81 The resonant quality of the liquids and nasals.
-
"7,-
me i&c% %hat the liquids iind nasals cause a contiguous stop
or fricative to become voiced (cf. $3. j 2 f f . above) indicates
that they are considerably more resonant in quality than the
121
rest of the consonants.
3.82 The distribution of the liquids. The extreme
rarity sf initial g and 1 has been observed by several writ-
ers,122 but it has not yet been noted that this extends to
the medial positions as wt3ll. Both r and 1 rarely ever occur
after anether consc~znt,bat they are F e r y fiequesif i n posf-
-----.
V U G ~ L L Cposition.
-- for example, the
'~'nus, comitative nominal
suif ix -= (cf. $6.447 below) forms its plural by adding the
vowei _u between it and fhe pluralizing morpheme 8, i.e. -8ura-,
whereas the other nominal relational particles do not (e.go
genitive plural -Bfe-> -&-, dative plural -%a-> -*,
directive plural -&a=-). 123 This also explains the tendency
toward metathesis in certain words with post-consonantal g,
the best known example of which is Nuzu erwi- versus Idittanni

3.83 Syllabic and g. Vaziant writings strongiy

suggest that post-consonantal 1 and g were syllabic or vocalic
consonants. This is seen most often when a consonant imne-
diately follo~vs,rather than a vowel, s3ch as when the attri-
butire particles -= or -= are adtlled. E.g. ew-ri- but e-wa-
er-ni ( L ~ L4:127, 1 2 8 ) , e-wee-er-ne
- (KUB 27 38 4:10ff .) , and
even e-bar-ni ( C ~ R T , p. 571, n. l), cf. I H $21; bfL -
waer,
-
Eogh. pabr but pa-Qi-ri-e ( ~ g .S - H Voc. 2 : 2 2 ) 4 pa&-re<paQg-
ne 125 and alpagarrage (HSS g 1: 3 4 Pa'@-na-)e;
- lie-eQ-ra-al-la-

The agentive
lu-~ul-la-a-~a<tal~l-la-isa~taluQl-na-i5a.
element which occurs in the previous word frequently
occurs as -@ulu as well as - ~ 1 3 . Examples of this phenome-
non could be multiplied endlessly. 127
3.9 The phonemic character of consonantal length in
Hur rian. It will have been noted in the foregoing that the
interpretation of the phonemic evidence here set forth differs
from that of Prof. Speiser in &and in his basic article
I

honeti tic Method in Hurr ian Orthography," Lang 16( 1940): 319-
339, in one particalaz which resnPts in very different construc-
tions of the phonemes of the language. Prof. Speiser invokes
his principle that double writing in the main syllabary ex-
presses not quantity but a separate voiceless phoneme, the
voiced coun%erpart of which is expressed in the syliabary by
single writing of the consonant involved. We have been led,
however, to interpret double writing as expressing consonantal
length. 128 With the stops a difficulty arises with Prof.
Speiser's interpretation, for one fiods not only that the
doubled stops are invariably voiceli?ss, but one also finds
that the single stops exhibit a pattern of voicing which shows
 e3
that the voiced and voiceless stops are, linguistically
speaking, in l~csmplementary
dis$ribution," i .e. the stops
are voiceless when initia1,when in homogeneous consonant
clusters, and when doubled, but voiced in inter-vocalic
position, in post-vocalic position when word final, and when
they are contiguous with the liquids and nasals. In his
-
i l r t i c l e ' ' ~ n n s $ i o&Zethnd,!' ->->nf
+7A ', 3 in ;a, a'a's.1-
yy4jr mm
j
"ln
i-(y,

Prof. Speiser suggests that, since the stops cannot tolerate

voicing when doubled but, are invariably voice?l-ess, t 3 e single
voiced sounds must have been composite in nature. I*9 i t is
not cleas in "phonetic Method,I I p. 330, nor in IH,$47, whether
Speiser means to set up two sets of stop phonemes as he seems
to, for he never carries it oat through the rest of the dis-
cussion, cf. $78 in particular. Assuming that he does not,
as in -
I 2 $78, then there is only one set of stop phonemes,
regardless of the fact that the voiced variety may have been
composite in nature. This being the case, it becomes im-
possible for the Hurrian scribes to have developed the ortho-
graphic principle whereby double writing represented voice-
lessness in the case of phonemes for which the syllabary had
no signs available from the fact that doubling of the stops
resulted in loss of voice, for the simple reason fhat, s i n c e
the voicing of the stops is non-phonemic, they would not have
-
been conscious of the fact tkzt
- the dozbled stops are voice-
less. Voicing simply has no meaning in the stops in Hurrian
exactly as aspiration of English stops, being non-phonemic,
is meaningless and not even noticeable to native speakers of
English unless trained to observe it.
Frxrther , in the Hurrian written by Semites, this
doubling of the consonants is most often orthographically
indicated, althorrgh with exceptions, as is the case in the
writing of AUcadian. This cannot aossibly be taken to indf-
cafe a method of differentiating phonemes in the manner in
~ 7 h 4 ~ la
~v.Y,u=l 0. -.s
- 2,- 5
- -z ~ ~S ~ Z Qc
s Q ~ 3~ f ~ iz I ~ scribes.
~ ~ ~T h e ~oniy
~ i

other possibility is consonantal length, a phenomenon with

~rlaichLUadian scribes would be familiar from their ox1m Xa3-

Finally, and most important, the res~ltof as-

similatioli is regularly ivritten double. Kote partict-rlarly
-=-<-a-
in note 128 zbove-
As a result of these considerations it must be con-
cluded that consona:zta:! length is strongly phonemic in
Burrian and that, wherever double xz?ritingoccurs in the syl-
iabary, it represents such conson~~tsl
length.
 IV. PHONOLOGICAL GI-IANGZS

4.1 I n the present s t a t e of decipherment only a p r e l i -

minary statement of Lhe phonological changes of ilurrian i s
possible.
-i n many instances i t i s by no means c e r t a i n t h a t
the changes a r e not morphemic r a t h e r than phonological.
F u r t h e r , the phonemes of Btrrsian a r e by no means d e f i n i t i v e l y
determined, ~vhichfwr ther com;1lbcates the deterrninaf i o n of
sotmd changes.
4.2 The e l i s i o n . and a s s i m i l a t i o n of t h e stem vowel of
t h e nominal.
-.- me stem vowel of t h e Xurrian noxinal rmder-
goes frequent e l i s i o n and a s s i m i l a t i o n . This r a i s e s some
doubt t h a t i t i s an e s s e n t i a l p a r t of thc r o o t , but i t has
be'en s o t r e a t e d here.
4.21 The e l i s i o n of t h e stem vowel -2 before -=.
Mominals which end i n - u s u a l l y l o s e t h e i r stem vovrei be-
f o r e t h e determining snff i x -= (and presumably , ebg.
-=)

t i 0 a - %nt t i e - n e (Vg. S-13 Voc. 2:27), -

Qena-, but 9en-ne
(conmnon a s a name element), e t c . Although only a few _a-
sterns occur with the s u f f i x , t h i s s e t s t h e s-stem norninals
a p a r t from those i n -z/l and -2, which do not l o s e t h e i r

s t e g vowel i n l i k e c i r c m s t a n c e s unless the stem ends i n

r
- 9 1, or
- n ( s e e below).

4.22 The e l i s i o n of
---...-..--.-- the stem vowel with stems t h a t end
-- .----
 87
there is no change of vowel before -&, emgoQarraQQe-be-
and ewre90e-be (see $6.4522) at ~o~hazlcgi,
and aQtaQQe-be-na
at AlalaQ (see Dsaffkorn, =A, p. 159); whereas in the latter
-
use the vowel does change to u/o-, e.g. ur-impu-8Q-u/o-Q&a

A.24 -
The g/l-stern vowel assimilates to the _a-vowel of
-
the~xonorninaiassoc faf ives. Only a few exaxples are to be
- 11 word,1I ~i-wCa-]ELI-la-a-an(ML 4:
found, e.g. tine 16) urbe
11
true,11 -
ur-Ga-al-la-a-an (13L4:29) , ur -Qal-la-a-a3 (BIL 4.: 23) 3 .
The form e-e-ni-il-la-a-an ( b i ~4:65) is not dae to %he need
of a'troiding confusion with -E (~peiser u,p. 188, n. 321)
but contains the 3rd person possessive snffix -i(y) "his,"-
as the parallel en-iff+alla in line 54 shows. Bowever, a
problem is posed by mariyannarti+la+an (BIL 3: 32), and by the
demonstrative an-til-la-a-ar?,(BEL 1: 100,106; 3: 56; 4.: 31) an-ti-
il-la-ma-an (hfL 2: 122). No pertinent examples occur with _a-
stem nomiilalls.

This assimilation does nof take place with the L-stem

and 2-stern particles, e.6. inu+tta (ML 1:74), anamn;i+tta
( X L 3:52,64,64) anammi+tiila (ML 2:67, 4.:122), anammiclla
(ML 2: 55, 4:126). Nor does it occur with the 2-vowel of the
suffix -mye. g e ~uk-kgn-ni-e-el-la-ma-an (51L 3: 54,56).
4.3 Elision and assimilation of the verbal vocalic
class markers . For the definition and function of these
vowels see $7.43.
4 - 31 The a~ssirnilat
ionof the class marker after the
negative -&- to the _a-vowel
- -
of the pronominal associativesm
- -

The vowel following the subject-action negative -I& (see

$7.4512) is regularly the same as the vocalic class nrarlcer
which precedes it--probably due to votvel harmony--whenever
the element is word final, or is followed only by the cop-

twp-o-ldco (X:L 3: 45) etc. However, when the pronominal as-

sociative~are appended, the vowel after the negative snf-
fix -I&- shifts to .,-_a- in a process of vocalic assimilation,
i.e. -= --, -= -
&
a, e.g. =n-a-kk%lla+an ( B ~ L4:2),
mann-o-kkar-tilwan (ML 3: l7), gg-o-l.ck%la+an (RIL A: 3), X n -

oQ-i-l&a+tta+man (ML 1: 52).

Thaf this is assimilation of this particuiar secondary
vowel is shorn by the fact that in the absence of the negative
-
-kit- the class marker does not so assimilate, e.g. tat-ear-i+
ti lai-n (;ti& 4: 9 ) 4.
4.32 .. The elision of the class marker before the as-

-sociafive -ormi. Before the associative -onni , the i-vowel

of the transitive class elidesi e e g . fur-i-&-onmi ( B ~ L3:3) ,
bill-oQ-i-I&-onni (ML 4:11) , kat-i-kk-onni (ML 4:2 ) . No ex-
amples occur on intransitives.
4.33 -
The-- of the transitive class marker
elision -i-
before the voluntafive suffix -1-. When the der ivational
base of the verbal end.s in -1- or -g-, the &-vowel of the
transitive class elides, and the -1- of the vol-mtative suf-
fix assimilates regressively to the -2- or -s- of the base.
ThrFs note the form ta-a-du-ka-a-ara-e-~3 ( $ 1 ~3: 65, 4: 123) .
In the context of IIL 3:65 the parallel form urbupt-00-i-1-ewa
in line 64 (see $7.46311) allows us to reconstruct tat-ear-
- ( i) -r-e\va4zxt-tikar-i-l-ewa.- For other examples note m-
-
le (LIL3: 12; 3:49,51; 4: 1) -1-i-1-e [see $7.46311 and note
96 thereto;, mai-ia-in
-,
{MI., 4:64) -
-: etc.
This phenomenon apparently does not occur with the in-
fransitive class marker -2- under identical circumstances, if
we c a n judge from the single example ur-o-1-ewa (XL 3: 115).
4 The elision of the intransitive class aarker -q-
before the jussive suffix -g-/-=-. The intransitive class
marker -2- elides before the jussive suffix -g-/-en- when no
voluntative suffix is present, e . g o seteQt-e- (ML 2: 24) ,
-
twp-e (:Ji2: 88) , Q~q-jl-~I-oQt-e-(hfL 2: 23), e%c. Cf $7.43
particularly the table therein) and notes 54 and 55 thereto.
The transitive .class zarker does not elide under like circum-

4.4 -
The elision of the agensive suffix -a)-
before
the ~ronominalassociatives. Before the pronominal assoc-
iatives - L a - "I, me,I1 -fills- "we, us," and - L a - "they, them,1I
the agentive suffix --)- elides. Examples are frequent;
for the allornorph -UQ(Q) -, added to consonants, note ge-e-ni-
iw-m-6-ut-ta- (BIL2: 50, 3 7 1 4 1 i.e. Sen-iff-u(B)+tta-;
4
ge-e-ni-iw-wu-u-trl-la- (IIL 1:10?,113; 3:61; ~$:19,39,40,51,
110)~ i.e. Ben-iff-u(Q)+lla: d~-rna-a-nu-~-la- (MI.,1 , 2:65),
i.e. +4man-u(Q)+tilla- and for the allornorph --), added
to vowels, note the parallel'forms of Slane and Keliya in
M in
hiL 4: 20 'and 26: hla-ni-e'i a-li-ya-al-la-a-an, i .e. biarie-8

~eliya-(8)
i l laian "Mane-by ~eli~a-by+they+and"
and "Gi-li-i-
5
-
ag 9Jni-e-el-la-a-an, i .e. Qliga-9 hiahe-(8)illa~
tl
Re 1iya-by $lane-by+they+and .11

-
attributing the first -1- of -1la- and the first -4-of ---
6
to the assimilated -9-, But the phenomenon cannot be so
interpreted. First note that the associative -tills- never
-
appears n l f h double -tt- :?lien $Be styposed assirnilaeion of the

-
-0- has taken place ( s e e the examples above), and second, note
7
- and -lla-
that both -tta- - are regularly written double else-
where when the ass~rrnedassimilated element is not present.
Hence the phenomenon gust be regarded as elision. The pro-
cess is apparently due to the tendency to avbid the collo-
cat ion of two dor~bleconsonmfs. The same phenomenon with
-tills- occurs by analogic levelling. This interpretation
is strongly favored by the fact that the associative -2-
,
4 me.-
9.9) does not e l i d e when the pronominal associa*ives
immediately follow, e.g. orohh-i-Qitillattan karhaQt-i-Qc

4.5 The elision and assimilation of ths labial fri-

cative r f l . This phoAerne was par ticalar ly susceptible
to phonological changes. This mould seem to favor the in-
terpretation that it was a bilabial spirant, see 3.64.
4.51 The elision of [fl after the 3rd pserson posses-
sive s d fix -&) a ?Yith the "prepositional" nominals a-
!I
person," s- presence"
I1
the labial fricative of the genitive
suffix elides after the 3rd person possessive suffix -i(yIe
For the establishment of tbis suffix and the form of the
genitive suffix with these nceinals, see ! $ 6 . ~ 1 (c) . Yhat
is involved here is very problematic. It is not apparently

not elide (or shift to -x-1) im attay-fe (written at-ta-i-i-wa)

hi^ 1:87,1061.~ Further, note the form xa''in-u-mi-i-ni-i-w~-
ni-e in BIL 4:2 5 , -
It is exactly parallel to Kmu-u-mi - -ni-
b
iw--5-n-e-xii-a i n Bii 4: 1 9 , so f i a t it can only be interpreted
as ''momini-i (y)-f e-ne
I1
land-m-of-one 11
Yet , here the geni-
tive strff ix remains -&. 23.I.e solution is not at the moment
clear .
ae52 m e elision of the l G 3 f a l fricative Cf 1 after the
dental frieaeive [el. In the formation of the plural of the
genitive suffix -fe [see $6.$4ifl (f)3 and the dative suffix
- [see $6.4451
-fa (d)1, the labial fricative elides after the
dental fricative of the plural, forming -@- and -€&-* That
this is not a process of assimilation is indicated by the con-
sistent single writing of the +-.?
$.53 The assimilation of the labial fricative of the
genitive suffix -fe and. the dative suffix -fa to the 2nCi per-
son possessiye suffix -c= This is rtlen%isr?ec3bere b e c z ~ s e
the combination is written an-&, e.g. ~e-e-na-a-an-pg(ML
1:89), and ;in-pa, e.g. at-ta-i-in-pa (RIL 3 : 5 2 , 5 8 ) . The com-
bination, obviously produces a double labial fricative -%+
 ,
92
fe/a> affe/a. That this, for some reason, becomes -&DP~/G
as the writing -ap& and -i~-pataken at face,vslue would
indicate is doubtful. However, note that the 1st person
possessive suffix -fff is ivzitten -in-wa. For a 3iiggestfon
as to the reason for the above writing with -m- see $6.4441
(a) a
4-54
-- -
assimila%ion of the 1a3ial frfcafive tg the

labial stop. When the labial fricative follows the labial

stop contiguotrsly, regressive assimilation takes place, i.e.
-a-f-'$-m-. This occurs thus far only with the divine name
TeQQop, for which see $ 6 . 4 4 1 (e) .
4.55 The assimilation of the labial fricative to a
preceding _u-vo~ve
1r When the genitive snffix -aor the
dative suffix -fa follo~vsa g-vowel, it always is written
-
#
-a-e. This fndubits3ly is to be explained as a loss of
~pira~~~tization
of a bilabial fricative after a g-vowel, so
that it becomes the semivowel . Note a-gu-6-e (JIL 4:123) ,
a-pu-6-a , and
( b i ~1:81) la-nu-6-e (ML 2:77)
C?9-m~a- . This
is farther evidence in favor of the bilabial nature of the
labial fricative in H-~t~rri~.
4.56 The dissimilation of the labial fricative after
the double Labial fricative. -e a ~ d
The genitive suffix -f
the dative suffix -faa;re all~ayswritten -& or -G after
the 1st person possessive suffix -iff. In the light of the
interpretation of the writing -band -&as representizg
the semivowel in $4.55 above, this can only mean that -iff-fa
became -iff-ya by a process of dissimilation to avoid the
triple labial. See $6.4441 (b) .
4.57 The combination of the verbal negative -1s- and
the indicafive agentive suffix -3,
- This combination is
always written -i-rm-W (see $7.45111 for examples) .:This
represents -i-uffe What has happened phonologically is
complicated by the ambiguity of the type of labial re-
presented hy the neg;at;ive -?~!a!- zzd tk,~ s@f i x

-
a - 0 Q
In the light of other uses of -I-,the latter in-
dubitably represents the diphthong s. How from tbe cor-

relation of the indicative agentive suffixes with the pos-

sessive suffixes of the nominal (see E_I! 984) it can be sur-
mised that the agentive suffix was originally -a$, brat the
spirantization was lost in final position. lo ow ever, 1-n
--- - assimilated to the agentive saf
the negative suffix -~"r(a) -
f i x (or vice versa'?), the resulting double fricative remains-
. $ The loss of snirantiaa%ion of the labial fricative
in word-final ~osition. Beside the example discussed above
of this phenomenon, note the nominal &- in Ug* A-B Bil.: 1
from the conjectured root kef-, cf. keummi in Ug. Quad. Voc.
130 3:10 (see Laroche, U~ariticaV , I, No. 29 and $6.472 and
note L O 5 thereto).
4.6 The assimilation of g , 1, and a. A strong t e n d m ~ y
exists for the liquids E_,1, and II. to regressively assimilate
to one another. This is seen by the fact that the stsrii vowels
and the vocalic class markers will elide when the stem of the
nominal or the derivational base of the verbal ends in r , 1,
or n, and the following suffix begins with & or g (and pre-
smnably r). The -
1 or 2 of the suffix then regressively as-
sirnilates to the final consonant of the stem or base. For
examples with nominals see $4.22 above, and with verbals see

With syllabic A and =, elision takes place, but as-

similation does not always follow. Thus note ew-ri and e-1v3-
. i e e e eivg-ni
,..
4:qc7,*00\
(i:~ -:r"j
" C r 9 ---
=- - ,
-
u- ,---
-L
v- =
: %=-
- . (BZL 3: 6 0 ) 2~s
Ze-bar-na, i.e. %-na (IIL 1:103); but note pabr- and"'-
pa-
) -Ba-ar-ra-~eki(m9 1: 3) , and talqlrr but ta-lu-gul-la-
~ R S S 13 234:2). Note also Qaur-ni "life,71 ioe. QT-g-niin
Ug. Quad. Voc. l31:6, 1 v 1:20 but BrJSlurri at ~oghazkzi(cf.
Laroche, Ugaritica V, I, No. 21); another example from Ugarit
II
is Bita,r-ni curse" in Ug. Quad. Voc. 130 3: 16, I T 2:46.
4.7 -
.The dissimilation of g, _m after 2 and n. In
certain root complements some evidence exists for the dis-
similation of n s g after g and 2, cf. $7.41 (1) and Laroche,
-
RA 54(1960) : 201.
4.8 The metathesis of the liquids r, 1, and the nasal
-
-n-e
- The metathesis of the Piiquids and g occurs frequently
when they are post-consonantal. This has been connected in
$3.82 with the fact that they rarely occur in this position
but are normally post-vocalico Thus note f q s - versus fasQ-,

-
ebli- versus elbi-, and the well-lmown ewri- versus erwi-,
etc.
4.9 Connecting vowels. In certain positions secondaxy
connecting vowels ,.arise. Although much remains uncertain, the
f01 lowing seem reasonably sure as examples of this phenomenon.
 95
4.91 When the associative -man is added to a suffix or
another associative which ends in -n- an 5-connectin& vowel
is used, e.g. tiGQann-*man (ML 2: 95,3:50) , eti+tann&acman
(ML 3:46,83), xaneann-at.nta (AIL 2:57,86,91,95; 4.:5~$,57), axam-
i-em-*man (ML 3:41). Kote that the preceding 2 doubles
secondarily under these conditions. Apparently related

fix -=writtea plena -a-an occgrs after theiii, e.g. filane+nn+

- 1 :14; 2:7 ,? 1 ; 4: 52) , &a@-i-enn+h (?,IL3:42) , mann+h
e
an (hiL

(k1L 1: 84)

8.92 When the pronominal associatives or the partitive

associa+,ive-
tan are added to a word, suffix, o r another as-
sociative wl~ichends in -2-, an i-connecting vowel is used and

- occurs, e.g. fiQQan-iit<t)a+n

no secondary doubling of the -a-

A.93 Connec%ing vowels arise after the 1st person sing-

ular possessive suffix -iff. When the copnlative -2- is added
to a non~i~al
which ends.inthis suffix, it takes the f o ~ m

When the connective -ar~follows, the -p- doubles, e.g. Ben-iff-

am+^^ ( M L 3:45).
When the pronominal assoicatives are added to a nominal
which ends in the 1st person possessive suffix, the connecting
12
vowel is -2-, e.g. en-iff-a+lla+an (ML 4 6 4 ) .
 V. THE CHARACTERISTICS OF HUIIRIAN WORD FOR?tlATION

Before turning to a discussior of the morphological

features of the langaage, we shall summarize the basic
a SWUUSGJ
-0
UL
IT----: .-.- -"--.a
r r u ~ i-1;
i nvpts
*----A: -- mL 2
I U Z ~ ~ U ~ ~ U I1111s
P I
- s7d-6. X.-
GAJ
-e%-
is aeces-

sary for the simple reason that these features are markedly
different from those thaf characterize the more familiar
languages of the Semitic and Indo-European families.
5.1
The basic divisions of the Burriax word. The
Husrian word 1 consists of a root azd accoln,=a~fyingsuffixed
elements. It is to be noted at the outset that both deri-
vational morphemes2 and relational morphemes are exclusively
suffixal. Thers is not one single example of a morpheme
.-
standing before the root in all the corpus of Hurrian texts.
Further, those elements that function as suffixal morphemes
almost never function as root elements nor do they ever
stand alone. Consequently the morphemes of Hurrian can be
divided into the roots, which carry the basic semantic bur-
den of the word, and the bound suffixes, which modify that
meaning or relate it to the rest of the sentence.4
5.2 The three classes of Hurrian words. Three
classes of words can be morphologically defined by the dis-
tinctive set of suffixes that each may take. These are the
nominal, the verbal and the particle.
 n7
7f

5.21 The nominal class. First there can be dis-

tinguished a class of words whose functions combine those
usually associated with the substantive, adjective, pronoun,
numeral, adverb, and preposition of the Eur~peanlanguage
sphere; and whose suffixes prove to be concerned with the
functions of possession, abstraction, modification, and the
relatinnal f~,--,stio-,sassroiated 1~1th'!case:: i r z ir,f l e c + , i n g

ianguages. @.go
8-
Ee-e-ni-iw-wa-u-e-ni-e-wa a:-ti-i-wa ...
za-lam-Gi (ML 3:76) , which equals Ben-iff-ge-ne-fe a0ti-fe
. . . zalamQi, "brother-my-of-one-of wife-of . . . statue,"
..
i . e . "(a) statue of my brothertswife." This class of words,
consequently will be termed n~minals.
5.22 The verbal class. Secondly there can be dis-
tinguished a class of words whose functions cover those
attributed to the verb in the Eur~pezrr.languages ant3 whose
suffixes prove to relate to tense, negation, aspect, mood,
etc. E.g. a-sa-a-3i-wa-a-en (Mi, 4:20,1P0) which equals
ba0-a@-i-wa-en 11 heard-fully (heed)-trans.-neg.ijnssiveT' i.e.
" ~ e t(them) not be heeded." This class of words we shall
deem verbals
5.23 The particle class. Thirdly there can be dis-
tinguished a class of words whose functions combine fhose
of o ~ m c k i o n ,interjection, etc. and which cannot take any
of the suffixes of the first two classes but can only sppend
one or m @ r e sf a separate class of suffixes which we shall
term associatives (see immediately following) . E. g . un-du-ma-
%-an (ML 2: lO7), which equals mfo+man I I now then+andO1'This
 98
class of words will be termed particles. The Eurrian root
does not seem to have belonged inherently to arty one of these
three classes but cotxld fit into any one depending on the
5
suffixes it took on and the function it fulfilled. Thus
even roots normally termed particles can take on the suffixes
of the nominal or verb (cf. IX, p. 71), but it must be em-

of particle ( i . e . conjunction or interjection) but now frmction

according to the class involved. This feature of the lan-
guage is particularly illustrated by the forms built with the
11
nominalizing" parficle -=-. IIere the base of the nord rr;Sy
be a verbal root plus tense and agentive suffixes which is
11
nominalized" by this particle, and may then take nominal
suffixes and function as a nominal. ( ~ f .$6.5 below). 6.g.

ge-na which equals fur-00-a-lla-an . . . tiwe-na tan-00-

a%-We-aa, 11
seen-past-by-hiwi-fhey+sna . . . thiag(s)-ones
11
done-past-by-me-nost.-part.-ones, i.ee "and the deeds done
in the past by me have been seen by liim." Here the verbal
f o r x tan-oQ-au "doce-?ast-by-ae" is nominalized by a-and
placed in apposition to tiwe-na "things" just like any other
nominal.
5.3 The associative. Alongside the three classes
of words outlines above, a fourth morphological category must
be distinguished. There are suffixes which never stand by
themselves but which can only be appended to the end of
6
any of the above three types of words, but which do not
 99
perform functions on the word level. They operate as sep-
arate syntactic elements on the sentence level. These ele-
ments mill be termed associatives. E.g. a-nam-mi-til-la-
u
a-an ['~]e-e-es-su-~a+
Y
d ~ a - u ~ - e d~-ma-a-nu-6-t
a~ i -la-an
-
'~i-mi-~i-e-n~-e-ti-la-an d~-a-a-~ar-ri-ni-e-ti-la-&n ...
ta-a-ta-a:-ti-te-en (ML 1376-78) which equals anammi+tilla+

Sirnikene-(by) and ~ a g a r ine-

r (by)+=+and . . . loved-?-
piural-jussive," f . e . "In this mamer let = be leved h-,-?r

It
Teggub, by Sauzka, and by Simike, and by Eagarri.
The fmctions of the associatives cover a broad range
iiieltidizg predication, sentence connection, pronominal ''sub-
ject') and various others.
5.4 The positional connotation of the nominal and
verbal suff kxes . The verbal suffixes nlways occur in a
fixed order within the chain vhich is never altered. A
definite oriier likewise exists within the nominai.chain,
but it is not so obvious ~ C C Z U S of
~ the p h e a o ~ a n o s~f "sxf-
fix duplication" whereby the relational suffixes of the
modified noTm are repeated at the end of the suffix chain
of each of its modifiers. A difference in the function of
the nominal and verbal suffixes can be correlated with their
position in the suffix chzin. In genezal the closer a suffix
stands to the root the more derivational7 its function and
conversely, the further its position from the root, the more
 100
relational its function. Thus, in both verb and notm there
exists a set of suffixes, called "root complements" by
Speiser, whose sole function is to modify the basic meaning
of the root, e.g. &a@-
- "bear," BaQ-a@- "heed"; - "to put,
I1
place," kep-an- "to him-e something placed, to offer, present.
The positional connotation is seen in the noun by the fact
that $he pzsnominaf suffixes invariably stand before the
relational or "case" suffixes. With the verb the tense suf-
fixes stand before the negative particles which in turn come
before the conditional and jussive elements. However, this
general pricciple is not always obvious in details, for it
is not always possible clearly to delineate this difference
in the case of individual suffixes which stand next to each
other, particularly with the verb. Finally it may be noted
that this principle greatly helps te narrow down the sphere
of meaning for those elements whose meaning and function is
no% yet clear.
5.5 The arrangement of the grammar, The clear
morphological division of words into three classes plus
the morphologically separate associafives provides the ob-
vious divisions into which Hurrian morphology should be
divided. Consequently in the succeeding chapters we shall
discuss the nominal and its bound forms (chapter six), the
verbal and its bound forms (chapter seven), the particles
(chapter eight) , and the associatives (chapter nine).
The normal division of grammar into "morphology" on
on the one hand and "sylatax" on the other is very poorly
suited to the description of Hurrian grammar (cf. $95).
Indeed, it is impossible precisely to define these terms
and keep them separate in traditional grammatical treatment,
for to establish a morpheme requires that something be said
about its function. Since Hurrian, as described above, is
fundamentally agglutinative in its construction, rather than
frifieci;ional, it seems more logical to discuss the function
of the particles in the same place that their form is dis-
cussed. This we will do for the nominal, the verbal, the
particle, and the associative.
 V I . THE NOMIKALS: TIIEIR FORhl AX3 FTJPTCTIOhr

6.1 As defined above, the term nominals refers to that

ciass of Hurrian ~ o x d sfv'asse functions, in general, dove-
tail with those wmgly associated w i t h the norm and i t s
congeners ancl modifiers in the Semitic zinc2 the Indo-European
languages, and whose suffixes express possession, modification,
abstractizn, an3 the relaticrial f ~ ~ c t i o n zassociated
i with
11
case" in the inflecting languages.
!:lore specifically, the EIarrian noainal can express a
variety of functions usually connected with parts of speech
11
that are morphologically distinct in the classical" Ian-
guages of the Semitic and Indo-European sphere. Thus it
combines the functions performed by the srrbstantive, adjective,
pronoun, numeral, and preposition. This is accomplished either
by the semantic force of the root or the appendage of the
11
requisite suffix. E-g. the "substantive" Qena- "brother,
the "pronotm" fe- thou," and the "preposition"
11
m- 11
per-
son,"' all belong to the same morphological category by
virtue of the fact that they all take the identical set of
srrff ixes , e. g . 3e-e-ai-iw-wa-;-a (hiL 3: 20j "for my brother,11
we-e-wa ( M L 3: 55) "for thee ," e-ti-iw-x~i,-rf;-e(EL $: 18) "of
sy person." The "adjectival1'function is obtained 5y the
to obtain several nuances of modifdcation, e . g . Jjur-ru-u-ge
KuRn-a-trii-i-ni (Xi 3: 6 ) " ~ u rian
r land."
Although the Hurrian nominal forms a basically homo-
geneous morphological class, all of whose members take the
same set of suffixes and perform similar functions, it seems
advantageous for the purposes of description to discuss sepa-
-rately fwn sgk-slzsses zf s=micz? z s ~ ? - j sGG + L-
ULLG -
IJWJLJ -0
u1

meaning: first the pronomina.1 roots and second the numerals.

Consequently we shall discuss first the nominal root in
general, with its various types of stem, then the pronouns
an& the nbimerals, after which we shai'l turn to %he nominal
suffixes.
6.2 The nominal rooto The root refers to that mor-
pheme which carries the main semantic burden of the word. It
always stands first. There do not seem to be separate nom-
inal, verbal, and particle routs in Hurrian, but rather a
root caa f - m c t i o n as one or the other, depending s o i e i y on
the suffixes it appends Find the use to which it is put, cf.
,-,
$ 5.23. mL r~ r L S >..---
c.;iils
c - a..? ---
b u i Z L i v w frum the i'ew
x
roots %hat do SO. r:
However, it m ~ s bt e noted that quite a f e *r ~
o o t s appear as
verbals or notninals only, while words with a related meaning
in another class use a different root, e.ge a ~ "to
- give" but
taQe- "gift, present.'' Hence it does not yet seem valid to
make t h i s a general principle of the language.
6.21 Nominal stems. Nominal r o o t s are usually
characterized by final vowels which are characteristic of
.t'na.i; root and always appear when the root possesses no suf-
fixes. They do not seem to be permanent parts of the root,
however, for they are modified or elided according to the
nature of the following suffir (cf $4.2). It seems help- .
ful to indicate the root plus characteristic vowel as a stem.
3
Nominal stems occur with _a-vowels, e/i-vowels, and possibly
-
u-vowelse By far the most fmequent are the dl-stens. A
Z e n co~ssnantaistems &is0 exist, K O semanbic 6r murphaic&f-

cal feature seeins to be implied by a partictrlar sten vowel,

-
except to note that u-sterns are infrequent with the nominals
but are more numerous with the particle stease As a result of
this it seems best to regard fhese vowels as integral parts
of the root that are :subject to frequent elision or assim-
ilation. Hence we shall not indicate these vowels in nor-
malization by superscript letters, as did Speiser (=$102)
a ~ ven
d p. 571, a. P)
Braad.er;sfs i n bef ozc him (c~;?T, .
6.211 stems in -2. These include such words as ela- 7

It
sister," Qala- "daughter,11 ~ e n a -"brother
~ ," tiQa- "heart ,I1
11
a - river," and the pronominal
mountain," Qeya- l'~atex,
stem e-"I." For text references, cf. $103.
6.212 sterns in -d&. These include such words as:

-
~ ~ r t e"city,"
-~ aQte- woman, awari6 "field, B- "god,
t1 tt 11 11

- 11
eQe- heaven, e ~ r e -"lord,
~ 11
tiFe-8 l l ~ ~ rthing,
d, 11
affair, 11

omini- land, - I1
turi- low, - 11 ?P
urbe- true, faithful, - II
api- - 11 11

ace, front,"9 a-per son, body,1110-

Iif i ~ t e -n ~ , l l l l-
11
eki-
"inside, interior, heart,1t 12 fe- - 11
thou," anti- "this,11 anni-
"that," oli- - 11
other,1I a-"ali, 11
and t m i - 11
f o x . 11 For
text references of. $104. From the Ug. Quad. Voc. note,
 105
Ho. 15),
purame- "slave"I3 (~aroche, ma- lI
song" (~arocl~e,
I1
No. 16), teari- "spindle" (Laroche, Xo. 18), zuzuke- cup,
goblet" (Laroche, No. l 9 ) , maziri- "sic?" (~arzche,No. 20),

tali- "wood, tree" (~aroche,No. 2 5 ) .

Qidar-ni "curse" (Laroche,No. 17) and Qumr-ni "life"
(Laroche, No. 21) are indeterminate as to stem vowel since
if elides before -=-when t h e stern en6s ie - l 5 or -
r j - n (see
$4.222).
6.213 stems in -2. These are few. From the Ug. S-
3 Voc. aQbu- "high,It uliweru- "extent," and utQuru-
we get -
"side." However, one of the prominent features of the
Ugaritic Hurrian dialect is the use of 2- and 5-vowels where
Burrian uses 3- and g-vowels respec-
Mittanni and ~o~hazk6-i
tively. l4 It remains to be seen if these would be 2-stems
or hfittanni.
at ~o~hazkoi Among the pronouns we get w-
"the other of t m 9 , " and akku- "the one of two."
6.214 ons son ant sfemso T,vo stems end in t h e dfph-
thong --: afta3r- "father" and zllay- "lady."I5 Apart from
these a fev czthers exis$: r,o)us $%iini~r- "eari;ii,
"I6 aria mu^-
twin ( or exalted? ) .I'

6.22 pronominal stems. Among the stems exhibiting

pronominal functions, there have been identified personal,
demonstrative, reciprocal, and indefinite pronouns. The
relative pronominal relationship is not expressed in Hurrian
by a nominal root but by the particle ya-/=-. 17
6.221 The personal pronouns. Only the pronouns of
the first and second persons in the singular have thus far
 106
been established, cf. $109.
6.2211 The first person independent pronoun. This
pronoun exbibits three stems:
iQa-,18 e.g.
(1) Theagentive formis - i-ga-ag
(ML 3: 57 j , i-Zal-la-a-an (ML 3: 54, 4: 63). 19
20
(2) The subjective form is iQte-, e.g. Ci]g-te-
e-en (ML 2:71).
.
-
This is now fully c o n f i r ~ e dhy Tigt Qzzd, V n c L

136 3 : i 2 , where-.t'n~,
form iQten is rendered by Alclcadian and
Ugaritic anaku.21
( 3) The rf~blique"
form is 0o/u-. The form a-
occurs with the genitive-dative suffix -=,while %- occurs
with the directive and co~nitativesuffixes -La and -La, e . g .
4 4 4 4
u - u - (ML 3: 115) ; 9a-u-u-ta,(ML 3: 11 3) ; %rx-u-U-ra, (hlL

2: 93) 8

6,2212 The second person independent pronoun has so

far only the single stem fe-. Although it always appears as
we-
- in 13L3 the f a a b ~ - e - e ~ a - l i -a?;
n 8cghazkgi ( I I Y ~ T
11

39 1: 35, c f . Laroche, gHU 1 1 1 , p. 323) establishes the pho-

neme 2s t h e ?a%ia?fricative rather t b the
~ sernivowei.
~ E.g.
agentive: we-e-eZ-3a-a-an,(3fL 3: 68) ; g e ~ i $ i v e , Gative: B-
e-wa (ML 3: 55,58) .
6.222 The demonstrative pronouns. Two pairs of
deicfic pronouns exist in Hurrian, one a general pair "this,
that" and the other a particularizing pair, "this one of two,
that one of two."
6.2221 The generai demonstratives are anti- "thisI! 22
..
and -
annk- "that," e.g* ti-~va an-ti (ML 4 : 1 3 , 1 4 . ) "this word."
 The virtual plural of anti- is formed by adding the third
person plural pronominal associative - L a , "they," e . g o 9-
til-1a-a-an, (3iL 4:31), "this+fheyYnequalling "these." No
such plural has been noted yet for anni.
6.2222 The particularizing demonstratives are aldm-
"this one of two,11 and -
a h - "that one of two. 1I E.g. &
E-4

u
raeXg-sa-a-a~-~e-na-a-ma-a-a;~
--
Pf7n'S
i-we-e-cd'-" IT& - ah- ~~I-Lv--Y~
i -en

is-la-ni-in-:v -ga - - 4
a-.p-u-u-a e-ti-i-i- t& -i;a-a-na-
as-ti-en 1: 8 0 - 3 2 ) , "let the sood things which we desire
be done rnrtually by the one for the other. 11
6 .223 The reciprocal prono-m is iatani- "m~~tualness,
reciprocation.I 1 Foran exa~rplesee the preceding quotation.
1I
The form iQtan-iffa@-a eqt~als11 in our mutrrality," i.e. we
m~rtrially .
11

a5.224 me indefinite prone-m is a-"other, II

e.g.
u-u-li ti-me !IiL 2:79), "a~otherword." The plural is
tn rn
icle
f or:lied by adding; the ~ar-t -32, e. g . u-u-ul-la-a2 "'""u--
-a-
mi-i-in-na, (!IL 2:87-331, "t'ine other iands." Note the elision
of the ster;? vovfel and the assimila-bion of the 13, ole-na,ofla,

cr. $4.222.
6.225 The " inclusive" pzonov.m is heyarunna I1
every. ;I
It does not occur in the Mittanni Letter, but was elucidated
fr oii~i3 oghazkoi ZIrrrr ian by Fr i edr i clam23
6.226 The "extensive" pronoTm is &- "all." This
was elucidated by Speiser in $l1&. In combination with
the pronominal associatives -="he, it" and -Ila
- "they" it
forms the comnon particles Quamzman, "all (of) iZ;," and
 108
Buallaman "all (of) tihem. 11 I t slso forms the troublesome
mana duene (JIL 1:69,73; 2: 55; 3: 5,6) which seems to have
an adverbial force, perhaps "wholly, altogether ."
6.24 The nmerals. These have been listed in IH
$116. with the place wheri they were first recognized. The
situation remains the same today excepf that a k - "three"
has now been verified from the AlalaD texts. The numerals
which are reasonably certain are the followifig:

-
Qin- "two." E g g . Ei-ni-a-ge-na- "of their two" (BIL

3:40)
kika- "three." The tentative identification of this
numeral by Speiser in AASOR 16, p. 133, has
now been verified by a clear occurrence in the
Alalab tablets, cf. Friedrich, "Zu den churri-
tischen zahlw6rten," nfO 17(1954-56) : 368f.
tumni- "four''
Qinta- (Qitta-1 "seven"
eman- "tene" N Q % +,he
~ verb e m a z a m - "to make tenfold"
in t h e J l i t t z z n i Letter (ML 3:54,,,1.c.7 1
nope- "ten thonsand=" Note the occurrecce of this
numeral in the Foundation Lion Inscription in
the form inope-, [cf. Nougayrol, @ 42(1948):
1-20].

Less certain identifications are: niQi- possibly "nine"

and kiQi- possibly one of the other digits.
6.3 The nominal root-complements. The form and
general nature of these suffixes was first recognized by
 lo?
Speiser in $$174-177. They do not have the general and
{videspread usage with the nominal that they do with the
verbal (see $7.41) , being most commonly found with the ad-
jectival suffix -&/-bbe -
- and with the adverbial crrffix -ae.
However, it seems proper to add here suffixes such as -uQlu
and uQhi which modify the root meaning in a clearly deri-
vational way. Nevertheless, since the nominal root-com~li-
ments are much more limited in their usage than their verbal
counterparts, they are here discussed before the nominal
suffixes proper .
The root-complements always stand immediately next to
the root, for their function is to modify or add to the
lexical content. With the adverbial forms in -% several
root-complements appended to the same root is not uncommon.
(1) The root-complement -%-.
This is -own from the
form tat-ar-aQk-ae in ML 3: 51,107. Here it indubitably must
be the same as the verbal root-complement -=-for which a
freguontative or durative force has been suggested [see$7.41
(315. Thus the form plausibly mezzs "wit5 centic~credaffec-
tion."*4 IIowever, there are a nrrmber of noafnals from illa?sg
which possibly contain this complement, e.g. heQtar-euli
" a maker of beQtaru- objects,[I 25 billari "a pot stand(?), 26
--
pawar- "a quality of wool,lf27makar- It
of or pertaining to
woo 1 , papari- "a furnishing of some kind,"29 papaQQar i
'2l!

!, 30
"a container, pabantaru "a garment or kind of cloth,11 31
etc. Xote also pur-ar-att-iff in ML 2 : 8 9 .
(2) The root-complement -arti-. This has been inter-
preted as a separate nominal from c- give"
I1
meaning "gift"
and the forms in -arti- have been translated "father-gift,11
It
sistership-gift ,11 etc., (see IH $173, 240). This must no=
be abandonedo Goetze's suggestion in Lana 16f1940): 135$ n.
41, followed up by Laroche in KA 51(1?57) : 105, that it forms

abstracts is correct. In several instances in ,141. it clearly

forms collectives. Thus, note, besides the remarks of
Laroche, -
Ioc. s othe,phrase el-art-iff-~e-na-Qe+mmaman
nibar i-yaQ-e
- -- tuppi-yaQ in XIL 3: 44-45," sister-coal. -my-of -
ones-of+in-particular dowr ies-their-of tablet ( s ) -their,II
i.e. "the tablets of the dowries of my sister-relations." In

-
the previous paragraph .%Tu3ratta has discussed the dowry tab-
lets of his sister and of his father's sister, both of whom
went to be wives of the Pharaoh, He nrges the Pharaoh to
procure their tablets and hear them. He also urges him to
procnre his tablet, the one of the clowry which he sent (with
) to hear "whether the dowry is
his daughter ~ a d u ~ e b aand
large, excellent, and suitable for n!ybrother. It Thus, el-
arti- in the first Pine of the next paragraph call only refer,
collectively, to these women whose relationship is that of
sister. And note particularly the use of att-art-iff+tan
to mean "more than my forefathers1' (see the discussion in
99.8) *

-
( 3 ) The root-complement -ar~-. This occurs at Nuzu
with ilmerical roots in connection with animals and ap-
parently inems 1I x-year-old,11 e . g . Qin-arou ti
two-year-old,II
I1
tumnaraul'four-year-old. Cf. Speiser, U O R 16, p . 131ff.
 (4) The root-complement -_k-. 'This occurs in combi-
- in -
natioo with -0- tat-ar-a0k-ae (see above) and possibly
m
in er-o0k-i-ma (ML 1: 97,100). Note also twp-ak-oQbe-nj.
(ML 2 : 2 P 9 2 9 ) . The force is unknown.
(5) The root-complement -A-. This occurs in te-01-ae,
alongside te-on-ae and tea "much, great." Speiser suggests
c n ~ p a r a t i v e;n..d s ~ , y e r i a t i x ~ rger z d e s , respcstiYz?y [I& $175
( 3) 1 This seems less probabl e n'ow, since this remains the
only example.
(6) The root-complement -a-. For te-on-ae see above.
Nate a l s o the form tz-on-s in BIL 3: 74, modifying Igiyarowa-
II
gold."
(7) The root-complement -3-0 This occurs in con-
- in a number of forms, [note -&- in urQupt-
junction with -t-
see $7.41 (8)3 . F o r nominals n o t e -&-in niru-oat--22 (ML
4: 5,6) , mannu-pat-% (ML 4: 59), and tuppu-pat-a-( F ~ I L3: 48).
In co:;l?;ination with -3- or perhaps the adjectival -&,
note d~i6a(Y)6apei,
- apparently derived from the mountain name
a , f r o m iilaiz9 note Ze5atupge "characterized by
~ i 9 a ( 3 ~ ) 8and

six-spoked 'cyheels, I! 32 fcarap&z " f a l l o : ~ ," j 3 ,118 saispi)u Be-

scriptive of barley. 34
In co;nbination with -5- i t occurs in pasapQe "culti-
vated(?), "j5 and in the forms in -paG&;
- note, besides those
cited by Speiser, 2 , p. 134, EQannipaQga at AlalaQ. 36
P7ote also the root-comglement - 2 9 - in (3) above.
(8) The root-complement -4-. Fox forms in which this
is compounded with -2- see (7) above. Rote also -arti- in
( 2 ) above. This forms a'bstract nouns in several clear in-
stances. Thus note kelti- "well-being" from m- "to be
pleasing? satisfactory" ( h l ~4:4 3 , ~ ,) emanti "decad" from
eman-
-- "ten," palt- "authenticity(?)ll from &- "to lmow"
(3dL 4:23,291. Note also ~aQ8ithe"envoy" from paQQ- "to
send.I1
(9) r
-
+I G
1
I G - -
A
77ni.s nccrrrc: l a EL i ~ ~ r g e
-- -

amber of pertinent forms- Mote nir-00-ae ( h l ~ 1:j j , 5 8 , 7 0 , 8 2 ;

4.: 3 8 ) , nir-0-ae (ML 4:66), and nix-i-Qe (hlL 4:43), as well
as zal-oQ-ae (ML 4:14) . By Par the most common use of this
is in the combination -uQQe
A.-
wnich forms objects and parti-
cularly vessels at both Nuzu and AlalaQ. In =A, p . 217,

Draffltorn lists some nine different words using this ending

st Alalsg; note especially =rrQgi "censer" and QrrpruQQi
"brazier, vessel" and cr;q~&rneLaroche, Ugaritica 'v', I I I ,
test 2, notes to lines 14-15. Note also 0ilaQuQga (XL 4:66).
see (7) above, and with
For its combination with -p,
- see (4) above.
-k-
(10) The root-complement
-
-=-. This is known pri-
maprily from Xuzu and Alaiab tvhere it f orrns primarily vocation-
al terms on both Ilurrian and non-Iiurrian bases. Thus note
QalzuQlu 11
mayor" < Akk. Balsn "fortress," maZku&xli " leather-
worker" < Aklt. mas'lm "hide," purkullu&-~li "stone-cutter" <
A m . purqullu "precious s t o a e ," mardat-li "manufacturer of
mardatu textile" < Akk. nasdatu "a type of textile," etc. 37
For Hrarrian bases note cniantt&li --.L-_
I1
leader o f a ten" < emanti
"decadtf
4 eman- "ten,I1 tal-li "wood-cutter(? )I1 38 4 -
tali-
 --

"wood, tree ," ziliknbli "~vitness"< a-

"?'.Ii
As von Schuler notes all the examples built upon roots
whose meanings are lcnown are based upon objects in the widest
sense. Hence it cannot be said to form agent nouns in general
but rather vocational or occtrpational terms.
11
Yet note ~vuruQli
- "south.
XC ".."
+ran imm+zamemm
VwIIVljJ
,hrrni
eUli c---- +u~A & u L u l-s
0---
sitzilar term,
e.g. ain-miwri (AASQB 16 62:27) "representative(?) ,!I and
peniburu (JEN 49:36) "overseer( ? ) ." This may be simply a
-
phonetic variant of -uQ.l-.
6.4 The nominal scffixes. -
mr-
ine n~minaisare morpho-
logically identified not only by the syntactic functions they
may perform but also by the characteristic set of suffixes
that they take on. These suffixes prove to be concerned with
the following: ( 1) p~ssession,( 2 ) relationai functions on
the sentence level, (3) determination and the anaphoric
relating of suffix chains, (4) adjectival relationships,
(5) adverbial relationships, and (6) infinitival functions.
6.41 General consideratiozs. I t must be emphasized
here that %he suffixes in Hurrian are basically agglutinative
in character, that is, each suffix basically preserves its own
individuality and meaning and, as such, can be added to or
separated from the word complex.
The nominal suffixes are basically either derivational
or relational in force and this can be correlated with their
position in the nominal chain. in general the derivational
elements s t m d closest to the root and the relational suffixes
 114
further away. Thus the root complements, being exclusively
derivational in force, always stand before any other scffixes,
and the pronominal suffixes always precede the relational or
"case" suffixes. This same positional connotation produces
a difference in the ineaning Biid frmction of c e r t a i n par-
ticles. The particles -=-"one" and -=-"ones," when added
direc%ly to the root, develop a force almost akin to the
definite article, whereas when used further down in the suf-
fix chain, they anaphorically represent another word or gzou*
of words.
6.42 The nluralizing suffix f_lo_r_the,
nronominal and
relational suffixes. A marked indication of the agglu-
tinative nature of Hurrian suffixation is the fact that the
plural of the pronominal suffixes and the relational suffixes
is indicated by the addition of a separate particle, -8-, to
the singular forms. 39 Let us begin with the pronominal suf-
fixes.
6.421 The pluralization of the pronominal suffixes.
r i l ~ P l u r a l of the -- f i j i e ~13 fG E K S ~bjr ?yddi~gt h e
p ~ G - +A -l <u- -xAlI t ~ s r ~t ~i ~
if

sxffis -%-o We shall illt~stratethis with the first person

pronominal suffix -iff-"my." This becomes in the plural
-iffaQ- "our," e.g. K"u-u-mi-i-ni-iv-w, (ML 1 : 68, 2: 17),
-iw-rra-a:- ,40 (EL
i.e. omin-iff "my land" and Knx~-u-mi-i-ni
.
3: 109), i e. omin-iffaQ- " our land( s ) . 41
6.422 The pluralization of the relational suffixes.
When the relational suffixes are added to a plural nominal
without any pronominal suffix attached, they take on the
 115
same particle. However, i t is added before the suffix,
rather than after, as is the case with the pronominal suf-
fixes. Thus the agentive -&- becomes in the plural -%-,
e.g ew-ri-ig, (ML 1:85), ewri-8 "by (the) lord" 8x16 ir, she A.

plural ew-ri-en-na-Zu-us', (IdL 3:48) , ewre-(n)na-€I@ "by the

lords.1 I
However, when the relational suffixes a r e added to the
already pluralized pronominal suffixes, e.g. iffa@- "our,"
the pluralizing suffix, -9-, already present, suffices to
indicate the plural of the relational suffix also, v i z . "by
our-It is iffa-Q-tr0. E.g. (ML 4:118),
e~v-ri-iw-.r.,a-Sa-~~g~ m-
iffa-€3-u0. Compare this latter form with 3e-e-ni-im-wx~-vrg,
-
(ILL 1: 74), Oen-iff-& "by my brother ."
We shall find that a very similar suffix -&a- is used
to pluralize the pronominal agentivc suffix of the verb, cf*
$7.4525.
6.43 z e nronominal s~ffises* prescnt , the
pronominal suffixes always stand next t o the root in accord-
azse mithu their kuasir; dexivatisnai n a t u r e . -. only eiement
xne
that nay come bet~yeent h e >ro?=o;nirnal suffix and root is
the particle -= or -na
- when used with the derivational force
of the article. This occurs very seldom as would be expected,
I1
since the pronominal suffix itself imparts a definite" char-
acter to the word. Only a few examples occur in the hlittanni
Letter. For example e-e-en-ni-ib-dan,(ML 4:116) , "from thy
\ gods ," and e-en-ni--~va-a-Ze-e-en, (hfL 2:77) , II
of our gods."
6,431 The nossessive suffix paradigm. The paradigm
of the possessive pronominal suffixes is as follows:

Singular Plural
1st Person -iff (-iw-w3) -iffa0 (-iw-wa-ag)
2nd Person -- (-
- b - i - [-fael mattested
3rd Person -~x)/-(&X)G
-1 -iyaQ (-i-a3)

6.432 The first person. The stem vowel is lost be-

fore the 1-vowel of this suf'fix, e . g . Bena- "brother" but
-
regularly Ben-iff- "my brother*11 .
I
,
L U erthogzaphy of the
~

llittanni Letter is regularly -iw-I=-, e.g. Se-e-ni-iw-wa,

(ML 1:65 etc.) "my brother," u-u-mi-x;i-iw-wa, (111, 1:68), "my
land." For the interpretation of this vriting as the double
labial fricative see $3*622e
The plural is formed by adding the pluralizing particle
- plus the connecting vovel -2- after the s u f f i x (cf. $ 6 .
-9-
v
42) i.e. -iffa@, e.g. at-ta-a-ar-ti-i$*-Iva-a~'"~~
(ML 1:8),
attart-ii'faG, "our forefathers."
6.433 Tfie secornd nerson. The suffix is attached
I1
directly to the stem vowel, cf. Qena- "brother, ge-e-na-ws-
&-an, (XL 1: 64) , "and by thy broxher ." When the suffix is
in intervocalic posit ion the sign we, (i.e. PI), is used
regularly in RIittanni orthography, e.ge at-ta-i-wtr-ug, (ML
3:67), "by thy father ,I1 and pa-a:-lii-i-it-Qiiwn-uE, (MI, 1:
53,72,83), "by thy envoy." When it ends a syllable, hov-
ever, the sign IU is used, e . g . pa-25-5i-i-it-Qi-ib, ( I ~ L
1 1 1 2 : 95), "thy envoy" and e-e-en-ni-ib-dan, (IL 4:116) ,
"from thy gods." In -
IH $145, Speiser would use the two forms
 117
--
ga-a-la-pa -
, (LIL 1:51, 4 9 3 ) a ~ d
Be-e-na-oa-an, (ML l:9l)
as evidence that the BTittanni Letter orthography is not m i -
form. Although he is probably correct, the evidence mixst be
w e d with ca~rtion. The form 3e-e-na-pa-an very possibly re-
presents a case of single writing of a doubled consonant be-
-
fore -an, (cf. 63.113) , in view of the folloiving e-ti-i--e-e-
im-ma-ma-an, i e . . Ziena-Z-fe+aqA2-
1,
and ijf "-- ur u-'"
buy '-- .
~ L U ~ P1 1 4 - 9 rAnU"
L=

fora :a-a-la-pa-an in 4:93 is in coz~.nletelyhrolcez contest

The sail;e form in 2: 51 seems nost clearly to represent "t13y
clax~ghter"bat the context is bsolren inmediately preceding
and a word beloiiging to this clause is missing.
44-

\\'hen the genitive suffix -fe or the dative sxi'fix -fa

follow the second person pronominal suffix, assimilation takes
e.g.
place and the resulting combination is written - p ~ - ,
at-ta&ip-;~a e-ti-i-i-ta, OlL 3: 52-53), 11 lafner-thy-for
person-his-to" i.e. "for the sake of thy father,11 3e-e-na-
an-nk, (3lL 1: 5 9 ) , il of thy brother.t i Piote also i-ti-ib-ba-an

par?-ra-na, ( ~ g .A-E ~il.:7)which equals -41& pagar-@ Scllim

11
protect your body. II The Burrian apparently expresses sorne-
thiag li!re "assure the well-being for your body" (cf. Laroche,
-
PRY III, p. 315f.).
Xo examples of the plural of this suffix have yet been

found.
6 -434 The third person, For the establishment of
the thfrC person as -& or -ga see IH $ 6 9 and 146. Its pre-
sence and form results f row a comparison of the "preposition-
al" phrase h-u-we-ni-e e-ti-im-w a-u-e-e , (BIL4:22) , 11 me-of -
 118
one person-my-of" i.e. "with regard to me," with %hat of _u-
u-mi-i-ni-i~-\~a-&-e-ni-e
- -- e-ti-i-e-e, (IIL 4:19,28) , " land-my-
of-one person-its-of" i.e. "with regard to my land." The
form e-ti-i-e-e must be eti-iv-(f)e. The presence of an
original -y in this suffix can be assumed from the fact that
the labial fricative of the genitive and dative suffixes

i-vowel, e.g.
- we-e-wa e-ti-i-tva, (ML 3:55), "for thee, for
(the) person" i.ee " corzcerning thee"]; and from the writing

- (cf. below).
of the plural as -i-as
It is possible that the suffix was originally a&- (or
at least was so when word final). That this may be the case
is indicated by the form - in the forms aQt-a (line 9) "his
wife" and arn-a (line 14) "his sin" of the Ug. A-H Bil. (cf.
IAaroche,IJRU 1 1 1 , p * 315). Possibly this is dialectalo At,
hiittanni the final _a has apocopated whereas at Ugarit the
intervoci%:ic and the preceding 1-vowel have elided, i o e .
aQf-i?ja>aQt-a. That the aominal. s r r f f i x mas originally i?/-a
is a l s o favored by the farm of the verbal agentive suffix,
3rd person s i n g u l a r , i ~ h i c l iis a l s o -= or' -2, c f . $7.4524.
The plural is formed by adding the pluralizing suffix
- to the singular, producing -iyaQ-, e.g. tw-pp-ag, (ML
-aQ-
3: 39,4.5), "their tablets."
The variant form -adeduced by Speiser from forms in
the G g . S-I3 Iioc. must be dispensed with in the light of the
Ug.-quad. Voc. It proves to be an enclitic form of the word
eti- "person," translating the dative of the Suznerian forms
 1.19
involved. Cf. Laroche 11.4 54(1360) : 198.
6.44 The relational or "case" suffixes. A

of suffixes, always cwlded affer the pronominal suffixes, have

the function of relating the nominal to which they are at;
tached to the other words of the sentence, clause or phrase.
Their position after the pronominal suffixes accords with
i-Ln<..,
srrzul
. .G
eAl -w, & ;---.l
ulV1lUIl
m -L~~~
I -- tf ~ ~ ZS
i i 01-1i110.lliefi
i.113 the d~ ivaijn n a l

nature of the pronominal suffixes. In accordance mi%h the

agglutinative liatrrre of Hurrian conslruction, the term " case"
for these suffixes wi l l be avoided for they have more the
natnre of independent particles than infiectionai endings.
Although the functions of many of these suffixes bad been
luro~vnfroin early in Hurrian strrdies, it is to E. A . Speiser
in #148-157 that rye are indebted for their systematic
elucidati~n.
6.441 The relational suffix naradigm. The forms
of the relational suffixes when attached to singular and
plural r,otninals ar,d $0 norninals \;'it11 aIi intervening pro-
nominal suffix are set forth in the paradigm on the fol-
lowing page, These suffixes will. now be discussed both

as to form and function.

Go.+@ The zero-suffix or.stein form of the nominal,
This form of the nominal will be discussed here not only to
m a k e the presentation complete and systematic but also be-
cause the absence of a suffix in this form is a "significant
nothing," so to speak. That is, the notninal without any
relational suffix has a definite and well defined function
 121
within t h e sentence. To nlay t h i s r o l e i t niust ay~erzrwith-
out any r e l a t i o n a l s u f f i x , and t o play any other r o l e i n t h e
sentence i t must add a s u f f i x . To t h i s extent me a r e jus-
t i f i e d i n speaking of a izero-suffix"45 f o r m of t h e nominal
and including i t among t h e r e l a t i o n a l s u f f i x e s .
6 -4-421 The form of t h e zero-suff i x form. This form,
.&I.--
UILCII,
is a i u t n ~ r i1a l ---A
---2--.
w r ~lrnuulr
2 ---L
-
a-----
uy f elatiujliiii suffix. r u w e ~ e +r
7T

i t can s t i l l c a r r y pronominal s u f f i x e s and i t can s t i l l append

associatives. One of t h e most frequent a s s o c i a t i v a s t o be
attached t o the zero-suffix form i s the p r e d i c a t i v e or CO~LI-

l a t i v e -g ( c f . $ 9 . 2 ) . ILIe a r l i e r s t a g e s of t h e i n t e r p r e t a -
t i o n of Hurrian grammar t h i s -zw a s regarded as t h e s u f f i x of
the " case" involved. 46 That t h i s cannot B e s o i s evidenced
by t h e f a c t t h a t t h i s -g appears on the z e r o - s u f f i x form
~ n l ?r!.,en
g t h a t for12 is t h e f i r s f word i n the s e n t e n c e o r
c l a u s e , or i s preceded only by a p a r t i c l e . Vhenever the
z e r o - s u f f i s form occupies some other p o s i t i o n , the -g no
longer appears on i t , bxt i s s t i l l attached t o t 5 e f i r s t word
of t h e sentence or clause ( o t h e r than p a z t i c ? e s ) . Liri The only

r e a s o n the -kwo a r e Zreyitently f o m d together i s that they

both tend t o stand f i r s t i n t h e sentence or cla~-we.48

6 . ~ ~ 2 The
2 function of %be zero-suffix form.
Tlie zero-suffix form has two functions which, although ap-
pearing i~larl~redly
d i f f e r e n t f rorn t h e point of view of oar
grazmat i c a l concej?ts, belonged t o t h e sanle ~norphologicai
category -to tile Burrian way of thinlring. F i r s t , i t functions
a s the " s ~ . ~ b j e c ot "f noniinal sentences, both i n t r a n s i t i v e
a ~ d
traasitive subject-action sentences. Eomever, with a
transitive ver3al sentence in which both the actor a d the
goal of the action are expressed, the zero-suffix forin can
t1
fqmction only as the goal" of the action (i.8. the logical
object). All these rrses will now be illustrated. Let us
11
begin with the subjective" function since this is skfaikar
f o n1ol.e familiar grammatical constrrrctions:4-9
*

A. Nominal subject - nominal predicate.

(1) alaQe+me+nin nigari tea (EIL 3:42) , ''whether+
?+indeed(?) (the) dowry (is) great. I ?
( 2) xmto+n -
%fane+nn+man Qen-if f z pa8Bi t&e
( b l ~4:35) 11
nowi-cop. hlane+cop.+conn. brother-ny-of en-
11 1f 11
i.e. now Mane is my brother's envoy.
U. Nominal subject - intransitive verbal predicate.
( 1) unt 0-i-mBn ima+me+nin @en-if 3-ge _at3t i w--et%-a
(BIL 3: 21) , 11 nowi-and lo+?iiodeed(?) brother-sy-of wife
come-will,f i i.e. ft
and now, lo, my brother's wife will
come. I1
( 2) rni?iane+n.tm 803-iff-9s paQQi%Qe un-a (IIL 2 : 13-
-

14) , "?Jane+cop.+and brother-ny-of envoy coming,I1 i .em

"and liane, (the) envoy of my brother, is coming-1I
( 3) ati+nin taQe+n i tt-o0t-a (!:!L 1: 90) , "tbrxs+in-
deed(?) gift+cop. gone-past,1j i.e. "so (the) gift has
gone . It

C. Nominal subject - transitive verbal predicate, no

goal.
( (1) blemi --
@en-iff paQQ-OQ-i CEIL 1:65), II
now bso-
 II
ther-ny sending-past-trans., i.e. "at this time my
Ssother mas sending an embassy.II

--
(2) aPmu-fa+inaa aQt-a ban-aQt-i-Mri ( ~ g ATB
. Bil:
9 ) , "last-dat.+and
I1
wife-his bear-ernph.-trans.-not,
i.e. "andffor everyhis wife (is) not giving birth."

p i - . . . Km~fagriyami Ku'omini 3: 5-71 , "~tbs~t+

and requires-trans.-neg. . . . Burrian Land, what+and re-
E~i~:es-trans.-neg. ... . Egyptian land, 11
i .e. "tvhat the
Harrian land is not requiring (and) what the Xgyptian
land is not requiring.11
These sentences all partake of a basic "equational"
nature in which %he predication can be expressed either by
simple juxtaposition [A ( I ) , D (1) etc.], or by the use of
the predicaffve associakive -p [A ( 2 j , B " 2 ) etc.].
The second use of the zero-suffix form of the nominal,
however, is quite different from nlore common and familiar
grammatical constructions. Tihenever the verb is transitive
and both the actor and the recipient of the action5' are
expressed, the verb is passival in orientation.'' In this
construction the recipient of the action is placed in fhe
ft
zero-suffix form while the actor takes an agentive" suffix,

and wife reqcested-past-by-him,I1 i .e. " (a) wife was

requested by my brother. ,f 52
Kere the ffg~al'l
or "logical object" of the action, aQ%i,
 124
1I
is in the zero-suffis form, while the "actorr'or logical
subject" appends the agentive suffix -@-. Kow, since the
-
eramatical terms subject and object are inevitably asso-
ciated with the actor and the recipient of the action re--
spectively, from their c o m o n use with verbs of active
orientation (as in the Semitic and Indo-European languages),
the use of these terms for the I I r r r r i a ~pa,sclval r?c?nst.rncti;c~
can only introduce confusion. Hence the zero-suffix f o r m in
these constructions will be given the gra~nmaticaldesig-
II
nation goal," and the actor or logical subject will be
grammatically termed the I1
agent. 11 53
It must be emphasized that this construction is only
found when two conditions are met: the verb must not only
be a transitive verb but both goal and agent must be ex-
pressed. 54 For further examples see the next section on
the agentive suffix.
Finally, the zero-suffix form fTactions as a v ~ c a t i v e ,
cf. the remarks of Laroche, Uaarieica Y , 1x1, A. Textes, 5.
IIpass 8~ i ~ ~ . r o c a t i c n%s des divin: tgs pzrtlcnliz~es, dis-

cussion; and I d e m , 1 1 1 , C, $ 1 1 . 1 . Compare also 8cn-iff

(hiL 4:12) .
6.443 The agentive suffix -QQ---Q --uQQ- WUQ. 55
As mentioned above, the transitive verb in Burrian is pas-
sival in force whenever both logical subject and logical
object are pressnt. Under these circumstances the logical
object, grammatically termed the goal, is placed in the zero-
suffix form (see above), and the logical srrbject, grammati-
cally termed the agent, takes on the agentive subject.
6.4431 The form of the agentive suffix. The suffix
is a doubled dental fricative and hence voiceless (see $3.5).
It is represented by the 5-signs in the syllabary and by the
-t-sign in the alphabetic texts from Ugarit. That it is double
is revealed by the fact that it is always written -=-in
Y V

final, however, it appears as -3, This may mean that the

doubling was lost in final position,56 but this is not neces-
sarily the case. 57 However that may be, we will represent
the suffix in final position in phonemic transcription by a
single -8. When added t o a word ending in a vowel, it has
the simple form -8(8) ; but when added to a word ending in a
consonant, it becomes -UQ(Q) 58 . The Affix elides before the
pronominal associatives -
&
a "they," -tilla "we" and -eta
"I" ( cf. $4.4) Its presence can be observed when the pre-
,,,,,g;
p~ .-,vo.l;rel. is e/i or g tiecause these vowels do not then
shift to an a-vowel as they normally do before these pro-
noninal associaiives (ci. gp. 4.24) m

The p l u r a l is formed 5y adding the piuralizing s u f f i x

- plus the connecting vowel g Sefore the suffix, gsving
-8-
- e ~ ~ e ( e )cf.
-, $ 6 4 2 2 above.

6 m44.32 f u n c t i o n of the agentive-suffix. This

suffix is used to express the agent or logical subject of a
transitive verb, wlzich is passival in force in3urrian. It
never occurs under any other Circrmstances. The logical
srxbject of intsansiti..verbs and of transitive verbs in
 126
-snbject-action construction is expressed by the zero-suffix
form, cf. $6.4422 above, Xote the following examples:

!1) rn~-zz-----
~rria W+an zalarnQi tan-&-a, (XL 3: 106) ,

"Immuriya-~y+and statue made-past-by-him,11 i. e. "and

11
Imauriya has made (the) si;atuea
19,
(2) ye+rna+nin tiwe ilane-B Ben-iff-ta katill-et-a
(h11, 2: 1n1-2) " ? ~ h a . t s ? i . ~ n ~ ~) o _yer<s
d~? Blane-hy br~fhc,--

my-to . .
communica-ted-fu-t-by-him,11 i e. "what words Slane
will comtnunicate to m y brother .I1
(3) inu+ae+min hemi 0en-iff iQa-0-tat-aq (BIL
1:75), "as+?+indeed(?) now brother-my me-5y loved-by-
me,11 i.e. "as I now indeed love my brother. 11
(4) ana~mi+tilla+aq . .demen-aa-~u~ti0-iya0-a+n
ti~ean ti W a n tat-aet-iten ( M L 1:76-79), " so+us+and
. . . god-ones-by hearts-their-in+cop. nwch much
loved-?-jwssive," i.e. "and so let the gods love us in
their hearts very tnucil. 11
6 The -
_ tive
cenie s u f f i x -f e- -4-ye- w -e- N--pe- o

Since this suffix most often expresses a relationship of ap-

pxrteaance between nominais, it has been giren the name "gen-
itive" from early in Harrian studies.
5 . ~ 1The form of the eenitive suffis. (a) The
variant orthographies point to -fee It is regularly written
- at 1,iittanni after 2-, 2 - , and I-vowels, whereas at Bogllaz-
-wa
lcgi and in the alphabetic texts of ~ ~ a r both
i t ~- ~~ 2
and -u
occur, cf. $3.6.
50 When the suffix is represented by the PI
sign, the vowel is aml~iguous. Its -
e-clmracter is revealed
by its allornorphs and by the plural.
(b) When the particle follows a g-vowel, the spiranti-
zatian is lost, and it is written --,
4
i.eo the semivogel
-=, e . g. a-cu-6-2 ( ~ I L4:123) from m- I1
other ." This same
writing -& occurs after the first person singular posses-
sive suffix -iw-TV~( -iff), e .g. Y
-6-e (RIL 3: 21
se-e-ai-i~v-wa
etc. 1, I!
of my brother," This can he P ? n , + s , r ~ f ~ f~eWdC ?w z y s +
%ither the labial fricative in -fe became the semivo~velafter
t h e double labial fricative of the prononlinal suffix, i.e.
iff-fe
- - >we_
by a process of dissimilation, cf. $4-.56,
or an anaptyctic 2-vowel was insezted? between the two to
a,-void a triple labial spirant and this 2-vowel conditions
the shift to -pe, i.eo -iff-fe > -iff-u-fe > -ifft~-gem
Whatever the mechanism involved, it is certain that the saf-
fix has the form -xe- after the first person singular posses-
sive suffix -iff.
!c ) 'Yhen the s ~ xifx folloms She third person p s s e s -
sive szffix -1_(Y) appended to the "prepositional" noainals
eti-
- 'I- p ~ ~ ~ O =Lid
n " x-"Fresence(7) ," the 'Izbial Pricative

elides, and the suffix becones si;::~ly -e. %is ciz;: 52 estab-
lished by a comparison of the following forms:

11
-fe-ne et-iff-ge "the one of me, of my person.
4
(2) INRu-a-ni-i-ni-in-:va-u-e-ni--e e-ti-i-e-a (ML 4:
19), i.e. Xmomin-iff-Ue-ne e%i-iy-(ffe "the one of my
land, of its person. I!
The parallelism between these two examples strongly
 125
suggests that the form e-ti-i-e-e contains the third person
singular pronominal suffix , just as the form e-ti-iw-wa-6-e
contains the first person singular pronominal suffix. That
it originally contained a final -y is required by the plural
A

NOW, in each case where the form -aoccurs, a geni-

t = we c % bzf
tive is rsqui~edby %he c ~ ~ t e ~Hencs ~ @onclnde

that the labial fricative has elided in these forms after the
-y of the pronominal suffix. However, it does not do so in
similar 'circmstances on other nominals, see $4.51.
(d) The combination of the second person singular
pronominal suffix -f and the labial of the genitive or dative
suffix is always written -=-in the hlittanni Letter, e.g.
Qena~pe(ML 1: 8 9 ) "of thy brother ."
What this orthography
63
indicated is problematic. By the phonetic rule that
doubled fricatives are voiceless we would expect that 'the
-
c o ~ b i n z f i ~-vf-)
n - 64
-ff-* Emever, t h e doubled labial
fricative of the f i r s f person singulaz pronamfnal suffix
- is always w ~ l t t e u-iw-wa.
-iff T t may w e l l be %hat the
writing -=-was chosen specifically to avoid orthographic
confusion with that very common suffix. Provisionally,
then; we shall assume that the writing -ap-pe-, when it
comes from this combination, represents -affe.
( 6 ) A diffesent phonetic result appears certain when
the genitive and dative suffixes are added to a consonant
stem ending in the labial stop Cp]. The only word this
occurs with thus far is the common divine name TeESub. Here
 129
d
the w r i t i n g - q - p e ( e . g . ye-e-eS-Zrr-up-p;, h.IL 2: 77) shows

t h a t t h e l a b i a l f r i c a t i v e has a s s i a i l a t e d t o the l a b i a l stop.

The r e s u l t i n g double s t o p i s , of n e c e s s i t y , v o i c e l e s s . This
t t i~n prawn
i s now seen from the w r i t i n g - ~ t*n, - (7j-g. alph.

6 ~ 9, : 10) ,65 which r e p r e s e n t s pro

66 -re-ne teQQm-oe-ne. The
phonetic development would be as follotvs: teQQub-fe>teQQub-
be >teQQ.,m-ee.

(f) The p l u r a l form i s -&. IIere t h e l a b i a l f r i c a t i v e

has elicled a f t e r the den-tal f r i c a t i v e , i.e. -9-fe)-Qe. At

Kuzu t h i s i s s t i l l f r e q u e n t l y w r i t t e n - a E - w . 67 Yhether
11
t h i s i s d i a l e c t a l or r e p r e s e n t s et-ymological s p e l l i n g v i s
hard t o say. That t h i s is e l i s i o n and not a s s i m i l a t i o n i s
shown by t h e f a c t t h a t t h i s f o r n i s never ~ v r i t t e n 68 -=-.
6.4442 The functions of t h e g e n i t i v e s u f f i x .
(a) A s the naue implies, t h i s s u f f i x i s m o s t f r e q g e n t l y
11
used i n a manner very s i n i l a r t o the function of t h e gexli-
t i v e " case of t h e i n f l e c t i n g Pangxages cr the " c c c s t r z ~ c t "
r e l a t i o n s h i p of the Semitic sphere, i - e m i t forms modifiers
i n a noii~iilaiphr-ase expressing possession or appurtenance.
Coxpare the f 01lowing esaaples:
( 1 ) attay-iff-ye-n Qala el-iff ti^ 3: 35-36) , " f a t h e r -
my-of-r-cop. daughter sister-:;ly," i.e. "%he dawghfer
of m y f a t h e r , my s i s t e r . 11

(ML 2: 71) , gypti ti an-one-of land-one-of lorrl-one, 11

.
i e. "kingG9 of t h e Egy-ptian land."
(3) tae-ne-fe i t t u n a i (KL 1: 9 2 f ) , "gif t-one-of
 1 30
going-out,It i.e. I1
the going-out of the gift."
f 4) en-na-QuQ QaraQQe-2e-ne-fe-na-8aB ewreGQe-he-ne-
re-na-8x0 ( I 27 42 rev. 15) , god-ones-by kingship-
11

qx~a1.-ELdj.-one-of-one-by lordship-qualo-adj.-one-of-
one-by,11 i .e. "by the gods, by the ones possessing (of)
the quality of kingship, by the ones possessing (of)

(b) In one usage the force of the genitive is difficult

to grasp* This occurs in what we shall deem the lzgenitive-
genitive prepositional" phrase. Here the "prepositi ~ n a l "
nominal and the nominal it governs are both in the genitive
rather than the usual dative-directive constrrrrctiorn. [cf.
f6.a-62 (c) below] , and the goveroed nominal has the particle
- The pertinent passages are:
-new '

1 0 Three occurrences with z- "presence('?)" and

the verb peteQ1- "to be satisfacforY*1I
(1) tilpa-itenn+zi~ $en-iff -ta nibariin Qen-iff-
ge-ne ay-(f) e pete0t-iten Quannama~l(SIL 3: 27-28) ,
It
shown-jussive+and brother-my-to do~vry+cop. brother -
my-of-one presence(?)-his-of saf;is$astory-jxssive all-
oP-it,11 i.e. "let (the) dowry be showm to my brother, let
all of if be satisfactory in the presence of my brother. 1I
(2) inna+ma+nin QBn-iff-qe-ne ay-(f)e peteet-ett-a
i ~ i L3: 2 9 ) , !' io+'7+indeed[? j 5 r otlzer-my-of-one presence
(3)-his-of s a t isfactory-fature-izer ,'! i D e o I1 lo, indeed
( 5 ' ) it will (bej satisfactory in the presence of my
brother. t l
 aQti-fe
--- nibari ar-oQ-a~-QQe.
- . . un-a+an
- Ben-iff-
('$e-ne ay-( f)e peteQt-ai+Q (l:L 4:47-49), seen-fut.-
1I

by-him+and brother-my-by+? brother-my-of-one-of wife-

his-of dowry given-past-by-me-noma-part. ... coming-
intr.+and brother-my-of-one presence-his-of satis-
factory-adverb;very(2 ) ,I1 i .e. 11 .-.-- the Cim-ry of my
and
brotherts wife (which) I gave mill be seen by my bro-
ther .. for (it) is coming very satisfactorily in
the presence of my brother. 11
2. The construction also occurs eight times in the
long passage 1% 4 ~ 1 8 - 2 8with &- 11 person." They occur in
four parallel pairs so only the first two need be quoted:
Qen-iff-tatman awe-ne+nin t iwe Qnrwe va.-tmmaman
" Icat-
i-ll-ewa 00-fe-ne eti-iff-qe mRornin-if f-ge-ne et-iy-
(f)e 0en-iff-u(@)+lla+an tiwe ane-na+marnan baea6-
f -*:;a-zn (blL 4: 17-20), "brother-my-to+b~xt any(?)+in-
deed(?) word evil ( ? ) 7 1 ( ? ) cornmi-
\~hat+~articular
cated-tsans.-vol.-conditional me-of-one person-my-of
land-illy-of-one per son-its-of brother-my-by+them+then ..
word(s) these+particuIar heeded-trans.-not-jussive, If

11
i .e. but should indeed any malicious gossip whatever
coilcerning me (or) my land be communicated to my brotheer,
$hen let n o t br=$her heed these words!"

3. It also occurs once in a broken context in kIL,

cf. 56.4452 (a) below.
That the particle -= is used in its anaphoric re-
 133
labial fricative by variant writings with Q / ~at Boghazkoi,
cf. &6152.
I\I
The suffix is regularly written -=-in the
htittanni Letter after the vowels 2-, 2-, and &-. When a
consonant follows or when the suffix is word final no in-
dication of the vowel is given and the suffix is then homo-
graphic vith the genitive suffix which is also simply mrit-
ten -E- under the same conditions. Tn t k f s cage o n l y

context can decide which suffix is meant and in certain cases

anbiguity yet remains as to which should be read.
(b) As with the labial of the genitive suffix, when
the dative suffix follows a g-voiFel, the spitantization is
lost and it becomes the semivowel - 0
e.g. a-gu-u-a (ML
1:81) froin m- "other." Similar also to the labial fri-
cative of the genitive suffix is the shift to the semivowel
- e.g. se-e-ni-
after the first person pronominal suffix -iff,
Y

iw-vm-;-a (ML 3: 20 etc.) . The same remarks apply here as for

the genitive szff ix a 9 ~ v e +
(c) Vhen the dative suffix is added to the second per-
son pronominal suffix, the combination of the two labial
fricatives is w r i t t e n -m- exactly as with t h z genitive suf-
fix. For identical reasons this will be interpreted as re-
presenting -v-fa>ffa.
(d) The plural form is -€&.Here the labial fricative
has elided after the dental fricative, exactly as with the
genitive suffix above, see also $4.52.
6.4452 The funsBon of thedative..suffix. (a) This
suffix most freqxently for~nsadverbial phrasal words expres-
 1 34
sing for whose benefit or advantage a n action has occurred
or been done. Cornpare the following:

and brother-my-for,11 i .e. "they are corning for my brother. 11

by-him gold-stative cast-stative Tuzratta-for+and

has made a golden cast statue and has granted (it) for
TuZratta with affection.i1
'(3) Note especially the phrase ei-f-fwan ~arn:(?)-
an-a in Ugo A-H Bil.:
___)
7, which is the equivalent of
Alilcadian pagar-ka 5ullin 11
save your body. " Although
the Rurrian verb is problematic, it apparently contains
the "f acti tive-causative" complement -%- ,76 and must
mean something like a s s u r g well-being fcr y=ur 5 o ~ y . "
It

(b) Anotller use of the dative suffix occurs 4x1 the

phrase alamu-fa+rnan aQt-a QanaQt-i-I&-i- U g . A-M Ail,: 9,
whi cll is the JT~rrrian equivalent of A!Lcac?ia~l d 6 r i g mar@ ta-
w
.
,
11
su m%r- 61 igu "forever his wife will not have a son.
I!
The EIrxrrian alamu-fa clearly renders Akkadian dfkri5 for
ever." In RA 54(1960): 197-189 Laroche has ascertained from
comparisons between parallel Bitti te and Hurrian passages that
the root meaning of alam-/alum- is 11 end, last, final." This
very nicely fits the requirements of the context of the bi-
 11
(c) The very frequent use of the dative in the prep-
ositional" construction with the governing word having the
directive suffix will be discxssed below, $6.446.
(d) In one case the dative is governed by the verb
more directly than in the adverbial construction aboveo This
occurs with the verb a-
or pisant- 11
rejoice, rejoice over. 11
11.1 12 8 2 3 , p r c f i
- t>
~ ~ f - B3 R
r----
i ~c ~ ~ c ~ nsare
~ : c c n~c e r n s
L.d
~ ~

the genitive rather than the dative. This cannot be sub-

stantiated. The pertinent passages are as follows:

TI~-neC
a . . ]an ti80an -[
Celt-iy-(f)e
-- ]
teonae ...
-- (AIL 2:62-54), "what my brother will grant, concerning
-x-s
this [I will rejoice] very much."
(2) -
kepQe+rnan GUSXIN - makann-iff-unn-a
Ben-ifCf-n~]
kepan-et-a antu-aa+tta+[an] teonae-tiQ0an -
ti0Qan
nis-o0t-ewa (EEL2 : 5 3 - 5 5 ) , " 3 3 my brother will grant gold
..
2:s m y gi2t then I would rejoice over this very much."
( 3) pisant-iQt-emi-can
- - tiQQan
-- @en-iff-ge-ne-i'e kelti-
i-fe (hiL 4:&$), "and so let (me) rejoice much over the
w e l l - b a i n g of my brother ."
On the basis of passage (1) Speiser concludes that the
ambiguous cases of passages ( 2 1 ~ ' and ( 3 ) are genitives. Al-
though the missing verb in passage ( 1 ) is probably some form
of the verb g Q - due to the parallelism of this passage with
passage (2) as Speiser concludes,78 there is one very signifi-
cant difference between the two. Passage (1) contains the
genitival nominal [elti-iy-(f)e after the form antu-ge-ne.79
 1 36
tI
After the analogy of the geni tive-genitive pr epositionalfl
constructions discnssed above, it is immediately obvious *ha2%
this is the reason for the genitive suffix on antu-w Conse-
quently this form cannot be used to suggest that u-governs
the genitive, and the arnbiguoc~sforms in passages two and
three are best taken as datives.
6.446 The directive suffix -ta-N-uta-. This suf-
fix expresses motion towards -either actually or logically,
hence it has been termed the directive.
6.4461 The form of the directive suffix. When added
to a vowel, the form is simply -&. The forms pa[-a&-3]i-i-
it-bi-wu-6-ta
- (hlL 1: 5 3 ) , and ku-Tsu-Qu-da ( ~ g .-4-H Bil.: 16)"
show that a 2-connecting vowel was used when the suffix was
added to a form ending in a consonant. 81 The dental stop
will be either voiced or voiceless according to the nature of
the preceding so-tmd. After vowels, liquids, and nasals it is
82
voiced, in all other cases i f is voiceless.
Tlie plural form 1s -=a. This is the combinafion of
%he pluralizing particle -9- (cf. $6.422) and the suffix.
Since both consonants exhihit voiced and v o i c e l e s s non-phc-
nemic variants, their combination is voiceless. 8 3
6.4462 The uses of the directive suffixo (a) The
basic function of the directive s d f i x is to express motion
towards, eifther actually with verbs of motion, or logically
indicating reference or belonging. For the first note the
following:
 f
P
[ n a ] ~ - 0 8 - a r ~t m - a + l l a ~ a n Ben-iff - u t a (AIL 1: l llk-l15) ,
"Xeliya-cand envoy-my $iane+cop.+and emoy- thy dis-
nissed-past-hy me coming-intr .+they+and brother-my-to , 11

i.e. "1 have dismissed Keliya, ny envoy, and hfane, thy

I1
envoy, and they are coming t o niy brother.
( 2 ) tmto+nan Ben-iff-ge+n a Q t i ar-00-ag itt-oQt-wman
-- .--

Ben--iff - p t a
- (XL 3: ? f -?2), "no\v+and brother-my-of+cop.
.:[ife -riven-past-by me gone-past-intr .+and! b r o t 3 e r -
zy-to, 11
i.e. tom then I have given m y b r o t h e r ' s wife
and. she has gone t o my b r o t h e r . 11

I n the l o g i c a l sense i t occrrrs with verbs of speaking,

giving, g r a n t i n g , etc.:
(1) unto+man inna+me+nin Ben-iff-qe a Q t i mi-ett-a

"now t h e n + a ~ dwhec(?)+?+indeed(?) brother-ny-of wife

.
coming-f t ~ t w r e - i n t r

p r e s e ~ t e c i-? -ftrtur e-ipk,r,

t h e r ' s wife w i l l come
., 11
..
~vhen(?)+?+indeed(?) br other-wy-to

i e , flno?vthen when my bro-

,,

when ( s h e ) . = i l l be presented t o
11
my brother.

I! 11 11
past-trans.+I+and Mane-to, i .e. And I r e l a t e d t o bIane.

( 3) ye+na+nin tiw %lane-0 Qen-iff - u t a k a t - i 11-ct-a-

[mlmaman f +ro+ [ma] ur j i + m & r i (ML 2: 101-103) , "what+?+
indeed(?) word $!me-by brother -my-to declared-? -

i.e. "~vhateverword Mane w i l l d e c l a r e t o my b r o t h e r , i t

i s r e l i a b l e and true. I)
 4 ) tiwe+man Quldco Ben-iff-uta. -1-(i)-1-e (ML 4.:

0,"word+and further brother-ny-to spoken-trans.-

11
vole-jussive, i.e. "And let a word further be spoken to
my brother.II
Finally, this sense is fully corroborated in the Ug.
A-R Bil., lines 14 and 1 9 , where eni-ta _aruQQulamma renders

Aldcaclian ana ili-Su &emut* "he hastens to his god."

(b) The directive suffix is also used with a logical
force of "belonging to.11 This is nost clearly seen in Ug.
alpha text 261 (cf. Laroche, Ugarit- V , Part 1 1 1 , Sec. A,

Text 1) ~vherethe Ugaritic constrcct phrase dbh C Strt,

II
sacrifice of B5tarte" (line 1) is rendered by the Hurrian

Sau3ka. t i Note the several similar uses in the succeeding

1ines.
11
In Ugaritica V, Part 111, Section C , Le hourrite .de
Ilac Shams," $11.4, Laroch?le notes this use cf the directive.
Re says It
. . . ies trss nonbrerm exemples de nom divin -c&
rgpondent, % Bas Shamra, la construction ougaritique 1-
0
'12, FoLrLfr 1 fie telle s o r t e qtre l e ' d i r e c t i f " est tres pxocbe
I1
d t m datif dlattritution,azr sens latin du ter~e. However,
in text 261, the di~ectivetranslaltesthe Ugaritic construct
relationship, not the preposition 1-. (I have only had access
to the texts transliterated by Prof. Laroche in Ugaritica V ;
there may well be exaqles of Ug. 1- equalling Hurriaa --&
in uhe "mixed" texts). On this basis Rurrian --& is the
1I
equivalent of the Ugaritic construct phrase expressing sac-
rifice of-.11 It remainspossi'blethatUgariticdbh1-,
11
saczifice for ," would be rendered by the Zurrian dative -fa.
The question is largely a natter of terminology for the Ugar-
itic construct phrase an8 the comstxuction with 1- are vir-
tually synonynous in this case, and hence the Hurrian con-
structions mould probably be so also.

=a-a;n $(?)-ku-la in Ug. 11-B Bil.: 6, :vhich renders Akkadian

---
m8dta pilaQe-ma "fear the oath." Laroche, (m 111, p. 315),
suggests that this eq~mlselame-ne-ta-ne+man, 11 oath-one-to-
ome+conn.,11 e 11
the one ~ I r l lbelengs
~ to fhe oath,11 or "the
one who presides at the oath.11 However, it is adlsopossible
I1
that this represents gPwe-ne+tan+ip.n_an oath-one+frorn+conn., 11
i.e. "(fear) from the oath," with the partitive force of
- (cf. $ 9 . 8 ) .
-tan The latter construction is preferable in
the light of the nse of -- as a partitive. - .
$1
(c) The dative-directive prenositional" phrase. A

specialized use of 'thedative and the direcLive suffixes

ivas developed with certain norninals to express a relation-
ship that is usually accomplished 5y prepositions in the
Semitic and Indo-European languages. The nominal to be gov-
erned takes the directive suffix, e.g. ya+ll%nin Ben-ife-
n
Q t m - o ~ - a - ~ ~ e -(XL
taQe-ne-fa eti-i-ta titve-naIm5 n a 1:
104-105), "w~~iit
c~leysindeed!?) brother -3~-by gift-one-for
per son-its-to thing( s)-ones done-past-by-him-nom.-part .-
ones,11 i.e. "wh,at things were done by my brother for the
sake of the gift. 11
 Although this cons-trwction is found most often with
certain nominals to express this 11 prepositional" concept,
it cannot formally be separated from the sporaic identical
construction with other nominals which yield a meaning not
in the least "prepositionalatlCompare the above example
85
with the fol lowing:

I(11111
ornin-i-ta wa6-ewa (ML 3: 111-112), "if+?+indeed(?)
further-more+i~i-particu1ar need brother-ny-for land-
11
his-to enter-in-conditional i.ea if, fnrthermore,a
need should enter in for my brother with reference to
his land. 11
KUR
(2) en-iff-ga~rnarn] krrro omio-i-ta biyarome
pal-ag ay+n . . . tea (ML 3:92-?4), II
brother-my-a+and
again land-his-fo gold known-by me that(?)+cope
great,I! i.e."sad again I k n o w that, for my brother with
reference to his land, gold ...
is great. ,,85
These examples show that the construction is not re-
stric.ted to certain "prepositions," but occurred widely in
f he language. 87 Its use is more frequent with cextair, nom-

inals because of the need in the language to express a "prep-

ositional1'relationship. The four nominals thus far en-
countered that exhibit these use are: (1) efi- 11
person, body;"
88
(2) x- "presence(?), t1
11
( 3 ) furi- view, sight," .and a-
ll
front, face," As nearly as they can be ascertained in the
incomplete state of the interpretation of the language, the
. meanings expresser? by these phrases are as follows:
 A. x-fa eti-i-ta: t h e f o r c e of the expression
11
for -
s, v i t h reference t o h i s person, 11 seems t o be " f o r the

( 1) ~re~r-a~Oa-OOe-ria+mant iwei3ES fal$ru-m-en i 0 tan-

-
i f f a0-a a - 0 a'lmua eti-i-ta tan-aQf -en (IIL 1:79-

82), 11 desired-by-us-nom. -par t -ones+and . things good-

-
-t- jussive mrrtmiity-our-in ( t h e ] -one-by ( t h e ) -other-

-
for person-his-& done-?- j u s s i v e , " i .e. "and l e t t h e
things vhich we d e s i r e t o be goocl (and) l e t (them) be
d o ~ emutually by t h e one f o r t h e sake of t h e other."

tan-00-a-QQe-na (ML 3: 52- j3) ,

31';'s
eti-i-ta tiwe-na"'b
"rvhat+they+indeed(?) Ar t a t a m - b y grandf ather-my-by
father-thy-for person-his-- things-ones done-past-
by-him-nome-par t .-ones ," .
i e. "what things mere done
11
by m y grandfather, by Artatama, f o r thy f a t h e r ' s sake.
1I
B. s-fa ay-i-ta: t h e f o r c e of the expression for
11
3 , with reference t o h i s p r e s e n c e ( ? ) ,I 1 seems t o be in the
presence of x." Only one use o c c m s i n a r e l a t i v e l y c l e a r
contest:
inrr+me+nin mg~:inua-fe 8? ' ~ z ~ ~ ~ c a - f$ a~.r - i f f - ~ a -
ay-
i-ta kat-et-aq (RiL 3: 97-39) , " so+?+indeed(?) Wineveh-of
Sauglra-for god-my-for presence(?)-his-to declared-fut.-
It 9I
by-me, i.ee so I w i l l c!.eclare ( i t ) i n t h e presence of
$au3lra of Xineveh, my god."
For t h e ~ x s co f , t h i s p a r t i c l e i n the g e ~ i t i v e - g e r r ~ f i ~ p ,
" p r e p o s i t i o n a l ' t phrase, see $6.4442 (b) .
 C. x-fa furi-i-ta: the force of the expression "for
r, with reference to its viewing,
It
seems to be "in the sight
of, in the view of." The sense seems to be literal nst ? ~ g -
leal in the passages that are at all clear, Note:
Ben-iff-uQ attart-iff+tan ti~~ani+tCt!*n ti[~]~Can..l
supiyamaet-en-i+tan Ben-iff-uQ
m-R omin-iff-ga fur[-1-1

(than) muchimet cop. much enriched(?) - jussive-more bro-

ther-my-by land-my-f view-its-to ,I1 i . e m " let my bro-
ther enrich(?) me much more than my forefathers in the
view of my (whole) lands: 1

D. ;-fa api-ta: this phrase does not occur in the

hfittanni Letter but hss been clearly established as meaning
"before, in front of" from Hiktite parallels by Laroche in

-
ail 54(1960) : 189-192*
What difference in meaning exists between this dative-
directive "preposi6ionaliiconstruction and the genitive-
genitive "prepositional" construction discussea in $6.442 (b) ,
if any, eludes rfie.
6.447 -
The comitative suffix -ra-k-ura-. This
suffix expresses a relationship of accompaniment, hence the
term " comitative ."
6.4471 -- of the comitative suffix.
T3e for:n When ad-
ded to vorvels it takes -the simple forln -=,e g ?la-ni-e-ra-
(I& 2:116) , "with ~ane." From the plural form -0ura- ar.8
from the form 3e-e-ni-iw-tvu-6-r [a-a-91 ( M L 1:9),90 the con-
necting vowel after consonants is seen to be -g-.
 143
The plural form is -9txra- with a c~nnectingvowel be-
tween the pluralizing suffix -8- and the comitative suffix
in contradistinction to the other relational suffixes of the
form CY (cf. 4 3.821,
b
e.g. tat-ayTQOe-na-Qura
-- .
(hiL 1 : , "with
the ones (which) are loved by me."
6.472 -
The function of the comitative suffix. It
Ql
I-,.-- L.--- ?,---.-
-i;vE;i syLi..G
-2---
$he m a ~ ks c i2n+;r
X,YA,'L
in
.
*a
. :01?C
j v ,
.L
" iY h
Y -
A Yt +hi e
Y I I _ L Y

suffix expressed a "with" or "accompanying" relationship:

an ---
paQQitb-iff-ura (MJ, 4:52-53), It
Mane+copa+and brother-
my-by also(?) sent-jussive go-condi3ional+he+so - that
envoy-my-with,II i.e. "Let my brother send Mane also so
that he may go with my envoy."

fa$r-me -
[tat!-~?k2r-~xe p[rj-a% ( K L 4:111-112), "bro-
ther-my-with+conn. heart-my-in+cope much very good-inf.
loved-recipiocal(?)-inf. dzsired-by-me, i i.e. f
"I desire
very much in my heart to be on good (terms) and to be on
mutually friendly (terms) with my brother ."
For an instance from ~ o ~ h a z k owhere
i the suffix seems to
be used to join nominals with a force akin to "and," cf.
$ 154( C) .92
. .-
61448 The locativ~suff
ix -ya- m -aw. The separati on
of this form from the dative is due to Speiser in IH $155.
H e is right. Both the form and the function have been clar-
ifierl by the new alphabetic texts published in transliteration
and studied by Laroche in Ugaritica V.
 14-4
6.~81
. . The form of the lsative suffix. In $155
Speiser posited a form -ya- based on the occurrence of the
f orin e-bar-ni ha! -ur-ni-ya, " lord on earth," at ~oghazkai93
The basic form -ya is now made certa5n by the new alphabetic
tests (cf. Laroche, Ugasitica V, Part 111, text 1, notes to
lines 4-5) Here the Ugaritic latroduc?ion ends in bgrn, "in

by agndym tdnty -
enmty enQzzy. From .t3aghaz%8i Hurrian these
can be vocalized agandiyama Sadandiya enumaaiya enigaziziya,
and are sacred locations, (as is also seen from parallels at
~o~hazk6i). Consequently, the Murrian suffix - 3 3 f s the e9ni-
valent of Ugaritic 3- "in." The form -= is also seen to be
that used after vowels. 9A After consonants the -j~- elides
and the form is simply -2, e.g. ti-gi-iw-wa-an (ML 2:55,105 95
and 4:111). These cannot be dative, for the dative after the
96
-
first personal singular pronominal suffix is always -a-a.
Hence they clearly show that the locative form is siinply -_a,
(i.e. tie-iff-atn) after consonants.
In the plural the locative takes the form -%- which
is identical v i t h the plural of the dative.
6.4482 The function of the locative suffix. This
suffix forms adverbial phrasal words answering the question
"place where? "97 This is clearly seen.in the examples from
the new alphabetic texts froin Ugari't cited above, where -=
is the equivalent of Ug. &- "in." Note the following from
the hfittanni Letter:
 145
tiQQan ti@Qan tat-aQt-iten (ML 1:76-78), 11 so+us+ana
. . . gods-ones-by heart(s)-their-in much much
loved-?-jussive,fl :... e . "and so let the gods love rrs in
their hearts very much."

-
(2) iQtan-iffa0-a+tilla+an @en-n(aj -ow-a (ML 4:120-
121) , 11 mutuality-our-in+we+conn. brother ( s)-ones-quai.-

The locative occurs most frequently with the nominal

i8tan- "mutuality" plus the third person plural or first per-
son plafal proaorninal suffix. Xote:

cause mutuality-our-in distant-?-qml,-adj.-dative

love-reciprocal(?)-trans.-t.we+cop. much very very," i.ee
"we toge'ther,in our mutualit;y,because of all this (will)
be on friendly terms with one another forever."
6 . 4 ~ 9 The "stative" suffix -a. The recognition of
this suffix and its function is a l s o Ckc. t o Spaisbr in a$
156.
6.4491 The form of the stative suffix. 9 S \hen ad-
ded directly to the stem, the stem vowel elides, c o g . urb-a
(11L 2: 106)<urbe: and when added to Ehe adjectival suffix -&/
--
w e and the nominalizing suffix --
W e , the 2-vowel elides, cog,
enanatn-fS-a (ML 4:32) and nama-$$.-a (ML 3: 106)
The stative differs from the singular locative in that
 146
the vowel elides and the stative -_a is added directly to the
root, whereas the locative form is -ya when added to vowels.
6.4492 The function of the stative suffix. As
Speiser notes, the stative suffix is used to express the
fact that something is or has been placed in a given state.
Eote the following:

ill-et-a
---- .-
-
00-fe-ne et-iff-ge KUilornin-iff-tp-ne at-iy-
(f)e urQ-acllwan palt-a+lla+an (hfL 4:21-23), "what-
ones(? ) +?+indeed(? ) Mane-by Kel iya-by+they+and declared-
?-rut.-by-him me-of-one person-my-of land-~y-of-one
99
person-its-cf true-stative+they+and authentic(? ) -
.
stative+they+and,11 i e. "whatever (words) (cf . line 19)
Eiane and ICe'liya will state about me and my lnad, they are
true and they are authentic.11

naklc-a-80-a, (BZL 3: 106) , "Iwmriya-b"y'iiirid stai;ue made-

100 101
past-by him gold -stative ponred nom.-part.-
stative,1 1 i.e. "And (the) statue was made by Immuriya, of
gold (and) pouzed. 11
Iioivever, by far the most frequent use of the stative
is in two compound forms, one with the adjectival suffix - ~ e /
- - -
yeilding -&a/-&a; and the other with the ubiquitorrs
srrffix -on- yielding -ma
(a)
-The use af the compound forms - - -
~ a / - u a . These
forms seem to produce adverbial phrasal words expressing a
state characterized by such and such a condition. This fol-
lows naturally from the force of the $wo suffixes, -5 ex-
pressing a state and -&-/-&-express;ng a qualitative ad-
jectival force. UnfortunatePy in most of the occurrences
either the context is obscure or the root of the word is
~nakno~wn. Note: 102
( 1) anti+lla+an emanam-k-a tan-oQ-aq (ML 4:31- 32) ,
11
this+ihey+conn. done-past-
maiee-ten-wale-adjC-s-i;a-i;ive
by-me,11 i .e. "'l'heseI have done-in a tenfold measure. 11
( 2) - -
nibari+man lcuro Qen-iff-a0 fur-et-a ar-oB-impu-
8-@-a (ML 3: 15-16) , dorvry+conn.
!I
also brother-my-by-

i.e "%'hedowry also will be seen by my brother with

rvhat measure it has been given. ,,I03
( 3) rnann-o-l;lr-a+tiLla-an afatt-*-a (1fL 3: 1 7 ) , "are-
11
ictr.-nege+we+conn. 7-qualm-adj.-stative," i.e. and we
are not in a state characterized by ?."
(b) .. The use of the compound form --=a. This corn-
pound suffix, which seems to consist of the copula -(&-
4
'
plus the stative,' bears a meaning quite similar to that
above but there is not the emphasis on a quality or condition:
(1) m-a+an Ben-iff-ga Bir-&+an Ben-iff-ge-ne-aan-a
tiQa-nn-a ( h l ~3: 13-14), " coming-intr.+corm. brother-my-
for conformz.ble-to105-intr.+conn. brother-my-of-one-
cop.(?) -stative heart-cop. (3)-stative,1 1 i . e . "(she) is
cciming for my brother and (she) is conformable to the
state of my brother's heart. ,, 106
(2)
SAL
TatU$ er2.--
+ . r - . y ~ ~ i --.-
mclr;ili-- MTuQratta-fe ,., . gala
 "1 mmur iya-falo7 -
T~izir-ne-fc-ne-fa ewre-fa a0ti -nn-a
ar-oQ-a-0Oe (ML 3: 163-105) , "~at&ppa*com. is TuBratta-
of . . . (the)-daughter Imzrriya-f or Egm-k-one-sf-one-
for lord-for wife-cop.(?)-stative given-past-by-him-
nomepart.,!' i .e. "TadxQeba is ( the) daughter of Tngratta
. . . ..
. ,

which he gave as wife for Immuriya, the lord of

EP,%*~."
U V I

6.45 The anaphoric surfi x e w e These ubi-

quitot~ssuffixes have been the subject of several apparently
diverse interpretations. In Syria 12( 1931) : 254-256, Thureaw-
Dangin interpreted them as a definite article singular and
plural respectively. In this he was followed by Goetze in
RHA 5
- fasc. 39(1940): 200ff., where he noted that this suf-
fix interchanged! in identical position with the pronominal
suffixes. In An Or 12(1935): 127-128, Friedrich noted the
- of ~urrian,"~and the suf-
parallel between the suffir -ne-
fix -a-
of Urartean, which he termed a "suffix-joining"
particle. lo9 The most detailed treatment, however, is that
of Speiser in $fi1j6-i4i. Speiser departs from all his
predecessors by seeing the suffix -=primarily as a re-
lational suffix in attributive constructions ivhose f-action
11
is to mark the relation of the "attribute" or descriptive
adjective" (using his terms) to the head noun. Although
Speiser's interpretation of the use of these suffixss is
incorrect (as ire shall presently show) he has rendered sig-
oal service by elucidating the fundamental meaning of the
- $125).
particles from the context of bIL 3: 35fP. (IH
 6,~51 The basic meaning of the particles: -= It I1
one,

- ones
-na
-.-
.
It
In $125 Speiser examines the use of the
word ---
ma-a-ni-e-im-ma-ma-anin hlL 3: 35, 35 and 38 (twice).
As he clearly shows, this passage makes admirable sense'if
11
this word is interpreted as follows ma-ne+mmaman, this-one+
in particuiar." Since it can be shorn ( (j 6.453 below) that

basic meaning is "ones."110 These rzeanings will be further

substantiated by the general good sense they make throughout
all S h e varied uses of these suffixeso
6,452 - -uses
The - of the suffix -= It
one.11 The uses
of this suffix can be basically divided into those that 'are
1I
derivational" and those that are "relational." Let us begin
with the relational uses.
The relational or maphoric uses of - n e e
6.4521
-
This suffix functions as an anaphoric particle on the word
level in the connectiag of suffix chains, and on the sentence
levei in the representation or resumption of previous sen-
tence elements.
A.
u s use as an ana~horicsuffis-connective in nom-
111
inal phrases. ~riedrich'scomparison of this suffix with
the "suffix-joining" particle of Uzartean comes close to the
correct identification, for its main use proves to be that
of an anaphoric particle in the annexation of the relational
suffixes ~hichthe head noun of a nominal phrase carries to
the modifying genitive or adjectival members sf the phrase.
This needs some clarification. Nominal phrases in Hurrian
 It
are characterized by a feature Imom as "suffix-dqlica-tion,
This refers to the fact that %he relational or "case" suffixes
of the head noun of the phrase are a l s o aaderl ple-
(SQE~!T~~L.%

onastically from the point of view of our grammatical con-

struction) to the modifying members of the phrase. Thus,
*
compare Ze-e-ni-iw-tvu-w-e a3-ti ( ~ ~ 3 : 2 1 ) -
,
Ben-iff-ge aQti
- W A u lr~iCl, .-,)' -
vr =v<
vr A f u 9 "
r G \vi %a .. -
~ - e e ~ i i eas-=-
~ c - ~ - n i - i w - ~a ~ -- ere

-
i-we (NL 3:76, 4:.11-8), sen-iff-ge-ne-fe aQti-fe "brother-
my-of -one-of wife-of . I ' Note that when the head noun ("vfife" )
of the nominal phrase carries the relational suffix -fe, this
suffix is repeated with the genitive modifier ("of my brother").
Iiow, one of the main functions of the suffix -= is to ana-
phorically represent the modifieci or head noun in joining
these relational suffixes to the genitive or ad-
jectival rnenibers of the phrase. Note in the example above
that theee is no -= suffix on either word of the phrase when
the nominal phrase bears no relational srrffix,'I3 but, when it
%he modifier, - 114
takes on the genitive suffix -fe, -
Ben-iff-ye
"of my brother,I t adds the genitive relational suffix -fe by
the use of the anaphoric suffix ---, becoming Ben-if f-ge-
ce-f e , ll of -the-one-of-my-brother ."
L__
To establish this more
fully, compare the 'fo l l o ~ v i n gpairs of examples in which the
first bears no relational suffix while the second does:
1. The modifier is a nominal with the adjectival suffix
-get3
--
(a) m~uOratita+an] Errvohe
V-
elverne (IL 4:127),
II ~EuSratta,the'15 Hrrrrian Icing. I !
 (b) en-iff -enn+an gurwo@e-ne-fe IS?o<mi>n-ne-fe
e~v[re-n]ne (ML 2:72), "brother-ray-is+and Kurrian-
one-of land-one-of lord-fbe, ( i .eo king) ."
2. The modifier is a nominal with the genitive suffix -em
a. head noun with agentive suffix -8:
II
(a) sen-iff-ve aQfi (ML 3: 2 1 ) , "brother-my-of wife.
( b ) @ e c - i f f - : r e - ~ e - 9 agfi - 8
--
L(ML 3: 7) , "b,Pcther-my==
II
of-one-by w i f e-by.
b. head noun with genitive suffix -fee
KZR
iaj --
@em-f-fe omini (ML 1: 89f.) , "brother-thy-

( b) Qen-i ff-2e-ne-f e -
l'UHomini-fe (1fL 1 : 9 7 ) , It bro-
+,her-my-of-one-of la~d-of."
c. head noun with dative suffix -fa.
(a) - - kelti (YL 4:43), "brother-my-
Qen-iff-ge+man
of-and well-being."
(bj Ben-iff-ae-ne-fa kelti-fa (ML 4:44), "brother-
of-ny-one-for well-being-for. II

d. head noun with directive suffix -La* No examples

with -= occur, but one has been observed with -La:
- ~ t a12 4 2 : 6 ) , sacri-
a ~ ~ o ~ i ~ o n n e - n e - r e - n a (ICUB
Eicer 126 -one -of-ones-to."
ee head noun wi%h comitative suffix -Lae No examples
are known to me.
f. head noun with the compound stative suffix -=.
(a) tiQa+man Ben-iff-ge (ML 4:42) , "heart+and
brother-my-ofaI1
 (b) Ben-iff-se-ne-nna tiQa-nna (ML 3:14), "bro-
:I
ther-my-of-stative heart-stative.
3. The modifier is a nominalized verb.
a. head noun with genitive suffix -fe.
(a) nieari - (ML 4:48)
ar-oQ-ag-QQe , "dowry given-
past-5y-me-norno-part.t I
r-as-f e ar-oQ-az-i2Qe-ne-f e ( M L
- - A n - - - -

3:40fe), "tablet dowry-one118-af given-past-

b. head noun with comitative suffix -ram

t ]at- [i&]ar -i~u-86e-ne-ra+n(MI, 4:yo) ,
h / \ It
loved-
-)

. !I
reciprocal( ? ) -? -nom-part -one-tvith-~and.
In the above pairs of examples the first example ex-
hibits a phrase in which the head noun is in the zers-suffix
form, while the second example exhibits a phrase in which the
head noun carries the indicated relational suffix. As much as
possible exampies were found in x'hich this was the only dif-
ference between the two formso It is the first form of each
of these pairs, namely the forms without any relational snf-
f i x on the head noun, fha* demonstrate that this suffix cannot
have the force of marking the relation of the attribute to its
head that i s attributed to it by Speiser, for each of these
forms is just as much an attributive construction as is its
parallel with one of the relafional suffixes. To the extent
.that the anaphoric sense of -= "one" and -@ "ones" refers to
or represents the nominal head whose place i t takes in the
suffix chain, it does connect the two. However, that this is
 153
neither its primary force nor that such a particle'isneces-
sary to connect the modifier to its head, is show by the fact
that it regularly does not occur unless the nominal phrase
carries a rela-hional suffixo Tnus its main frmction is the
anaphoric representation of the head-norm in the connecting of
the "phrasal" relational suffixes to the modifying nominafs in
the process of saffi x - & - ~ fi c z t i c ~ ~

Further, note that the forms with the adjectival suffix

-&, which Speiser sought to contrast wifh the forms using
-BY pattern equally with the genitival modifiers in the
employmerrt of - ?vher: t h e ncmina2 t h y iiiodify b ~ a r sa ze-
-ne
fational suffix (cf. the examples under number I, adovej .
Be -The
- use of -ne as -particle on the sen-
an anaphoric
-
tence level. The suffix -= also functions anaphorically in
a few instances on the sentence level. One of these ocsurreoces
is'in the genitive-genitive "prepositional" phrase discussed
in 6.44.2 ( b ) above. Referring to the exampies yuoked there,
. , I-

note thae in each case the particle stands as a grammatical

substitute for a preceding word or group of words, (this is
most evident in g r o q fa g r o q 1 t h e aatecedent is nfQari
"dowry"; in group 2 it is the nominal phrase t.iwe Burwe "ma-
licious gossip," and in the broken context in group 3 it stands
for the pzevious relative clause [cf . the remarks in $6.4142
I*
The recognition of this use of -=helps to clarify an
otherwise obscure passage in hIL 3:67-71:
 QQe tea attay-f-fe-ne+tan. tigeannaman
- Go-fai-man @en-
iff-UQ irnoh-oQ-iya-ma aftay-iff-ua-ne-raa k e p 3 ~ - & - a -

QQe "? (is) gold

-9 father-thy-by grandfather-my-for in-
former-times121 presented-past-by-him-nom.-pa+t . you-by+
and father-my-for in-former-times presented-past-by-

f or+colln. brother-my-by decreased(?) -past-by-him-? fa-

i.e. " 7 (is) the gold which in former times thy father
presented for my grandfather, and that which you in former
times presented for my father (is) greaf, very nmch more
than that-of thy father, but ( m b ) in relation to (stative)

--
that which mas given for my father, my brother has decreased
(it) for me."
Note now the -= stands for or resrmes previous clauses
in the sentence. This is clearly amphora and fits well with
the other uses of the particle.
6.4522 - -
The derivational uses of -nee From the fact
11 It
that the basic meanrag cf t3is suf'fix is "one, single,'' or
It
indivfd~xal,"it can be used with a "deriva-i;ional"
force when-
ever it is desired to lay emphasis on the 11
singleness,If It
n-
I1
niqueness," or "individuality" of a nominal, i.eo one in
particular." 'This is most obvious in the passage ML 4:32ff:
anti+lla+an emanam-Qa tan-00-a2 tieacrnan Qen-iff-ae
-
~ukka-(n)necn pati tiwe-ne+n
----
QisuQ-08-fuff, "these

tenfold I have performed, and (the) heart of my brother

 . 155
as much as a single distant word I have not vexed."
Its use with this same meaning in ML 3: 35ff has ajlready
been stressed ing6.451. Apparently from this same force it
developed a usage comparable to our definite article, an
" individualizing" or determining" force.
(1
I t is this nuance
which was noticed by Thureau-Dangin and Goetze sad led to their

freqrrently with words in apposition to proper names and with

the names of countries etc. This usage is clearly shown now
by the U g . Quad. Voc. where the following forms appear: L2 3
ew~cri = A I ~ ,~ G I U= r ~ g . baC1u "ioifdl'( 130 3: 13-14).
ewir-ne = Akk. garru = Ug. malku "king" ( 137 2: 32-33}. 124
Bere the force of the particle is not strictly equi-
valent to the "particularizing" force of the "definite arti-
1I
cle"; it rather emphasizes an "individuality1'or uniqueness,"
so much so that Akkadian and Ugaritic are forced to use dif -
fzrent words to render the c o n t r a s t . 125 Note the following
from ML:
" ~ u ~ r a[ta+an]
t, KU.9#ur,vo&e ewer-ne [ .. 1 m~muriya+

the Hurrian king [ . . . 1 m~wnuriya,the Egyptian Icingo,, 126

XUHhlizir-ne-fe-ne-8
- ervre-0 (h1.i~ 1:85) , "by the lord of

It
Note also how this detezmirring" force appears in
passages subsequent to those in which the word taee "gift,
oblation" is first introduced, i.e. ZaQe apli (hIL 1:85), but
taQe-ne-fa furi-ta "in view of the gift"
- ( h l ~l:9l) , taQe-ne-
fa eti-ta "on account of the gift" ( I ~ L 1:99,104), etc. No%e

--- (ML 3:41).

this same phenomenon in 9ar-ne-fe In hlL 3: 15 and
3:27 Tusratta introduces the sr-bjecf of the dowry of his
daughter Tadqeba. In 3: 35ff. he mentions the dowry tablet
-
of his sister, ~el*eba'~( and that of his father's sister.
When in 4:40ff. he brings up again the dowry Which he has
~ i v p _ n4
=- _ ~ ~;111
.19 ~-
-it -
frmrrn n<?na*-nn-.+'-
ILI*-I ;ZII-OQ-;Z-~-GG~-ZZ-~ 2

"the tablet of $he dowry which I gave."

Finally the recognition of this "derivational" force of
- clarifies a difficult ghrase from ~oghaz'kgiin which it is
-ne
used to "determine" a qualitative adjective in -*. Coqare
the f01 lowing:

Be
129-neb']e-cCa]-@iu~]
-- (-
h q ~'27 42 rev. 9 1 , "gods-

ones-by father-one-of-ones-by kingship-qualm-adj.-

one-of-ones-by," i.e. "by (the) .gods,by (the) ones
of the father, by the ones of ipossessing) the quality
of kingship."
h,m- S
(2) DIN [ G E ~ J - [n]a-0uQ Qara[QQ] e-be-ne-fe-na-0x8
eare~ee-Se~ne)'
30-ie-na-~u~- 27, 42 rev. 18f. )
(KUB ,
"g-ods-ones-by kingship-qual.-adj,-one-of-of-or?e~-5~~
lordship-qua1.-adj .-one-of-z,i^res-by/ i o e . "by (the)
gods, by (the) ones of (possessing) the quality of
kingship, by (the) ones of (possessing) the quality
of lordship."
 i .e. "by TeS8rxb, by %he one of (possessing) the qual-.-
ify of kingship, by the one of fpossessing) the w a l -
ify of lordship.!'
Kote how the forms in -& are in exactly parallel posi-
tion to atta(y) "father,I 1 in example (I). They must also
express, then, some similar modification of the head nouno
The interpretation that malrea the most sense is to see in the
form in -& a qualifying adjectival force "characterized by
kingship" or the like. This then is "determined" by -=
a.nd expresses sorr.et;hing l i k e " t h e qzality o r c h a r a c t e r of

kingship or lordship."131 This interpretation is a logical

exteasion of the derivational force of -= afid re-inforces

the basic correctness of the interpretation.

6.453 The uses of the suffix
--- --- -*, I t was Thureau-
Dangin who first observed that this suffix mas not so much
the plural suffix (as i t was interpreted, for instance, by
Friedrich, BChG, ppo 2-7 as it was the plural co-mterpart
of -% Ccf. 36(1939): 19 and $1391. This is obviously
correct for it evidences exactly the same duality
.- in usage
that we observed :or the suffix -%: it can function as a
relational suffix and a derivational one.
6.4531 -
The-relational uses of -na.
--- - Exactly analogous
to the usage of -ae, its singular counterpart which we illus-
trated a t some length above, -@ is used in the process of
suff ix-duplication to connect the "~hrasal"relational suf -
fixes to the r a o d i f i e r s of %he hsad r n m .=,f%he ? p ~ m j g & l _nh.ra.an
i2-L we-

when the head n o m is plural. 132 This usage with -@ is not

nearly so well documented as for the suffix -mysince most
of oar examples come from the blittami Letter, and this doc-
ument simply yields very few plural nominal phrases with the
requisite relational suffixes. In fact, I have only observed
three, two of which are in broken context:
(a) the head noun has the plural genitive suffix e.
( 1) eLarf-iff
- -ge-na-Qe+maxnan nihas-iyaQ-e fapp-

iyaQ (ML 3: 44-45) , 11

sister-relations133-,y-0f-
ones-of+in-particular dowries-their-of tablets-
their," i.e. "the tablets of the dowries of my
sister-relations.1 I
(2) ..] 0en-iff-ae-na-~e[. .. ( ~ I L1:54),
It
brother-
my-of-ones-of,11 i.e. "of the ones of my brother. 11
(b) the head noun has the comitative plural suffix -8ura.

C. . .It-iff-cia fat-as-QQe-na-Qura (ML l:7l),

11
. . . 34-my-wi th loved-by-me-nom.-part .-ones-withy I1

i.0. "with my . . ., with the ones loved by me (i.e.

51
with the ones which I love.
A few examples with other reiationai suffixes come from

(a) the head no'ccm has the plural agentive suffix -=.
For an example of this construction see the end of
the preceding section ($6.4522), examples (1) and (2).
(b) the head notm has the plural dative suffix -so
d~eO~op-fe-na-~a
talbi-na-8a ( h B 27 42 obv. 36) ,
" ~ ~ g & ~ b=ones=f=r
-=f ? = e r ; s s - f o ~," f .e. 1 ,, -
& -
, , ~ e r r f s,
A

fox the ones of Te88ub. (1

 l5?
(c) the head noun has the plural directive suffix -
&
a
.
. . .I -
aQBoQikkonne-ne-fe-na-Qta (KB 27 &$ 2:6),

"sa~rificer'~~-one-of-ones-to," i.e. "to the ones of

the sacrificer.It
One finds that most plural nominal phrases without
any relational suffixes (the so-called "zero-case") do bear
the -= suffix, contrary to the case with the singular nominal
phrase without relational suffixes, which, in general, does
not carry the singular suffix -nee This is simply due to
the fact that the suffix -= is usually used to indicate a
plural nominal when the plurality is not indicated otherwise
(cf. $6.4592 below), whereas the singular nominal needs no
such indication except when it is desired to emphasize it.
6.4532 The derivational use of -=a The suffix -=
finds its most common usage in the designation of the 'Iplu-
rality" of a nominal. This is a logical extension of its
basic meaning of " o ~ e s ~ Thus
" $iwe (Xi 2 : l2, is siiii-

ply "(a) word" whereas tiwe-na (ICIL 1:73, 99, 108 etc*) "word-
ones" represents "words ." The question immediately arises
whether this also implies a "daterminatic;zl, "the ~ ~ o r,I1d s
11

similar to the usage established in $6.4522 for the sin-

gular suffix -KO This question is a vexing oneo Certain
11
usages seem to imply a definite determining" force while
others are equally indeterminatee The c c o t e x t alone is the
deciding factor.
First, note that -% or -= is rarely ever added to the
root when the root possesses the pronominal suffixes. i 36 In
 only fo~rrinstances in the ?;littanni Letter does a word appear
with -= or -=Before the pronominal suffixes, am^ in each
instace the emphasis is that of number. I n Further, a clefi-
It
nite determining" force seems evident in those contexts in
which the srrffix alternates with the possessive suffixes.
Note the following:

jussive lord(~)-ones-for ?-my-for other-ones-for

land-ones-for viewing-their-for,11 i.e. "and let me
be gladdened(?) by my brother for the lords, for nly

? , for the other countries to see. 11

In view of the pronominal suffix -iyaQ 11 their" nz fur-

1l
seeing, view," anrl -iff- 11 my" on irinnarti-, a "determining"
force is hard to escape in the -= suffixes on the other nomi-
nafs. 1;ote tha* irinnars- is a collective, and hence needs
no suffix to indicate its plurality. 138
(2) [@]a[tj+tilla+an Qine+tilla+man Ed] *men-na-~z~

ilalrlr-i ten d ~ e 6 ~ o p - a 0"iimanu-(~)+tilla+an em-

iffaQ-~;r@ attay-iffaQ-uQ (ME 4:117-118) , "together+
us+and two+us+? gods-ones-by guided-jussive-plura1
Tagsub-by Ani~m-by+nsaand lords-our-by fathers-
our-by,11 i.e. "and let both of us together be guided
by the gods, by Te33ub and Amun, by our lords (p1nd)
By our fatlzers,"
Note two facts here: the word w- "god(s)" takes the
 261
suffix -nay but the words in ayposition ewe- "lord(s)" a ~ d
II
attay- fatl'ler(s)" both having the possessive suffix -iff&-
11
our,11 do not. Xon, there is aotbing about the possessive
swffix "onr" that requires that the word that it is placed on
be plural. Hence, if -= indicated plrxrality only, then its
absence in cases like these is inexglicable. Elonever, if it
2g-t: ckzlrr icdicatcs pl:=ali$y 3nf also i:ciec?ltes z , ~;ndfyic~Sl-

izing o r determining force, then its absence when the posses-

--
sive snffix is present is q ~ i t eunderstandable. iiurriarn ap-
parently felt no absolute need for a -plural narker when the
fact of plurality was obvious from the contest,139 or from
the nature of the word (zag. a collective). Eiowever, when such
is not the case, the snffix -= is found with great regularity.
This is particularly noticeable with %he norninalized
verb when the word governing it is plural. Exaqles are
only two will be cited here:
~~'tm~erous;

iff-tall-an ttwp-a-Q8e-na (hlL 2: 17-18) , "assexbled(? ) -

past-5y-ae+it+and a - all-it nobility-my+they+
GIG ntz~erous(?)- i n t r .-nor;!.-part .-ones, If i.e. "and I
asselnbled all my land and WJ nc~meronsnobility. II
Note here that the word viratarti- which tupp-a-We-na
qaalifies is a collective, and hence tile noninalized verbal
f orin nzus-t carry the plural surf i x - e m

(2) mto+man ya+lle+nin 'lES

-1;iwe-na Quallaman Qen-iff-
r& kat-oQ-a-QQe-nadur.~r-iya-Q8e-ila, (1iL 4: 30-31) ,
"now+and 7)
\vhat+tbey+indeedf things-ones all+they
 162

br other-my-by cormunicafed-past-by-bin-nono-part .-
11 !I
ones desired-by-him-nom.-part.-ones, i.e. now then,
the things which my brother has co~m~micated
and
desires. 11
This example illrrstrates a particrrlarly c o ~ - ~ oocctrrreilce
n
of the nominalized verb plns the relative particle ~EJ
- to
fnrm_ 2 I..II...jL
nr\rnim a l v.'hn--r\
.-& pCJIL1
-1-i ~h
,,LL1.Vtl
n?-
Vwu rr-1-c
VLflY =,I--
, ----9---2
J -GLIuCIGU I---
w~ %n Zzg-
iish relative clause. The great majority of these are in the
plural and the norninalized verb regularly a . d s the -=??lural
!as)
suffix agreeing with its goal (here tiwe-nal
In other instances the contexts seems to demand solely
I1
a plural force with all determining" connotation sr~bjugated.
Thus note the ermz.meration of objects in ;l:L 2: 59f .:
t i iQiWe-na Bin Biniperwe-na C. .., I1
four ? -
ones, two ivory-ones. I1
This is the first time these objects are introduced
i a e o the letter so that the -= s ~ f f i xeaphasizes number only.
Again note the following sentence:
i8tas1-iffa-a+tilla+an en-n(a)- ~ Q $ - E L (NL A: 120f.),
11
brother -ones-qt,x1. -adj -stative ,"
mutuaPiLy-o~~r-il~+-we+and .
II
i.e. in our mtuality vie are like brothers (s.pecir"ically
inaa state of the character of brothers). ,, 140
Here the emphasis of &he -= is only that of number.
In conclusion, the suffix -na, from its basic meaning
of 11
ones,11 serves to bring out both "pl~rality"and "deter-
mination" or II
individualization. I1 Whichever nuance predomi -
nates is brought out by the exigencies of the context.
 6.46 me adjectival suffixeso The suffixes --
~ e /--
-we

- impart to the root an "adjectivalr'force.

and -zzi
6,461 The "adjectival" suffixes -& and -&&.141
It has already been established that these two very closely
related suffixes differ in consonantal length. The single
3 of the syllabary is alvfays tvritten 4 in the
intervocalic -
alphabetic texts of T J ~ a r i t ,t v h / l _ ~ ,the ilnr!hlp g& of t h e sylla-
bary is allfrayswritten Q in the Ugaritic alphabetic texts,
showing that the doubled velar fricative is voiceless. 142
6.4611 The form of the suffix. The suffix -& is
usuaiiy added to vowels, e.g. gurroee, i ~urrian";galbal~e,
i

--
LubtO D ~143
"galbian"; - , " ~ ~ b t i a n "AlaQi)ra@e
; (~g. ~~GYZ-
* '
274: 6), "~laSiyan",44 Tj&Qe, "~ d&-qit e" , etc. 145 r,
IIo~veve
when added to a word ending in a consonant, no secondary
vowel is used, e.g. W U-~ r r kir@be ewg -ne, " t h e Trrkr i 3 i te
king. 146 The writing system does not permit the possibility
of identifying p o s s i b l e examples of the long suffix In post
consonantal position.
When added to stems ending in e/l, a vocalic change
takes place: the g/~-vowel becomes 2 ( o r ~ e r h a p s3 i n so==

\$'henthe stative suffix is added to either -kje

- or -a,
the g-vowel is lost, forming -& or -&a, cf-66044.92 (a).
6.4612 The function of the suffixes -@ and -we
The difference between these two suffixes has not been clearly
settled yet. Nevertheless, in the majority of cases -& is
--uvad
-- for etiuiic and geographic terms, wl~ilethe form --
m e is
zrsecl t o form q u a l i t a t i v e a d j e c t i v e s from othcr roots. 1-47
A, For the form -Qe the following examples have been
-
noted: &&: gurro9e : ~ o ~ h a z l i ~EalpaQe,
i:. gattohe, UdaQe,

e t c . ; a t Alalah, however, one f i n d s the form Amurru&.Qe{&

277: 12) The Porn -& i s a l s o used w i t h a b s t r a c t nouns

ship." For the forms BasraQQe@e-aild emreQQeQe- from

X30ghazk8i, see $6.4522 above. Compare a l s o the form a8-du-
ng-Zii-~g-na from A l a l * (AT 423: 36). 150
13. The form -we
- seems t o form q u a l i t a t i v e aiijectives.
The best imorm examples a r e t o r o w e , "male," and aQtoWe,
"fellale," both coaaon a t ~ o ~ h a z ? r.151
; i i Compare a l s o , now,

-
from Ugarit: pbng (which i s probably papanname o r papname)
If
mountainous" ;152 f r o m nlalah: Qaniyaae, "~jai~ean"
;15' and

C. Izl combination with the s t a t i v e s u f f i s -a, the

a d j e c t i v a l s u f f i x e s -be
- and -me
- form compound s u f f i x e s ~rfiich
If
have tlze force of " i n a s t a t e characterizecl byf' or in a
rI
s t a t e of the qrrality of. The c l e a r e s t exanple of t h i s use
i n :.iL i s f omd i n the sentence:

s t a t i v e , " i.e. "And i n orrr mt~tualitym e a r e l i k e ( l i t .

i n a s t a t e o f the q u a l i t y o f ) brothers,''
The most frequent use of t h i s construction i n 9% is i n
the fornlaf ion of adverbial phrases. For other examples see
$6.4492 (a) above.

- which
D. F i n a l l y , the very f r e q ~ e n tforins i n -@be,
mostly form v e s s e l s and c o n t a i n e r s , probably belong here a l s o
i n the l i g h t of the two forms aQruQQeand @ q r u Q b e . The f o r n
abruQbe has been shorn by Laroche t o be from aJg- 7 I incense. 156
The many v e s s e l s named by t h i s formation may be based i n p a r t ,
then, on the use t o which they were put or the m a t e r i a l +hey
were intended t o hold, The fori.1: Q ~ z - L
has
~Qbeen
,I-explained
J~

by von Br andenste i n as f roln halw/bur "ear thy" 157 t ~ n dhence

seems t o be named f r o ~ nthe material otrt of which i t is g s u a l l y
or o r i g i n a l l y constructed. For a l i s t of t h e s e t e r u s oc-
curring a t d l a l z k ~ , see Drafflrorn, p. 217, and f o r a
p a r t i a l l i s t of forms from TTnzc, see Lachernan in Kuzi, Vol. I
(canbridge: EIarvard University P r e s s , 1939), p. 533, and
S p e i s e r , IH, $175 ( 5 ) .
E. Other s u f f i x e s p o s s i b l y contain t h i s q ~ a l i t a t i v e
srrffix -9e
- a l s o , n a t s b l z aizong ii%.ich is *he comaon term
paQQitQe 1 1 envoy, ainbassador, 11 f r o n the r o o t naQ0- - 11
t o send, I !
[for other p o s s i b l e examples see $17 j ( 7 ) , and coixpare
the ~ c l l ~ o r ~for;.;:
?, sait& St dlala2, c f . DrafPkorn, m, p.
1961. .In ending -phi
- a l s o occurs i n the d i v i n e name ~ ' i / ~ i ~ a ( ~ ) -
Qapbi, apparently derived f r o m t h e mountain nane ~ i Q a ( y ) Q a ; ~ ~ Y
i n t h e f o r a s SeGatupBe 1I
c h a r a c t e r i z e d by six-spoked rvheels, ,, 160
built fro?n She ~11rlcai=ai1&.3atn 11
s i x " , karapbu
• 11 f a l l ~ wI , ,rGz
a ~ d
the s aIr ~a p j ~ u ,d e s c r i p t i v e
C ~ ~ U Z O of barley. 1G2
The form l.aQQi&-iff i n ItiL 3:54, 57 agpears t o have no
a d j e c t i v a l force a t a l l . From the context i t al3pears t o mea,
something l i k e
11
shipment ."
ill1 of these s u f f i x e s form words whose meaning f i t s
very well w i t l i t h e b a s i c f o r c e of " c h a r a c t e r i z e d byt1 or "of
t h e q u a l i t y of" f o r -Qe.
L

6.462 The a d j e c t i v a l s u f-
fix -a@
163 This s a f f i s
seems t o imyart a f o r c e of " s u i t a b l e t o , f i t t i n g , worthy
of* 11
Tz7~oc l e a r exam;21es have Seen i d e c t i f i e d 5vhish 2d-

m i r a b l y g i v e the connofaPion:
ar-am-enn-a+rnan
( 1) ----- Ben-f f f -a0 ha@-enn+an alaQe+rne+nin
nibari tea - niri
alaQe+me+nin alaQe+ne+nin 8en-
i f f-.trzzi (ML 3: 41-43) , " given-causative- jussive+and
brother-my-by heard-jussive+so-that s~hether+?+in-
deed(?) dowry great \.vhether+?+.indeed(?1 excellent
whether+?+inbeed('ij brother-my-adj .,11
i oe. " ~ e my
t
brother cause ( t h e t a b l e t ) t o be given and so l e t (him)
hear ~vliether the do~vry( i s ) g r e a t , whether ( i t i s ) es-
cellenf, 5'3ether (it f s ) suitable f o r EY b r o ~ n e r . "
( 2 ) A t K u z u a garment i s c a l l e d agtuzzi [w 2671, now
published a s t e x t 172, RSS 15(1955) l o The meaning "feminine"
fits vzsy 1 ~ l h1e r e . The dif rerenee i n colinstation between
-nzzi and h
-& i s n i c e l y brought out by t h e d i f f e r e n c e in
tr
Between aQtdWe "femalett and a e t u z z i "femilline.
6.463 The "adverbial" s u f f i x -aeo Since t h i s s a f -
f i x forms modifiers :vhich f-mztion as a d j e c t i v e s ( a t l e a s t i n
t h e vocczbufaries) as well a s adverbs, i t seems proper t o
list it hereo The s u f f i x has been the s u b j e c t of much debate
and a d e f i n i t i v e statement cannot y e t be w r i t t e n due t o the
uncertainty of the state of interpretation. Both its forin
and its function remain, to a certain extent, uncertain. Irl
1I
-
I H @65-167 Speiser classed the suffix as among those en-

ployed with verbal nouns" and suggested a basic "gerundive"

1Sq
value for it. This now seems very unlikely. I t rather
forms adverbs or adjectives, forrns which modify verbals or
other nominals, and hence it is provisionally classified here
11
among the adjectival1'suffixes. It may also have a relation-
al force and could properly belong with the relational or
case1'suffixese
5.4.631 T'ne forn of the suffixo The uncertainty as
or not forms
to the form of the suffix hinges on ~vI~ether
ending in -aand -e represent variant forms of this same
suffix which have m~dergonephonetic changes. Speiser, IH
$68, notes that forms in -2, -ae, and Y. & , 165 appear in
parallel passages at 9oghazk6i. The forms in -aat
=cghzzk8i 2nd in the U g . 3-3 Vote could very easily be taken
166
as simple orthograpllic variants, partic~~lnrlyas it does
not seem likely that these t e x t s were written by native
s-,ezl:ers of IIurr ixn. 167 The p o s s i b i l i t y of an allophonic or
allsgraphic variant -2 is also problematico There are no
examples in exactly parallel, wholly clear contexts. 168
Rowever, the forms %lam-ae and nir-ae in Uge S-11 Voc. 2: 18
and 20, alongside the forms in - g In the same list of adjec~'
tives mcdifying maGiri "rate of exchalr~ge,
market" strongly
suggest that this is the case. The matter remains, however,
 6,4632 The ftmction of the suffix. The interpre-
tation of the function or functions o f this suffix is still
problematical. Certain uses are well established, however.
In t h e Slittanni Letter and at Alalag it clearly forms ad-
verbs and in t h e vocabularies it seems to form adjectives.

A* -
The hfittanni Lettey. All of the examples in hlL
r v h _ f ~ h S C C E r jz reascr,z$ly clear con+uaxfs %aye r=, c l a z r 2z.d

decided adverbial force. 169 Thus:

adv. very sent-past-by-me," i o e a "And I have sent

il
them1'/' to iny brother in excellent condition.

(ML 3:106-l07), "~mnmuriya-by+and statue made-past-

by-him gold-stative poured-nom.-part-stative
Tugratta-for+and presented-past-by-him love-?-?-
adverbial," iae. I Inmuriya has made a cast golden
I

statue and presented ( it) for TuEsatta with affection,"

Xote a l s o how t h e f o r r i s teonae and -teona contrast in
usage in blL. The phrase teonar tiQQan "very much!! is used
adtverbially with scch verbs as tat- " love" and pis- !I rejoice"
( e e g . h.11, 2: 55,62; 3:?2,109; 4.:111,113). This contrasts with
the use of teona in BIL 3:73-74:
11
&iyaro@a+tta+an
- teona Qen-iff-UQ lcepan-u-en, gold+
me+and much brother-w-by presented-?-jussive, I1 i.e.
It
and let my brother bestow upon me rnrrcB gold. I(
 Here the form teona i s a d j e c t i v a l , modifying -
Qiyaro'ae
"gold*"
B , hlalaQ. A numerical d i s t r i b u t i v e , e x a c t l y p a r a l l e l
-
t o Xldcadian -&has been i d e n t i f i e d i n AT 417 i n the s u f f i x
-t ~ e 17'
. As Laroche p o i n t s o u t , 17 3 t h i s argues h e a v i l y i n
favor of an aciverbial i n t e r p r e t a t i o n o f the s u f f i x . 174
C. The vocabaJa_r-ies. I n b o t h t h e 1Jg. S-H Vnc, a.~il

the fTg. Quade Voc. fcrr:s ia -- a r e u s e d i o t r a n s l a t e -41~-

Icadian and Smmerj.an a d j e c t i v e s , e.g. i n the S-1-1 Voc.: Srm.
GU.LII eqrrals telanr-ae ( 2 : 1 8 ) , Stnx, SIG5.GA ecluals n i r - a e ; 175
176;
slid i n $be Eg. Quad. 'i'oc.''" Q i z l a e eqrrals A1dr_. ganntulu
II
s p i r a l , " U l t a e equals Akk. gatqir " e l e v a t e & , " and S i b a l a e
eqzals V g . $~rl~rxr"nur i t y . 1f177 ~ 1ofi these are a d j e c t i v e s
except t h e l a s t ,
D. Certain forms s t r o n g l y suggest the p o s s i b i l i t y t h a t
t h i s s u f f i x might a l s o be used a s a r e l a t i o n a l s u f f i s a n a l -
ogous I
%I! % h o s e analyzed in $ 6 , / ~G ~ O V E . Laroche i n a a r i t i c a
Y , 1 , ?To, 28, sxggests thzt " v e yrobaaiy a r e dealing w i t h an

instrmmental case." Goetze, i n h he Genitive of the Surrian

itountW
7'
j f e ~ s c , 33(1940): 136 a ~ d
2 0 2 , lists s e v e s ~ lcorn-
I1
b i n a t i o n s rrn.der a t e n t a t i v e heading " a d v e r b i a l i s . However,
II
.tlzis has i t s problems. I f the -% of these forms i s a case"
or r e l a t i o n a l s u f f i x md these examples a r e g e n i t i v e construc-
tioas ( i a e c neminal phrases, as Goetze t a k e s them t o b e ) , .then
t h i s "case" a c t s very much d i f f e r e n t l y than a l l the o t h e r s .
A s Tile noted i n 86.4521 A , above, v~henever a r e l a t i o n a l srrff i x

i s added $0 2. lzorninal phrase, i t i s joiiled t o the g e n i t i v e

suffix of the modifiers by the anaphoric saffis -@e, e.g.

itkalzi-ne-fe-na-QnQ Qige-na-8u0 "by the waters of pwrifi-

cation." No such construction caa be observed in the "ad-
verbialis" examples cited by Goetze, e.g. tatrdcar-ae D I M G I R i
IiBS-na 2 ae tar3uwanna-Zae (p. 202). In fact, several of his
examples contain obvious verbal forms ending in -ae,178 bring-
ing to mfn6 .csw~,ralnf.&?_r cxear ..rerbal f ~ f frcz
z ~ m,BSZ&2Xksf
->

and IiIittanni ~rhich~ -- or -aege179

end in -aen -
In $he ligbt of these problems it does not seen1 possible
(1
yet to speak of an -% case" or relational use. W e can but
note that there are many examples, particularly at ~ o ~ h a z k o i ,
which are not yet capable of satisfactory interpretation.
Ye c m only wait until advances in Ewrrian lexicography en-
able u s to interpret them. We will indabitably then have to

moaify the present understanding of this suffix.

6.47 he "infinitival" s-&fix --. ~krissuffix
seryes to f o r m a aorninzl ~ ~ h l i cnames
h the verbal action of the
root. This obviously forms an abstrace noun of a different
type than the forms in me forms in -% are abstracts
.
e g . a-ttay- "f'a"cerv : a-bi;aQQe
based sn a noninai coilc~pi?t,

"fatherhaodYn ewre- " lord" : ewreQQe- "lordship" ; 'cvhereas

the forms in - m i e are abstracts based on verbal concepts,
e.ge "love one another" : tat-ukar-me "to love
tat-&ax-
ft -
one another, having mutual affection':" faQr- D e good" : PaQr-

-
mmne "to be good, being good, 11 180
6.471 The form of the suffix. In most clear instances
the form is - m e y although - m i often &3pesrs, &ue to the
ami3ig~ityof w r i t i n g 1- and g-vo:vels. 181 Xote e s p e c i a l l y
now t h e c l e a r forms i n t h e Ug. Quad. Voc. where forms i n
-mme a r e rendered by U g . and --Vdcadian i n f i n i t i v e s ( see
'

below). A t Boghazlroi t h e w r i t i n g -gvery l i k e l y i s all

apocopated form of -mum. l 8 Whether or n o t other for:ns,

such as -&, represent the sane s u f f i x i s problematicalo

form -
fur-im-ai-n (hiL 4: 122) as an example of t h i s s u f f i x .
However, not only i s the form -@ u n a t t e s t e d e l s e ~ i ~ h e r ebut
,
t h e following -ai s difficx11-f;. Coilseqwently t h i s had b e t -
t e r be regarded a s rmcertain u n t i l f u r t h e r evidence i s f o ~ a d .
6.472 The f m i c t i o n o f the s u f f i s . That. t h e s u f f i x
forms t h e nominal which names t h e verbal a c t i o n is now cer-
t a i n from the Ug. Ur~ad. Voc. ~ r h e r ei t i s w e d t o render the
Aldcaiitn i n f i n i t i v e , e.g. arrr[unne_] = AHc. nadgnrx = Srm~.s&,
< .

" t o give, e g l m e = Ug. I ~ W V ~=U Saz. I:U, " t o deliver,

szve , ? r e s e i x e , icirfimli = &cice Eakgn~ur " t o p u t , s e t , es-
t & ' ~ l - j ~ h185
, ~ l+
I -
,,-
un.~.-v = iildc. ~^sEibaika$mn
L @ ~ I ~ ~ = 3 m . BAL, "to

r e v e r s e , i n v e r t ," I'5 zapu~~cume = AICIC. ~irzohu, t c save,

, I 187
c a m e t o leave, aaci finally zulrxtumnle = ~LMC.g a t s r u =
11
Sum. GLIB, t o r e l e a s e , s e t f r e e . "188 The a b s t r a c t f o r c e
of namiag t h e verbal a c t i o n is a l s o evident from the Y - m a
e&Zu forms from Kuzu where the x i s u s t ~ a l l ya Kurrian
word lg9 (although AIckadian vrords can a l s o be used). 190
This f o r c e i s p a r a l l e l t o t h e ~~1d~adicz~1
idiom i n -6ta e ~ 6 2 ~ ~
(wvhich has the f o r c e of " t o d o an a c t i o n ? perfornr somethingf');
and even more c l o s e l y p a r a l l e l t o the l e s s common AkIcacf_ian
i d i o a with the i n f i n i t i v e p l a s e p . 6 2 ~e.5.
~ al&m ep5"su
11
to travel" ( lit . "~ia1cea goingt'), paJl%Qu ep63u tI
t o show
respect" ( l i t . " t o make a f e a r i n g " ) , clar2bu ep$.%u" t o give
b a t t l e " ( l i t . "make an approaching1'), e t c , The Hxrro-
i~ldr'ddial: idiom i s obviorxsly pztternell a f t e r the n a t i v e
-4IZ~adia1-1
idiomatic e s p r e s s i o ~ z ~

f e c t l y i n accord with the force ascribeti t o i t . Note:

mane [tat]-ul.zar-mm~~e 1 - a , (!IL 4: 111-112) , "bro-

ther-my-ivith+and heart-my-in+copo i % ~ c hvery good-inf O<

1f
love-reciprocal('?)-inf. desired-by-me, i.e. "I desire
i n my h e a r t very t~~ucli
being good ( a n d ) being muttrally
f r i e n d l y with my brother."
6.5 The nominalizing
-- s u f f i x -o This s u f f i x ex-

h i b i t s two d i f f e r e n t u s e s , both of which can be coimected

with the concept of forming a l ~ s t r a c t s . SYith nominals i t has
a c l e a r d e r i v a t i o z a l f o r c e which f o m s a b s t r a c t nouns and
with fcLI verbal f o r m s i t t r a n s f o r n ~ sthei-r! i n t o nominals,
w i l i c i l then I-ctlce on nonzinal s-tiffises and f ~ i i c t i o n s .

6.51 The form o f t h e s u f f i x o Whea adtied t o a word

i n a v o l ~ e l ,i t takes t h e form -- (writteri -g-ge/gi i n the
s y l l a b a r y and -5
- a t gari it) After a consonant, however,
- ( m r i f t e n -3e/:i
i t i s s i x p l y -Qe and p o s s i b l y - a t Ugarit) 192 .
The f i n a l -e- can be l o s t hefore the s t a t i v e -2 and changes t o

o before t h e a d j e c t i v a l - -
- w e , cf .f4.23.
g e /-
6.52 The f u n c t i o n of t h e s u f f i x o A s n o t e d above,
t h e swffirr has two d i s t i n c t uses, one w i t h ilorninals and one
x i t h f u l l v e r b a l forms.
6.521 I t ; furrctio~nwith no.s,i=lalsQ In several clear
i n s t a n c e s the s u f f i x i s added t o nominal s t e a s producing an
ev!re@Qe- " l o r d s h i p , " 19' -
a1~strsc-ts u b s t a n t i v e , e . g . ---- 8 a r-
r a-
QQe-
I!
1;ingshi-p , I 1 19' a t t s Q Q e - " f stherhood, 11 195 crQtaQQe- " yotmg-z~an-

-- -

,, 139
-tcfzt-d ( ~ ' g . slph. 2854.8) eqrials QitxxraQQe" g i r l - h o o d ,
200
-
SiDTGA-Ze occurs a t Xlalaa f o r " p r i e s ~ h o o d . " From t h e
tI
Ug. S-l3 Voc. cones ~ r a , t a Q @tsh e r e a r p o r t i o n , ~t :.;rrzu
t1.1ere occurs artamaQ8e 11 ~,lxrchsset1(i. e. t h e a c t n o t the ob-
j e c t ) ,202 and --
nmv3QQe11 personal p o s s e s s i o n s . ,120 3
6.522 ~ t f sy n c t i o n i n norilinalizing v e r b a l forms.
B y f a r t h e nostcon%on a s e of t h i s s u f f i x , however, i s t o
t r a ~ s orm
f f u l l verbill forms i n t o ~ l o n i n a lstems. I n a sense
of an "abstra.c-ting,11 and f i t s -&hef o r c e
t h i s a l s o ;~~~,?urt;aI~:es

s h a l l uazx thz for;::. I t then can g e r f o r l n tytnicai nominal

f ~ z l c t i o : ~ s . I f t h e verb i s t r a n s i t i v e , t h e n both agent and
goal. a r e a l s o ex-i,2ressed, r e s u l t i r i g i n a :~orninai c l a u s e 'i8hich
f r e q u e n t l y cc21 only be rendered i n E-rrglish by EL full relative

T h e v e r b a l nominal n a t ~ ~ rofe tile for~i: can be secn from

t h e 3 g e 11-11 U i l . , l i n e s 7-8, where ---' J z u - Z U - ~ L I - ~ ~ L - ~ e-la-mu-

~

-
ILI-~~-~XL-CLS.-E~-~~L,
in transcription ----- -
KrxQuQ-uta+an elam-31
r p-
- y ~-
~-
- % @ e - ;renders
~e, M&, tgn18 ana ilzri "he svho swears by
 174
the r i v e r oI t - forii:, i n d i v i d x ~ a l i z e dby t h e
T h e Yarria~: -We
szff i z -=, i s ecfi~ivalentt o t h e AIxlcadian p a r t i c i p l e , and
11 ,I 204.
i q x ~ s t have t h e Porce t h e one :lrho p e r j u r e s h i a s e l f .
The functions of t h e verbal nominal embrace most of t h e

f ~ n i c t i o n sof the nominal' i t s e l f . Tllus i t can fcciction a s :

a,. A moclifier of another nomilzal, e.g.

(1) - t ----- - Gen-iff-ge-ae-fe
Gen-iff-~~GQ-~+~ an

- i-f e
&(it hi'clsri
k------ ar-00-ap-86e
I 4
{ b i i A: LL( -40,
d n 1
, I!
seen-
.
f u t -by-hir~+Lnd brother-my-by+conn. brother - a ~ -
of-one-of ivife-of dowry given-past.-by-me-noma-
11
psrt. i.e. "And my brother w i l l see ( t h e ) dowry

of zriy brotllers wife (5\7liich) I have ,giver?;*''

( 2) 00-f e+man -
t"pri~- --nibar-ne-fe
.- --
sr-00-ap-8Qe-ne-fe
It
ar-Bnn-2m1-a+m&x
- Bet?-iff -30 (hZL 3: 39-4.1) me-of+
and tablet dowry-one-of given-past-3y-ae-non. -
p a r t .-one-of give-carsst ive- jussiiv'e+co~~i.bro-
11
th2i-iily-by," i.ea Le.t my brotfner cause ay t a b l e t
t o be g i v e n , (t32 one} o f t h e do:.vry (i1:11ic9 I gave."
I n both of these cxarnples the form ill -89q modifies 'the

goal of the sentence.

b e I t can a l s o f ~ n c t i o nas t h e subject of t h e sentence: 20 5
(1) @ e n - i f f - a ( € ~ ) + l l a , + a nti0a-an-a uur-iya-QQe-na
C -

tiwe-ns
- CJg~llaman tan-i 11-ek-a+lla+an hi^ 1: f 07-
109) , "bratiler-iny-(by) +they+and heart-cop'? -in
desired-by-him-nom. -part -3nes . things-ones a11-1-
they dome-?-fut.-intr.+they+conn.," i a e a And a l l
the things d e s i r e d by riy brother i n (the) h e a r t
 !!
w i l l be dose.
c. I n combination w i t h the r e l a t i v e p a r t i c l e ~ a - / y e - ,
the verbal ~ o m i n a lfreclnently functions as a co~?lpoundg o a l :

brother-my-by Gsclared-~a.st-5y-hirn-~?o~~-p2rS-cnes

me ," i . e w 11 And now then ~ihc?~t

( e v e r ) t h i n g s have
been declared by nly b r o t h e r (and) a r e d e s i r e d by
1!
him, these I have done tenfold.

7 3) , "1,';ane-%y+t'ney+a.nd envoy-thy-by seen-past-

by-him+they+cop, 77holly t h i n g ( s )-ones done-
.
past-by-me-ilor~z. -par t - o m s ," .
i e. " ~ ~ a n e ,
thy
envoy, has been i n t o t o the t h i n g s :vhicfi I have
done. "

d. The verbal nominal can a l s o take the re-lar nominal

206
suff i s e s :
(1) the s t a t i v e

- iyarow-s
zalamQi nalrlia-QQa (hlL 3: 106) , " ( a )
s t a t u e , of gold, poured."
 by-ne gone-intr.-neme-part. -stative ," i .e. "I
have heard of ILeliya and !Cane's having gone."

(2) the ststive plus the adjectival suffix -9e

- forming
adverbial phrases: 207
ar-enwan Ben-if f -we 8ar-oQ-iapa-QQ-o1&-~ ti@-
iff -rmn-olp?i-a Qir-a-QQe* (BIL 3: 85-86), "given-
---
---- --
--^ ^ - - -1 7---
j i t s s i v c r ~ r r u uriji;Lt:i--zi).-'u_y dendadeci-pctst-r-203.-
A

(it) be given by my brother suiting mjr state of

heart and the state wit11 -:jhiclli it aqras requested."
( 3 ) the comitative:

tat-ax-QQe-na-aura
- (blL l:7l) , "with the ones
loved by me .':
 V I I e THE VERBALS: TEEIR FORM AND FZTNCTION

7.1 General considerations. As tlefined in $5.22

t h e ?;SEE verbal refers t o that class sf Hnzzfizn w o ~ d siTZiese
b--- J. .
i u r -; ~ ~- z o ncover
s %'nose a%tributed to the verb in the European
lcng-ges and whose suffixes prove to relate to tense, ne-
gation, mood, aspect, etc.
7.2 The verbal root. As noteti in $6.2 the root is
that morpheme which carries the main semantic burden of the
word. The question of specific II verbal" or "nominal" roots
remains open. From the few roots that do form both verbals
and nominals, it can tentatively be suggested that roots in
Hurrian are not inherently either verbal or nominal, but
function as the one or the other depending on both their
position in the sentence and the strffixes they append. The
verbal is not characterized by any fixed vowel which could
be taken as part of the root, as the nominals are (cf. $6.21).
7.3 The verbal classes8 The Hurrian verbal is
morphologically divided into two basic classes by %he
vocalic class markers (see $7.43). These two classes are
transitive a,nd intransitive respectively sad their worpho-
logical separation runs through the whole verbal system.
Other morphological divisions are also gzomfnent in the
H~rrianverb. Thus the transitive verb is found in two

177
 178
basic fmes. When the transitive verb has both logical stlb-
ject (grammatically termed the agent) and logical object
(grammatically termed the it is passival in orienta-
tion. The agent carries the agentive suffix and the goal is
in the zero-suffix form. This construction is found in both
indicative and non-indicative moods. However, when a tsan-
-- -- .- ---- ----
~i
*iwp ha= 3~
w~+rh g ~ a li.i; 9% a c $ i ~ gi n srientatgon ~ixdi$s
subject is in the zero--suffix form. Finally it m s t be noted
that ttvo morphologically separate series of suffixes exist for
the expression of negation and person in the indicativehaand
non-indicative moods ( see $7.46)
7.4 The verbal suffixes. The verbal suffixes do not
have the same freedom to occtrpy different positions in the
verbal--chainthat the nominal suffixes have. Rather, they
have a rigidly fixed order. This important aspect of Eurrian
verbal structure was first brought out clearly by Speiser in
-
III $176. The verbal suffixes are added in a chain whose
order is fixed and invariable. Further, as with the nominal,
a dieriva.f;ional-relational con~otatiozlcaxn be correlated with
verbal position: the closer to the root the more derivational
the force, the further from %he root the more relational.
Thus the verbal root-complements stand first. These elements,
like the nominal root-complements, complete the lexical con-
tent of the root and virtually form c o m p o m roots. Their
function is in several instances equivalent to the different
verbal stems of the Semitic languages. Farthest from the root
stand the agentive-suffixes whose force is almost purely re-
 17 9
lational. Note also tjnat the suffixes of mood and aspect
stand after those of tense and negation in keeping with their
more relational character.
The order of the verbal suffixes is as follows:

A. The Derivational Base

1 The Root Complements (87.41)

2 The Tense Suffixes ($7.42)
3 The Vocalic Class Markers ($7.43)
B. The Reiafion~iSuffixes
Indicative Mood Non-indicative Mood
.-.
4 Negative suffixes ($7.451) 4 Negative s&ff ix ($7.462)
5 Agentive snffixes ($7.452) 5 "~oluntative"suffixes
($704631)
6 "aiodal" suffixes ($7.4632)
7.41 The root-comlernents. The form and general
nature of these suffixes was first recognized 5y Speiser in

-
IH 44174-177.
Lr.
They always stand immediately next to the
verbal s c o t , in keeping with their complef;ely derivatimal.
nature, for their function is to modify or add to the lexical
content of the root. Some of their functions are similar to
the derived stems of the Semitic sphere. A given root may
take on more than one root-complemenf, in fact three is not
uncommon. The force of many of the root-complements remains
yet quite uncertain,1

-
( 1) The root-complement - a ~w
- -=-.
These *vo %re
tentatively grouped together here since their force seenls to
 180
be the same. Laroche, in RA 54(1960) : 199-201, has plausibly
suggested that this element has a factitive force. This seems
a little strained and a causative force seems just as satis-.
factory. Note the following:

-
tib-an- 11

~ e a - a n -"caase
~
show, make known" (7 )
2

to be placed, offer, present, bestow.

It

This gala_ he VP-ZY satisfa~toriiyinterpreted as a causative of

whicfi is tbe equivalent of "Sa&ntr !'.to place. 11 5
A
%he root hef-'
eman-am- " t o make tenfold. 11 The form -=-is very likely
a dissimilation due to the preceding The word is bnilt
upon the numerical nominal eman- It ten."7
Bin-am- "to double, to duplicate.11 8
These are all fairly clear. The following are more
d0~9tf~
rn l

~ur-am-"lohasten, speed." In the light of the forms

with -am- above this very possibly contains the same root-
- being conditioned by the -g-,
ccmplzment, t h e shiff to -in-
cf. also fhe following.
irk-am- meaning ~m-1movm. Possibly same n,_m shift as
above dae to the 2 in the roo2r.
gat-.ma-a=- very likely confafns this sams causative,
but the context is obscure and the force of --- is un-
bn0~rn.
( la) In = j$(1960) : 199f. Laroche snggesfs ar-am-
(ML 3:4l) as an example of the above "causative1'root-comple-
I1
ment. dltliouglz a force of cause to give" fits the context
well, its connection with -a-
in (1) is difficult due to
the double g in this form, and the possible shift q to g
after 3 in Bur-am- and irk-a=-. This may be a related suf-
fix, note the variants -g-/-G-in (11) below. The forms
anzann- (NL 2:66) and anzaan-oQ- (MI. 1: 18, 3: 50,51,87; 4:90,
129) are possibly examples of this same suffixo
(2) - This suffix, f o m d only
in pis-ant- {ML 4:9 : ~ )has very plausibly been connected
9
mith.,thedeictic pronoun anti- "thisoii' If converts the in-
11
transifive verb p&- rejoice" t o a transitive verb meaning
II
rejoice about, over. 11
(3) The root-complement -%-. This suffix has now
plausibly been given an iterative, frequentative, or durative
force by E m von Schuler in "~nrritischeNomina ~ctozis,"A=
19 fasc. 686196x3: 21-22. Eote the Eollolving:
paQQ-ar- (LIL 4:54) . This form, with the negative surf -
fix -=-and the jussive suffix -en-, fits the general conno-
tation of iterative-durative reasonably well. Tugratfa has
been urging the Pharaoh tii dismiss and speed his envoys on
their way and to send hlme with them. Then he says "let not
It
my brother page-ar- anot'nes envoy, but let him send hianem
11
Some such force as send ever" seems t o Pit here. Note also
paQQari in Ug. Syll. 1:9.
urn-ar-i-mni I1 butcher."
This word occurs s$ Nuzu as
does the relafed term urpumma e n Q h 11 -to Play, butcher. 11 10
(4)The root-complement -%-a This suffix is b o r n
thus far only from the form Ba8-a8- in ML. From context it
clearly means "to ]neeat'from ba9- "to heas." - It can very
plausibly be connected with the pluralizing element -2-11
and be interpreted as giving an intensifying force to the
It
root, "to hear fully" equalling to heed."
The remaining roo%-complements will be listed in alpha-
betic order. Their meanings remain thus far quite uncertain.
(5) The root-complements -a&-,
- -oQ-,
- -
-u?.J- and -n-
/ol&
--.
These may a l l be rel,af ed i n ~ , = S ~ i n cr
g, viiVJ ..,-J
m=rr b s qzif G

sepasate. Thef f s r c e is s & o P I ~ m ~ d l ~ e z t ~ P nY

r& fomi -9-
is the most common:
(a) anzann-og-oQ (ML 3: 50,f51 etc. ) alongside anzann-i
(EVIL2: 66).
(b) irn-%-08- (ML 3: 67) alongside irn-o-ldo (ML 3: 6 0 ) .
( c ) oll-o9-o-lkko (EL 2:104) alongside 011-i-wa-en (ML
3: 9 5 )
Note also 01-ob- (ML 2:11, 3: 16 and 4:60). The form
tat-uge-ul- (ML 3:4) is probably related. In terms of the
change of verbal class the above evidence is startling. In
each of the above paias the only difference between the tgo
is the presence of the suffix -9-,yet in (a) there is no
- ~esuI%s
change sf verbal class, In (bj the presence of -o$-
fn a caaiige from ifitrcmsftive t o transitive, and in ( c j the

presence of -9-results in a change from transitive to in-

transitive!
Oze can also n o t e -3-
in Bapne- (ML i:95) ancl QisuQ-
(ML 3:76 etc.) "vex, grieve. t I

he form -2-
is found in eil-a$-ue-ga (ML 4:66),
Qi 1-ag-uQ-oQt- (ML 4:41) , and possibly mazz-ab- (ML 2:8) .
 Finally, the form ar-om-aQQ-oQ-i-l-$a (ML 3: l 3 ) possibly
contains this same element*
( 6 ) The root-complemeni -=-, -. -u1( P) A1 though oc-
curring in a large number of significant contexts, the force
of this suffix remains obscure. Note the following: kat-ill-
-
et-a (kfL 2: 50, 102; 4:21), Bar-ill-ett-a (111, 2: 116), Bar-ill-

,
,,
, +kn
,,,,
'tUL-+ken .,,
en-- -c/nlf- is related or is a separate

complement is mcertain. It occurs in the forms nab-ull-

inrpu-88-oh-a (ML 3: 96) and tib-an-oll-ett-a ( ~ ~ 3 22)
3 : . From
the latter form it would appear that the suffix has the form
- rather
-oil- than ---. From Ugarit can be cited elam-u/ol-
mp-a-QQe-ne ( ~ g .A-H B il*: 8), and ar-L~Q-u/ol-am-n;a ( ~ g .
A-H Bil : 14, 19)
(7) The root-complement -om-. While the meaning is
miknom, this element occurs in a signif i c a ~ tnumber of forms.
For the suffix -am-, see rrnder -%- in f llj above. Note the

-
om- (hlL 3: 8) (XL 3: 13)
and a~-o~1-aQQ-og-i-Q,a .
( 8 ) The root-complement -Q-a This suffix, better
-mo~mform nominal root-complements icf. 5 6 . 3 (7)1, occrrrs in
the forms urhu-p-t- (ML 3:48), and mamu-pat-ae ( ~ I L4:5%
Its force is urniknown.
19) The root-corriplement -s-, This occurs in a few
forms. In most occurrences it is added without a vowel, note:

-urb-u-p-t-OQ-i-1-ewa (XL3: 64), urb-u-p-t-en (ML 4:1P 2) .

--
In both contexts the meaning "keep faith" from "tzuel' m-
f i t s well. I11 (IIL 3: 48) and mmu-mat-ae
~'CRJB-U-pat-a-
(1% 4: 59) the same two elements a r e separated by a vo~velt .
Other p e r t i n e n t forms are: ur-t-ul-ems (ZL 2 : 5 3 ) , ~m-t-en-i-
(11L 3: 74) , " biQim-tu- (XL 2: 115) and grmp-at-a-88- (ML
2:22). From Rmu comes the phrase ilim-t-mma e 6 3 u ( U O 2
16 42: 18) which can now c l e a r l y be coilnected w i t h the root
- 11
oath; $0 S V P . ~ ~ an na.tka_,"'4 I YQI?~~ e ~ g g e e to a~~=cti~g
t h i s element ivitb the -4- ~vbichforms the i n t r a n s i t i v e fense
s u f f i x e s -ogt- and -a-
from -&- and -el-* A s such i t
would have a force of s t a t e o r condition, This f i t s the force
of ~ r b i p %"-t o be f a i t h f u l " from -
urQ- " t r u e " and a l s o ilimtrmuna
11
en%u t o enter i n t o a covenant, make an oath" from the root
elm- "oath. ,1 15
(10) The root-complement -=-. In $183, Speiser
e s t a b l i s h e d an element -0-J-, of T ~ ~ o meaning,
r m a s belonging
i n verbal s l o t t h r e e , a f t e r the tense markers, on the b a s i s of

says "the analysis of t h i s f or^ cannot but i s o l a t e -& t u/ogt-,

the f i r s t of these s u f f i x e s being necessarily the p e r f e c t e l e -
m a t , hov?ever uncertain the meaning. 15 Kevertheless, he f e l t
fhat 11
i n I^u;?zctioni t seems t o be close t o the root complements, 11 a7
I n the l i g h t of the disscwssion of the tense s u f f i x -*- in
$7.422 belo~y, i t seems -far b e t t e r t o c l a s s t h i s a s a root-
conqlement. I-i; is very hazardor-lis t o i n s i s t on a verbal posi-
t i o n a f t e r the tense s u f f i x e s on tbe b a s i s of the above form
f o r several reasous- F i r s t the context is strongly against
a past tense forrn;18 secondly, the form Qil-ah-&-&a
(ML 4:66) :contains this same element -u/o0- before the stative
+ qualitative-adjective suffix -& (cf. $ 6 * 4 4 9 2 A) corn-
parison of this form with that of ar-00-imp-uQ-ba (ML 3: 16)
makes it very doubtful that the element in question is the
+
-."=use srixfia. Finally, the whole question is settled by the

form pet-eQt-ett-a (ML 3:29) , apparently over looked by Speiser

listed a . ~ e-r-le --
3.P h_ig -g*-- ele.nent='
9 I n this fez~
the -=- elemant ozccrs b e f ~ i ethe clear fufufe tense s d f i x
- (cf. $7.423)
-eft- a As a result of these considerations -=-
indubitably must be taken as a root complementa
The vowel that goes with the element is almost certainly
determined by vowel harmony with the preceding vowel of the
verbal, whether this is the root vowel or that of another root
complementa Thus, for the form -*-,
note ak-ukar-aQt-,
swiy-am-aQt-, Bur-am-set-, tan-aQt-, tat-aet-, etc. *' For
the form - e / i ~ t - , note pet-eQt-, pie-iet-. Spieser also notes
fmon ~oghazlci;ithe forms Bul-il-iQt- and kir-iQt-o The only
form opposed is pis-ant-i0f- from hSL which might repseeat as-
similation to the root vowel. For the form - o / u ~ t - ,note
~~
koa-oBf-, &xpl-r/ol-u/o~t-, .
I. .jzzk-n/ol-u/o€lt-, psi/okl-
u/o~t-. 821-ah-n/o~-c/o~t-,~zr/orw-ii/obt-,sr-oiiil-o&?b Fse
only form opposed is pis-u/oet. 22
The meaning of t h e element is mieertafn. Tentatively
I would snggest interpretating it as a compound formed from
the suf'f l x -8- [also found in -&- (see root-complement t41)
and connected there with the pluralizing suffix) and -&-,
which forms the intransitive tense suffixes -a-
and -&-
from the transitive forms -&- and -a-B
Thus it would
tend to impart to the root both emphasis and a stative force;
however, this does not fit the majority of occurrenceso
(11) The root-complement -ukar-. This ~uffixalso is
of uncertain meaning. On the basis of tat-&ar- (ML l:9;
2:67,79,85,93; 3:65,108; 4:96,1i2,113,n21 ,123,130) and ak-aar-
~ 58,&
( g 2: Z ~ S
2% sazn) s a ~szs 3=gg29%& $36 ~ e a n i n
-g

f! -
back, in return" (IH, y o 136, n. 205). This fits several
contexts in ML well but others only awkwardly. The forms
pitt-ukar-a (ML 1: 25, 3: 110) and aQt-wkar-iffag-? (ML 2 : 7 6 )
also occur (the latter apparently builf on the nominal root
-
aeti- 11
wife, woman") .
(12) The roct-complement -u/ol-• The force of this
suffix is uncertain. Considerable ambiguity exists in a
given case as to whether we have the root-complement or the
voluntative soffix ( see $7.4631) which, in the absence of
tense and negative suffixes, is added! directly to the .root
and cannot then be separated, in form at least, from the root-
complement. Dtre to the freqaenf collocation of both -iJ-
a ~ d-a/31- w i $ h %he suffix of contingency -=-,
i * is here
zrbitzarily ass-med that each example of this coiiocafion ex-
hibits the voluntative suffix rather than the roof-complemento
In PRU PII, pp. 417' and 320, Laroche suggests a reflexive
force on the basis of the forms ar-n0Q-ul- and elam-ul-mg-
of the Ug. A-B Bil. However, this cannot be applied to most
of the forms of TvIL that are in%lear contexts. The forms
ti-i-$a-nu-u-lu-ma-a-a-as-3e-ni (ML 3: 8) and ti-i-Ba-nu-n-ul-
li-e-et-fa (ML 3:22) suggest that the suffix is -a-
rather
than -a-,
but the possibility of both -a-
and -c&- existing
cannot be eliminated. Other examples are alg-ul-i (bfL 2 : 9 0 ) ,

u/olf-nl{-(i) -1-e --
( b i ~ 3:6,3), ppl-u/ol-a/oQt-e- ( h f ~ 2: 239,
. ]nak-u/ol-n/oOt-
,
'
I J
(ML 2:24) , tat-@&-z/ol-i-mi- (ML 3: 4),

(13) The root-complement -nQQ-.. This is =om clearly

seen fo be a root complement in f'ne light of the form ar-uQQ-
ul-amma in Ug. A-R B f 1.: 1 4 and 19, where it occurs before the
clear root complement -aJ-. 2 3 This brings to mind the nominal
root complement -*be- which primarily forms names of vessels
or containers. It also raises a question about the forms in
-
-Me- from the Aiittanni Letter which have been considered as
examples of the norninalizing suf'fix, -a.
Consider the forms

i m p ~ - Q Q - ~ w ana@-ull-imp-89-oba
, (ML 3: 96) , ana others. These
cannot be root-complements, however, since the first two ex-
amples clearly showthe tense element -@- preceding them. 24
Fur%her-i;"ne g-vowel before the which usmPly takes an 2-
voivel can be explained as belonging to the preceding element

( 14) The root-complement ---, This suffix, meaning

G ~ S C Q Z ~ is
, now I a o m Zron %"thefarm elam-ul-up~-a-89e-ni(ug.
A-B B i l . : 8) as well as from ML, e.g. kat-zpp-an-i- (ML 4:
-
14) and tan-=mp-ae[ .. (RIL 2: 114) .
7.42 me tense suffixes. In position 2 , immediately
after the soot-complements, come the suffixes that indicate
tense. I?izese stsfixes evidence tT?o separate series of forms
in the pasf and the future.
7.421 The indication of gresent tense. TIxat the
action is going on in the present is indicated by the absence
of any suffix in position twoo This is not only assured by
a clear present force in forms with no tense suffix, but also
by tire fact that the two series of forms which do appear in
this position are clearly connected with the past and the
I1
future. Thus note the forms tat-(i)-ag loved-(trans.)-by-
me" and -tat-i-~altloved-trans.-by-him" in the clearly present
colltext of IiIL 1:74-75:
inpittamin Qenni Ben-iff-a0 fat-i-ya inn+ne+min
bemi Qen-iff iQa-Q tat-a~,"as+I+indeea(? ) now
brother -3y-by loved-by-him so+?+indeed(?) now bro-
tber-my me-by loved-by-me,11 i . e . "As my brother indeed
now loves me, so indeed f now love ~ n ybrother,11
7.4-22 The indication of nast tense. Past tense is
indicated in Yurrian by two snffixes which differ, as do the
futnre s&f i x e s , by She addi-hion of a -4- , namely -&- and
-
-o6t-. That both of these refer to past time is clear. 25
The problem that remains to be solved is the difference be-
tween the two. As Speiser bas ~oted,the vast majotfty of
the G2CUrlenCeS of -a-
are with transitive verbs. 26 But it
can also appear w$h intransibive verbs. Only two exmples
are lmom from E X : faQr-oQ-a (LIL 1: 60) in broken context and
~m-00-a ( ~ I L1: 86). Neither context is clear enough to say
anything definite about these forms beyond the fact that -08-
can on rare occasions be used with verbs that are cleasly in-
transitive in other occurrences. A similar situation exists

with -&-. This particle is used wi%h intransitive verbs in

all but two of its occurrences.28 In these two occurrrences
it appears ko be used with transitive verbs in clear agentive
construction.29 Besides the rather broken en-iffaQ-t&l T-XCQ!~-
qn
La1n-or~lt-a(hIL 2:7 6 ) ,'-note the foliowing occurrence:
ya+lla+nin ammat-iff-LI attay-iff-& attay-if-fa3'
(ML 3: 57-59)
fe-Pa makanna ke~an-01-oQt-a-QQe-na
"what+they+indeed(? ) grandfather-my-by father-my-by
fathar-your-for you-for gifts32 granted-?-past-by-
him-nome-part.-ones,11 i .e. "what gifts were granted by
W gr andfather (and) by my father for your faLher (and)
for you. 11
This occurrence, however, is not absolutely unequivocal
either, for it is indeed possible that the -oef- is an ex-
z q ? e of the root complement -=- [see$7.41 !10) ].33 The
-o-vowel would be due to vowel harmony with the preceding -g-
(see the seaarks under the zoosf-conplemenf cited above). The
passags is clearly ?as% acd the verb c~cldgain a pasf ref-
erence from context. 34
These facts can be interpreted in two ways, If the
Hnssian verb is inhereatly f i r z n s i t i ~ ec!r i n i ; r a 3 s i t f ~ sSad
cannot change from one to the other, then the clear use of
- with intransitives--as well as its normal use with tran-
-oQ-
sitives--and the probable use of ogt- with transitives in
agentive construction--as well as its normal use i~ithin-
transitives--would mean that and -=-
-a- cannot be used
as markers of the past tense with transitive and intransitive
verbs respectively but ratasit have some other forceo35 However,
if the Hurrian verb, or certain Iiurri

---
their class from transitive to intran
..na

o[€l]t-
e'razenfs ii? ke~aa-ai-as%-and the c ? ~ i r n f f w l U_-___-

cited above are taken as root-complements sather than

I ptf1,a.n-
\ . . . F

-
the tense element -00t-, then the forms -@- and m- can be
taken to indicate the past tense with transitive and in-
transitive verbs respectively. The latter interpretation
appears preferable for several reasons. First, other evidence
exists which clearly indicates that certain Hurrian verbs
can be transitive or intransitive as the context demands (see
%he discussion under the future tense suffixes below), Se-
condly, the marked morphological bifurcafSlon of the Hurrian
verb on the basis of transitiveness strongly suggests that

between the forms -&- and -=- of the past tense and -&-
and - -
e t t - of the future tense, where a connection with verbal

ciass is clear, also strongly suggests that verbal class is

involved. Conseqtxently, we shail conclude, with reservations,
that -a-is the past -tense suffix with transffive verbs and

-
-o@&- marks the past tense with intransitive verbs.
7.423 The indication of fne future tense. The future
tense is also indicated by two suffixes which differ by the
addit ion of a 4 - , namely -&- and -eff- That both of these
refer to future time is clear. As with the pas* tense suffixes
-
-09- and B- the problem fhat remains to be solved is the dif-
ference between the two formso The form -G- with one ex-
ception occurs,in ML in agentive construction only. 77 The
exception is pa00-et-i+tan (&fL 3: 116) which, unfortunately,
is in an obscure context. The use of --- is net so uniform.

knam transitives: Icat-ill-ett-a- (ML 4:109) , kal-etf-a

(kXL 4:60), tiban-all-ett-a (bfL 3:22), 38 and Oar-ill-ett-a,
all in subject-action constrocti~n,'~and once an m h o m
verb olob-ett-a parallel mith kul-ett-a in ML 4260. Fixst
it must be noted that the number of occurrences of these suf-
fixes in clear context is so small as to preclude a definitive
statement at this time. Of the eight occurrences of the ele-
ment --- only four are in reasonably clear context. The
problem of inferprefing arr element under such circmstances
is obviouso
From the occurrences that we do have, the following
facts must be noted: the suffix -ef- occurs not only in agen-
&fve csrskru,rc%io-,l j p ~ ialso ia stxbject--i3etii)ii ~oiistli10t58n~ i f h
a transitive verb, and the suffix -&appears not only with
intransitive verbs, but also in subject-action consfruefion
with nsrmiilly fransitfve verbs. The use of -a-
Snci -ei;t-

in subject-action const;~nstionmith transitive verbs is not

strictly parallel, however, for the single form with -&-
fakes an &-vowel while the four forms with -=- take an a-
vowvel. !Ye shall discuss the significance of these vowels in
$7.43. There we shall see that the i-vowel is the character-
istic class marker of transitive verbs, the _a-vowel is the
characteristic class marker of intransitive verbs in the af-
firmative, while intransitive verbs in the negative are
characterized by an 9-vowel, This strggests that the normal-
iy -krsm=i-&iveye^^^ ==.. "$6 ~ q j ~d ~~@ lt ~,~ = kxl--
j ' ' ''to

S2s2;2io'1 uAftllfl-
.I.l %.-.- 11 aU
.G 5 5 . 0 ~mice
~ qmrj*in('i)," z z i ~saz-
7
" *bi3 z s 2 ,

demand," which appeared above with -@- plus an _a-vowel,

have intransitive meanings in these contextso h'ow Inrl-ett-a
(ML 4:6 0 ) and kat-ill-ett-a- (ML 4:109) are in obscure and
broken context4' respectively, bat the other two are in
reasonably clear context, although the meaning sf tiBan- is
uncertain:
( 1) untowan inna+me+nin Ben-iff-ae a0ti un-eft-a
inna+ma+nin Ben-iff-ta tiean-ull-ett-a (ML 3:21-
22) , "zow-themand when(? )+?+indeed(?) brother-my-
of wife come-future- intr. wben(?)+?+indeed(?)
9; 11
brother-my-to 3-?-future-intr., i.eo now then,

when my brother" wife mill have come, (and) when

(she)rvill have W4' to my brother. I !

"as+?+indeed(?) .. .42-one-from god-thy-from fate(?) -

one-our destiny-one-our inquired-?-future-intr.,I I
i-e. 11 Since oar fate and our destiny will have been
inquired from the ... (and) from thy god*"
 193
These forns contrast with Both pa08-et-i- (XL 3: 116) in sub-
jecf-action construction and Bar-ill-et-a (IJL 4:124) which is
iiz agentive construction.
It is also possible, since both of the verbs that are
in clear context seem to be passive, that the intransitive
class marker c m l d be used on a transitive verb to mark the
verb a1;:nr-----
e ~ . s ~ l i w 12
q ~ ~
- ~
MQWP.VP,T) .Q % & ~~T .~ ~ ~ C ~ _eP _ E C P _ i~g againsf

this in.terpretat,lcrn, nrmie3.y the fact that the IFrrrrian verb is

neutral as to voice, see $7.48.
In the light of these considerations it seems best to
take -a-
as the mark of the futrme mith transitive verbs
and -sft- as the mark of the future mith illtransitive verbs.
11
7..~$2A< The natare of the tense" involved. It is
legitimate to question whether these tense markers refer to
"tenset' in the sense in ~vhichthis is used in many modern
lang'~ages,i.e. time of the action. They may indeed indicate
complete and incomplete action rather than llpast"and llfut%re.1:
IIo~vever,in the present stage of interpretatisn tais cannot be
decided, so we shall continue to use the general terns past
and fnture, although it must be emphasized that this must not
be talcea t o refer to time rather than verbal action.
7.425 The elenent -inmu-@ This elenelat is listed

here solely because it seems to occupy a position in the

verbal chain immediately after the tense suffixes. Ifs
meaning and function are unlmotvn, however. The snffix oc-
curs only in forms in -QQe, -@€I-o$/QQa, or -uQga,
--
e.g.
]€I-impu-Q@e (IL 4:108) , [tlat- [idc]ar-i~~a-~Be-ne-ra+an
[oar-~
(ML 3: 85) , and ar-08-imp-Qb-a ( 1 . 1 ~3: 16) . For the position
note the last two forms. The context of these forms requires
a past tense, c . g . note the force of ar-oQ-imp-Qb-a in ML
3: 15-16: "And my brother will see the dowry also in the manner

-&he transitive class marker becanse af t h e f n t ~ 3 ~ s i t iu-

~e
innu-. Apparently the suffix has a ferce that is apropos to
nominalized verbs, particnlarly with the stative + qualitative
adjective suffix -&/w-.A verbal use is almost required by
the fact that it comes before the norninalizing suffix -88(e).
7.43 The indicators of the transitive and intransitive
verbal classes. The combination of root + root-complements
+ tense snffixes (which we have just discussed) forms a ver-
bal "base" that is common to all verbal forms. Since these
suffixes are primarily de2ivatiana1, we shall refer to this
for purposes of Bdeztiffcafion as the "derivational base" of
the verbal. To this derivational base are added the rela-
iiional verbal suffixes which have to do with negation, mood,
etc. Hexever, bePsse %timing40 ehese ~eiationaive~baisuf-
fixes, it is necessary to note that avo verbal classes are
morphologically distinguished in Hurrian by the vowels that
characterize khem in a number of forms. ~Tiese'vowe'isare
added after the tense suffixes and mill be termed class
markers. Their existence and function were first recognized
by Speiser in $119-120, in connection with the agentive
 195
negative suffix - w v )-43 and the non-agentire negativa suf-
44 Before these suffixes transitives are charac-
fix -I&-. -
terized by an &-vowel ana intraansitives by a g/g-vo~rel. This
much is reasonably clear and certaino45 However, alongside
this formal division exists another set of vowels whose in-
terpretation yet remains in doubt, but which also morpho-
logically categarbza, i n fha nair, tbe two classes d f verbs.
Befcre disecssi~gthese it is necessary to bring out the
three types of verbal constraction that exist in the lan-
guage. First there is the 11agentivet'constrnctiono This
construction arises when and only when, both logical subject
(grammaticallythe agent) and logical object (grammatically
the goal) are expressed, either as nominals, associative
pronorms or agentive suffixes on the verb itself.46 Of
necessity this construction can only occur with transitive
verbs. When it does, the logical subject carries the agen-
tive suffix, and the logical object Is in the zero-suffix
form. Second there is the "transitive subject-action"
constructisn. This construction arises whenever either the
logical subject or the logical object of a iransitive verb
is not e,UPwnm
,,,sed. This has asen termed t'ez?"ujecf-acfion
csn-
strrxction rather than the "actor-actionttconstruction used
by Speiser, since the grammatical subject is not neces-
--.-a
= ~ A
1--
A ~
1 2 - 2 A - 3
AJA U L O G U t o t h e zc-i;or- who performs the verbai action
but can also be the goal i.ee the one affected by the ver-
bal action. Under these conditions the subject is in the
II
zero-suffix form. Thirdly there is the intransitive sub-
 196
ject-action" construction. This occurs with intransitive
verbs. Their subject is also in the zero-suffix form. It
Vfill be noted that this consfruction is grammatically iden-
tical with the second type. It is necessary to keep them
separate, however,for they are characterized by different
class markers. On the basis of these three types of verbal
coastruction the following paradigm can be constructed for Bhe
affirmative ~ e r b : 4 ~
( 1) Intransitive verb: un-a (blL 2: 14)
(2) Trans. subject-action cansfr .: t a t ~ k a r - i( ~h ~l ~4:130)
( 3) Agentive construction: tat-i-ra (ML 1:74}50
Types (1) and (2) are impersonai, i.e. they have this same
f orm regardless of the person of the subjest;, Type ( 3) adds
agentive suffixes which change with the person.
As the above paradigm shows, the transifive verbs are
characterized by an I-vowel, while intransitb-ireverbs are
characterized by an a-vowele Mow the vexing guestioc is,
just what is the morphological role of these vowels? Do they
only indicate verbal class or do they have some other function'?
The three separate constructions have led Goetze t o posit
three verbal types, corresponding to the three constructions
of the paradigm. 51 Constrnction (2), which he calls the A-
form of the verb, he j-nterprets as indicating "the effect of
an action of twdefined origin upon a person or thing. " 5 2 In

-
IH Ql70a speiser has shown that Goetze's construction is not
satisfactory. This is further indicated by the recogniti~n
that the -
%-vowel is characteristic of both types ( 2 ) and (3)
 1 97
( cf. note 50 above).

Speiser, in $168-171, treats these vowels as pri-

marily 1I morpho1ogic,11 i.e. they have, according to him, the
function of distinguishing voice in the verbal forms in
question, which he defines as "participles." The ,-vowel
be interprets as "activet1and the _a-vowel as "middle." From
an $~;unica.f:jnll cf n c ~ p s c -j$r? c ~ z n n---"
yw r m d aiz &153?L f~ 2 ~ ~ i t i y e

verbs appear with a -

u-vowel , he concludes that a
is formed by the _n-vowel.
This interpretation is now highly problematic. First,
Speiser's &-vowel form, which he constraes as "active," is
seen to be characteristic of the verb in agentive construction
also, in which the verb is passival in orientation. This can
also be seen from the jussive forms in -m:53
Trans. verb, jussive: fa-a-na-ag-ti-en ( h l ~1:82, 3:75,
78) 54
Intr. verb, jussive: p&-te-e3-te- (hlL 2:24) 55
Here the aussive suffix -en is added to the 1-vowel class
marker in the transitive verb, while it is added dixecl;ly to
the derivational base mith intransitives. 1 5 can be sur-

the transitive verbs are in agentive construction and hence

passival in orientation. Finally, the recognition of the
fact that %he negati-ve ofmtheverb in subjecf-action con--
struction is formed by the suffix -&- brings i n insarmomtable
obstacles to this interpretation. To establish this note the
follawing paradigm:
 ( 1) Intransitive verb:
(2) Trans. verb subjecf-action constr.: tan-oQ-i-&(i)
(ML 2 : 5)
( 3) Trans. verb agentive nonstr ~ cion:
t tan-00-i-~a-5~
(zaL 4: 10)
Rese again the transitive verb exhibits an 2-vowel in contra-
distinction t o the intransitive verb, which here takes an 2-
vowei. I f is now impossible to interpret fhe &-vowel as a
passive, for 1% is haraly likely that 3he expressie~ef the
negative would produce a change in voice. Rather, we again
have a distinction made by these vowels between fwo verbal
classes, transitive and Intransitive respectively= Ccn-
sequently, although problems remain, we shall regard the
function of these vowels as that of indicating the particular
verbal and not primarily voice.
Thus two verbal classes are morphoPogically distinct
in Hurrian, the transitive class, characteiized by an &-vowel
attached to the derivational base, and the intransitive class,
characterized by an _a-vowel attached to the derivational base
in affirmative forms and a u-&vowei in negative forms.
7-44 The-mor~hologicaldivision of the Hurrian v 8 ~ b
in the expression of mood. At this point another morpho-
logical division of %he Hwrrian verb must be brought out.
This division arises in the expression of mood. 60 The suf-
fixes which express negation and person (in agentive con-
struction) in the indicative mood, and those which express
negation ar,d the moods themselves (and possibly person) in
the non-indicative moods are &ifled t~ derivaticna: I
.-
--
UCUJG
 199
of the verb, right after the class markers. However, these
suffixes form morphologically distinct categories due fo the
difference in the expression of person and negation in the
two series. The indicative mood expresses person in agentive
constrnction by suffixes that are clearly related to the pos-
sessive srrffixes of the nominal, whereas the non-indicative
ere e f t h s r f q j e i ~ ~ a G : ex
rn,~?cd~! : a n j z e s s pelyuii in a iimi-iied
m b e r of forms by suffixes that are unrelated to those of
the indicative mood. The negatives of the two categoxias do
not wholly agree either. Bence it no longer seems judicious
sixply to arrange all the suffixes in a single undifferentiated
list as Speiser , yerforc5has done in a0 It is now neces-
sary to distinguish 4x0 series of modal suffixes--the in-
dicative and the non-indicative--and to discuss the sraffixes
applicable t o the two series separately.
7.45 The relational suffixes of the indicative moodo
The indicafive mood is indicated by the derivational base it-
self in the affirmative form and by the derivational base plus
the requisite negative suffix in the negative form of the ver-
bal, In ageiitive conskruc-&ionan agentive saffix is also
-
&&fietiaffex L V -
but: iiegative position.
7.451 The negative of the indicative moodo The
negative of the indicative wood is formed by the addition of
a suffix in verbal position fouro This suffix has two m-
related forms, one for the negation of verbs in agentive con-
struction and the other for the negation of verbs in subjecf -
action .construction whether transitive or intransitive.
 200

7.4511 The negative of the agentive

- construcfion
-?v(a) -. It has been recognized since early in Harrian
studies that this was a negative suffix,61 bat it has been
interpreted as the negative of "optative" forms. 62 It does
form tkte negative of the non-indicative moods ( see $7*462)
but it also forms the negative of the indicative meed in
agentive construction.
7.4511l The foxm of the suffix. It mould appear that
the form of the suffix, at least in the indicative mood, is
simply -w-. 6 3 The phoneme repmesented by this writing is
uncertain. It is either the semivowel [ g ] or the labial frica
tive [f]. The form -=, which represents the negative suf-
fix plus the first person agentive suffix, is in favor of
the semivowel. Apparently the first person agentive suffix,
written -&and interpreted here as representing the diph-
thong -2,
was originally -af hut the spirantization of the
single labial mas lost in final position. 64 This is strongly
suggested by the cornnec%ion bet~veenthe agentive suffixes and
the possessive snffixes of which the first person form is
-
iff. 55 It ~vrrould appeax that the negative suffix -x- as-
similated to the labial fricative of the agentive suffix and
the consequent double labial fricative d , i d %of lose its s p i -
rantization (cf. -iff). The comection of the writing -i-uw-
...%
-
r r e T a.W4-L
L ~.&La
Y
UXLG ~ ~--
-- -el
gattive -the firsf person agentive
an6
suffix -&was first elucidated by Speiser in $84.
The suffix - w ( a ) - also indicated the negative of the
non-indicative moods, see 87.462.
 7-4.5112 The use of the suffix. The fact that the
negati-vesuffix -a)
- negates not only "opfative" forms but
also agentive forms in the indicative mood,hasnot hitherto
been recognized, but the following examples establish the
fact:

copt.(?) envoy( s)-my detained-past-by-you no+conn. de-

ll
tained-past-neg.-by-me+they+cop., i.e. "my brother might
say 'you have detained any envoys,' No! I have not de-
tained them. ,!66
(2) gy+ma+nin Ben-iff-uQ anam tan-00-i-w(a)-a+lla+nni
(hfL 4.: 9-10) , ifi?+inrdeed(?)
" birother-my-by in-this-rn~mer
11
done-past-trans.-neg.-by-him+fhey+?" i.e. if in this man-
ner my brother has not done them."
The four examples of the negated first person (see note 66 for
the other three) and the one example of the third person are
all in.:clear indicative con* ext . Hence the -JV( a)- negative
. proves -bo negate the agenfive cons*ruction in fbe indicative

moot3 as w e i i as negating the non-inuicative moods.

7.4512 The negative of subject-acffsn construction,
both transitive and intransitive, -I&-* The meaning of this
suff f x has only recently been f irmiy estabifshed- hlosf of
its occurrences in the kiittanni Letter are in obscure or
broken context which made its interpretation very difficult
c 6 However, with the discovery of the Ug. A-B
Bil., it became clear that it was a verbal negative, for here
the Akkadian phrase la i116 is rendered by pal-i-Uci+n, "he does
not h o w (it)." Due to the appearance of this same element
(or a non-homonymic homograph) in certain words that are
clearly nominals (cog. aQtgoe-i-kk-onni "sacrificern67) some
d0ubi; could have remained. This is now f irrzt1-y dispelled by
68
the occurrence of two forms in the Ug. Quad. Voc. iiere
-..----
ruaiuii renders Ugaxi-i;i 6 3 t o be,!! Whereas maninj-u-
c hawa- (!

c_.

k(k)u renders Ugaritic and Akkadian 1% and Sumesian MU, I1

not. 11
That M
- J- is a negative can no longer be doubted; what re-
mains to be established is its use. As Speiser noted, it
falls in the exact same verbal slot as -1da)-, immediately
after the class-m_axkerse r;Cr~rth,er, the two forms aze =eyer
used in the same constructisno The negative -w(a)- is used
with agentive construction and with the non-indicative moods,
whereas -&E- pccuss only in subject-action construction with
both transitive and intransitive verbs. 7 0 T h u s we have an-
other indication of the strong morphological bifurcation be-
tween agentive and non-agentive construction in E-Inrrian (cf.
the remaxks of Speiser in $246).
7.45121 The form of thz suffix, The vowel preceding
the negative -=-is determined by the class of the verbal.
Bith intransitive verbs the vowel. is -pS7'
with transitive
verbs the vowel is -I-,cf.
57.43. This usage is extremely
72
regular in the l~iittanni Letter. In the great majority of
instances the vowel after the -I& element is the same as that
preceding it and can be attributed to vowel harmony since the
function of these vowels is to indicate verbal class. Thus
," kat-i-kki-
note yur-i-kki (ML 2:73,84; 3: 5 , 6 ) rldesire-neg.
rI
(bfL 4: 17) "declare-neg., 11 tat-&ax-oQ-i-Xdri (xL 2:7 9 ) love-
?-past-trans.-ueg. ," gall-i-kki- ( ~ g A-3
. Eii. s 18) "know-
I1
trans.-neg., etc. 7 3 For the intransitives note: rnann-o-

Eotvever , the contrasf in the vowel f sllowing the -I&- be-

tween the forms u-u[-ul]-la-@i-d&-ku-rr-ump ( ~ Z L3: 84) and ai--
lu-~u-rrc-cu-6-un(YL 2: 104) raises the possibility of s dif-
ference in use. 7 6 Finally, the forms lian-s-lika ( ~ g A-II
. Bil.:
17) am%-ta&-a-T&a (9s. A-H Bil.: l4.,18)are thus far -unique.

This may be an example of Ugari-bic -a- eq-iralling ~oghazk6i

and BIittanni -2-; however, the interpretation of Laroche
posits transitive meanings for the mmderlying roots.77 since
these are oominals, one can also adduce the anomalous nom-
inal(?) forns putt-u-mi- and nen-a-kki at hIL ( s e e note 7 2 ) .
T045122 The use of the suffix. As noted above, most
of the occurrences in XL are in obscure or broken context.
FIowever , note the following:
(1) ti~Yatlla,+an Burwe Ben-iff-ta kat-i-ldri (ML 4:16-
17), "nord(s)+they+and evil brother-my-to declared78-
trans.-not, f 1 ice. "and evil reports are not being de-
clarecl to my brother. 11
 "what+and desire-trans.-not altogether(?) Hurrian land
wbat+and desire-trans.-not altogether(?) Egyptian land,"
i.e. "what the Hurrian land does not wholly desire and
what the Egyptian land does not ~vhollydesire. t i
( 3) tiwe+man Baa Ben-iff-ta 1 -i - 1 Ben-iff-
r

paAn ay-i-ta tiwe Qurwe tea %at-i-I&-onni mann-o-

1 17 .- 2
~ U U I
--
~-ij-i&%+Pii%tafi A~-a i a- -l,u. -t : - f i e - P Z SGy-i-GG

(XL 4: 1- 2,
\
, I1
worc%+and further brother-qy-to speak-v01 a -
juss. brother-my-for presence-his-to word( s) evi 1
great speak-trans. -not-'? to-be-intr e-not+they+conn.
this come-intr. -not+they+conn, chief (?) -one-for pre-
sence-his-to,I I i.e. "and let a further word be spoken to
ory brother: in mymbsother's presence many evil reports
are not being declared. These do not come into the
presence of the chief ( 3 ) .11

Finally the forms ending in -iWrbnne must be mentioned.

In several contests these are clearly negative action nominals.
Note Laroche's plausible interpretatien of Bag-i-I&-onne, fur-
i-I&-onne a d Ira-&-i-&-orme as I I he who is deaf ," "he who is
blind," and "he who is dumb" respectively, from a ~ o ~ h a z k o i
context.7 9 Bate also in hIL 4:11 $emi+man Bill-00-i-Mc-onne
Bill-00-i which can be translated "and now he who was not
speaking is speaking. I I However, to take kat-i-kk-onne in
example ( 3 ) above as ''he who is declasing" makes poor sense
in that context. The connection of -awith the anaphoric
- is problematical.
-ne Thus note the form tan-oQ-i-wa-~11%
-
mi (hlL 4 9 ) which has to be analyzed as 11
done-past-trans.-
 20 5
.
not+,j-him+,they+?1180 The verbal construes with the agentive
Ben-iff-uQ and conseguentlly the final -acan have nothing
to do with the particle -- 11
one." See $9.10.
7.4513 The negative suffix -=. In several contexts
in hiL this suffix added to 3rd person agentive forms clearly
requires a negative interpretation. Note especially the
f oliowing:
L
a?r+macnin %iane+n Qen-if f-uB na00-i-ga-ma oli+man
paw-et-a pr-i-uff-u+nna*an (ML 4:55-57), It
if+?+iii-
deed(?) iiiane+cop. br other-rrty-by sent-t rans. -by-him-
neg. other+but sent-fut.-by-him want-trans.-neg.-
by-me+himtthen,11 i.e. "If my brother does not send Mane
but will send another, then I do not want h i m o 11
A negative force is also clear in the two occurrences
aff er ay+la+an in hlL 4:20-21 and 26-27. Here Tugratta has
said that evil reports concerning himself or his land showld
not be heeded by the Pharaoh and vice versa. The phrase in
qr-xestionwhich follows immediately can only mean " if Mane and
Keliya do speak them." So also with the form a-
oQ-i-ya-ma in 6fL 3:70. Tugratfa has brought to the Pharaoh's
attention in the preceding lines the great generosity of the
pharaoh's father to his grandfather and of the Pharaoh him-
self to his father. 1% is very characteristic, in the light
~ f ' ~ ~ e rpassages
ous in the Akkadian letters $0 the same ef-
fect, if the next phrase means something like "but my bro-
ther has not increased it (or done the same ? ) for me." This
last example also precludes the interpretation of the suffix
 206

as referring to the future adopted by Friedrich in BChG, p, 3

38ff., for the -2-
snows that this form is past. Other ex-
amples in brolren or obscure context are Iml-i-ya-ma (ML
2: 105,106,106) , pal-i-ya-ma-Q~e+man(MI,3: 40).
7.452 The aaentive suffixes bn the indicative mood,
It has already been stressed tmt *he EIrrrriao verb m ~ s fbe
viewed as passival in orientation when, and only when, both
agent and goal are expressed (or understood from a previous
clause). 81 When this construction occurs, the verb is ob-
liged to append agentive suffixes which are etymologically
related to the possessive suffixes of the nominal. These
suffixes are placed after the negative suffix and before any
associative elements.
7.4521 The agentive suffix paradim. The agentive
suffixes are as follows:
singular plural
1st person -.;zT-
2 3 -a@a
2nd person -
-0 --
3rd person --
7,4522 The fir-stperson. The form is always written
- i
-a-u, except when negated, when it is written --m-W. It
is t o be noted that the f-vowel of the transitive class elides
before this suffix whereas it is preserved Before the second
and third person snffixes (at least in present tense). The
form is the same in the present, past, and future tenses, e.g.
present tense: ta-a-na-6 (ML 2: 92) "1 do ,I1 ta-a-ta-6 (MI, 1:75)
11
I loveI', past tense: ta-a-nu-ga-6 (AIL 1: 58; 4: 32) "I Bid,"
a-ru-a-ga-5 (KL 3: 11; 4:34) "I gave,It future tense: ka-te-
e-ta-5 (ML 3:99) "I will declare. 11
Vhen negated, the labial bf the negative suffix -;o(a)-
assimilated to the agentive suffix, forming a double labial
( ; -- Rote, present tense: ~@ 0
fricative written -m-wi5 ~xff). u -
ri-w-vu-m-;la-an ( b l ~ 4: 56) "then I do not want him,11 past
( 1 1 ~ 4:333
iense: ~i-su-6-$x-1ii-mv-~s -
"I did not vex," Iru-zu-
u-Zi--m-m-la-an ( h ~ L4246) "I did not detain them."
In the light of the regularity and consistency of
hliftanni orthography and the fact that good evidence exists
elsewhere that -5- can represent the semivowel [.4].82 the
writing -&is best interpreted as representing the d5ph-
thong [a~]. IEypothetically it would appear that the agentive
snffix was originally -= on the presumed relationship be-
tween it and the first person possessive smfix of the nominal
- but the spirantization was lost (presumably due to the
-iff,
fact that it was single in final position?). When the nega-
tive saf'f ix -&}-, which conldi be either the semivowel or
the fricativs, assimilates to the agentive suTfix, fhe re-
sulting double fricative remains.
7.4523 The second persoii. Ttvo occurrences in ?rlL
clearly demand a second person, viz. ~i-pa-a-nu-n-gu-n-n8-ge
.
(ML 3: 69), i e. kenan-oQ-o-88e "granted-past-by-thee-nom.
..
-
part. ," and lm-zu-u-5u (ML 4:45) : i .ee 3x02-oe-o/u "detained-
past-by-thee. I1 The first form indicates that the suffix TZS

-
-0- rather than -2-. From ~ 0 ~ h a ~ l rcome
8 i the phrases ~ 6 - e - e ~ .
pa-li-u which is clearly fe-9 pal-i-o " thee-by horn-trans*-
 208
Sy-thee ," and inu-tta pa-a-15 -u8-ESe-ne-wCaIy probably pal-i -
83
o-We-ne-f L$] "horn-trans. -by-thee-nom. -?art .-one-of/fo~(?).
7.4524 The third personm In the present tense the
suffix is -ya, (identical w i t h the reconstructed fornl of the
third persona possessive saffix of the nominal), e.g. ta-a-mi-
I1
-
a ( h l ~3:81) "he does," ta-a-ti-a (ML l:?~) "he loves, The
form I--a-ti-ya (m 8 61 rev. 7 ) establishes the form as -=
and not 3.EIowever, in the past and the future the 2-vowel
transitive class-marker and the -x- of the suffix elide,
leaving simply -2, e.g. for the pas$: ga-aZ-!k~-n-c-~a( $ 1 ~2:
108,109) " sent-past-by-him," a-lm-u-3a (ML 1: 87) "directed-
past -by-him" ; for the future: wa -riwe-e-ta ( b l ~4:39) "seen-
frrfare-by-him,11 pa-ag-8i-e-e-fa (bfL 4:56) " sent-future-by-
I1
him, g-ri-e-ta (ML 1: 106) l1 given-future-by-him."
7.4525 Tbe plural ~f the agentive saffi x o On the
0 0
basis of the single forrn n-u-ra-6--3s-~ES-le-na-a-ma-a-an
ti -
we-e-e'IES (YL 1:80) it is possible to establish a plural form
of the first persoc agentive-3- with the form formed
by the addition of a pluralizing s-affix -0(a)-m This s M fix
can immediately be connected with the pluralizing suf'fix
-la)@- used on the possessive and relational suffixes of
the nominals, (see $6.42) . No analogous verbal forms exist
for the other,:persons. Rowever, there are several agentive
plaral subjects in TdL in the third person. Several of them
govern jussive verbs and mill be dealt with later; one is in
~ompletelyobscure context, vfz. ew-ri-en-na-%z-u3 (ML 3: 48);
and the other governs a form which is problematic for other
reasons: d'me-e-ni-iw-wa-4u-d rrC3-] t[a-a-Inn-uC-ulB-ta (hfL
2 : 7 6 ) . The last form, however uncertain the tense suffix,
seems to be the requisite verbal form inthe context?4 anti
it is singular, not plnral. Note that several verbal forms
85 These facts
have compound subjects bat a singular verbo
86
seem to imply that the agenfive verb, like the nominal,
did not 'aave to be expressly marked as plural when the plu-
rality of the subject was clear from the context. Note that,
the plurality is not ex-
in the form ~r-~@3a-QBe-na--.above,
pressed in the context, but only by the agentive suffix -agQa-.
7-46 The relational suffixes of the non-indicative
moods. The non-indicative nioods are formed by the ad-
dition of colr5inations of several groups of suffixes to form
a varieiiy of mood nuances. It Will be our task first to as-
certain the basic force of each saffix and second to dis-
tinguish the var i orrs i'moodls"expressed by the combinations
of these suffixes. But first some general characteristics:
of the non-indicative moods need to be set forth.
7.461 The veca?ir class-xarkzrs, -i- traasitfve arid
-
-0- intransitive. The same vocalic class markers dis-
tinguish transitive and intransitive verbal classes in the
non-indicative moods as those whica characterize transitive
and intransitive verbals in the indicative mood. Thus note
the use of -A- with transitives before the negative -=-
and the "voluntative" suffixes -&) - and z- (see gt7.462
and 7.46311, and the nse of -2- with intransitives before
these same elementso To establish %his note the PoZR~wing
table:

The Vocalic Class ldarkers of the Non-Indicative Moods

A. Transitive verb: vowel -A-

Before -=- Before -1( 1)-1-m-
bisuh-i-wa-en (BZL 3:76 etc.)
gaQaQ-i-~va-(nl~
4:20 etc.)

kozoCj-i;-i-wa-er;(AZLLjr 40)
karQaQt-i-wa-en (hlL4:40)
BilaQo0oQt-i-wa-en (ML 4:4l)
paeear-i-wa-en (ML
-.--.-
4:54) - 29 8 3: 34)
aroQ-i-11- (RUB
5. Intransitive verb: vowel -2-
Bezore -ma- Before -l(l)-/-g-
ur-o-w-en (kiL 3: 11,116)
-
. pis-o-nn-en (JIL 1: 79)

Before the plural jnssive suffix -iten the 2-vowel of

but;
A'I.. iatra~sitiveclass- elides, e . g . mt-90t-fferi (ML 3: 2 8 ) ,
itt-iten (XL 3:23). Before the singular jussive suffix -en
the p-vowel of the intransitive class also elides, brat the
-i-vowel does not, as was deluonstrsted above in $7.43.
However, there is not the morphological bifur~ationin
-LL
~e ---
xluni-zfiuir;a~ive m s s c i s
2,--?.2 --I>---
betwee.. %he agentive and non-agentive
 211
construction that there is in the indicative mood. In the
indicative mood agentive forms take a different negative than
srxloject-action'forms, and they are personal, while subject-
action forms are impersonal. Bo~vever,in the jussive mood
both constructions take the same negative and both are ia-
Personal. Cornpare the f08 lowing:

Ca. I
(3) -Qat+tilla+an -
Qine+tilla+man
------ .-.-- -- -----men-na-~.ut?
-... nakk-

The verbal constrnction is identical in intransitive subject-

action construction, ( I ) , in transitive subject-action con-
struction, ( 2 ) , and in agentive construction,( 3).
7.462 The g,mression of _the negative in the non-in-
dicativ-e mods. The negative suffix -w(a}- is the only
sdfix used to negate non-indicative verbal f o r m and it is
actually found only with the jussive suffixes -en- (sing.)
and -iJ . . . en- ( p ~ ~ ~ a l )Logically
. there does not seem to
5 s a ~ yreason why the csaciitionai ~ n volmtative
d moods couid
not also be negated, hence it can be attributed only to the
paucity of source material that such negated constructions
have not yetbeea fourd. All but one of the negated jussives
are transitive verbs. In t h ~ s eforms the negative suffix
occurs immediately follov~ingthe &-vowel transitive class
myarker, and has the form -La e.g.
(1) tCi81-iff-e+nna+an Qen-iff-ue &is%-i-wa-en - (h:L
3:89) "heart-my+it+aw? brother-my-by vexed-trans.-neg.-
 jass., I!
i.e. "and l e t not m y brother vex m y Itearto1 I

- e n 4: $0)
i c a r l ~ - a ~ t ~ ~ - i - w e (hiL , "brother-my-by+they+and en-

11
neg.-juss., f o e . "and l e t not ny brother d e t a i n nor hin-
der my envoys. 11
If a sirig1s fez= in z ccztext tk;zle is zot csqjletely
clear can h e %rwterJ5 $ 2 ~?n23.21~
~ b-YA V Y VA. +?=-
UGQ JLLDDAV
IIT,-S.-:-PDA G t4.k
--+: IIU
4 %

intransitives is -m- or -we- and corns a f t e r the i n t r a n s i t i v e

c l a s s marker -2-, e. g .

-
ima+nmaman Qen-if f -ge tCofrqi ur-o-m(e) -en (31L 3:
110-111) , "~o(?)+in- art i c u l a r brother-my-of danger ( 3 )
It 11
a r i s e - i n t r .-neg.- jussive, i .e. Lo, l e t no claxger ar5se
1I
f o r ( l i t . of) tny brother.
Vhen the jassive i s p l u r a l and has the p l u r a l s-affix
- i t t o ) - , the negative occzrs between t'ne p l u r a l s n f f i x and
the jussive s-uffix, axid has t h e form -_w- or -me-. Only one
form occurs:
. . .]d.m en-na-QcQ ~al&-ito-w(:e) -en ( h i 5 2: 5 2 ) 11
....
11
gods-ones-by guided-pl .-juss.-nee-juss., i.e. " l e t not
A.7-
hue
- gs&s guide ... IT

The phonetic q u a l i t y of the l a b i a l involved i s un-

certain. In view of t h e r e g u l a r i t y of XL orthogrzg3.y ( s e e
$3.63) i n which the v r i t i n g with -E- represents Cfl i n a l l
cases i o which the cbaractez of the phoneme can be established
with c e r t a i n t y , i t can be regarded a s representing [ I " ] . riowever,
we shall use the ambigrmus s y m o l -qr- (see $3.22) i n order
 21 3
not to pre-judge the case.
7 .$63 The non-indicative mood saffixes, their form
and meaning. As mentioned above, the non-indicative moods
are formed by adding combinations sf 11 mood-suff ixes" to form
a number of nuances of meaning in the sphere of mood. Two
groups of suffixes can be discerned, differing by verbal posi-
%ion and by the kac-i;t'mt %he members form mutually exclusive
sets. T
LU
-- verbal position five are to Be fsmd a set sf s d -
fixes termed "aspect" sdfixes by Speiser in $$188-191.
As far as can be ascertained, these suffixes have to do with
I1
a "voluntative" or purposive" force, L e . they express the
desire or intent of the speaker. In verbal position six oc-
ccrs a set of suffixes which relate to mood proper. These
will be seen to have the force of various shades of commancj.
and contingency. By combining suffixes from positions five
and six further nuances are obtained.
7.4631 m e volmtative sr 3cr~osivesuffixes. This
fsxce is associated, as far as can be ascertained, with the
a - l / ? \
- n d - - T.11ese suffixes occupy verbal position
five in the non-indicative verbal, coming after the negative

- e.g.
suffix -%Ya-, QaQaQ-i-ma-11- (ML 4:26). It m s t be noted
at the outset that, m e n there are no suffixes of tense or
negation (verbal positions two and four), it becomes very
difficult t o tell vhether a given occurrence of -&- or -11-
represents this modal suffix or the root-complements -=-
and -u-[see $7.41 ( 6 ) I . This ambiguity will have an im-
portant bearing on the question of the interpretation of the
vowels ~vhislnprecede these swf i s z s (see below) a
7.4.6311 The form of the suffixes. For examples of
this morpheme with transitive and intransitive verbs see the
table in $7.46. When the derivationai base of the verbal
ended in -_1- or -2, the &-vowel transitive class marker elided
- of the suffix assimilated t o the -&- or -g- of the
and the -1-
,
,, ,pl&, 4W, 1. L, .J A A J
Base, p ~ c e j ~ -11-- -
=zzTr88
i ~ g2 ~ 2 -4,
rusu uvrr
x.,
UG
-,,-
JGGU

from the following es2~zple:

anamm-i+tta+man
- Ben-iff-ara nrQupf -oQ-i-1-zwa anam-
i+tta+nan_ -tat-ukar-r-eaa ati+nin maama+t @%man (BIL
3: 64-65), " as+I+aad brother-iay-with faithful89-past -
trans. -volunt.-condo as+I+and love-?-volxmt. -condo
11
so+indeed(?) be+Iaand," i .e. as I ought to have been
faithful with F I brothes and as I ought to be on friendly
terms, so indeed I am. 1I
The para1lelism between ur&upt -oQ-i-l-em and tattdcar-r-
-
elm allows us to reconstruct the latter as tatrikar-(i)-l-

-
ewae9* The 2-vowel of the intransitive class marker did not
elide under identical cir cumstantes: e * g o nr-a-l-ewa (ML 3:
215)
.
I n most eases- t h e morpheme has a single -A-. tiowever,

-
in three occrrrrences in BIL -11- appears: QaQaQ-i-11-i+lla+an
( h ! ~ 4:291, pQaQ-i-ll-ai-n-i+lla+an (ML 4:23), ana BaQaQ-i!-iva-
11-i+lla+an (ML 4: 26);gl it a l s o appears so at ~ o ~ h a z k i (see
ii

-
IE $189) . ':hat difference , if any, exists between -1- and

Due the alternation between -i-11- and -i-nn- in sther-

wise identical forms and in parallel passages at ~o~hazlcd;i
(see Speiser , 4 190) , and the existence of the two fornls
pis-o-nn-era (ML 1:qg) and far-o-an-en (ML 1: 81) in blL, a
related suffix -=-can be posited (cf. IH $190). What dif-
ference in meaning existed between -11-and -=-is tmlsno~m.
In 6189 Speiser interprets these srrffixes as b e i q
O

-iiei-, -i;enn- or -u/'oi-, -u/onn- and decides in favor of

the voweis as representing voice92 rather than verbal class
93
on the basis of the form Qaw-01-e-Q found at ~o~hazlroi.
He says:
\Ye expect therefore fs see in -a-
an element character-
istic of intransilives. This is reftited, however, by
haZ-01-e8 which contains the comuon and plainly tran-
-
sitive roof haZ- "heart1;the forin cannot mean 'let X
hear" and has to be interpreted as "let X be heard,"
The contrast between -i/e~-and -01- was thus not one
of verbal class (position 5) but rather of voice. The
...-- prove to be nedio-passive.
forms with -01
However, we have already seen that it is impossible to in-
terpret the vowels attacheti to ii:GG% 1 b ~ 7 6termed the t t deri-
vatdonal base" (ioe. root + root-complements + tense suffixes)
as indicating voice (sea $7.431 94 Further, as brought out
in 67.46 above, the 2- and 2-vowels before the "voluntative"
- occwy the same verbal positon (i.e rlght after the deri-
-1-
vational base) and pattern identically with the other class-

Hence the consistency of Yne whole pattern of the

structure demands that these votvels be interpreted as class
markers. What then can be done with gaQ-ol-eQ? The -a-
element c-zrt only be infespreted as a root-complement, Corn-
 216
pare the forms cited in $7.41 (12), and note especially

-
irePan-ol$-o$-(i)-1-e~v~ttwan
L J
(ML 3:63) and ~isu&-01-(i)-
1-e+tta+an (ML 4: 10). 95
7.46312 The use of the suffix. The recognition of
this as an "optative" or "voltmtative" suffix is due to
Friedrich, IBChG, p. 36f. Speiser agrees in $189, teslning
11 --L--A-L>---tI
2 4
.
uuuur t a b r v c i n light of his interpretation of the forms

"n -2 ii//e as including a first person suffix. This is prob-

lematical, see $7.46321 1 (b) below. In all of its occur-
rences me suffix is very satisfactorily interpreted as cax-
rying a 'burposivetlor 11 volmtative" fsrce, indicating strong
intention on the part of the spealcer. As such it combines
with fhe jussive suffixes -g-, -2-, - producing the
and -ai-,
strongest possible command, and combines with the snffix of
contingency -=a- to produce an "obligative" mood, (see
-- - $7.4732 below).
7-46 32 The "modal" suffixes. In verbal position six
is found the series of suffixes which have a 11 modal" force
proper Of these, two different forces can thrxs far be re-
cognized: suffixes of comand, or jussive suffixes, and a
suffix of contingency or condition.
7.46 321 'me"jussive" suffixes. Three orthograph-
ically separate suffixes belong in this category -e-/-en-,
-ae-/-aen- 9 and -ai-/-ain-. :That difference of meaning
exists between them is not altogether clear.
A. The suffix -e-/-en-. This is the most frequently
used suffix in XL for the expression of comand. Ifs jassive
 217
force is clear from many contests, e.g. tat-aQt-it-en (ML
3:2&) , itt-it-en (IIL 3:23), peteQ%-it-en (UL 3:281, nakk-
ito-tv-en (ML 2: 52) , peteQt-e+l l w a n (BIL2:24) , farn-a@%-i-en
(1fL 1: 82, 3:75,78), nal&-i-en (ML 4:42,51), as-i-em (ML
2:88, 3: 85,96,97), @as-i-en (16L 1: 113, 2: 13, 3:40,42,49) etc.
1. The form of the s m . In the great majority
of f ~ s t = z e s the particle occurs with transitive verbs in
agentfve consfruction with a third person agent. It also
occurs With intransitive verbs without the -g.~,e . g . peteet-
e+lfa+an (EIL 2 ~ 2 4 ) . In a significant nmiber of forms in
contexts which require a first person subject, ambiguous
writings occur with signs which could be .read -h or -2,
e.g. Ml-li ( ~ J L2:12, 3:49, 4:l) imee lml-(i)-1-e/i, &a-3i-
i-i-li (IL 4:43) i.e. PO-i-1-e/i. The combined evidence
is in favor of the 2-vowel (see below under 2). The dif-
ference in form then is apparently due to the person in-
volved. It is possible that this fiszl -2- is to be con-
nected with the copulative = associative (see $9.2) or the
pronominal associative a
- (see $9.324). Koie that t h e
- doubles before %he 2-connecting vowel of the comecfives
-n-
- and -&n-,
-an- egg. ar-i-enn+an (hlL 3:85), we-i-enn+an
(BIL 3: 42) =nn-f -enn-%man [XL 3:41) . However, it does
not doable before the %-connecting volvel of the pronominal
associatives and -%, e.g. @a@-i-en-i+lla+an (ML 3: AO) ,
arann-i-en-i+lla+an (h1L 3: 39), mrt-en-i+tta+an (BIL 3: 34)
stmiyamaQt-i-en-i+tan (ML 3: 88), hay-en-i+lla+an (XL 3: 30) .
2. -- ------ --
The problem of ---
the renresentatisqof she plural.
 218
The question of the'interpretation of the particle it(o) as
\
the plaral of the jassive is still problematibal, Bo~vever,
~peiser's objections in $184, based w o n verbal position,
are not valid. Since the jussive suffix in agentive constrnc-
tion, -a-,
is clearly impersonal (see below), the conparison
to the position of the pluralizing particle on the ~ezsonal
agentive suffixes of'the indicative mood proves nothing. fin..-
AUG

9 l e ~ e ~-i?;-
-f 3l:yq-s c@=,es i s y ~ e f a t e l y5ef o r e -en-, e . g , tst-
aQt-it-en (ML .3:28), itt-il-en (RIL 3:23), makllr-if-en (ML
4:ll7), eec; except for .the single negated example where
the negative -E- comes between the two suffixes, viz. naklc-
ito-w-en (hlL 2: 5 2 ) . The "non-optative" forrns cited by
Speissr from J30ghazk6i also prove nothing for the present,
for they cannot be interpreted (as Speiser notes).
T:ow the three occurrences of -iten with agentives are
clearly plural, viz. demen-na-~nO
.. . . tat-aQt-iten (hlL
d,m
i:78), a a m e n m a - ~ u naklc-i
~ ten (ifL 4:117) , and en-na-0@
nakk-ito-m-en ( E L 2:52). Further, every other occurrence of
- in agentire sc=s+vrtrc%ier~
-en- bas a singa'lai: agent. 96 With
intransitives, however, the evidence is not consistent. The
forms at%-aGt-iten (Mi, 3:aoj , itt-iten (ML 3 : 2 3 ) ,97 and
tlQan-iten (KL 3: 24) have plural subjects mi th reasonable
certainty, while neteet-iten (1% 3:28), tiban-iten- ( ~ I L
3: 241, and a - i t e n - (I~IL3: 30) most likely construe with
singular subjects. hrrtber, note the intransitives Q u p l -
-01-oQt-e+lla-, . o]nalc-ol-00t-e+lla23 and peteQt-e+lla-
in MIL 2:23-24, which contain the jnssive suffix -g-, and
construe with plurals (+%a), yet do not contain -i-J-.
Thus it is obviously difficult to interpret -13-
as
indicating plurality with intransitives, but it may do so
with transitives (the distribution may be accidental since
only three transitive jussive plurals exist in ML).
The coxpasison of -it(o) - with the Urartean s u f f i x
-
-itu- which ESZICS the 3rd p. ~ 1 .sf tifie aransikive verb isee
$ h ~
rgm,agks of S p s i s e r , fZ 2. EdQ, a. 231) gains greater
weight from the full comparative study of Diakonoff, "A Corn-
parative Study of the Rurrian and Urartean ~anguages,"PSVX,
pp* AOlff. However, note that -
&
u
- is a suffix of the indi-
cative mood in Urartean. .

Finally, it can be noted that -it(o)- could be inter-

preted as a root-complement in the light of the present evi-
dence and the ambiguity of its interpretation. It comes right
after the verbal root in six of its occurrences and after the
root-complement -=- in three others. Note also the forms
i-i -a-ku-un-na-ma-an ( EIL 3: 94) versus i- i-d&- c%u- 1un-na-na-
-
an (bfL 3: 84), u1-lrr-~u-ug-cra-d-m(ML 2: 1 ~ 4 )versus --
[ul-1 la-$1-a&-ku-u-un (ML 3: 84) cited by Speiser .
3. The use of the suffixc That these various forms of
the suffix express a jussive or command force admits of no
doubt. Beyond this there remains, for the present, con-
siderable amhiguify. Is the person of the subject expressed
in these.suffixesas, for instance, it is clearly expsessed
in tkre agentive suffixes of the indicative mood ( see 67.452)'i
Speiser decides in the affirmative (1~ff193and 196), basing
h i s view on several contexts where a f i r s t person seems re-
quired by the context but i s not other:vise indicated. Bnt
*%ishas i t s problems.
Let us begin with the t h i r d person. liere we have
nmerons examples i n agentive constructiozl, ?Ybere the agent
is c l e a r l y t h i r d person. T h e goal may be both t h i r d person
a2fi fF_rcf:~ e r ~9 cn- --neml - - 98

(:.IL 4: 57) , no+and brother-rty-by

11
Biane-cop.+? sent-
I1 11
tram.-juss. i.e. on the contrary, l e t Elane be sent by
II
my brother.

( b ) Affirmative verb, 1st person goal:

(2) @en-iff- u ( Q l t t a + a m supiyam-set-i-en (UL 3:71-72) ,
11
brother -:ny-by+me+and enriched(?).+? -trans. - jussive, TI

i.e. "And l e t nly brother e n r i c h we. .11

(c) Kegative verb, 3rd person goal:

11
i.e. and l e t no-b niy brokher grieve ny heart. If

i Kegaiiive verb, 1st person g o a l :

d d d
(A=) a n a m i + t i ll%an TeQQup-aQ QazrQka-8 Amann- ( 0 )+
tillwan d~imilcelle-(~)+tiiliM-a,nn %a~arrine-(Q)+tilla+
an... dam
e n s a - Q u Q ti0-iyaQ-wn tiQQan tiQQa11 tat-
a Q t - i t e n , ( i . ! ~ 1:76-78) " thus+ns+and TeQQob-by Qau0I.m-by
Aman-by+us+and 8 imilcene-by+ws+and E aQarr ine -by+cs+and
. . . god-ones-by heart ( s)- t h e i r -in+cop. very very
 221
loved-7-pl-jnssive,11 i.e. ''thczs let the gods, let Te"sub,
S~n?$Iia,Amon, Similce, Ea"sar ri love rrs in their b a r % i $
very very mzch. I t
Now the 2nssive suffix -en-, plural -iten-, cannot be
regarded as being or contai~ingasz agentive suffix "by him,
her, it" or "by them," since the identical suffix ocs~srs

(5) nibarii-n Ben-iff-ge-ne ay-iy-e pete0t-iten ( ~ I L

3: 27-28), " do\vry+cop. brother-ny-of-one presence-hi s-of
satisfactory-p1,- jussive,1I i .e. " let the dowry be satis-
factory to9@ ny brother."
(6) inlla+mamm Qen-iff-ge torupi mo-w-en (1% 3: 115-
11
1 1 ) lo+in-particalar brother-ny-of danger(?) wise-
It 100
intr.-neg.-jussive, i.e. "io, let no danger arise for
ny brother. 11
Further , although the jnssive suffix mi th 3rd per son
agent is most frequently -rn- it can be sinply -e-. For this
compare the fosms (7) .]nak-~1-0Qt-e+?la+an, guyl-ox-cQf-
e+lla+ar, and peteQ-t-e+Pla+an all in B%L 2: 23-24, Ajlthorrgh
'$he context is broken, t'ne passage forms the concluding sen-
tence to a paragraph which deals with gifts and other objects
101
sent by the Pharaoh to Tu3ratta. bother excellent exaqle
102
comes from ~o~ha;zkoi:

Qa api-ta talr-o-l-ae-0 QeQal-o-1-e-8 kaQl-o-1-ae-0

 222
IciraQ-o-P-ae-0 (m29 8 4: 27ff .) , "AS+? silver-one
pure massive(?) stable(?) durable(?) so sacrificer
0 . e
103 god( s?-ones-for mankind-ones-for front-to
stable(?)-volm- jussm104--errrph. Io5 pure-vole-jussm+emphm
It
? - v ~ l ~ - j u s s ~ - e m pdurable-vole-juss.-emph.
h~ e m 11 as
the silver is pure, massive(?), Io6 stable(?), 106 dur-
able!?) ;lo7 s. I,% -kk 8 z ~ r i f i c = r108 . l c Sil L Iuxx
' *---A u --lo9
VI

the gods md rnan,1.,iz5 b e stzble(?) , -,-;ze, 3 ,ll0 a---rIl u )

t,..

durable. I!
Now these examples are both occurrences in which the
jussive suffix is nsn-final. Has the -g- elided before or
assimilated to the following associative? Apparently not,
for -en- can appear in non-final position, eeg.
(9) stmivan-aQt-i-en-i+t- Ben-iff-GO (XL 3: 88),
I1
enriched-?-transm-juss.-corn-vowe1+fr o m brother-
rcy-by" i .e0 "let (me) be enrichecl more(?) by my brother. t1
(10) ar-am-i-en-i+lla+an Ben-iff-uQ . . &a$-i-en-i+
a

lla+an (blL 3: 39-bl,0)"given-?-trans.- jussc-corm.-vowel+

they+and brother-my-by ... heard-trans.-juss.-corn.-
-irowel+they+and, 11
i . I1 .r
l e t "chentbe causecii?) to be given

As these exampies sksw (and ofhers could be cited),

when the jussive suffix is in non-final position bat in clear
agzntlve construction in the 3xd person, the suffix is still
written -en-. The last e x q l e shows that then the final
associative is -an- or ---, the connecting vowel is -a- and

-
sscondary doubling of the -En- occurs. However , when the
final suffix is one of the pronominal associatives or -a-,
the connecting vowel is -A- andl no doubling occnrs.
-
It wonid sppear,theg,that the form -en- is required
with transitive verbs in agentive construction in the third
person [examples (1); 2 9 , a d ( 2ow-

eves il: can be csed with intrz~sitiveverbs f e x a q f z s f 5)

and (6)1, but is not required [examples (7) and ( 8 ) 1.
The same distribution can be observed in the use of
a suffixed -2- with the jussive suffixes -3- and -a-
to
be discussed below. 112 In each case where a transitive verb
occurs in agentive construction in the third person, a snf-
fixed -n- is used on the form, e.g. Ben-iff-uQQ+an ml-(i)-1-

(HL 4:23). \%ere the verb is intransitive, the -2- may or

may not occur (see note 111 for an example).
In the light of these facts, what interpretation can
we give to this suff ixerll -2-? As noted above, it cannot be
agzntiva for it occurs with in%xamsi%ives. 1 % is required

but is optional with intransitives. It may be used with -=-

and -a-
with the same distribution, -411 of these facts can
be explained'if we view the -n- as the copfxlative or predi-
cative associative identified by Speiser . Its obligatory
use with tsansitives in agentive construction but optional
use with intransitives is simply explained by the nature of
 224

intransitives. Since they express a state, condition or

activity of the subject ("to be satisfactory" etc.) no ex-
pression of the copula is necessary, but it can be used (per-
haps for emphasis?). However, with transitives, which ex-
press an action performed by the subject upon the goal, the
expression of the copula with the jussive is necessary (some-
thing l ilre our " let be"? ) .
-
This Lezves t h e -e-, present In a l l these formg, as t h e
snffix which expresses the jussive. 'I3 it is significant to
note that-this leaves no agentive suffix expressed on fie verb
in jussive forms in ths third person, where alone we have a
sufficient number of forms in clear context t o be reasonably
certain. This is in marked contrast to the indicative where
such a suffix is necessary.
Turning to the forms which involve a subject otfier
than third person, the evidence is not so clear, mostly be-
cause of its paucity. There is only one form in h1L which has
been viewed as an I1 imperative" i.e. command with a second
person subject, but it is in broken context, and these are
only seven forms in 1,IL which can be plausibly fnz-i;e~p~e.l;ed
--
f r g ~ sontext 28 ha;.--
vussrg r r r--+
+"
a v ------
p ~ r ~ u --a
u~ --0--A---"-*--
pU U
uzlAV&bUILELbGLY 9

several of these are in broken or obscure context. 114 The

peftinent passages bear citing here:
(a) Possible 2nd person:

(b) Possible 1st persons

 ( 14) t iwaallw-an kuru-fe/a sen-iff-ae+man kelti
niriee ~a0-il-e/i117pisant-iQt-ann+an tiQQan Qen-iff-
ge-ne-fa kelti-fa (ML 4:4 2 - a ) .
KUZ
( 15) ya+l( l)a+an tarn-i1-n [oil-na omin-na
$ualCl?a-man @en-iff-nr. ._ .fan Qrxkkan-ne-fa+n tfwi-

ati-nin rnanna+tta+man (hill 2:82-85).

(16) awema+nin h r o Qu-ta ya+amwn hill-o-1-ewa
KVB
Ben-iff-ge-ne eti-iy-e omin-i-fe-ne eti-iy-e 9aQ-

( 17) ye+ma*nin l8 %lane-(Q)+lla+an kul-et-a

m~eliva-€I1
Ben-if<f>-ue-ne eti-iy-e mTRornin-i-fe-ne eti-iy-e
urha+lla+an ~alta+lgl)a+an baQ-aQ-i-11-i+lla+an
- (ML
4: 27-29)
First if can be noted that, unfortunately, there is
not one occurrence in ML of a jussive verbal where the first
person agentive is independently expressed in the form i@a-8
Il
by me,
,, 119 as thelne are for the t h i r d person. Such a form
.r.i~al&
cl,earfy I.,%;-t,o sstfPe the pr-iibkem of the existelice of
personal agentive suffixes on jussive verbals. Now the im-
personal form of the 3rd person jussives strongly suggests
that such should be the case with the 2nd and 1st person forms
also. Note that all the examples except the t w o forms in ex-
amples (16) and (17) can be interpreted as evidencing i a e final
- jussive suffix isolated for the third person above.
-e- In
 226

this light example (12) corrld very plausibly be translated

Il
"daughter-thy+cop. wife-my+cop.+stative given-jass., ioe.
"let thy daughter be given as my wife." The person involved
is obvious from the context. The forms in example (13) are
allso preferably treated in this manner: llbrother-iny-to+conno
word further spoken-vo1.-jusse,!I i.e. " ~ e ta further word be
spoken to my brother" or, preferably. "Speak a further word t o
my brother. ,1120 Example (14) is a problem passage which yet
defies satisfactory interpretation (cf, the discussion of
Speiser $214, p. 1 8 3 ) . The final -ucould be read as
- with the -g- the jussive suffix.
-1e- However, this makes the
interpretation even more difficult. Ignoring the problems of
the interpretation of the first two words, the second phrase
makes sease if the final -g- be interpreted as an agentive:
"brother-my-ofi+and good-health excel lent heard-vol -by-me" .
ioe. "And may the excellent good health of my brother be heard
11
by me." Under this interpretation the jussive" force could
only be introduced by the "voluntative" suffix -I-. The
final phrase then m u s t exhibit the jussive suffix -en(n)-
with a first person subject m d e r s t o c d from t5s conSext. Xom-
ever, the whole Passage bs obscure a ~ dl i t t l e c z n be based
wpon it.
Example ( 15) , alss interpreted by Speiser as a 1st per-
;-$ G O
son form, is .= broken a context to give any indication
either way except to definitely establish the vowel as -e-
and not -&-, due to the supplementary final -2- (ri-e).
Examples ( 16) and ( 17) introduce a further complication,
for here the vowel is clearly -1-and .the forms are parallel
to clear 3rd person agentives in the parallel passages in
which the subject is the Pharaoh (referred to as Ben-iff-
"my brother"). Thus -
haQaQ-i-ma-11-iclla+an is parallel to
.ir

(ML 4: 1 9 - 2 0 ) , I!
brother-my-by-i-they+and words these+in-par ti-

heed these words." In example ( 17) -

BaQaQ-ill-i+lla+an is
parallel to BaQaQ-ill-ai-n-i+lla+an Ben-iff-u0 (ML 4:23) ,
(I
heeded-voluntative-juss. -cop.+they+and brother-my-by, i .em
"Let not rar brother heed then." Now the i-vowel can be re-
garded as the first person suffix, but this is not absolutely
necessary. In " jussive" and !:voluntative" forms we have seen
that t h u ~;onnectingvowel before the pronominal associatives
is -8- [ s e e the discussion above followifig example (11)]-
The A-vowel in examples (5) and (6) can just as plausibly be
intespreted as %his connecting vowel. The forms then can
simply be translated "they mill not be heeded and "they
will be heeded" respectively. 121 This seems the preferable
intespretaticn. Fate t h a t the 3FTioPe s u b j e c t ( f i w e Qurm,
11 f~l?cm~~~'~) is ...-.Ao..-+r.*~
ulruvAauvvu
Qnn-
r rvul
4.L-
U u G
---A.
~ u l ~ ~ ia
e x exampie
t (16).
Finally, an overlooked example of a first person jus-
sive with an g-vc~velthat cannot be agentive occurs in the
following passage:
(18) _ay+ma+nin Qen-iff-& anam --
tan-oQ-i-na-a+lla+nni
~isrq?-ol-(i)-ll~~-e+ttacan
- --.. -- (hlL 4: 9-11), "if+?+
- --- tiQQan

indeed(? ) brother-~-by thus done-past-trans -neg. - .

 11
by-him+they+? vexed-7-voluntative-jussive+I+then, i .e.
"If my brother has not done them thus then I will be
very grieved. ,I12 3
Here it is quite impossible for the -e- to be agentive.
This example would seem decisive in interpreting the forms
in obscure and broken passages in examples (14) and (15)

of the form Qebal-o-1-e-0

- -
in exbmple (8) above. Here -0-l-e-
occurs with a third person subject, parallel to forms in -9-
I-ae-.
11s a result of these considerations me shall conclude,
tentatively, that the jussive forms of the verb are impersonal,
the subject being s,:ated elsewhere in the sentence. Under
this interpretation, the jnssive force is produced by the -2-
vowel in all these forms.
B. The suffix -%-/--. In several pertirsn* forms
a very definite jussive force seems to inhere in the suffix
- 124 From hlL can be cited the three forms of
-ae-. jm&- lllmow":
( 19) en-iff-u~~+an pal-( i) -l+ae+n (ML 4:56 49, 108).
In sac3 context a jussive foxce is c l e a r . The suffix
also oczuxs qcii%efrequentiy at ~s~'nazkoi,Note haw it alter-
- in the passage cited in example (8)
nates with the form in -e-
above. Examples such as this make it very diffictrlt to as-
sess difference, if any, existed between -%- and -g-,
In $ i 9 3 Speiser treats it as a variant of the jussive
suffix -g-, which may well be the case.
C. The suffix -aai-/-ain. This suffix also occurs in
a pertinent number of forms in ML and at ~o~hazkdi.It is
treated by Speiser in IH $193 as an orthographic variant of
-
-ae-. This nay yet prove to be the case. Ms~vever,the occur-
rences in hfZ seem to suggest a inore polite, less blunt jus-
sive force than that of -2- md -*-or a force of result or
possibility, consequent upon a jussive. For the former note
the parallel forms w i t h - ".L~-Q~Y" i~ h~Lc $64-65,

and brother-w-of-ones know(t rans.) -voluntative-jussive+

11 11
emphasis(? )+they+conn., i .e. Xay my gods born and may
the gods of my brother know. % I
For the interpretation of the form QaQaQ-ill-ai+ni+lla+
an Qen-iff-I& in ML 4:23 (see above) as another example of
this "polite" juwsive see 47.4723
., below,
For the result or purpose force contingent upon a jus-
sive note the forms with ift- "go" in AIL 4:31-53:
(21) 0en-iff-u(Q)+lla+an paQQitb-iff Quram-aet-i-eo
lil
nzick-i-en i tt-ai+Ga+Piatim %iane+m+an Gen-if f -u2
Quka
------.. paW-i-en
.--
itt-af-nna+an pa08itQ-iff-ura, " ~ e tmy
brother hasten(?) and dismiss my envoys so that they ma;y
go; and let my brother send Biane also(?) so that he
go with my envoys.t 1
7.46 322 The.suffix of contingency -QIV~-. In the same
verbal positiom~as the jussive suffixes,'.i.e. immediately after
the volmtative suffixes, occurs the suffix --ma- uhose
function is to introduce an element of contingency.
A. The form of the suffix* The suffix bas the form
- in a l l cases, but the second vowel is ambiguous when
-ewa-
word final due to the use of the indeterminate sign -=, e.g.
ka-ti-li-e-wa (EIL A: 18) The final -2 is assured by several
full spellings, e . g . =u-u-lu-u-$-e-wa-a-ti-la-an
- - (ML 2 : 11)

and is used with both singular and plural subjects:. Its con-
tingent force mas recognized by Speiser in &&> 59(1939):
315ff. independently by Goetze in Lane lG(1940): 129, n. 1 5
and spelled out more fully by Speiser in ,6192. Its use
will be illustrated below in the discussion of the "moods" of
Hurr ian .
7.47 The non-indicative moodg of Hr~rrian. The suf-
fixes described above are used independently and in corn-
binai;ions of suffixes from positions five and six (one from
each position only, tbe suffises forming a verbal position
being mutually exclusive) to form different nuances of meaning
. ;ys
,,lLwt
+la ferm $he "moods" of I-Itrrrian. Since there is

stiii much ambiguity and uncertainty about the interpretation

of the individual swffil-es, there must be even more so in as-
sessing their coti~binations;hence only the most preliminary
of sfatemen$s can be madeo125
7.471 The "volmtative" mood. R distinct possibility

exists that the forms in -1-/-11-can be used indepenGently to

form a mood expressing the intent ox purpose in the mind of
%he speaker. Compare %he discussion of the forms QaeaQ-i-~~~z-

- (LIL A: 26) and QaQaQ-i-11-i+llwan

11-i+lla+an - in examples ( 16)
and (17) above and note 120. The possible 1st person forms
discussed in examples (12) to (15) above would be examples of
this same construction if the final -d&-vowel should turn
out to be a first person strffix instead of the jassive suffix
,-
-a
- as interpreted here.

%hetiler the parallel "voiuntat~ve!'sr~f

fix -=-could
also function independently cannot at present be decided.
7.&"7 The II
jussive" moods. bloods in the semantic
area of the " jussive" can be formed by the independent use of
the suffixes 'and by their combination with the "voltmtative"
suffixes.
704721 The simple jussive mood. The use of the
jussive suffix -e- without any accompanying volmtative suf-
-.

-
fix [-l(1)- or -an-]
-.. produces simple command. For the 3rd
person note examples !1) to (6) above; for the 2nd person(?)
note example (12). X,'o exrzaples have been noted w i t h the 1st
persotz.
7*.72.2 T-ue !!-heiEhtened"
-- jnssive mood.
. The corn-
bination of the voluntative suffix -l( 1)- and the j~xssives
- ancl -%- produce the strongest possible form of command*
-e-
80te examples (8) ,( 13) ,( 18) ,( 19) , and possibly ( 1.4.) and ( 15)
above.
Xote also -an-en in the forms fabr (RIL 1 : S l j and n i s - -L-_

o-xc-en
------ - (BIL 11:79). How this differs from the above is un-

cerf ain.
 232
7.4723 The "polit& jussive mood. This mood is formed
by the use of the voluntative -u)-
with the suffix of pos-
sibility -a-.
Note the example cited under ( 2 0 ) above. The
form QaQaQ-i-ll-ai-n- in ML %:23 can be plausibly so inter-
preted also. When Tugratfa discusses the "evil reports" which
may have reached the Phar-,:.,'s ears ( lines 17-20) he concludes
with a negated simple jussive PaQaQ-i-wa-en (line 20) "let not
11
(my brother) heed (these words). iithen, however, he turns to
the positive side, stating "whatever Mane and Keliya will cfe-
claret'he uses the polite jussive (-ll-ai-)"may they be
heeded. 126
\Vithout the voluntative -1(1)-
a similar force seems to
be found in the clause waQ-ai-nn-an @en-iff (ML 3: 33). How-
ever, the context is too uncertain to be sure.
- form follows immediately upon a simple
When the -ai-
jussive, and is not augmented by the -a!-
volunfative suf-
fix, it seems to express a force of possibility (or perhaps
result). See example (21). P t is not improbable that these
two nuances of thought should inheze in the same particle.
7.473 The contingent moods. This mood is formed by
the suffix -=-and by the combination of this suffix with
the voluntative suffix -1-. On the pattern suggested above,
one might expect to see simple contingency in -=-and a
$1
force of "duty" or obligation," i .em "should"127 in -1-ewa.
There are a number of contexts where the force of "should" fits
forms in -1-ewa- admirably. However, there are also several
contexts where identical forms seem to express simple con-
tingency rather than obligation.
-
7.47 31 Simple contingencY. As Speiser notes, &.
cit Y these forms occur in passages introduced by the particle
- 11
if, is it that-,I t e.6.

iff- u n m kepan-et-a ai~trr-qa-tttatan teon-ae tiQQan

561, "if+amd .. 128 ?+corn. gold brother-pi-by

gilt-ziy-as .
granted-ftxt -by-hln this-for+i+and mmch
I!
very very re joice-'?-cccrnd. hear t-my-iwcop. altogether,
i.e. "If . . .128 and lily brother will presenL gold as rqy
11
gift, then I ~vorrld rejoice over tfiis in ~y heart wholly.
T5e forms with the volwrtative snffix -1-which cannot
be obligatory from fhe contest, b u t mdst express contingency,
can be interpreted as expressing a high degree of probability.
Thus aote:

-?"+
pus u -by-yOi~,% I i e . ".-.--3~0thezmig21.$
ruy
1
say ' yow have de-

::ere the form &ill-o-l-evra rather than just oil l-ega

s~zggestsa high degree of probability in the condition. The
condition is formal only; ~ugrattafeels that this is exactly
what the Pharaoh is saying. This same interpretation nicely
fits ur-o-l-ema in I\IL 3:115 and the forms Icat-i-l-ema and

- in the contest dealing with evil reports (tiwe

bill-o-l-ema
~ u r w e )in blL 4: 17-29.
7.4732 The
-- nood of obligation or duty. The combina-
tion of the voltmtative ->(I)- and the conditional -eJV_a- pro-
duces several clear examples of an obligatory mood, e.g.
( 1) anammi+tta*man @an-iff -g.&
- kepan--o
-l@Ll-(i) -1-errs*
- -
tta-tan ati+oin mann-a+ttakman anami+tta+man @en-iff-
. . u
UIW -
---%--A
- - - a &nammi+tta+nan- ~ax-&ar-( 2 ) -1-
.ewa ati+nin ~nann-ai.tta+man (ML 3: 62-65] , "as+~+a.=~
brother-my-for besto~.~-?-vol.
-cond.+Isconn. so+indeed(? )
be+I+conn. as+I+conn. brother-my-with faithful129 -past -
vol .-cond. as+I-corm= love-?-vsl .-cond. so+indeed(?)
be+f+conno,I t i.e. "As I should.bestow (gifts) upon my
brother so indeed I do, 30 and as I should have been
faithful with my brother ancl as I sho~xldbe on friendly
terms, so indeed I an."
( 2 ) inu+me+nin d$imike tar6qanni-0 fur-im-ai+n tat-

(1fL 4:1211-1.23), "zs+?+indeed(?) Sun mankind-by seen-? -

adverb(? )+cop. loved-trans. -by-him so+we+and mutnali ty-
aur-in love-? -vol .-condo," i . e. "as mankind rnanifest-
ly(?)I3l loves the srm, so we mutallly should love one
another
?Tote also twp-o-1-ewa (nlL 3: 100).
7-48 The question of voice in Hurrian. The only con-
clusion that can be reached from an exanination of all the
evidence is that the Burrian verb is nxtral as regards voice.
It is neither active nor passive bzt can express relations
 235
lxith the logical subject or logical object that have to be
rendered by active or yassive forms in other languages, yet
there is no observable change in the Hurrian verbal structure.
.i'hus, consider the agentive construction. Since the logical
subject takes an agentive suffix and the logical object is in
the zero-suffix form, the verb i n this construction can be r e -
garCcd as ~asolvali n nrientatinn. Rut, ayart from the addi-

tion of personal agentfve suffixes (which are not formd on

non-indicative forns), the verb is morphologically identical
with the ~ii"uje~t-ac-f;i~n
form with no goal expressed, in which
case it is active in orientation. Thus, compare the agentive
and the subject-action forms of the verb pa0Q- "to send" and
II
-
kat- to re~ort,declare1'in the following examples:
i1 ) Agentive construction, indicative mood:
- -
[F%~a]ne+nn+an Q[e]n-i [ff -u]@ paQQ-oQ-a (kfL 2 : 107-108) ,
"Xane+cop.+and brother-my-by sent-past-by-hin,II i e.
II
i~ndmy brother sent hiane."
(2) Agentive construction, jussi-~emood:
8en-iff-u8(0)+a~ %ane+nn+rran paBQ-i-en hi^ 4:5 7 ) ,
:~fane+cop.tcome sent-tzzas.- j ~ ~ ~ s s i v e , "
"l~rother-rj-b;~.+and
i.e. "Let my brother send ~ane."
!3) Subject-action construction, goal
paQ0-i+nn+an Ben-iff - -
Bu-ta (AlL 3:112-1~3)~
"send-
trans. +cop.+so brother-xy me-to,1I i.e. "SO that my
brother sends to me."
(4) Subject-action construction, agent unexpressed:
-
tiwa+1la+an Qurwe Qen-iff-ta kaf-i-kki (ML 416-l7),
 "~vord(s)+they+and evil brother-my-to re~orted-trans.-
ceg." i.e. "evil reports are not being reporfed to my
brother .It
In ex tmples ( 1) and 6 2) , when the verb is used in
agent ive constrrrction, both indicative and jussive , the verb
must be viewed, 'from our under standing ? as passival . However
i n ( 3 ) , wilen no goai is expressed, the ver'b mcst be active
in orientation. K o t e parficuiariy in < 2 j and ( 3 ) that the
under Pying verbal base is identical in form. The forin in
the indicative mood in agentive construction but present
tense [example (1) is in the past tense] would aiso be iden-
tical in structure. Such a form does not exist for the verb
paQQ- in hlL in clear context, but nunlerotrs exa~nplesof
It
other verbs can be cited, e . g . tat-i-ya ( 1 2 ~ 1:74.) loved-
trans.-by-him,I I Rat-i-ya- (%f~@:12) It
"rey~orted-tran~.-by-him,
etc.
Comparison of examples (3) and (4) shows the same 6011-

trast in voice i n strbject-action s ~ n s t r r x c t i o n . Yhen the

logical object is not expressed, as in example (3), the verb
nl~xst be viewed as active, and the grammatical subject (in
this case the actor) is in the zero-srrffix form. H~wever,
%hen the logical subject is not expressed, as in example (4),
the verb must be viewed as passive. The grarmnatical stxbject
!in this case the goal) is still in the zero-suffix form. It
is interesting to note the clifferenee in construction that
must take place in example ( 3 ) when the logical object is
expresssd, that is, if i t is desired to express "my brother
 2 37
11
sends a word t o ine" rcztlter than rny brother sends fo tne."
Under these c i r c ~ m s t a n c e sthe l o g i c a l s u b j e c t "€)en-iffl*in
example ( 3 ) ] must then take on the agentive s u f f i x , becoming
gra'ilmatically the agent; t h e l o g i c a l o b j e c t i s i n t h e zero-
s u f f i x form, being grammatically the g o a l , and the verb mrrst
be viewed, f r o ~ nour rmderstanding, a s p a s s i v e , i . e . the sen-
ience becumes f a r e s e r v i n g t h e &bnuxn&i \ ~ u r dorder V C exampie

( 3 ) 1: 133
@Q-i-ya+nn+a,n
-- tiwe Qen-iff -uQ Qu---ts, " sent--braus. -
by-!~im+cop.+so word brother-my-byme-to," i . e b "SO
t h a t word i s s e n t t o me by m y brother. , I 134-
I n conclusioc, i t 3 n s t be noted t h a t , i n a given sub-
j s c t - a c t i o n construction, whether the grammatical s ~ b j e c ti s
the l o g i c a l subject ( i . e . t h e one who performs Lhe a c t i o n , the
a c t o r ) or whether i t i s t h e l o g i c a l object ( i . e . t h e one upon
i.?hom t h e ac-tion i s performed, the goal) i s not i n d i c a t e d mor-
p h o l o g i ~ a l l yi n tlurrian. 13' 1 % i s i n d i c a t e d s o l e l y by the
requiretnents of context. This follows iiatuxally and without
s t r a i n if the nature of t h e Iit~rriar,verb i s n e u t r a l r v i t ' n r e s -
ycct t o v o i c e . The verbal form i n flurriizn does not i n h r r e n t ~ j *

express whether the goal of the a c t i o n i s t h e same as o r other

than t h e subject expressed. T h ~ si t i s not r e a l l y c o r r e c t ,
from tile r ~ o i n tof view of Iiurrian verbal concepts, t o say t h a t
the verb i s a c t i v e or passive i n o r i e n t a t i o n , t h i s only de-
s c r i b e s t h e manner i n which i t nz7:st De viewed according t o
our l i n g u i s t i c concepts.
 8.1 As defined in $5.23 , the term refers to
AL -
~,uczr,
L
class of Huriiian words whose functions combine those
of conjunction, inter jectlon and adverb, and which cannot
append any of the nominal or verbal suffixes, but can only
append one or more associatives. 'I
8.2 The aarticle root. As noted in $6.2 there do
11 11 t1
not seem to be inherenf "particle, nominal" or verbal"
roots in Hurrian. A given root can function as any one
2
depending on its suffixes and its position in the sentence.
This can be surmised from the few examples we have of roots
that do function as both particles and nominals, or pa.r-
ticles and verbalse4 However, it must be admitted that most
particle roots have not yet appeared in any other function.
It may turn orrt that only a limited nrm-her could part,a!re of
swch d clor.xble function,5
3 me p a r u l e classes, F r o m what is thus far

known about them, the primary force of the particle mas that
of conjunction or interjection. lIowever, it is not yet pos-
sible to separate them into classes along such lines for
the simple reason that the exact function of so many of
them remains rmcerfain. The force of the conjunction or
interjection in a language is often swch that exact f r a ~ s -
lstion is difficult if not impossibleab in the present

238
suvau a~cq%xsd
aqj -a$wqmsa$apar ST IaMoA l v u r y a y $ ( n i i
rza$$yrnr L~durys sL~hi1.e s!: w r o g a q q sours -5/nFi (z)
8
* o p Aaqq paapu? i5E ,leads ppnoys Aayq wIl s m a z rprya
( ~ 0 1 - C;
f :c qr{) ~ t p m + q T + a ~ gTn+T?.;?
n~~ 0 L'U r wn-L L T I I ~ T
a:= -3-2

* q y n s a r j o squawa$a$s s m z o j 91 - u-
em+anr$eraosse-~euywon
-6sci-ar.e~~' - i . x r u + ~ f va s c r q d a q q q$rhi u o g q v u r q u r o ~ u~
~

II -smaaq A i ~ t i a l s $uo eq p l n o q s L T T Q E ~ ~ U I
ah satxuen aqyi a? 6 m ~ saq$ sanoi { ~ ) G ~ q . s a j ~ pupluern
n~ui
-
sail s p v a x y a r y ~( C ~ T - T Z I152)
:~~ - * ';L%+?flr$+rannvuv
uru+aui.tmur o s y v axedm03 , , * q ~ nAms a n L z a ~s $ r e a y z y a q 3 u ? sn

uosrrrvdmo3 s m r o j $!: -waua a ~ a ~ 3 r v ca yi 3 y$rM u o r q e u r q m o o up:

* s a 1 d w e x a r o j L a l (j 111 -53 ,;sa,, 6uor$ammCuo3 - n U j ( 1 )
* z a y ~ a 9 o qp a q s l ~ a x a q a x v s m a $ s 5- p u p iT- csaaueg.s
-uy T e z a A a s ul u y e q z a a u n s r Iahion XeuTj a y q jc xaqcjvxsqa a y q
--
sp qDnmssrrI *k%aqs 5-/E- 3 u y $ r q r y x a sala!q.xocl 9-y

u r auop svq x a s y a d s s v zauuvu amps a y p LIT way? q s ? ~I l e y s

ahi ' A ~ $ u a n b a s u o 3 - p a y a ~ o x d d vu a n a a q U Q ~s a ~ a ? $ z v dq a n s
j o 2rayu~aru j o saauvntr a k v a r ~ a pa q 3 q e y q p a a o a d x a a q oq. $or1
sr q? 'qnamq-eazq- SiiT$TK€rjap $ F B M Q a 2 ~ n Z u v l a y q 30 s ? a u j ? a s
- s o 3 3 a y q 30 Guew qarqAi u ? c u o ~ q v $ a r d i a ~ asTzxn11
us jo a$vqs
~Lz.
II
a g a i n , on t h e other haxd. 7 1 I n each instance i n which the
context is c l e a r i t i s used when a new or opposite subject
i s introduced. Thus i n ?.iL 3: 115 T u s r a t t a leaves t h e d i s -
cussion of the tyife whom he has sent and ~vhorn t h e Pharaoh
w i l l see and introduces the subject of her dowry w i t h lcuro.

I n 1IL 3: 55 he t u r n s from "what things my arandf athex d i d

a.

Tor yorxr f a t h e r " (~vhic21he has made tenfold) t o "what things

--- a-.4.
~ a b h e i :did foi: yorr,
1I
by the Trse sf ftwro. In hiL 3: ZI.5 h e
leaves t h e disctrssion of t h e emergency which might a r i s e i n
t h e pharaoh's land and introduces a similar d i s c u s s i o n of a
p o s s i b l e emergency i n h i s own land by using kuro, and f i n a l l y
i n ,lIL 4: 24 he t u r n s from t h e e v i l r e p o r t s which might have
reached t h e pharaoh's e a r s concerning himself or h i s land
t o t h e discussion of e v i l r e p o r t s t h a t he might hear concern-
ing the Pharaoh or h i s land by t h e use of kuro. The f o r c e ,
!I
then, i s t h a t of an i n t e r j e c t i o n "on t h e other hand, again,
11
not an adverbial a g a i n f r i n d i c a t i n g r e p e t i t i o n of the ver-
bal action. I n 3: 39 i t seems t o have the f o r c e of a "secand"
t a b l e t or "another" t a b l e t ,
( 3 ) nanu-o This occrxrs only i n the phrase panu+lle+
nin iQg-ewa OIL 4:16). The f o r c e i s unknown, but note the

p a r a l l e l i s i n with i n u + l l e + n i n Qill-o-l-ewa (l!L 3~101-102).

(1
(4) Q ~ l d c o - ~The n a r t i c l e means furthermore, more-
over, i n a d d i t i o n , " based upon a root Quk1.z- ~ e a n i n g" f a r ,
d i s t a n t , f u t u r e , 11 see Speiser , IH p. 91. Quldrosmmarnan i n
11
iClL 3: 1111, bears the meaning never t k e l e s s . 11

( 5 ) unto-, The f o r c e of an i n t e r j e c t i o n meaning "now

then': f i t s t h e u s e s of t h i s p a r t i c l e f a r b e t t e r than t h e
"ir'nen" of Goetze ( s e e S p e i s e r Is,p. 83fe).
(6) =-. This p a r t i c l e occurs only i n broken con-
t e x t i n h:L 2:66 as unu+rne+nin . . . followed rrp by anammi+
tillla+an. For t h i s reason Speiser i n -
111, .p. 89, t r e a t s i t

as a v a r i a n t form of ~ U T 9.

G?
vr,
C ~ ~ m &
x -s. U A
~ f
U S . G ~
i l ..-
e&<I..:
-+=--
GAXAJ.U.L
. /- a V G ~ X I >w
-21s
U J . ~ S ~
-.I.--- li --:-=I--
~ ~ L U I U
I U
IG
A-
-
LIV

orthogra~hicambiguity both w i l l be l i s t e d here,

( 1 ) alaQe-. 'The meaning "whether" n i c e l y f i t s t h e
only occurrences of t h i s p a r t i c l e i n t h e AIL passage:
€20-fe+man t ~ p enhFaz-ne-fe
j.
as-oQ-ag-We-ne-fe arann-
enn-%man Ben-iff-uQ haQ-enn+an ala€le+me+nin n i k a r i
tea alaQe+me+nin n i r i alaQe+me+mio Q e n - i f f - z z z i (KL
..
3: 40-4-31, "Let m y b r o t h e r procure'o my t a b l e t , t h e one
of t h e dowry which I gave, and l e t (him) hear whether
Lhe dowry i s l a r g e , whether ( i t i s ) e x c e l l e n t , whether
?1
( i t i s ) s u i t a b l e f o r my b r o t h e r .
Cf. t h e remarks of S p e i s e r i n 12, p. 93.
(2) a-.
The p a r t i c l e means "thus, so ( r e s u l t ) . " It
occurs only w i t h t h e a s s o c i a t i v e ---. I t s most f r e q u e n t
use i s in conjtmction wit11 t h e verb niann- " t o b e , 1i forming
a phrase of a s s e v e r a t i o n , 11 e.g. a e i t n i n t n a n n a + t i l l w m a ~ ~
(1% 4.: 119) , " s o indeed we a r e ," a t i + n i n mannwttacman (ME
3:63,65), "so indeed 1 a m , " and a t i + n i n miinna+lla+man (ML
1: 109) , " s o indeed t h e y ( w i l l ) be.''l2
From t h i s meaning i t can be surmised t h a t , when i t
occurs independently, i t introduces a r e s u l t c l a u s e , e . g .
 242
11
ati+nin taQet-n itt-oQt-a (h4L 1:9 0 ) So the gift has gone."
In ?IIL 2: 1 3 it introdrrces the opening sentence of a para-
graph, wl~ere it is followed by inn-ma+nin. Jinse in the
previous paragraph TuSratta speaks of hearing of the departure
of Keliya and Vane (VL 236-73, it fits quite well to begin the
next section "so Ilane, my brother's envoy, is coming."
3 ) 3 - This Z Q S ~is p~~~i~i~n~1,1,:r 31-

thcugh i t m2y beleng w i t h the nomi~als. It is listed as EL

particle since it occtrrs th~zsfar only with associatives ex-

cept for the form aweQ0e- which seems to f oral a different
word [see (4)below].' Note particularly the contrastive
alternation in :.:L 4:17 and A: 24: awe+nne+ain and a\ve+ma+nin.
- and
That -nne- -=-are not examples of the anaphoric nomi-
nal suffixes -= and -na
- is seen by the fact that t h e r e is ao

difference in nmnber in the tTvo contexts. Provisionally I

would connect -=-/-=a- wit11 the -m associative riis-
cussed in $9.10. Rote also a\ve+nna+man in obscure context
in :;IL 2 : 7 3 , atld the forms a-we-en and a-wi-in iu Ug. Syll.
5:5 and 5:6.
in &$11
IJ 5 Soeiser s u g g e s t s tila% the fern, is a pxo-
norm meaning I1ars_yone.11 ~ r
,,,,- l i sgeneral force is - i t ~ iconfizmed
~

ay the Cg. Quad. Voc.14 where equals Ug. & "which, that,
of" in 137 2:z9.15 Now it is significant that the relative
particle =-/=-occurs in YfL with impersonal antecedents
only. Thus I would see in -
awe- the Hurrian relative particle
with personal antecedents, "who, whoever. 15
(4.) aweQQe-. This appears to be an expansion of the
 243
above p a r t i c l e by t h e a d d i t i o n of the " a b s t r a c t " s u f f i x
-
-8Qe. 1 % i s here l i s t e d as a p a r t i c l e because i t only ap-
pends a s s o c i a t i v e s , e. g . awe0Qe-t-nin( h l ~ 3: 3) and av~eQQi+
lla+man hi^
- 2: 32) ,

In $115 Speiser su;gests "ivhen, where?" on the basis

of i t s trse i n personal Earnes. T h i s is n o ~ vs t r o n g l y ~ r p p s r t e d
-9

by the Urartean form aiSe "somewhere."'' This nakes rea-

sonable sense i n 3 i i 2:32:
ya+la+an
-- -
t a n - a ~ 01-na amreQQi+lla+~an
"~vhat+
they+and
done-by-me other-ones where+they+? ," i e . "The other
t h i n g s wfiich I do, where a r e they?"
11
( 5 ) --
Qenne-. The p a r t i c l e means now, a t t h i s time, :I
used both i n present t e n s e ( h l ~ l:74.) and p a s t tense ( h i ~4:
11). For i t s use a t Iiuzu, see C. 11. Gordon, m, $4.17
(1'13). That i t i s a p a r t i c l e r a t h e r than a nominal adverb
Iii, p. 93, n. 77) i s perhaps in-
( a s i t i s talcen by S p e i s e r , -
d i c a t e d by the form be-en-ni-e [-iml-ma-a-ni-i-in (l?L 4: 101) ,

f t -mately i n br olcen context.

~ mor
( 6 ) o l l u i - ( o r ol1~1-y-3) " b e s i d e s , moreover, on the
other hand ( ? ) ." The meaning "on t h e o t h e r hand" mould seem

t o f i t Z!L 3:44 where T u z r a t t a introduces a negative condi-

t i o n : "1f o l l u i t h e l 8 t a b l e t s of t h e d o w y s of my s i s t e r -
r e l a t i o n s 1 9 a r e not s u f f i c i e n t ( ? ) . "*' I would connect the
- "change(?) , a l t e r ( ? )
r o o t with -011- .TI !I Besides, moreover"
f i t s the other occurrence i n QIL 3:75.
(7) pati-. The meaning of t h e p a r t i c l e i s uncertain.
I t occurs i n biL 4: 33,67,68 and 7 2 . Speiser suggests Itup to,
 24-4
as much as" in $129, on the basis of the passage in hiL
4:3 3 . In the other three passages it occurs in the phrase
zrilcm aati. If zukan eqtrals "small" [see below $8.7 ( 6 ) ] ,
11
then this phrase very plausibly could mean even a little,
as much as a little" but the contexts are all too obscure to
tell whether this meaning f i t s e
I1
(8) gataranni-. This particle possibly means formerly,
in former -I;imes." This .meaniilg is a suggestion based solely
on the contexts in tvhich the word occurs. In 1:G5 it seems
to contrast with benni- "now at this time," and it fits the
occurrences in BL
: 2:15, 3:63 and 3:69 quite well, particularly
the latter two.
( 9 ) In $128, Speiser cites the form e-ta-la-an in
:,3L 4:45 as an example of the "prepositional" root efi- used
as a particle meaning 11 why." This must now be abandoned in
the light of the recognition of the nominal force of m-
as "person, body." eta+lla+an paQQitQ-iff kuz-oQ-o prob-
ably means tI
you have physically detained my envoys. 1I
3.6 Particles exhibiting -2 stems.
(1) inns-. The meaning of this particle is yet un-
certain. r Speiser decided on an in%erjecfion
In IY &l29
"behold," rather than a conjunction, since the paaticle is
not restricted to any particular type of sentence. But is
a conjunction necessarily restricted to any particular type
of sentence? Several contexts rather clearly suggest a
telnporal conjunction "when. I I Thus innaAmatnin . . . in JfL
2: 6 could be rendered: "when I heard (that) Keliya and Mane
 245
had gone, I ... ! l 2 l The t a o occrcrrenccs i n 1% 2:14 and 16
a r e i n sosewhat broken context, but the general sense i s
c l e a r and the f o r c e "~vhen"makes sense: "SO ( s e e above
under a-)
biane, my b r o t h e r s envoy, i s coming. 'IYhen (inn%
lownin) the dowry was . . .,22 and when 23
m y g i f t , which w a s
formerly bestowed by m y b r ~ t h e r ,was .. = by >!axle, I as-
sembled a l l my land . . ." So a l s o "~vhen"f i t s BIL 3: 11-13
well: "?Tow then, I have given my brother ' s m i f e and she has
gone on her way t o my b r o t h e r . Yhen she w i l l have a r r i v e d ,
then my brother v ~ i l lsee t h e manner i n which she has been
given." Again AIL 3: 21-23 "NOW
then, whea m y brothe?s wife
- she w i l l have been made known t o
mi f Z have come, and when
~ 5 b- r o t h e r , then l e t my ,Bi,24 the one f o r me, go on i t s
~xay." F i n a l l y "when" a l s o f i t s 1\IL 3: 29: "When I t ( t h e dowry)
m i l l be s a t i s f a c t o r y i n my b r o t h e r ' s presence, then l e t the

d i s t a n t heavens . . . 25 11

The xse of imna- p l u s the r e s e r i c t i v e p a r t i c l e -maman

( s e e $9.7) i n the sense of " a t any time" P i t s the context
of ?,:L 3: I i 0 and 116: "Let no enicrgency of my brother a r i s e
ii
a t any time.
(2) oya-. h p a r t i c l e o f negative or adversative f o r c e ,
'lrpo'l or "011 the c o n t r a r y , " i n XIL 4:46,57. s e e B , p. 94
and F r i e d r i c h , BChG, p. 28 and n o 3.
11
( 3 ) Quka-. Perhaps " & l o n g , wi.th" or a l s o , too." It
occurs i n brolcen and u n i n t e l l i g i b l e context i n BiL 2:7O, and
ii? t h e very c l e a r passage i n h:L 4: 52 and 53. I n the l a t t e r
passage eitlier of t h e above meanings f i t s ths: context.
 246
8.7 P a r t i c l e s e x h i b i t i n g consonant steins.
( 1 ) aiianun-. ? h i s par-1;icle i s an adverb or coiijrmction
11
meaning " t h u s , i n t h i s manner, i n the manner t h a t . The
p a r t i c l e means "thus" i n t h e sense of manner r a t h e r than
r e s u l t which i s expressed by a-.
Kote p a r t i c t r i a r l y Xi
2: 56: " I n this m_ankzer, theni I have s ~ ~ n I i e n
the^ t r r ~y brc-

t h e r f a ~ d )he knows , I ' and I l l 3: 51 "1n t h i s rnanner 1 pro-

mised, saying . . .".. -
For i t s zse a f t e r inu- " a s t ' i n com-
par isons see $3 .A ( 1) above.
CI
f t i s used before t h e as-

s e v e r a t i v e nhrase S i + n i n m a s + . . . [see $8.5 (2)

r II
above] a s a c o n j m c t i o n , e . g . %
.,l~ 3:62-65: ~ n ?the nlallner
tha* I should bestow ( g i f t s ) upon fiy b r o t h e r , so indeed
I do; and i n t h e manner tliat I should ~ ' L ~ Vbeen
C faithful
witb my brother and ic the manner t h a t I should be on
f r i e n d l y terms (with him), so indeed I am."
r r u ~tnh e p a r t i c l e begius a sentence, and consequently
r;rT...-

aptxmits a s s o c i a t i v e s , i-t:has t h s form anam- w i t h an h-con-

12ecting vowel before t h e pronominal a s s o c i a t i v e s . llowever,
5vI1en used Eitivcrbiaily f u r t h e r oil i n the sentence, i t i s
writ-fieil si~ilplya-nag, 3 . g . I;;L 4: 10.,13.
(2) s-.
This p a r t i c l e i s used as an i n t e r j e c t i o n i n
~oghazlrb'iIIurrian, see Speiser , HI, p. 9 0 .
(3 - Although the n a r t i c l e may have been a~&-,
t h e evidence is predominanfly i n favor of an ~.'~f?azrgmented x-
11
diphthong. I t c l e a r l y rneans if." A s Speiser n o t e s , the

r o o t i s probably r e l a t e d t o the nominal =- used p r e p o s i t i o n -

a l l y with the f o r c e of "presence." The senzantic r e l a t i o n i s
 247
not clear. :iote % -c cop. -2 i n iliL 2: 53,86,90; 3:&!,93;
4:65,66,57. Unfortunately, a l m o s t a l l of these a r e i n ob-
scure c o n t e x t , bet ce%e SIT; 3: bAA. I n t h e previous paragraph
TuSratta has brought up t h e dowry t a b l e t s of h i s s i s t e r , his
father's sister z ~ c ?the tzklet of his elrn do:vry given with
11
h i s daugh&@r and urges the P h a r a o h t o p r o c z r e them a ~ d Beax

xyhether t h e dowry i s l a r g e , whether i t i s e x c e l l e n t , ~vhether

II
i t is snita'ble for my brother. The o p e ~ i n gsentence of the

n e s t paragraph then says: " I f , moreover, t h e i r t a b l e t s , of

26
t h e i r dowries, specif i c a i l y t h e ones o f ray s i s t e r - r e l a t i o n s ,
a r e not l a r g e ,27 then ;ay brother
"28 .
With t h e a s s o c i a t i v e s -ma+nin i t occurs i n hiL 3: 111,
II
4:9,5.4-,jY. Three of these c l e a r l y r e q u i r e the meaning if."

Late e s p e c i a l l y 4: 53-56: "Let not ny brother send m o t h e r

envoy, but l e t biane be s e n t . I f my b r o t h e r does not29
send kiane, but w i 11 send another, then I do not want him."
a-i-la-an occurs i n hi-L 2: 58,75; A: 20,26,128. Only
4:20 and 26 a r e i n c l e a r context and " i f " i s required, note

31L 4: 17-21: " ~ i ~ o r rany

~ d e v i l r e p o r t s ~Yhateverbe cormunicated
t o m y b r o t h e r concerning me or my land, l e t not iny b r o t h e r
heed t h e s e words if they are neS spoken by Xane and by Keliya. IT

I n view of t h e c o n s i s t e n t s p e l l i n g with .a s i n g l e -1- i t is

n o t c l e a r tvlzether t h i s i s the pronominal a s s o c i a t i v e -=-
11
they," s e e the d i s c ~ r s s i o l li n $9.325.
(4) pekan, meaning tmlcnown. The p a r t i c l e occurs only
i n BIL 1: 1 1 2 , 4: 107.
( 5 ) t i Q Q a n , "very much. 11
The meaning of t h i s p a r t i c l e
has been Imo~msince early in llurrian studies, see the
references in Ei, p. 34.
(6) -zt~lcan. The meaning of this particle is rmcertain.
Tentatively it can he connected with Z'cd~ein U g . 3-3 Voc.
2: 19, ~*&ich translates S~meriaa[ T U ~ ]. A A (i'dd.fadian -
p-ag-ri:
-
I .
SiilaLL y
7 2 A ,
~i b ~ L G *
- t 30 -r-- n,,-
ivr:il f $ i s Z X S C ~ : ~Z Z S : G ~ G Z S to
11
--
tiQQan very much," and hence co~rldmean "very little."
irnfortrnately all its occurrences (XL 2: 11; 3: 16; A: 67,65,72)
are obscure. For its ase with p t i - see $8.5 ( 7 ) above.

Conpare also zu-Itu-u-u-un (XTL4:6 9 ) .

8.8 The rslative particle ye-/=-. This particle
introduces relative clauses, functioning both as a relative
djective and as a relative pronovai, with an impersonal ante-
cedent. It al~~~ays
stands first in the sentence when function-
ing as a rela-bi~e. 1%tvo irzstances it fmctions adverbially
(see belolv) in 'i1r1zichcase it does not stand first.
Frmctionally we can distinguish a relative adjective
fmctioa and a relative pronoun function. ;'{hen the particle
frrnctions as a relative pronorm if acts independently as the
goal or subject of the clazse; ~vlzereaswvben it f-rmctionsas
a relative adjective it introduces a clause which contains
31
i-tsown goal or subject. Eote the following illustrations.
A. Relative adjective function:
1. Singular:
(I) ye+ma+nin tiwe ?%me-0 @en-iff-ta kat-ill-
-
w
et-a+~n[malman (1lL 2: lot-102), "IYhat+?+indeed(?3 word
---

Mane-by brother-my-to declare-future-by-himin-partic-

~ ~ l,"
a ir .e. ":'!hat word Liane w i l l s p e c i f i c a l l y d e c l a r e
11
t o EY brother.
Colllpare a l s o EIL 2: 79.
2. P l u r a l :

fa eti-i-ta tiwe-:aA 'lES tan-00-a-We-ila L 3 : 52-53),

11--.-
\vnat+%hey+icdecci('?
j ihr tatalna-by grandfather -my-by
father-thy-for person-his-to things-ones done-past-
by-hitn-non. -yar t -ones, . II
.
i e. "what t h i n g s Ar tatama, my
grandfather, d i d f o r your f a t h e r ' s sake.
11

~jrhat+they-I-indeed(?)word(s) -ones a l l - o f -them brother-

my-by declared-past-by-him-norno-part-ones desired-trans.-

stative done-past-by-me ," i . e . "i;;orv then, a l l the nords

~yhichziy brother Izas declared (and) d e s i r e s , these I have
I1
performed tenfold.
dompare a l s o ;,iL 1: 36-93, 38-100, 10~1,-105; 2: 13-22;

B. Xelative pronorm frmction:

(4) ya+ati x - H i maria Quene VurroQe I<UHomini

1;LT:;
yatan r - i - i maria Quene XaQrivanni KUXoroini

( $ 1 ~3: 5-61 , "'l'i'hat-tar~d d e s i r e - t r a n s . -neg. a t - a l l 32

k i ~ ~ r r i aland
n rvhat+and d e s i r e - t r a n s .-neg. 23-all
Xgyl3tian
... - land," i.e. "';/hat t h e l i t ~ r r i a nla-nd docs n o t at
a l l d e s i r e , and what tlre $gyptian land does n o t at a l l
!!
desire.
( 5) ye+me+nin Ben-if
- f -uQ kepan-e t-a-lnnarnan f5 ; ~
2:62-6 3 ) , "l,Vlmt+?+indeed(?) brother-my-by gxailt -f nture-

.
isy-hiiwin-part i ctrlar ," i e. "Yihat lrly b r o t h e r s p e c i f i c a l l y
f!
will g r a n t .

Co:~i-pare a l s o I I ~ L3: 91-92.

2. Plural:

L<-I -I ' '

--..
Qen-if("f)-ge-ne
- e t i - i y-
- e-- L,AL omin-i-fe-ne
----
eti-i-
y-e

future-by-lii~x brother-my-of -one person-his-of land-his-

of -one person-i ts-of t r u e - i n t r .+they+and a a t h e n t i c -

i . . '' "'hat --h a l i y a nnrj :,lane w i l l declare concerning ny

b r o t h e r ( o r ) h i s laid, they a r e t r u e and atrtl~en-tic,a ~ d

( 7 ) ya+la+z.n gur-i-1d:i 5 o i n - n ] anni -

0ine-
[. . .ins-n(7) p - i d e a t + t i-
[la- ... ( h f ~2:73-

74.), "'i'/hat+they-tand d e s i r e - t r a n s . -neg. land- [ones]

those two-[:. . . ] ~v&at+v~e+a~361 desire-trans.-neg.
t;ogether+w[e . . . I , " 1.e. ":;Plat those two . . . l a a d s
do n o t d e s i r e and what we together do not d e s i r e ... 11

I n the above examples two t h i n g s need t o be noted.

 25 1
F i r s t , t h e p a r t i c l e ga-/=- does not need t o take a nominal-
ized verb t o form a r e l a t i v e clause. This i s seen by a com-
parison of examples ( 2 ) ar,d ( 3 ) w i t h (1) and ( 6 ) . Botlz ( 2 )

and ( 3) a r e p1t;ral , and i t can be noted t h a t every other ex-

ample of the selcativc adjective used i ? i t k : a -,lural g m ?
uses a nominalized verb. I-To~~ever, example ( 1 ) shows t h a t
bile . z e i s % i ~ ~
A*- e j e c t i v euse does no% r e q u i r e a nominaiized
Vsrb - !VL,-,
, < A L U ~ conditions the occtirrence of the nominaiized

verb i n the r e l a t i'tre c l a u s e and t h a t d i f f e r e n c e i n meaning

e x i s t s , if any, between t h e construction t?i t h t h e nominal ized
verb and t h a t without i s n o t c l e a r . I t may simply be s t y -
listic. - is not
Secondly, t h e pronominal a s s o c i a t i v e -1la-
necessary when the antecedent is p l u r a l , a s can be seen from
e l ( 6 . This i s indubitably another example of the f a c t
t h a t Iftrzrian f e e l s no a b s o l u t e need for the e x p r e s s i o i ~of
the p l u r a l vhan the p l u r a l i t y i s c l e a r f r o m the context.
See t h e renlarks concerning the expression of p l u r a l i f y i n
the nominal ( $6.4532 and note 1 1 2 t h e r e t o ) , and i n the
agentive s u f f i x e s on the i n d i c a t i v e verb ( $ 7 . 4 5 2 5 ) . Sx-
ample ( 6 ) a l s o makes i t very d i f f i c t ~ l tt o t r e a t t h e as-
s o c i a t i v e -=-/-me-- as t h e t h i r d persoE s i n g u l a r pronominal
a s s o c i a t i v e ( s e e $9.324-) .
F i n a l l y , with t h e r e s t r i c t i v e a s s o c i a t i v e -maman,
ga- occurs a d v e r b i a l l y w i t h the f o r c e "tvhatever" i n b!L
4,:13,24.
 9.1 General considerations: As noted in $5*3> the
associative is a suffix which can be appended to either n o w
inals, verbals, or particles--3eing the only appendage pos-
sible with the particle--but which does not perform fmctions
on the word level. It func.ticl?s, rather, on the sentence
levelc The frmctions performed include fhose of predication,
sentence connection, pronominal subject and goal, and others.
9.2 The associative vredicative ctnd copulative particle

- e
-n- This ubiquitous particle has been interpreted mainly
in two ways, either as the mark of the subject or zero-suffix
fora of the nominal,' or as the indicator of the verbal
copula* 'The former has mainly been espoused by Goetze in
"'l'he n-form of the Ilurrian ?;otm," J A O S 60(1?4.0): 217-223 and
in "~ncliticPronouns in l:Iusrian," JCS 2(1?48): 255-269; the
study in 3 ,@203-209.
lattex by Speiser in a. thorough..~. ,<.

The details of the two views need not be presented here.

Suffice it to say that the evidence seems preponderantly in
favor of Speiser's interpretationo As Goetze has sho~vn,the
particle does not always stand on the subject or goal of the
sentence, btrt only when it stands first in its clauseo This

- znd the .other case

formal difference between the suffix -n
suffises, which never leave the norm they govern, presents
252
 253
the gravest of difficulties to Goetze' s view. However, it
harmonizes nicely with speiserts view. In normal word order
Hurrian introduces the subject in the intransitive sentence
and the goal in the transitive sentence2 as early as possible
in the sentence. The verb i n the intransitive sentence a ~ d
the agent plus the verb in the transitive sentence normally
follow. Thus a position c ~ i i i c i d e n t that of the sc~bject
6r g o a l om as close as possible, is just what would be ex-
aected for the predicative particle which links the subject
or goal to the predicate. Note also our interpretation of
- which appears on the jussive forms of the verb in
the -n-
97.46321 A. 3.
However, a definitive demonstration is not yet possible
due to the uany morphemes whose functions are not yet well
understood. In many sentences we cannot even be sure of the
presence or absence of the 2-suffix.
9 * 3 The pronominal associalives. These associatives,
11
termed subjective" by Speiser in I B $ 2 13 , function in a very
similar manner to the zero-suffix form of the noun, i.e. they
are used as the subject of intransitive verbs and of transitive
subject-action constructions, and as the goal of transitive
verbs.
9.31 The pronominal associative naradiem. The pro-
nominal associatives are summarized in the paradigm on the
following page.
9.32 The form of the snffixes. Only the 1st person
singular and p l ~ r a 1and the third person singular andplural
 The Pronominal Associative Paradigm

Sing
1st person -
-tta-
2nd persoii - - -3
3rd person --
ma-

a r e reasonaaly c e r t a i n *
9.321 The f c r n -of the first person singplar
-
-=a-.

T h i s i s the only one of the s u f f i x e s vrhicb i s i n v a r i a a l e in

form, always appearing as -&a-.
9.322 T'ile form of' t h e f i r s t person p l u r a l - t i l (l)a-.
T h i s srrff i x i s one of the several s~rf'fixes which shorn a cor-

r e l a t i o n between the doxbling of the consonant and the p l h z

w r i t i n g of the a-vowel i n the coonectivs -~J
I~
. Thus one
finds either -til-la-a-ao or ti-la-an. No conditioning
f a c t o r nor difference can be noted. For example, consider
the passage i n ?iL 1:76-78. aere - t i l ( l ) a - "r.sl' forms the
n o a l of the t r a z s i t i v e p l u r a l jussive verb t a t - a Q t - i t e n
l
2

tI
"let b e loved. I t i s repeated etrphatically f i v e times i n
%he sentence before the verb. On the iutroSlrrctory ? a r t i c l e
11
anam- i n l i k e manner" i t i s w r i t t e n - t i l - l a - a - a n ; however,
on three of the f i v e divine n w e s nhich f o r n the corqomd
agent of the sentence i t appears a s - a - l a - a n ; whereas on
the r e s ~ m p t i v emaneo(0) - "by these" i t appears again a s
-il-l-a-m T h i s a l t e r n a t i o r ~i n -tills i s exactl, p a r a l l e l

t o t h a t found iri - l ( l ) a - "they, them" t o be disczssed below,

which fact i s of the -z-t;raost i q o r t a ~ ~ cfor
e the i n t e r p r e t a t i o n
..

of the phenomenon.
9.323 The 2nd person. I n the a r t i c l e " ~ n c l i t i c
Pronoms i n Brrrrian," JCS 2(1?4+8): 255-269, Goetze sugests
Yh8t t h e missing s e c o ~ dperson s u f f i x i s -to be found i n the
form -ma-. This i s very ~nlli3.cely. Note f i r s t t h a t ---
never occurs i n 5;L without a folloning - ~ a - a n ,whereas the
other pronominal asaocf atives rarely a2p2ezc

do riot sees t o f o l i o w aclmorrledged p r i n c i p l e s of Irfurriaa p a n -

inar. 5 I t i s simply not yossible t o take -the -=a on kenan-et-
a-minanan i11 XL 2: 6 3 a s an appositive srrbject of the senteace,
11
thou, u y brother, 11 f o r , i n order Tor i t t o f o r m an appositive
agent t o Ben-iff--&,"by my brother ," i t vmuld a l s o have t o be
ztgentive, a2d then ivouid bave the form me-e-eg, i .e. fe-8
1: A bee-by." Note t h a t nst one of ~ o e t z e ' sesaaples shows the
-mila fmictiming e i t h e r a s t h e subject of an i n t r a n s i t i v e
verbal or t h e goal of a t r a n s i t i v e verbal as the other pro-
nominal a s s o c i a t i v e s do almost erclusively. Consequently,
11
t h i s s u f f i x rixst s t i l l be regarded a s p a r t o f the resfrictive"
snZ4ix -ii3;1aian as i t was regarded by Speiser, ( s e e 39.7 be-
1 ow) .
9.324 Tne t h i r a ner son singular , In $217 Speiser
t;ll:es the s u f f i x -=-/-=-as the t h i r d person singular pro-
nominal associative. A s Goef ze has noted [ " ~ n c l i t i cPronouns, I t

-
J C S 2 ( 1945) : 257-2593 t h i s has been based upon t h e supposed
pitralleZism between i n ~ ~ + t t a + n and
in -I n ~ . + ~ e - i - niinn 5"i 1:74 and

1:75. A s Goetze shows, the p a r a l l e l i s between the - L a -

 256
II
m e " i n the f i r s t sentence and t h e Ben-iff "my brother" i n
t h e second sentence. Thus -=-/-m- mst be viewed as a
6
p a r t i c l e af i n d e f i n i t e n e s s as i t w a s taken by Biesserschmidt.
Another i n d i c a t i o n i n t h i s same d i r e c t i o n i s the f a c t t h a t
-
-me-/-@- never appears on the verb,? nor does i t ever appear
added t o nominals as the other pronominal a s s o c i a t i v e s do

a.g. ';lm;~nu-<~j+tiia+an(ili i : = / 6 ) , g~yaxoDga+tta+an( a i ~

3 : 7 3 ) , t-.--
i % - l l a .---
+ a ~- (NL ~ ~ , : 1 6e) t,c . I n fact i t almost always
appears at tacked t o p a r t i c l e s , e. g . Bu+uie+nin, unu+me+nin,
ay+ma+nin; inna+ne+nin, inna+ma+nin, ye+matnio, ye+me+nin,
ya+ne+nin, e t c . Mote a l s o the very frequent presence of --.
Hence i t seems a l m o s t c e r t a i n t h a t i t niust be an a s s o c i a t i v e
ivhich adds some force t o the p a r t i c l e s involved.
8

I n " ~ n c l i t i c~ r o n o u n ,"
s JCS 2(1948): 259-261, Goetze
suggests t h a t this 3rd person pronoun i s t o be found i n t h e
-n- which appears on c e r t a i n v e r b a l forms. H e suggests f u r t h e r
t h a t t h i s becomes -- when another s u f f i x follows. Note a l s o
t h a t Speiser e a r l i e r i n If1 $ 2 0 8 had. suggested t h a t t h e cop-
u l a t i v e p a r t i c l e -n(n)- had an o r i g i n a l pronominal o r i g i n . 9
T h i s i n t e r p r e t a t i a n i s favored by the Uraxtean 3rd person
singular v e r b a l object s u f f i x -@, cf. Diakonoff, PSVX, p.
601 and t a b l e p. 602. Some examples c l e a r l y and s t ~ o n g l y
argue f o r a pronominal f o r c e , e c g .
( 1 ) pal-i-?&i+n ( ~ g A-i5
, Bil.: 1 8 ) , "knows-trans.-neg.a
11
he," i.e. "he does n o t lino:r.
 257
?+indeed(?) word hiane-by brother-n;y-to declared-?-
fut .- by-hin~in-particular good-intr.+it true+and,
(1

(I
i.e. what word AIane will declare to my brother it is
good and true."

hasten(? 1 -7-trar;s.-jussive dismiss-trans.- jussive go-

jt~ssive-elnph.+they+so-that tiane+cop.+and brother-my-by
also(?) send-trans.-jussive go-juss.+he+so-that envoy(s) -
my-with also(?), 11 i.e. " ~ e tmy brother hasten (and) dis-
miss %y envoys so that they may g o . And let my brother
send Mane also so that he may go with m
y envoys also."
( A } 2+maA~in biane+n Ben-iff-r;rQ.... naQQ-i-y-a-ma o i i+man
pa0Q-et-a pr-i-uff-u+~ir,wan(Xi, 4.: 54-57), Ifif+?+indeed(?)
-
.
;.Iane+cop. brother-my-by sent-trans -by-him-? another+
conn. sent-fut.-by-hini desire-trans.-neg.-by-ne+him+
then,iI i .e. "If my brother does not send Mane, but
sends another, then I do not want h i m . "
Zxample three is particularly instructive in view of the
parallism between the form itt-ai-0a+lla+an and itt-ai+nna+an.
kiowever , this corrld very well be the =-copula suffix which
frequently goes on jussive forms, and which doubles hefbre
\ '?
, $7.46321 A. 1.
the suffixes -% and - ~ n see This is clearly
the case with those jussive forms that append -an or -man
-
after the -q [contrary to the view of Goetze, 2(1948):
 258

2601.
I t i s p o s s i b l e , however, t h a t t h e r e i s no 3rd person
s i n g u l a r aronorninal a s s o c i a t i v e and t h a t these elements must
bear some other i n t e r p r e t a t i o n . This may be i n d i c a t e d by
the f a c t t h a t t b s fmeqaency of occurrence o f -=,--
tta
and - t i l l a i n i n i t i a l p o s i t i o n i n t h e sentence i s nluch
mreater than t h a t of
b --.'" 1n

S u f f i c e i t t o say t h a t n o d e f i n i t i v e conclcsion m i l l
be p o s s i b l e r m t i l p_tany more contexts become c l e a r lexicog-
. .
r a p h i e a l l y and g r a ~ q n a t i c a l l y .
3.325 The form of t h e 3rd person p l u r a l - l ( l ) a - .
This s u f f i x appears a s both -1-la-a-an and -la-an, exactly
analogorrs t o t h e forms of - t i l ( l ) a - noted above. In " ~ n -
c l i t i c Pronorms ," 2(194!3): 261-263 Goeeze i n t e r p r e t s t h e
- as the p l u r a l forru of h i s "accusative" s u f f i x
forms i n -Ian
-n-,
- formec!, by the ~ i d i t i o i iof the p l u r a l s u f f i x -5- vhicb
shifts t o -L- i n t h i s p o s i t i o n . I f we a r e c o r r e c t i n i n t e r -
preting the singular s a P f i x -
-3- d i f f e r e n t l y , then t h i s i n t e r -
p r e t a t i o n ri;t~sta l s o be i n c o r r e c t . Xowever , t h e r e a r e pro-
blems with Goetze's i n t e r p r e t a t i o n q u i t e a p a r t f r o n any
r e l a t i o n t o the singular form. The nxost s e r i o u s blow i s
given by the p a r a l l e l i s m of these forms with those of the
1 s t person p l u r a l s u f f i x - t i l ( l ) a - , noted above, I n Goetze's
view the s a f f i x forms the mark of the "accusative:' ( i n our
view t h e form is the of t r a n s i t i v e verbs) which be-
l o n g s t o a noun t h a t may e i t h e r immediately precede or follow

l a t e r i n the sentence. Koa i n the sentences with -tills-,

t h i s a s s o c i a t i v e i t s e l f forms the goal ( o r "accusative") and
-
lrence -there Ls no noun t o vrlzich the v a r i a t i o n i n t h e f i n a l -1-
can be a s c r i b e d . Coapare the e s a c t l y p a r a l l e l forms i n

;ya+til;tt-an I
-
--A
- i - ~at+ti[la] . . . i n TtIL 2:73-74. sere
ya+la e x a c t l y p a r a l l e l s ya+tiPa and both a n t i c i n a t e the ,sub-
+
JGU U J ,
---:- ---
V:ISIU-I~~ i ~ ti h e f i r s f and Bat+tiia ill t h e second. Se-
condly, note t h a t t h e r e i s not t h e b i f u r c a t i o n i n usage claimed
It
by Goetze. l1e says: t h e o5servation is f h m d w $ n t a l %fiat t h e
pronorm -@ i s f o r m d only avI~ent h e seiitence contains no nom-
i n a l o b j e c t , t h e element -la(n) on the other hand always be-
longs t o a, norm t h a t may e i t h e r i m ~ ~ e c l i a t e lprecede
y or f o l -
low l a t e r i n t h e sentence." This i s contradicted by the foP-
lowing e x a w l es:

m a (XL 3: 17-19) " t h e things which I have pre-

s e n t e d f o r ~y b r o t h e r I have presented, and my brother
w i l l see them, f o r they are coming f o r m y brother ."

" I have r e l e a s e d ICeliya, ii?y e m o y , and Iiane, thy envoy,

I1
aad they are coming t~rmy brother.
(6) Q e n - i f f - p + a n a y --
i-ta tiwe Qur~ve t e a kat--i-

-
I&-oilni PPwan
anann-~-~dcai-
.-
anti un-o-1clca-t la+an talagt3-

ne-fa ay-i-ta (HL 4: 11-31, "a:az~y e v i l r e p o r t s a r e not

being declared i n m y b r o t h e r ' s presence, these do not
 come into the presence of the c5ief ."
Zxan-ples (4-1 and (5) show the verb -=-"come" in
parallel passages. Note that example (4) uses -&- ~vhile
exaxple ( 5 ) uses -
&
a
- as the subject of s-. Example ( 5 )
- 4~L~u- l~t sthe same fact.
ea u The verb niz'iln- tI to be" f i m c % i o n s

here i n i t s fsle as sfi asseyera$iye--reinf~rcii:g the state-

ment .l2
Kate that its subject has the form -La- whereas
the syntactically parallel m.-0-ldc has the for12 -Pa- as its
subject. Other esanples could be cited. These examples
-- are free variants.
show that -La- and -la-
Finally, Goetze questions the interpretation of - L a -
and -la- as associative pronotms by cluesfioning the theory
of pronominal anticipation advanced by ~ r i e d ich.13
r But

this has several factors in its favor. First note that

- "I, ~ne"and -tiPla- "i!?e, us" invariably stand on the
-tSa-
first word of the clause (or t h e second if the first is a
particle which has two associatives already) , even though it
is repeated later in the sentence. Second note that normal
kiarrian word order gives great proriiinence to the subject of
the intransitive sentence or the subject-action sentence asd
to the goal of the agentive sentence by placing them first in
the sentence order after the introductory particles, if ally
( cf. $244) . Tlius , when the subject or goal is placed
later in the sentence, it is natural to expect an anticipsfory
pronotm in the first part of the sentence. A good n m b e r of
- in ?:iL can be attributed to this fact,
the occurrences of -11s-
particularly those in. the ya- relative clauses which most
 26 1

o f t e n place the g o a l fuxther on i n the sentence c l o s e t o

the nominal izecl. verb. F i n a l l y those seiltences i v h i ch piace
- and goal together, e i t h e r with the
both a s s o c i a t i v e -1la-
a s s o c i a t i v e appended t o t h e goal or the a s s o c i a t i v e appended
t o the i n t r o c l ~ ~ c t o rpya r t i c l e with the goal following i m -
mediately, ntay be emphatic o r , more l i k e l y , t h i s may be an
a l t e r n a t i v e nethod of exnressing tile p l ~ x r a l i t yof t h e goal.
This may explain :vhy the p l n r a l - L a - avpears f a r more
r e g u l a r l y than the s i n g u l a r -=a-. I t can be noted t h a t i n
the majority of these cases the goal does not c a r r y tile
pltrral s u f f i x -na, ( e x c e ~ tf o r e x a q l e s w i t h ya- pltrs t h e
nominalized verb, i n which case -= i s r e g u l a r , but here the
- has been seen t o be a n t i c i p a t o r y ) .
f o r c e of %he -Pla-
As a r e s u l t of these considerations we z1~1st r e j e c t the
views of Goetze and t r e a t -&a- - as f r e e v a r i a n t s
azd -la-
of the 3rd person p i u r a l nronolninal a s s o c i a t i v e .
9.33 -
'Yne uses of t h e pronominal a s s o c i a t i v e s .
These s u f f i s e s ftmcticn i n e s a c t l y the sa;r,ue manner as t h e
z e r o - s u f f i x form of the nomil~al, i .e. as t h e sti13ject sf t h e
i n t r a r i s i t i v e verb alzd o f +he t r a n s i x i v e strijject-action con-
struction. These uses have been discussed i n considerable
detail in $214-218; they w i l l be only S r i e f l y reviewed
here.
9.331 Their f u n c t i o n as s ~ ~ b j e c t . For t h e f ~ m c t i o n
of these a s s o c i a t i v e s as the s u b j e c t o f i n t r a n s i t i v e verbs
i n examqles (4-) ,
note the forl:ls tm-a-t-lla- i31~dm~-o-ld~~zt.lla
( 5 ) and (6) above. For t h e t h i r 8 person singular note the
jtrssivr f o r n s o f - - - "go" c i t e d i n example f 3 ) d ~ o v eand
%he inc'iica-tive forill of fabr- " t o 73e i n exai-irple (2).
For tile r i r st person s i n g ~ l a rancl. p l ~ x r a ln o t e tlic f ollov~ing:
a12t1r-ga.+tta+a[n] --ti0Qa.n t i Q Q a n p i s o Q t -
teonae
1 -..-
-
ey{z (!...L 3. C,I
A
d - CJCJ\ / 5 113----.
YGP thi wuu3.d r e j o i c e v e r y very

(8) mann-o-ld~a+-tilL%an av;la,tt-a~g-a (YL 3: 117) , "we a r e

not i n a s t a t e of . .I1

9.332 Their f u n c t i o n a s coal. 'these a s s o c i a t i v e s

have a p ~ e a r e i !a s t h e g o a l of t r a i s i t i v e s olz numerous oc-
casions i n c i t a t i o n s of' :?assages frolit ?;!I, i n t h i s stully and
hence w i l h n o t b e fz:rther i l l u s t r a f e d here. Srxciz use i s
conuson. !lov~ever, i x l olze case they ftulction as an i n d i r e c t
goal a:~d t h i s has n o t h i t h e r t o been s t r e s s e d . Late the

Eollov~ingpassage:
(3) piyarohJa+ti;a-ta:~ teona 0en-iff-LIQ kepan-r;-en
----
(XL 3 : 7 3 - ~ L I . )"gold+ma+anci
, nuch brother-my-i3y granted-
1I
'?-jzssive," i.e. "Let my brother g r a n t me r ~ ~ u cgold.
b
In IE $214, p. 152, Speiser c i t e s this as a n exazple
of -=a- ~xsedas the goal o f t h e sentence. 3 u t i f tile goal
be d e f i n e d a s t h a t sentence elelcent d i r e c t l y a f f e c t e d by the

v e r b a l a c t i o n performed by t h e a g e n t , then t h e goal o f t h i s

sentence i s $iyaro&f_a "gold." This i s what i s s e n t . The
a s s o c i a t i v e -=a- "rle" m u s t here r e p r e s e n t t h e i n d i r e c t

goal.
9.4 The connectives -&I/-= and -A. These have a l s o
Isbussed at considerable l e n g t h by Speiser i n
ijeen d-: --- I3 $210-
2P2a, and by F r i e d r i c h i n UCI?.G, pp. 14-21.

3 .r!l - -&/-;sno
The connective The for^^ of the s u f f i x
i s st~b;jectt o the a l t e r n a t i o n -a-an versus -an. No f a c t o r
can be observed which occasions the one or t h e o t h e r , nor i s
t h e r e any d i f f e r e n c e i n usa,ge observable a s t h e r e ' i s f o r the
v a r i a n t forms of -=discussed i n $9.42 below. For the con-
comi tz:lt .'ozh?e -r it iz;: of ti:- ~ r c c e 5 . i - g C C E S C E ~ X ~scz$ ?. ;??
move. Following S ~ e i s e rwe i n d i c a t e t h e nLZne form by -&.
as F r i e d r i c h and S-peiser n o t e , t h i s i s t h e riain cormec-
t i v e i n tlL. I t car! be used t o connect words, e.g. r4<e1iya-~
q*ne-@Q+an (5% 4: 27) , "by Kel i y a and by h:anel' ; verbal forms ,
e.3. peteat-sn+an . n i -h a r i 8ir-enn+an. (9% 3: 3 4 ) , " l e t the
dowry be s a t i s f a c t o r y and. l e t i t be f i t t i n g t ' ; and whole
sentences, e .g. note t h e -& i n e r a q l ~ & ~ s f r & 87.324 above
urhich j o i n s the two sentences " ~ e m
t y brother hasten (and)
c t i s ~ i s sn!y envoys s o t h a t they 31ay go. &i l e t my brother
n
J

send bfane a l s o s o t h a t lie may a l s o go ~ ? i t my

h envoys."

F r i e d r i c h a l s o noted t h a t t h i s connective could be

used t o ilitroduce srz'bordinate r e s u l t clauses. For t h i s use
n o t e again e x a w l e ( 3 ) referred. t o above; specif i c a l i y ift-
11
ai+nna+an " s o t h a t he may g o ,
- etc. T h i s f o r c e i s frequent

and does not seem l i m i t e d t o the cases o f cosatiguous verbal

forms noted by Speiser i n 1 2 ~ 6 9 5 0 . Thus i n the long passage
d e a l i n g with t i n e Burwe, 11
e v i l r e p o r t s , " i n 54L 4: 17-29, note
how the apodosis i n each case i s introduced by -&: "~hould
ally e v i 1 r e p o r t s wllatever by declared t o my brother concerning
me or my lalid, then l e t xy brother L o e n - i f f - u ( ~ ) + l l a + a n ]not
heed these vrords."
3.42 The connective -
&
a 'ithisrefers to the par-
ticle written -ma-a-an rather than -!na-an, foilowing the
convention of Speiser in u. two writings have been
in%erpreted by Speiser a ~ Goetze
d as coz~posite;fcrncd ~f
miu-an or m%n, cf. I11 5212. This seems all the nore probable
-*... .&L
i i u t ~ UJLUU
Al-
ULLG
- i ~ ~- -b e e-Ls
--A
~ p Lion
x UZ - E - i - as
~ --the 3rd person
singular pronominal associative is no longer valid (see
$9.324) . - by itself, in 9% at least, is
Bowever, that -%a-
"and" [so Goetze 5 fasc. 35(1~39): 106, n. 17, and
Speiser, m,$2121 is very unlikely, as we shall show.
It is of primary inportance to note that the spellings
-ma-a-an a ~ ~
-a&-an
d represent two different associatives
whose f~mctionis marlcedly different. The associative
written -ma-a-an is the connective, probably composed of
m w a n as per Speiser. The form -ma-an functions differently,
however, and can only represent the i~orcl-finalform of -@-/@-

to be discussed below. This has not hitherto been observed so

it nrill be established here in ftrll.

First i t lnrrst be observed that every clear occurrence
- as
of the ~rseof-man a, sentence connective exhibits the
pl5nE spellimlg -ma-a-an. Kate the following examples:
( 1) a~i~nn-en-i+ia+sn Ben-iff -uQ t~xne-yaQ Qine-yaQ-e-
nwlmarnan
- QsQ-en-i+lla+an QO-fe+m&n tqpe nibax-ne-fe
ar-oQ-ap-QQe-ne-fe arann-em-aman Qen-iff-u0 (biL
3: 39-41), "Let my brother procnre their two tablets and
let (hir I hear -them. & my tablet, the one of the dowry
 which I save, l e t n~ybrother procure ( i t ).I'

(ZiL 3: 106-107) , 11
I m i r r r i y a has made a, g o l d e n c a s t sfafxe

-
and be has bestoned it trfson Tvzratt-a, with a f f e s f ; i ~ n ~ "

irr-02 Icat-o6-~~-88e-na kn~r-i-ya-8Ge-na ant i+lla+an

a l l the things which my brother has declared as h i s

d e s i r e , these 1 have performed t e n f o l d I have not
vesed m y b r o t h e r ' s h e a r t by as much as a s i n g l e d i s t a n t
( ? ) word."

an f u r -..-s-.-t - a ar-all~-a00-oh-i-pa un-%+an Ben-iff- -

Qira+an @en-if--
f -ge-ne-nna ti8a-ima nibax i+&n kuro

@ z i ~ - i f f - z Qftrr-et-a
-- ar-oQ-i-mpu-QGa, ( > t i ~3: 11-16),
----
It..,<ow t-hen, I have give11 ~xyb r o t h e r ' s wife she has
gone on her may t o r i b r o t h e r . When she mill have
a r r i v e d , then m y b r o t h e r w i l l sec the nlanner i n which
she has been given, f o r she i s coming f o r ny Srother
confornable t o the s t a t e of rtly brother's Leart.
m y brother w i l l a l s o see i n what manner the dowry has
been giveno"
;late that each esa111ple of -
tmto-;?!%a
- introducing a new
paragraph [examples ( 3 ) and (4) and RIL 2: 57,107; 7: 21,351
has t h e p1EriB s p e l l i n g . I n exz't~nle (4) -ma-a-an occurs i n
con jtmction with 1.~1ro"again, on t h e other hand" which d l -
ways intr40clrrces another s u b j e c t Csee $8.4 ( 2 )]. Aote a l s o
&eilni+%Ln k ~ r 0(ML 4: 11) . The s d v e r s a t ive =a- ''hut, on the
contrary" $ 8 . 0/ I,2,;
\-:
appends -ma-a-an i n each of i t s t w o
occurrences, Othez esa-l$s i n clear sentex* ef -;m-a-8i?,

a s a sentence connective or word connective a r e : ~nto+rnSn

-
en-iff -ura+m%n (l:L 4: 111, s t a r t s new , 9al-i+n&n

Kow the s p e l l i n g -ma-an f u n c t i o n s very d i f f e r e n t l y ,

This i s m o s t s t r i k i n g l y seen i n those f a i r l y frequent occur-
rences i n which i t appears on the second word of a sentence
or on t h e verb of a sentence whose f i r s t word c a r r i e s the
connective -a.For the form on Z verb note example (1)
above and note 1~1.t h e r e t o * Note a l s o the follorving:

m y brother w i l l see the dowry of my b r o t l ~ e r ' swife which

fI
I have given.

4 5 7 ) "Let m y brother send ]+fane."

( 3) d'men-i+l la-t-an Ben-if f -ge-na ~ a l - ( i -)1 - a i c ~ a - l l a *
-
man (hiL 4: 6 5) , "?r~ay
- my brother ' s gods know. "
Other examples of t h e same phenomenon a r e : i Q a - ( Q > e l l a +
an Qulrkanne-sllatman (BIL 3: 54) , anti+l la+an 6&&anne+
- 1l%mn
(:,Ti, 3: 56), fur-et-a+lla+an rrnto ~ien-iff-tr(~)+1.la+mani : e i ~

- - (1,;L
1la+~an 3: 17-18?, and irinn-if fa^!^) +an nr-s-~ce-!-~n~+~~~

In only one context does Lhe associative -ma-an anpear

to be a sentence connective. This is in the passage ananmi+
tta+man. . . ati+nin mma+t.tatman anammi+tta+aan . . .
anami+tta+ma~ . . . ati+nin manna+t<t>wman in BIL 3:62-65,
wllich reads "As I should bestow (gifts) upon my brother, so
indeed I do; as I should have been faithful with my brother
I1
(and) as I should be on friendly terms, so indeed I am. How-
ever, this is deceptive. The sentences are "connected" by
the alternation of the comparative particles anamm- ..
-
ati-. Xote that there are s e v a r a l of these particles which
ei tiler Pmtcfion independently or append -a,
-a-nin, or
-me+nin and introduce new sentences withorvat eitlzes of the
connectives -& or -%, e. g . =-,*- inna- , and s - / .~ -
the -ma-an in tbe phrase anamnitpronominal-associative+
'i'l~x~s

-
man ~ m s tbe an example of the lr?ord-finalform of the particle
- -
-ma--/-me-. In this con~zectionthe form inna+lla+man ir? WIL
4:129 is exactly parallel; mfortunately the context is
br olren.
In these cases it c a m o f function as a sentence con-
nective for this fmction is patently performed by the -an.
il'ith t h i s ass ~ ~ 1asl sto be comected the f r e q ~ ~ e na t i - t n i n
manna+pr01101fiina1-associ a t ive+- whi ch f uric* i ons w i t h a n

a s s e v c r a t i v e f o r c e [see $8.5 ( 2 ) ] i n some seven p l a c e s i n

S!L. And f i n a l l y t h i s same p a r t i c l e appe2rs i n t h e words
~ f a+zan
QXTl and Qxanrrwni2rj.
I n a l l of these sccusreuces the s u f f i x czn cnly bz
fiitcrpreted a s the vford-f i n a l f orzl; o f the a s s o c i a t i v e -=-/
- t o be discrrvsed below.
-ma-
From these esnrnples t h e connective frmction can only
be a s s o c i a t e d with t h e p a r t i c l e -;!la-a-aq. This can now very
p l z u s i b l y be taken as tlie a s s o c i a t i v e -@- -r- connecti've -an-.
Yow t h i s d i f f e r s i n a s e from simple -%- i s not c l e a r .
9.5 The a s s o c i a t i v e -ma-/-=- /Y - m a FG r the
i n t e r p r e t a t i o n of t h i s p a r t i c l e a s the 3rd person s i n g u l a r
pronominal a s s o c i a l i v e and the evidence a g a i n s t i t see $9.324
above. ill~er,word f i n a l , the p a r t i c l e q37ears a s -=mritter?.
aY-- - f o z nhicil see $~.42 irii!:~odiately prece8ing.
I t always comes a f t e r the pronominal a s s o c i a t i v e s , e. 2 .
a~ian~ni+tta+man
--- ( : l i ~ n 2:67,
3:62,54,64), a i ~ a ~ m i t i n a(:.;L
I<:: 122) inna+lla+~izan
- - (z,L 4.:129) ; S r n t 13ef o r e the a s s o c i a t i v e

- . inu+me+nii_l(>:L 1: 13,75; 2 123,125; 3:97; 4.:115,

121j , m+!)~.a-+nin
( ! . L ~ ~ 1085
: , ilma-i-a~ai-nin(XIL 2: 6 , I & ,16 ; 3: 1 2 ,
22,29) innaAme+nin (XL 3:21), ay+rnat-nin (XL 3:111, A r : 9 , 5 0 , 5 9 ) ,
and alaQe+m~+i;in(1iL 3: 4.2,4.3,4.3) .
Althor~ghthe a s s o c i a t i v e i n the majority of i t s occrzr-
reiices annears attaclled t o t h e i n i t i a l p a r t i c l e of t h e sea-
teilce o r t o the second word i f the sentence begins miti1 a
not~inaly l r r s the connective -= (see $9.42 above), it can
appear on the verb, e . g . 89.42 above and note: i ? r - ~ - l - ~ ~ ~ X b +
rim-lzin (T:L 3: 115) .
llte meanin$ is nrzcer taii~. Long ago !lesser schmidt sag-
-1

- l5 This is also
gestecl an indefiriite force for -i7;E3-/-~~a- o

sugcested by Goetze, : 253-2.53.

2( 19~~8) Alt'not~gh this
fits several ~>sssagasvery nicely (2.g. note r"u;f;iiiG+~f~ in
11
$:L 4:55 and 3: 111 where a force if ever" saits the context
very well) , there are other occurrences where this is not
at al: aprogos. Arly greater precision is obviated by the
fact that the meaning cf so many of the particles to which
it is attached is quite mmcertain.
9.6 The associative --. This particle is always
viord final ,l6 and is alrvays spelled -ni-i-in. It occurs
Frimarily on the ],articles, e.g. ptlcnin [ c f . 58.5 (2)1 vrhich
always carries this srrffix. :lost frequently i t occurs with
the associative -=-/-ma- (see above), and often with the
pr ononinal associatives e . g o ys+lla+nin, inu+ttwnin, e t c .
Several tines it occurs on verbal forms, e.g- Wnn-i+nin
. . . ~m-a+nin ( ? , i ~ $: 13) , &at-wp-a+nin (hli, 4: 14-), pis-0-nin
(;;iL 3: 4.), anrf ur -0-1-ema+ma+nin (liL 3: 115) .
As suggested by Speiser in J A O S 53(1939) : 303, a force
of "indeed., verily" plausibly fits most occurrences. This
is particularly apropos for the asseverative plzrase --
ati+nin
manna+pronominal-associative+man [cf. $ ~ . 5(2)].
9.7 -
The associative -miamail. For the interpretation
of this for111as containirig a second person pronominal assoc-
 27 0
i a t i v e of t h e form -=a, and the f a c t o r s a g a i n s t i t see $ 3 . 3 2 3
above. From tlze i s o l a t e d form rna=m-i-maxa
' (hlL 3: 5) and t h e
si!!lilarity of the range of meanings, t h e p a r t i c l e can be as-
sinned t o contain the p a r t i c l e -- (cf. $9.5 above). The

s u f f i x can be appended t o a l l t h r e e c l a s s e s of ~vords. For

nominals note Q i r n i l c i -ne-fe-ne+mmc?.rnrn (LIL 1,: 94) , e t i-ig-e+
nnnaman (:!LL I : y l j , ane-nai~man~an
-. -.--. .-.. . {h:L 4.:20),
-.-
Bill-i-yaQ-e-na+

- - hi^
mlalnan 3 : 4 0 ) , elart-iff-se-na-Qe+m;n;tman (BfL 3 : 4 ) ; mane+
T .

rtmaman (1iL 3:35,35,33,35). For v e r b a l s n o t e Icepan-et-a+

ma man (kiL 2:63), k a t - i l l - e t t - w ~ m a m a n (blL 4: i o y ) , - -
mann-i-t.
urnarcan (XIL 1:15; 3:5,10,100). For t h e p a r t i c l e s liote Qul;Iro+
amaiiian (XL 3: 111) &a.+nmama~ (I!% 3: 110,116), ya+mmamar,
(XL 4: 18, 24) ; ~ o s s i b l ya l s o i-i-in-ma-ma-an (b1L 2: 5 6 , 1 0 1 )

and i - i -~~m-rni
- i - in-ma-ma-an ( Z L 2: 9 9 ) .
II
;be r e s t r i c t i v e " force ~ v l ~ i cSpeiser
h a t t r i b u t e s t o the
narticle in $ 2 2 0 seems c l o s e r t o the meaning of t h e s u f f is

than the iridef ini t e connotation of Friecfrich and ;iesserscbmidt.

'

9.3 :he -
a s s o c i a t i v e -tan. 11s Speiser notes t h e
scffirr i s r e g u l a r l y w r i t t e n with the DALY s i g n i n S L w i t h
tilt: s i n g l e esception of e-ti-f-,ta-oi-il-la-mna-ani n Eli 3: 47.
In the Ug. A-Y ail. i t i s w r i t t e n -da-an,
The i n t e r p r e t a t i o n o f the s u f f i x i s complicated by t h e
f a c t t h a t s o zany of i t s occurrences a r e i n broken o r obscure
contexts. Speiser suggested " f o r , about" on the ' b a s i s of i t s
use i n sentences w i t h the verbs anzannob-, - Qar-,
pal-, and -
It
whose meanings he took as " r a q u e s t , 11 a s f ~ , "a.ndl'demand.,I I

respectively. -
I<owever, nal- i s now 1;no.rvn t o mean ''?mow,? I 1.7
 27 1
il 18
a n c 1 anzannou- cannot !:lean " request." I suggest "promiseP
,111 t3e clear occurrences of the form can be satisfact~rily
I1
explained by the basic meaning frorn," indicating b o t h source
mcl s partitive force.
'This can now clearly be seen fron the U g . .+9 Sil.
ZfES
where the opening line in 1\1r_Lc;zdia113u1u,m lcasrsi Sa mgrnrti
++< <, <?8i3S
-
;
.a. V V I J.*L
&-I -a-:
U ~ I C Y L ~ L , j
' 2 a\
~ I l YUU
\
!,age fbi%ukl
L-. .a.
tine Geposition of
money of the oatn from god," is rendered by the Ilurrian ke+n
I<ASPI
- elanli-ue en-ne+tsn
-- na-x-Qa-ma-3a ( 1ine 5) . flltll~ugh
the verb is iiiqmssiisle to restore, it is clear that ke+m ICASPI
elami-ne renders -tm kaspi ga p&n?ti and en-ne+tan
----. - renders
i t t i i l l-1,jES I1
from go&. 11 19
The basic force of "from1' is seen also in those occur-
zences in :;iL avith the verb x-denand,II 11
e.g.

pyarow-a -
na[1&]-a-~~-a ear-oQ-ax (?iL 3: 39-91) 2 o or
this I requested from my brother a golden case statue of
I1
ny daughter.

T i l e saffis can also be used in a derived sense indicating

the source from which an action originates or the cause that

produced it, i.e. "because, due to,t i e . g .

3: 10F3-209), "Because of all this we together mutually

are forever on very friendly terms.'!
ly also in BIL 3: 31-32 with the verb
So ajy-~arent a-
f o r n s a p r e p o s i t i o r ~ a f 13hrase of t h e f o r m x - f a c t i + t a n vc11ich
a p-p a r e n t l y means "because o f , drxe t o . "
.. %Tote--
A. 0rdG::an-ae-fa+n
timi-fa+n
--- e t i - i + t "becazrse of the 9, word." Note t h e pre-
ceding d a t i v e e x a c t l y as w i t h t h e & plus
d i r e c t i v e -@.
T s e v e r a l occ~arrencest h e p a r L i c l e i s rased i n i t s

z u Giie V T i i ~ e s eo c c r i r s i n %he Ug. k ~ - i l Sil.

w l ~ c r ct h e ::trrxian phrase gmne-il-e+tan-i+rna~z i l r r r l ~ l i n e 5)

renders t?lc iUckadia-1 in%m:ta yilaQe-ma " f e a r t31e oath."
+ilt'!~or:f;h the :Ir!rrian verb i s not c l e a r , tile -phrase v e r y
-r?lausilsly !neafs "be a f r a i d of t h e oatil," l i t e r a l l y " f e a r
1: 20
froiil $ h e oa-i;h.
I n t i l e l P i t t a . x n iL e t t e r t h i s recognition of Ez narti-
--
t i v e f o r c e t o t h e a s s o c i a t i v e -tall helps t o c l a r i f y several
-- i n cotnbination w i t 1 1 t i 9 Q a n "intrcil" de-
c o a t e s t s r;rliere -tall
velops ;-2 co21~3ar&tivef o r c e "much Inore ( t h a n ) .l l 2 l This i n t e r -
? r e t a t i o n is sade very much izore ~ l a u s i b l ewhen we note t h e
frequent occurrence i n the i~ldiadias~
l e t t e r s of' T u g r a t t a of
1I
t h e phrase aQi-ya el al2i-ya 10-Si.1
---- 16 S t e t t e r a n n i liay
rgy b r o t h e r illcrease t o me t e n t i n e s more than riy f a t h e r , "

Cr
cL:zi-ya
-2
el cZ1.3i-ya n~grf_iS
- lig&il-anxi ")lay ~ l , vbrother

send tne much more than my f a t h c r .I1 22

-
(1) Ben-iff-en attart-iff+tan tiQQanna+man a n z a n n a -
a tat-ar-.zQ!i-ae (1% 3: 50-51) 11
Brotheri-cop. fore-
f a t h e r ( s ) -fly-f ro:n n~t~ch+'iproini sed-past-by-rcie love-
durative-IS-adver'uial," i.e. " I a f f e c t i o n a t e l y promised
m y b r o t h e r much 21ore than my f o r e f a t h e r s . "
 ..
273
(2) GUSICIN . . . fe-QQ+an a t t a y - f f - g a gatmanna
kevan-a@-o-8Qe t e a atta-y-f-fe-ne+tan tiQQanna+man
(XL 3:67-70) "g01d . . . thee-lsy+conn. father-zy-for
formerly granted-past-by-you-no111. - p a r t . great father-
thy-of-one-from much+?,I I i . e . " t h e gold . . . which yon
formerly granted f o r my Sather was g r e a t , rnuch more than
+l,q+
ULA- u
-a
VI
A,---
bizy
n-*L
aLut;x
--- 11 23

( 3) a t t a r t - i f f - t t a n t i ~ ~ a n - i - t i t ] a + nt i ~ a a n [ .]
.
IiZd onin-iff-ga
-
s q ~ i-
y a m a Q t - i - e n - i + t a n 8en-iff-ua fur-i-

-
ta (1% 3: 37-83), " f o r e f a t h e r ( s j -my+f rorn rnuch+me+cop.
n~t~che ~ i r i c ~ a (- ?t r)a n s . - jrrss .+fro111 brother -my-by land-
11zy-for view-its-to." t brother e n r i c h ( ? ) ne
i .e. " ~ e 317

mrxch inore than z~yf o r e f a t h e r s i n view of my land."

Example ( 1 ) i n p a r t i c u l a r m81ces e x c e l l e n t sense i n t h e

context, f o r Tuzratta goes on t o staibe t h a t he made h i s
shipments tenfold over t h e above what h i s grandfather had
d.one f o r the pharaoh's f a t h e r or what h i s f a t h e r had done
f o r %he Pharaoh himself.
9.9 t i v e s u f f i x -go
The a s s o c i a-----
-- This s t ~ fifx , in-
ih~bitalslyt o be connected with fhc p l u r a l s u f f i x -(a&-

of the nominal ( s e e $6.4.2j and -aa-)of the inclf c a t i v s

v e r b a l agentive s u f f i x ( s e e $7.4525) a s Speiser n o t e s i n

-
Iil $ 2 2 3 , has the force of " f u l l y , completely" or the l i k e .
Thus i t i s p a r t i c u l a r l y s u i t a b l e t o the jnssive forms, i n
which i t has the f o r c e of strong emphasis. Xote the form
Qa0-01-e-0 c i t e d by Speiser Prom J3oghszk6i, a.zd Ugarit. 11.1

1% one can note p a l - [ i) -1-ai-8-a+l lwma; (XL 4: 6 5 ) " ~ i ~ a y

 274
they lrnow f u l l y , " and i t t - a i - 8 - a + l l a + n ( i , ! ~ $: 5 2 ) "so t h a t

they nay indeed go. "*'! kzeyuently i t f u n c t i o n s a d v e r b i a l l y ,

e .g. ~ra-*an aen-if P-a2e-ne ay-iy-e
- peteQt-ae-8 f:,iL 4.:
11
?.9-50), I t ( t h e dowry) i s coning i n t o m;y b r o t h e r s presence
m o s t s a t i s f actor i l y eI!
. -
I 2 s e v e r a l cases i t is anpended t o s u b j e c t - a c t i o n forms

2: 9 2 - 9 3 )
(,:.IL , rt
s o nly brother i s on completely f r i e n d l y terms
with m e o11 Coc~pare a l s o 4: 121, and kat-i-€4 (Xi , bill-00-
-,
f i (:IL 4-: l ~ ' , )orom-i-9- (154: 1191, and liarba0t-i-0- (3iL

L!: 120) .
1 The a s s o c i a t i v e -a.
- B complex problem a r i s e s
with the i n t e r p r e t a t i o n of t h i s s u f f i x . I n the f i r s t place
t h e r e i s a s u f f i x which c l e a r l y i s appended t o v e r b a l forms,
e.g. -
ta.r-oQ-i-iva-'~lla+nni (I,IL 4: 10), 1~at-i-kk-oqni ( X L A: 2) ,
ak-oQ-a+nni ( 5 i i 2:5 0 ) . O n t h e other hand one f i n d s nominal

-
f o r ~ st h a t end i n -mi. These have been viewed i n t h e pas$
as a v a r i a n t foril: of t h e anaphoric -= "one" used as a v i r t u a l

clef i n i t e a r t i c l e c $6.45) , however, note t h e a l t e r n a t e

forl!:s e-wa-ir-ni (XL 4: 127,128) , and ewi-ri-en]-ni (XL 2 : 7 2 ) .
id:ovr these could s t i l l be orthographic o r phone%Fc var imts.

Ifo\vever, E. von Schuler has srxbjectecl the frequent forms i n

II
-n& t o a preliminary study i n " ~ l u r r i t i s c h e:?omilia A c t o r i s ,
-
1t;~'i19 f a s c . i3(1961): 19-21. iie notes i t s use i n kIurrianizing
1I
f o r e i g n ~ f ~ o r d cs o, g . entanai y r i e s t e s s " f r o 3 AMc. Gntrx- 11
priest-
.,
I1 11
ess, mariganni " c l ~ a r i o twarrior" from Vedic mapya youth, l1
etc. I11 c e r t a i n cases i t can be added t o negative s u b j e c t -
 27 5

a c t i o n v e r b a l forins forming c l a s s e s of men w i t h a permanent

d i s a b i l i t y , e.g.QaQi'iilcorini I1 deaf p e r s o u , I I Icatildconni 1 rxute ?

Derson, I t and f a r i!&onni " b l i n d person. ,125 bt h e r f orns a r e

not clear f r o m t h i s interpretation. ;:ate p a r t i c u l a r l y the

f o r m k- a t - i - I & - o m i - ( ? I L A: 2 ) c i t e d above. liere a c l e a r ver-
b a l f o r c e i s reqrrired by the c o n t e s t , i . e . "great e v i l re-
I1
-ports a r e n o t beieq 4 e s l a r e G i n t h e p r e s e n c e of lily brother.
c o i n ~ a r e~ ~ i l l o B - i --
1- n i 1 L fi.:d i n a c o n t e s t which can
~ 5 t o n isn.
be t r a n s l a t e d " e v i l r e p o r t s a r e beine-- r e p o r t e d ( f o r ; he who

w a s n o t sneaking ( ~
1l -i0 9 - i -I&-onni) has sr~oicen." I t is

g o s s i b l e t3-a-t t h c r e a r e t i ~ oi1oi?1ographs which a r e c o n f ~ s c d

h e r e or t h a t t h e for12 i s ca7ti7ablc of a v e r b a l or nominal trse
<ie!3endi11~on t h e c o n t e x t . :he l a t t e r seems p r e f e r a b l e a t
tllis y o i n t . 'Jon 3chxler a l s o n o t e s t h e for!??ation of genuine
i ~ o n i n za c t o r i s b y t h e v s e of -=i i n t h e well-lcnomn form
nrnar-i-nni " l~rrtcher, I 1 f r o x nrp-
:I
t o f 1ayY1Ir~sect st PFuztr, 25
and adduces froii! 1jogilaz!c2ji i t t- - a r -- n n i "run;ter, c o r r r i e r , I f
a --
. +---
.
f ror; t h e l;ilovn r o o t m- " t o go."
lio~vevcr,mrrch lnore needs t o be c l a r i f i e c l b e f o r e m e can
clelii-ieaie tile i'eiil,Lio.ilshi~-,,if a n y , heliveen -this - anti
-nllj.,

tile -aon agen'tive v e r i ~ a l sn o t e &13ove, w h i c h w a s p l a a s i b l y

i n t e r l 1 r e t e 6 by 3~ti7eiser as an a s s e v e r a t i v e p a r t i c l e .
 FOOTNOTES

CHAPTER ONE
1
"Urartean is now-establishedbeyond cavil as a related
language; certainly not a linear descendent [ c f . the remarks
of W. C. Benedict, "~rartiansand ~urrians,"JAOS 80(1960):
100-1041 but a member of the saEe family [cf. the important
article of I. M, Diakonoff, "A Comparative sturdy of the
Hurrian and Urartean Languages,11 Peredneaziafskij Sbornik:
Vonrosy Xettologii i Xurritolo~ii. (Akademija Mauk Gruzinskoj
SSH, Institut Jazykoznanij a m )hloscow: Izdatel'stvo VssfoEnoj
Llteratury, 1961. his volume will be cited hereafter a s
PsVX)]. However, both languages have been elucidated in
large part contenrporaneonsly, so it has only been in the
later stages of their independent elucidation that they have
thrown light on one another*
Speiser , 11 A k l c a d i a n Documents from Bas Shamra,
II
2 ~ f .6. 80

?
'Volume XX, 1940-41, of The Annual of the American
Schools of Oriental Research, hereafter cited as G.
4=, p . 14.
51n fact the only attempt at a comprehensive study of
the language is SpeiserDs Introduction to Burrian.

6 ~ h espelling of this word with double -=-, although

1 277
contrary to t h e custom which has prevailed for decaries, is
required by t w o facts: first the phonemic n a t ~ r eof conso-
n m t a l l e n g t h in Rurrian (see $3.9 below) and second the
spelliag li[i 1-i-it-%a-a-an-ni-e-wa in hlL 3: 104. I t should
be noted that Mittanni orthography is extremely consistent,
particularly in the representat ion of consonan-tal length.
7IH, p. 5.
811he best edition of the cuneiform text is the fac-
simile of atto Schroeder, forwd! in t e x t r~trrr~ljer200 of 1ai.r;
Die Tontafeln von el-Amrna (Vorderasiatische Schriftdenk-
rnaler XII; Leipzig, f ? P 5 ) , cited hereafter as Schr. The
best transliteration is that of J o Friedrich, based on a
collation of the original tablet, found on pp. 5-32 sf his
Lieinasiatische
-- - . -- ~pracbdenhaler
-- -. (Kleine Texte f
7
k Vorlesmgea
und ubungen, hsgbn. von Hans Lietzmann, NO. 163; Berlin:
Walter de Gruyter, 1932), abbreviated hereafter as E U D o
9 ~ h e s edates are taken from the most recent attempt at
a chronological synthesis: I-:. A . I.'.itcben,St~pilrxliumaand
the Amarna Pharaohs. A Study in 2ePative Chronolom (Liver-
pool: Vniversify P r e s s , 1962) , p. 24 and n o t e s P and 2 . A
hieratic doclcet on EA 23, a 'copyt of a letter from Tuzratta
to Amenophis 111, gives the date as the thirty-sixth year of
Amenophis' reign. This letter specifically refers to T a u -
3t;Lla
L-LO as ' ---'
" 1
W L L ~ of Amenophis 111. Since the hlitfa~iLetter
a l s o refers to the negotiations between the two kings over
the marriage arzd the dowry, it n u s t be dated from this same
period.
I 27 8
loin four parts: I A= 14 fasc. 58(1956): 33-38, I I
14 fasc. 59(1956): 69-116, 111 15 fasc. 60(1957): 30-89,
and PV &
A 16 fasc. 62(1953): 18-64. The Hurrian texts are
to be found in part 111, Nos. 380-405, pp. 46-51. Cited
hereafeer as
"~urrian passages and/or texts have appeared in all

are en~xmeratedin a part IV, p. 26, and in the Bibliograpl~y,

par* A.
12six of these are published by F. Thnreau-Dangin in
.
."Tablettes hurrites provenant de hfari," @ 36(1939): 1-28.
II
The seventh was published by E. Laroche in Fragment hour-
11
mite provenant de hiari, 51(1957): 104-~06.
m AurriaD, c f * the
13gpropos of a letter to ~ i m r i - ~ iin

interpretation of ~aessjdethat Samsi-Adad and his son I h e -

Dagan are specifically connected with the Hurrian area around
Sernsara on the Lower Zab river pr he Shernshara Tablets. A

Preliminary Report. Copenhagen: hfmksgaard, 1959) , passim

but especially pp. 29 ff. and pp. 72-75.
lA~acsimileshave been published in S.yria. 10( 1929) ,
plates 64, 67, 73, 74, 75; Syria 12(1931): p. 389; Syria
15( 1934) , pp. 14'9-154; Syria 20( 1939) : p e 126. A transliter-

ation appears in C I H. Gordon, U~ari%PcXIanual, An O r 35,

(~ome:Pontifical Biblical Institute, 2955), texts 4,7 , 31,
34+45, 3 5 ( W , 50, 60, 61, 1060
15Ets 10.4. This is published as text number four in
- and is analyzed by C.
UlT, -G. von Brandenstein in " ~ m
P 27 9
CP1Urr ischen ans den gas-~chamra- ex ten," ZDMG 91( 1937):

555-576. This study is cited hereafter m d e r the abbreviation

-
ChRT
'4~acsirnile by J. Nougayrol, Uaaritica V. (Not yet
published as of this writing.)
17~acsirnileby J. Nougayrol, transliteration by 8 .
T{t=+_r&~~_r jn_ TJg..=itics 11;

I8~ext by Nougayrol, analysis by Laroche in Le Palais

Sogal dDugarit 111. Textes accadiens et hourrites des archives
est, ouest et centrales (paris: Imprimerie Nationale, 1955),
pp. 327-335. Hereafter cited as 3RU 111.
1%. Laroche, PRU 111, pp. 311-324. Bereafter seferred
to as U e . A-H Bil.
20~ougayrol, 111, p . 311.
2 1 ~ u b l i s h eand
~ analyzed by Thureau-Dangin in Syria 12
(1931): 225-266. A transfiaeration by J. Friedrich appears
in W3, pp. 149-155. Hereafter referred to as Ug. S-EX Voc.
2231aterialen zum Smerischen Lexikon V. The Series
gar-ra= bubullu, Tablets I-IV. (liome: Tontif ical Biblical
Institute, 1957) . Cited herear"*er as bi8L V.

2 3 ~ e e the remarks of J. Kougayrol in CBAIBL, 1960, p.

168.
2 h e e the publication by B. Landsberger and R e T .
BaPiock, " D ~ SVokabuf ar sa," !!:aterialen zum Smerischen
Lexikon I11 (gome: Pontifical Biblical Insfitute, 19553 ,

PP* 47-87.
2 5 ~am dependent upon the remarks of Eougaytol in
I 280

CIiAIUL, 1960, pa 168, for this description. Only the study

of selected entries by hi. Laroche has been available t o me;
I have not seen the publication of the full text to appear
in Ugaritica V.
26~oagayrol dates the text " incontestably" to "at least
the beginning of the dynasty of Aldcad, according to the chro-
nnlngy gs1?eza11;r ZCzittcd f s52'j' f o tkis 24% G z Q 9- a - --
r J l u LGLAUULJ
d.-----

11
B.C." The dates used in the text follow the so-called l o ~
chronology" [see, e . g . , 3 . T. Gaqbell, all he Ancient ?:ear
East: Chronological Bibliography and Charts," The Bible and
the Ancient Near East (Essays in honor of 4Villlia-m Fomell
Allbright; ed. by G. E. Wright; Garden City, New Yorlc:
Doubleday, 1 9 6 1 ) ~pp. 214.-225; and especially see the latest
resume' of the subject found in fascicle four of the revised
edition of volumes I and I1 of 4
(cambridge: University Press, 196.23 by ai. B. i2cstsn, pp. 32-
500] For the preferai3le dating in late A l r k a d times or Ur 111,
see $ 2 . 1 1 3 below.
' 7 ~ 0Speiser insists on reading it in "the Hurrian Parti-
cipation in the C'iviliza-i;ionsof i2lesopotamiaY Syria and
Palestine," J
WJ l(1953-54-): 313 n. 10, and also G o s t z e i n
"An Old Babylonian Itinerary, JCS 7(1953): 620 However, as
I
Laroche bas shown in his discussion of the epithet enda-n'
on pp. 192-193 of his article in &
J 54(1960), (cf. the fol-
lowing note), the person in this tablet is a priestess, and
since feminine Hurrian names are not Ionown to end in -atall
the reading Tisari is preferable zmtiI more conclusive
evidence comes to light.
28 II
Parrot and Nougayrol take this word to be man,
lord" [g42(1948): 111 purely from context. IIowever, see
recently E. Laroche, "Etudes hourrites,"~54(1960) : 192-
193, where he very glzgsibly takes the word as a borrowing
- 11 chief priestess ,11 basing his
from Sm-ero-AkkadianSAL$ntzr
identification upan clear usage in the ~ o ~ h a z l r 8textso
i
Thus, perhaps, the dedicator of this temple is a priestess
of high rank. Against this, however, as Laroche points out,
is the fact that -a-ri/tal is not so far known as an element
in feminine names, although u-does occasionally so occur.
*9~f.,for example, I. J. Gelb in Burrians and Subarians
(The Oriental Institute of the University of Chicago: Studies
in Ancient Oriental Civilizations, No. 22. Chicago: Univer-
sity of Chicago Press, 1 9 ~ ,)pp. 55-57 and 2. T. 0"allaghan
in A r m Naharafm (Rome: Pontifical Biblical Institute, 1948)
pp. 44-49,who interpret the dearth of historical documents
from Assyria for the period from 1700-1500 B.C. as due to a
It
great catastrophe c m s e d by invasions of i1literate barbar -
ia=sY11
30 ,-
iae evidence is as follows: the Fomdation Lion In-
scription immediately brings fo mind the so-called Samarra
tablet published by Thurean-Dangin in "~ablettede Samarra,"
RA 911912): i-4, This tablet, acquired from an acfiquities
dealer in Samarra on the Tigris itiver between the Lower Zab
and the Diyala, connnercorates the dedication of a temple t o
the god h'ergal of I-fawilumby Arigen, son of Sadarmat, king
1 282
of Urlci3 ancl Nawar. 'The name of the scribe is Sam-gene
Before the discovery of the Foundation Lion Inscription
these were almost the only clearly Hurrian names from circa
the Al&ad period whi ch occur in conten~paraxydscxrr~entsof
the period. Since the tablet was purchased in Sasarra,
Urki.5 and Nawar were placed in this region. aowever, by
the time tl-re Foundation L i o n carve tii f f g h t , U * ? k i g had appeared

in the Aiari letters and the texts from Chagar Bazar in con-
nection with localities that suggested the general area of
the Habur triangle as the region vrllesc i t 1:1igh1be located.
C1

n Babylonian Itinerary,''J S ~(1953): 57-72,

Then, in " ~ Old
A. Goetze published the itinerary of a journey from southerc
Babylonia up the Tigris past A5gnr, across northern Meso-
potamia to somewhere in Anatolia and refurn. In crossing
the headwaters of the ljabrrr, between IIarran and Subat-En'li 1,
'J

VrkiE is menf ioned as lying between stations such that it

must be placed near the gabur river, north of the main tribu-
twy, L l
i - K G W -this is the heart of the territory

which later f orrned the kingdom of F f i t t a , i ~ n i .

!lecently, another very suggestive detail has come to
light. In "Docmnents du :labur.
b
. . . 2. L e sceaa de Daguna,"
Syria 37( 1960) : 209-2P4, Noagayrol has published a cylinder
seal, executed in lapis lazuli, so inordinately fine in its
aorlmanship that certain details appear better than in re-
presentations on a much larger scale. The sssze represented
is a classic "presentation" scene in which a seated goddess,
welcomes with a gesture a cortege which approaches from the
1 283
right, led by another diety who announced the female suppli-
cant by the words of the appended inscription. The accompany-
It
ing inscription reads D a g m a , the wet-ilurse, d&z:g!~ler of
Tiga-dimmuzi, the royal stewardess." The name Da,g.ma cannot
be connected with certainty to any h o ~ v nethnic or linguistic
group [however, it is suggestive that da-mx-na occnss im-
mediately before the likely Hurrian name da-qr-se-ng ( i.ee
~alcllna-3enni)in a list ~f personal names from the Linear A
%able-i;si'rom Hagia Triada on Crete (text No. 1 0 3 ) . ] EIowever
the mother of Daguna is transparently Hurrian, formed from
the well attestad root tB- and a variant form of the god
Tammaz. That Tamuz had been aopted into the Hurrian
pantheon is now seen from the Ug. Quad. Voc. 137 3: 33, 4:18
where C~lu-irm-z[i] = 'DW. ~ 2 1 1 ,see Laroche Ugaritica V,
I $ 2 7 ~Laroche also refers to the form dmnuzzi at Boghaz-
i Begarding the significance of the presentation of a
wet nurse to a goddess, Mougay.rol concludes very plaasibly
that the goddess, seated on a mountain peak, is not just any
mountain goddess, but is the mountain goddess par excellence,
the erninent ::in$drsag, iilothar of t h s gods and the one who
nurses royalty with the milk of legitimacy. Thus we have
here a seal executed for a royal wet nurse, possibly in
comernoration of her appointment to off ice. Now according
to the dealer from whom the seal was obtained, if comes f r o %
the same site as the Foundation Lion Inscription discussed
above. Further, the lion is also a very fine piece of w ~ z k -
manship. From these two pieces it is possible to conclude
1 284
that there had developed in this Hnrrian sfafe on the upper
ljabur an art which equalled in its quality the most beautiful
products of the contemporaneous Swnero-Akkadian sphere. This
advanced state of Hurrian culture as early as the Akkad period
possibly has the great;est of itnplications for the impact that
the Hurrians musf have had in their lafer migrations into
Syria and Palestine. If Urlcl-3 d i d not S ~ X C C Z U Bt~o the cata-
clysmic events which produced the fall of the Aldcad dynasty,
and the high level of Hurrian culture continued in northern
hlesopotamia (which yet waits to be provedl) , then, rather than
being the illiterate barbarians who were responsible for the
abrupt cessation of all historical inscriptions in Assyria
after the death of SarnSi-Adad I s.1716, the Hurrians must
have had much to do with the transmission of culture from
Mesopotamia t o Anatolia, Syria, Palestine, and Crete.
Bow extensive the Hurrian political control was in
this period rernains to be seen, although the expression of
the Sarnarra faalet "King of Urkis and Xawar" perhaps suggests
nreater control than that of a single city state.
b Farther,
t h e fml.;ortancz of this e m ? y cen%eer c m -be farther grasped,
but again only hazily, by the fact that it is tfie seat of the
god Kumarbi, the head of the IIurrian pantheon, who figures
so largely in the cycle of myths of Hurrian origin found in
i i i t t i f e recensions a$ i30gnazkoi. Gf. id. G. Guterbock: "The
song of ~lli~nrurmi,"JCS j(1951): 135-161, speci'fically p.
146, line 15.
"see C. 8. Gordon, "~videncefor the Horite Language
1 285
from ~ u z i , "BASOR 64(~ec. 1936) : 23-28, Ibid., he Dialect
of the Ktrzu ~ablets,"Or. 2i.S. 7(1938): 32-63, 215-232, espe
pp. 51-63 and 232; for the mouth names see C. I-I. Gordon and
Em R e Lacheman, " ~ h sNLTZU ?:len~logy,~'
Arch. Or. 10(1938): jl-
64; for the m c t i o n s see F. 2. Sfeele, h he Points of the

E-muti in exactly parallel construction in HSS 14 6 2 0 : 2 9 .

33~ndeec?clvonologically they triggered the realization
that such mas the case, See Leo Oppenheian, "Zur Landes-

34
I. J. Gelb, P . hi. Purves, and A, A. hlacljae, Ntrzi
Personal Kames he University of Chicago Oriental Institnte
Publications, Volume LVII ; Chicago: The University of Cki%cago
Press, 19431, hereafter cited as For a list of the names
appearing in Excavations at Xuzi, Volme V I I , Economic a ~ d
Social Documents, Selected aud Transcribed by Ernest a.
Lacheman (~larvardSemitic Series Volme XVI), that do not
appeaP ill T;R;, see the review or" tnis volume by 19, A. Ke~necly
in &
A 17 fasc. 65(1959): 173-177. A list of the names
occurring in the Nrxzu texts published by N . B. Jadko~sks,
"Legal Documents from Arrap9a in the Collections of the
U S S B , " PSVX, is fotmd on pp. ~ ~ 9 8 - 5 2 of
2 that work.
3 5 ~ e efurther by the same at~thor "~iewLight on Aurrians
and Subarians,11 in Studia Osienfaligtici in onore di Giorcio
Levi della Vida (~ubblicazionidell'institnto per llOriente,
1 236
KO. 52; Roma: Institute per l l O r i e n t e , 1 9 5 6 ) ~V o l e 1 , pp.
378-3939 and "Iinrrians a t Nippur i n .the Sargonic ~ e r i o d , "
in F e s t s c h r i f t Joliannes Friedrich zus~65 Geburtsfap, ( ~ e i d e l -
berg: Carl Winter Universi t a t s v e r l a g , 1959) , pp. 183-184-.
3 6 ~ b e s ehave been studied i n t h i s regard by P. hl. Purves
i n h he Early Scribes of ~ u n i , "M S L 57(1940): 162-187, and
42sL 58(l,94l,):
11IIr_rrria.c c ~ n s n ~ a ~Pa+ternlg1
~tal 378-4g4.

n ~ i s t e r land strrdieZ 5y C. J. Gadd, I r a q 7(1940): 35ff.

j a r i s t i s c h e n I n h a l t s , " W'JDCG 50(1927). Collected by Zbeling

i n " ~ i Eigennanlan
e der mittelassyrischen Rechts- m d Geschafts-

3 9 ~ i s t e dby A. T. Clay, Personal Names from Cuneiform

I n s c r i p t i o n s o f the Cassite Period (Yale C r i e n t a l Series:
Researches; Vol. 1; Net? nave, 1912) ; d i s c ~ s s e dby F. Bork,
11hlitami-Namen aus P$ipptrr," 9( 1906) : 588-5910

A o ~ u h l i s h e di n Vorderasiatische ~ c hif
r tdenlonaler 'Jl i:
( 1909) a d . discussed by gngnad i n l l ~ n t e r s n c h ~ J z gzu
e n den
8 Urkimc?en aus D i l b a t ..., 11
~ e i t r & zur
~ e ilss~siologie
md s e m i tischen Sprachwissenschaf t V i 5( 1908): 8-21 ( a m d
Gelb xs, 57ii94oj: 172ff.
4 1 J~ Gadd, I r a q 7(1$40): 35ff. Cf. Ii: 7c.
4 2 ~ e eC. Virolleaud, "Les t a b l e t t e s Be ::1ishrif6-
Qazna," S y r i a l l ( 1 9 3 0 ) : 311-42, and J. ~ o t t 6 r 0 ,P i Les In-
v e n t a i r e s de Qatna," 43(1949) : 1-40, 137-218, "Autres
11
t e x t e s de Q E L ~ H ~ Z ,&
, 4-(1950):
l 1-5-118, " ~ o c a b u l a i r ede
1-2
Qatna," @ 44(1950): 119-122.
43~eeGustavs, " ~ i ePersonemwen in den Tontafeln
von Tell Ta'annek," Zeitscbrift des Deutschen ~alastina-
Vereins 50(1927) : 1-18, 51 (1928): 169-218.
4 k e e L. Messerschmidt , "xitanni-studien," MVA( e ) ~

4/4 (11899): l l 9 f f., and J. Friedrich, " ~ l e i n e~ e i t s a g e

hereaftea cited as BCW.

45~hefive letters to Amenophis 111 areJJE 17, 19-21,
and 2 3 , The letter to Teye is E - 26 and the three leffers
to Amenophis IV are Ji&27-29. -
EA 22 anci EA 25 are not
letters but lists of the dowry gifts sent by Tugratfa to
the Pharra0.h.
46~.g.E. Laroche, "gtudes hourrites," g 54(1960):
187-201, N O Van Brock, "~ubstitutionrituelfe," &
A 17 fast.
65(1959): 117-146 and E. von Schuler, "Hurritische Nomlna
~ctoris,"A= 19 fasco 68(1961): 19-23.
47~otethal; the syllabary is not capable of folly
differentiating the stops for the purposes of Akkadian.
These is no differentiafion possible at all for VC signs,
the sign AB also representing a p , the sign AD also represent-

-
ing at and af and t h e sign AG also representing & %*

CHAPTER XI
'3t seems very probable that it rill not be long before
sufficient onomastic material is available in the Minoan
. ..
syllabary to enable this evidence also to be included,here.
2 258

P r o v i s i o n a l l y note da-ltu-se-n6 (a103:2-3, 4-31, i.e. ~akkn-

Senni, am~d sn-lzi-ri-te-se-ya 11 7 a ( p l a t e XXIII)], i.c.
Stdcri-Tegsega. For the came da-la-se-n6 zrid the use of t h e

IIinoan signs -
s p l u s a vowel f o r U g a r i t i c and 4,
- see C I 11.
Gordon, "Toward a Granmar of hfinoan, 11 N S 32(19633: 232-237.

Possibly da-gu-na
--- (IIT 103:4) could be included h e r e , see
$1~25,n o t e 2 6 , It sight be significant t k a t it occwrs i n
the l i n e immediately preceding da-lm-se-n6.
11
$or the purposes of t h i s d e s c r i p t i o n orthography"
means not only t h e syllabary ( i . e . what s i g n s a r e csed and
r v l i a t phonetic v a l u e s they may take on) but a l s o t h e ortho-
graphic methods by which t h i s s y l l a b a r y i s wsed t o represent
the phonemes involved.
3 ~ h i st e r n now seems a b e t t e r one than the "A~cado-

~ i t t i t e "of Thureau-Dangin i n & S ~ l l a b a i r eAccadien ( P a r i s :

P a u l Geutlmer , 1 9 2 6 ) , pp. I V Pf., ( h e r e a f t e r c i t e d as S A ) ,
since even if w e camlot conclude Fvith c e r t a i n t y t h a t it was
IIurrian s u b s t r a t ~ mwhich influenced i t s f o r n a t i o a , i t most
c e r t a i n l y was used most consistentljr i n j u s t those a r e a s
iLUd s i t e s ~;~hei'eIIurrian p e n e t r a t i o n and inf'lnence w a s f e l t
\
m o s t strongly. For a very h e l p f u l chronological survey of
the o r i g i n and development of t h i s s y l l a b a r y see 2 . Labat,
11
L e raycnnement de l a langue e t de l ' g c r i t u r e alrl;adiemes au

demieme m i l l g n a i r e avant n o t r e e're," S y r i a 39(1962): 1-27,

and e s p e c i a l l y pp. 13-15.
%or the Nuzu s y l l a b a r y see 61. ilerliooz, The Huzi Dia-
l e c t of Akkadian: Or thoera~hyand Phonology ( Langcmge D i s s e r -
tations NO. 23; Philadelphia: Linguistic Society of America,
1 9 3 7 ) , pp. B f f . ; C. Ho Gordon, h he Dialect of the Nuzu Tab-
lets," % NS. 7(1938): $$1.1-1.6; A. Goetze, " ~ o a eObserva-
tions on Nuzu Akkadian,I1 Lana 14(4938): 134-137, and E. A.
Speiser , "Notes on Hurrian ~lhonology,"JAQS 58(1938) : 173-
201, passim.

%or the orthography of the Alalae texts see the re-

marks of D e J . Wiseman, The AlaPah Tablets (London: British
Institute of Aschaeology at Ankara, 1953), PP. 18-19, and S .
Smith, The Statue of Idri-mi (London: British Institute of
Archaeology at Ankara, 1949), pp. q-29. For examples see
J. Aro, "~emaxkson the Language of the Alalakh ~exts
,I' AfO

Syllabary and the Problem 04 the Origin of the Hittite

script," Arch Or 29(1961): 486-418, esp. pp. 415-417; and
G. Giacumakis, A Grammar of the Akkadian Documents from
AlalajB (~npublishedPh.D. dissertation, Brandeis University,
Waltham, Mass., 1963).
-
6 ~ o rthe orthography of the Akkadian docmnents from
Tigarie see %he general remarks by Nougaysol in PRU 1 x 1 , pa
xxxv, and the detailed discussion of G. Swairn, A Grammar of
the Akkadian Tablets Found at Urarit (Unpublished PhoDe disser-
tation, Brandeis Uniwrsity, Waltham, Mass., 1962), $$lo 1-1.18,
hereafter GATU.
or the Amarna syllabary see the discussioz of F. Mo
~iihl,Die Sprache der Amarnabriefe mit besonderer ~erucksich-
tigung der Kanaanismen, (Leipzig: Dsuck von August Pries, 1909),
pp. 1-26, This voluminous body of texts of such varied pao-
venance cannot be uniform in its orthography. A detailed
study of its orthographies would be most helpful and yet waits
to be done.
or the orthographic practices of the Hittite texts
from ~oghozkoisee J . Friedrich, Hethitisches-Elementarbuch
-1 (~eidelberg:Carl Winter Universitatsverlag, 1940) , 1-30;
and for those of the Amadian documents from l3oghazk6i see
R e Labat, L8BUrkadien de Boghaz-koi (Bordeaux: Librarie Delmas,
1.932, pp. 7-37, hereafter m.
Q
-
/For Nuzu see Gsetze "~rrzuAkkadian,11 L w g . 14(1938) :
135-137; and Berkooz Nuzi Dialect of Akkadian, p.1.41, n. PO.
For the Alalah
Y
texts see Wiseman, g ,pp. 19-20; Aro, a an-
gnage of the Alalakh ~exts"AfO 17(1954-56): 365.
'OC~. Saaim, GATU,$$~.~~,
1.14 and 1.16.
llcf. B ~ N Cie
, SprocZ~eder Amasnabriefe , $10.

similar difference can be seen in the use of the

sibilmts in the ~oghazkoitexfs of Hittite provens~nce. See
Labat, s,pp. 36-37,and esp. n. 38. It is also worth
ns%ing hare that %he two towns of Ugarit and APala4 moved in
dirferent political spheres, Ugarit being under Hittite dom-
ination and A l a l a l ~that of Mitfanai.
I3~lthoughPI had the value w plus a vowel throughout
the whole course of Assyrian cuneiform and in Old Babylonian
and Neo-Babylonian, it does not regularly have this value in
the contemporary Middle-Babylonian syllabary. This is wha*
makes its use n i g h fhis value in the Burro-Hittite syllabary
signifi c a n t . Cf. von Soden, D a s Akkadische SglPabar ( hOr
2 7 ; Rome: Pontifical Biblical Institute, 19481, p. 69, sign

no, 223.
lkf. la $14 - 14(1938) :
and the remarks by Goetze, Lang.
136-137 and Speiser JAOS 58(1938): 188-193.
I5~batthis practice is not completely rmiform at Nuzu
as i t is taken t n be by Gcsetze [~ang14(1938) : 1361 is perhaps
indicated by the form d-nla-as-sa-aq-ma, HSS XIX 7:46. This
is the only example of etymological sarnekh represented by the
set 3 plus vowel rather than the s e t plus vowel that I have
noted in a far from exhaustive study of the Muzu texts. It
may indicate a sporadic use of these signs for etymological
samekh as at Alalal~(cf. the next note).
'
s
e the remarks and conclusions of Gamkrelidze, Arch

-
Qr 29(1961): 416.

18c1. ~bh,
l Die Sprache der Amarmbrief e , y$ lob.
l9~f.Labat, B , p. 35, n. 35. Here the reverse (3-
signs for etymological samekh) is not infrequent (cf. p* 3 5 ) .
This is obviously due to the sethsgxaphic pzacfices current
in writing HitQite where the HBttite phoneme is] is repre-
sented by the 5-signs.
20~or the evidence see the citations W o v e for each site.
2 1 ~ f . the remarks of von Soden, Das Akkadische Sgllabar
(An Or 27; Rome: Pontifical Biblical Institute, 1948), p. 2 1 ,
 292

- 14(1938):
23~f.Goetze, Lang 135-6; $14.
2 4 ~ o t ; e , however, that this same indiscximinate use of
the signs for the voiced and voiceless stops is found in
Elamite, no% only in fhe Middle Babylonian period but also in
the fwo !mall f r ~ ~ e n t a rinscriptions
y ho~oringSiwepa?ar-

ment de la langue,'' Syria, 39(1962): pp. 6 and 14.

25~hisfact, inexplicably, does not yet seem to have
been fully recognized, for the orthography of the Mittanni
Letter has been indiscriminately grouped with that of Nuzu,
Amarna, and ~o~hazkoi.For example compare the remarks of
The V. Ganihelidze, he &ado-Hittite Syllabary and the
Problem of the Origin of the Hittite ~ c r i ~ t ,Arch
" Or 29
(1961): 408. He can state "~ittitecuneiform, like Hurrian
[i.e. the Mittanni Lettsr] and NuziS fails to distinguish
between the signs for corresponding voiced and voiceless plo-
sives," (bracketed comment mine). Speiser , ir, $13, groups
"the remaining larger subdivisions of the main Hurrian sylla-
11
bary" as a single system which comprises the rest of the
ma-terial from Nuzi, harna, and ~oghazk~i." He does this on
the basis of the manifest correspondences which set the sys-
tem a p a ~ tfrom the orthography of bfari and of Classical Old
Babylonian. Among these manifest correspondences he cites
11
indiscriminate use of the signs for stops in respect to
voice. I1 This simply is not so for the Mittanni Letter.
"I* was noted above that the signs for the emphatics
are not infrequent in the Tell-El-Arnarna tablets. It is more
significant, however, to note that they are not infrequently
employed in the Akkadian documents of the Tugratta dossier.
It is this which makes their absence in the Miftanni Letter
significant for Hurrian phonemics. The only signs that
could he interpreted as representing emhatics aza the SUM/
- ~ ~2 : 7 3 *74.; 3: 5.6) and the MUS/
ZUM sign in ~ - ~ - s u M / z u M(ML
QIR sign in broken context in hlL 3: 11. The first is clearly
to be read 6-6-Lk-ki (cf. @ p, 12, n. I ) , and the second must
either be read as & or perhaps as zir/zer (because of the
-
following -ri-e-).
2 7 ~ f .Ferdinand Bork, Die Mitannisprache, WA(~)G

14(1909): 15. Notice the close similarity of this system to

that sf the representation of the stops in the Old Akkadian
syllabary. Cf. $2.131 (d).
28~.e. there is no distinctive sign available for the
voiceless stop. This is true for BI because PI is used ex-
clusively for _w plus a vowel*
29~ontrary to the scheme of Pnrves, m, p . 184.
301 have no suggestion as to why this method of indi-
cating the vowel was never extended to DU and TU.
71~hisis most evident in the single writing of conso-
nants that must be geminated and in the representation of the
stops.
32~hereasthe Mittanni Letter, for example, is a sample
of formal diplomatic correspondence between two powerful
empires and probably was executed in the state chancellery
of Mittanni* For clear evidence of the Semitic nationality
of the scribes of the syllabic texts see $2.11224 (2).
f l l (d) above.
34Cf. ma-mi-&, line 2, and -
ga-qa-da, line 12, versus
mar-~8-ta,line 4; i-*-ma (for ? ~ G m a ), line 13, and ha-am-
ti-iH (for &a-am-ti-ig), line 11.
-
3 5 ~ f .$2.1124. ( 2 . ) below.
36~hereare twenty four signs in agreement with this
principle, and five in violation. The t w o instances of the
verbal element -aZt- contain a voiceless 5 , cf. the forms
from the alphabetic texts of Ugarit cited by Ce-G. von
Brandenstein in "Zum Churrischen aus den as-~chamr.a- ex ten ,"

-
ZDMG 91( l937): 569-573.
3 7 ~ f .e-en-ni-da-an, line 5, versus e-ni-da, lines 14
and 1 9 ; a-ru-gtr-la-am-ma, line 14,versus a-ru-n3-8a-la-am-ma,
line 19; and ta-ah-a-ka, line 15, versus ta-ab-a-ak-ka-aa,
line 18. This is frilly in accord with the normal rule for
doubled consonants in Akkadian, i.e. double consonants are
written either double or single.
38~amely,e-la-mu-lu-up-pa-as-le-ni, 1ine 8, which con-
tains the nominalizing particle -&-.
3gi-ti-ib-ba-an,line 7 .
4°~xamples are: pa-lu-lku, 1: 2, possibly represents this
morpheme but t b Sumerian is not preserved; (gi-li-)3u-kiY
line 2: 1 6 , equals sum. [nu]-an-tug. In lines 2:27ff. the
entries r m : Sum. Ciln-an-sum equals Hurrian e-di-ni, then
Sum. ba-an-sum is given as Hurrian (e-di-)ki-ni. Now, in his
full edition of the !Ail-ra: l~ubullutablets Landsberger lists
2 295
nu-in-na-an-sum, the negative of in-an-smn, as immediately
following in-an-sum, rather than the ba-an-sum of our text.
Since e-di-ki-ni seems exactly corrsct for the negative of
e-di-ni, it is highly probable that the scribe skipped an
entry in the Sumeriaa text at this point.
4 l ~ h eforms are: bi-ti-&i 1:25, gu-ru-ti-bi 2 : n a d
-[]-ti- 2 In the forms ka-te-ni-wa 2: 10, pa-Gu-gi-
-
te 3:7, bi-8a-Za-fe 3: ~ 6 and
, bi-9u-Zu-fe 3:22, it is not
clear whether the sign TE represents a doubled consonanf and
hence voiceless or whether it should be read DE.
@see the preceding note for the pertinent forms.

43cfeCg3.32-3.34 below.
r) This interpretation is favored
by the form zi-ltr-um-pa-ni-we, line 2:12, which is a loan
word from Akkadian snPuppu "date" and does not follow the
positional voicing of the 2 af'ter g~ as would be expected for
a Hnry&ac2~vordwritten by z Ssaftis scribe. Rather, it is
voiceless as is correct for the Akkadian word.
4 4 ~ h eonly doubled consonant in the whole document is
iCrnl-xu-r[i-lwa, line 2:13, wsich is probably a loan word.
In the light of this lack of indicating doubled consonants
t overlooked when in interpreting the vocabulary
it must ~ o be
that some of the occurrences of final -& could represent the
associative - L a "they".
4 5 ~ h a tis orthographical lye Phonernioally this sign is
also used to represent the labial fricative*
4%f. pa-ag-Eii-it-gi, line 4,but wa-Ba-um-mi,
-- line 8 ,
476f. JU-ga-ri-it, Pine 1, and e-ta-ni-u-un, line 7 .
2 296
4 8 ~ h eGA in U-ga-ri-it and liar-@-mi; are regnlar in
these non-Hurrian names.
498u-ir-ra-an, fine 18. However, the grammr is diff i -
cQlt. Two datives precede, suggesting a dative (as Laroche
takes it in W
jJ 1x1, p. 329) brat the cornbirration of the
second person suffix -ib/w plus the _w of the dative or geni-
five particle always appears as -ip-pa- in the Mittanni Letter
and it appears as -ib-ba- in Uge A-H Bil., line 7.
5O~f.DI-Ii-ia, 6 obv. 3, versns TI-ii-ia, 6 rev. 2 in
identical context.
5kf. $3.51 3 below.
5 2 ~ e ethe study by Laroche in Uraritica V.
5 3 fen
~ glosses have also been known 'for a long time in
certain sf the harna letters, cf. L. Messerschmidt, " ~ i t m n i
Stntiien," bfVA(e)~ 4(1899) , pp. llgff., and Goetze, "An Un-
recognized 5urrian Verbal Form," A= 4 fasc. 35(?939): 103-
108.
5 4 ~ f NpN,
. p. 184, and $3.4 below. There are no sure
examples of Hurrian [s] at BogBazkai. However, since Hittite
Cs] was written with g-signs, it is logical to assume tha%
Hurrian [ s ] would likewise be so written. Cf. IH w6d2
-
and
note 30 above.
5 . , $14.
56~f. $1.25 above, and especially note 5 thereto.
" ~ document
57~ou~ayrol, n de fondation hnrrite,"
42(1948): 34
s 8 50(1952):
~ 180, n. 2.
2 297
5 9 " ~ e wLight on the Hurrians and ~ubarians,"in Stndia
Orientalistici in onore di Giorgio Levi Della Vida (Pubbli-
cazioni dell'istitnto per lwriente, No. 52; Roma: Institute
per laOriente,1956), Vol. 1, pp. 378-393.
6 0 ~ e Parrot, "Acquisitions et inedits du ~ n s / e&u
Louvre* Lfoc de fondation," Syria 31(1954): 1l-13*
I!
61~f.P_A ~(1912): 1 . He says: L t inscription est gravEe
profond6ment dans le metal, en beaux caractkes archaiques
qui appartiennent , sem'ble-t-il, & m e gpoque interm6i~iaire
entre l'i$poqne dtdgad6 et lGPooque d'ur. II
5 2 ~ f oGelb, E E , p a -
47, and "New Light on the Hurrians
and ~ u b a ians
r ," pp. 380ff .
6 3 ~ h earchaizing'tendencies of peripheral areas are
well known. For a similar situation from this same era, note
the case of Susa cited by Labat in 1) Le rayonnement de la
lmgue," Syria 3391962): 3. ~t Suss SuPgi d r e w up some
Sumerian votive inscriptions in honor of the god of the city.
Although the language does not differ from that of the anal-
ogous documents which the same king drew up at Nippur,
Lagas, or E r , %he form of the signs is clearly more archaic
than fhese and is related more to the earlier tradition of
the time of Akkad. Labat concludes that they were written
by indigenous scribes who were faithful to more ancient
traditions still extant in their o m scribal schools.
'43, Landsberger and H. G. ~6terbock,&J12(19n-
f

1939) : 55-57 0

6 5 ~ o w e ~ e rserious
, questions have recently been raised
2 298

regarding this widely-held view that the Hittites learned

their cuneiform from the Hurrians. Cf. Gamkrelidze, he
Akkado-Hittite Syllabary, "Arch Or 29(19613: 406-~$18~For
the fullest statement on the positive side see R e Labat, " ~ e
sayomement de la 'langue,"Syria 39(r962): 13-16.
6 6 ~ Gamluelidze,
~ . "The Ak3cad.o-Hittite ~yllabary,"
Arch Or 29(1961): 417. It camot be completely ruled out,
however, that the set of signs 2 plus vowel was pronounced
&
sin, at leasf in part, in 0 Id Akkadian f imes and consequently
could have been used by the Hrrsria~st o rep~esenftheir Cs]=
This I s the proomciatiom adoptecl by G ~ e t z eic "The S i f 3 i l m t ~
of 0ld Babylonian," @ 52( 1958), p. 148. Gelb, however, who
holds that they were pronounced &, has recently set forth
a very convincing correlation of the s o m d shifts that took
pzace in Akkadian with those that took place in Snmerian,
cf 0 BAlfrG, pp. 39ff.

6 7 ~ tis interesting in this connection to note Goetze's

obsexvation that this use of the s e t of signs plus a vowel
to represent etymological samekh in the Old Babylonian period
occurs only in a part of the Babylonian terrifory, namely the
11
northwest, he Sibiiants of Old Babylonian, IR_A 52(1958) :
l4O]. This, of course, is exactly the region in which the
Hurrians came into contact with the Akkadians.
b8~or references as to where these names have been
published and studied see $ 1 . ~above.
69~f. A. Finet, L'Accadien des Lettres de Mari (~caci6rnie
Royale de Belgique, Classe des Lettres et des Sciences Morales
2 299
et Politiques, htemoires, Tome LI ; Brmrelles: Palais des
~cadgmles,1956), 12 b-d and 13 a-c, (hereafter cited as
-
AN).

7O~inet,my$11 b.
7 l ~ h i srenders unacceptzble the vier of Purves, "~urrian
Consonantal pattern," -
AJSL 58(71942): 385; %hat all the e x a q l e s
of 2 in these texts render the voiced form of the dental fri-
cative in the same manner as it is 'represented by g-signs in
the personal names at Babylonian sites. However, some of
the forms with g-signs might be exaqles of the voiced form
of the dental fricative reridered phonetically as Semitic
hearers would pronounce them, rather than by the orthographic
metbads current in the scribal schools. All of ~urves' ex-
amples occur in contexts that are wholly untranslatable and
hence cannot be controlled. The werd pa-za-la, 6:12, recalls
a good root with Hurrian [z], namely pazi- (ML 2:98,101; bfari
7: 10) , and none of the words reveal variants with 3 and 2
which would be expected by this interpretation, except' wa-zu-
9, 3:23, and wa--gu-me,3 : 2 6 , The only reasonably clear ex-
ample of this is e-ern!-nla-zu-ug, 6:14, alongside gi-we-na-
5:90
7'~or these names and a phonemic interpretation of them
see the two important articles of P. hl. Purves: he Early
Scribes at ~ u z i , "AJSL 57(1940): 162-185 and "~nrrianConso-
nantal ~ a tern,"
t GTSL 58(1941) : 378-385.
7 3 ~ e eI. J. Gelb, Old Aklradian Writing and Grammar
(Materials for the Assyrian 'Dictionary No. 2, 2nd ed. rev.
2 300
and enl.; Chicago: University of Chicago, 1961).
7 h h e sign later used for AQ is used only with the
value SAL/SAL, cf. OAWG, sign n9, 3b9 p. 570
751t is used with the valua only in ssnthern Baby---
.
lonia, cf OAWG, pa 29.

770
- 9 AWG PP* 28-30. The following is worth quoting here:
"~rornthe earliest historical times down t o and includiag the
Ur 111 and Old Assyrian Periods, normally only oue sign is
used for a syllable beginning with a stop or sibilant, with-
out any attempt being made to distinguish between voiced,
voiceiess , and ( in Aklcadian) emphatic consonants. Thus DA
stands for e,g , or 4_a, DAM for -, -
a m , or tam, ZA for
za
-9 -
s%, or sa. The existence of snch pairs of signs as BU
and ?d, GI and K I , TU and DU does not mean that the signs
BU, GI, and DU are used t o indicate voiced consonants and
the signs ~ d K, I , Tli are used for voiceless consonants.
... Both rows of signs are used equally for voiced and
voiceless consonants."
76~ccordingto Gelb PA occurs only in the word A-pa-

79~1is used for ai only in South Babylonia.

8 0 is
~ used
~ only in the word Ta-ta.
8 -1 ~ sign
~ ~ no.
~ ,266, p. 105.

8 -
2 0 ~ sign
~ ~ ,no. 1 5 , PO 50.
8 3 occurs
~ ~ both initially and medially, and BI occurs
medially, but there are no variant possibilities for these
2 30 1

signs. BU represented bu and xu through the history of the

cuneiform syllabary,
-
'~R A 42(1948): 8-9.
8%e also notes in the Additions and Corrections, p.
210 f. that has the value 2 ir? S m e z i a x ~ ~
86~hat the Hurrian sound is a velar fricative rather
than a laryngeal is shorn by the choice of the sign fox 9 and
not @ in the alphabetic texts of Ugarit.
d

8 7t~might be considered possible to turn ~ougayrol's

interpretation around and let $ represent the voiceless velar
fricatiwe in Hurrian while 4 represents the voiced velar
fricativz. Emever, in the Foundation Lion Inscription -
Q
occurs in initial position only k d e in medial position
only, and the later evidence reveals thus far only the voice-
less velar fricative (written @) occurring in initial posi-
tion, cf. g" 3.7 below.
88~fe the remarks by Nougayrol , g 42( 1948) : 10. Note
the attempt by Gelb to establish a third set of 3-signs rep-
senting the remains of a period in which Aklcadian recognized
a phoneme g < g - , alongside the sets representing 3 4 t-
-, and
-s . <--z / -~- $ $cf. OAWG, pp. 35-40. Note also the comenfs on the
Old Akkadian sibilants by Goetze in "The Sibilants of Old
~abylonian," 52(1958) : 147-148.
89 ~ P* 26.
9 AWG

~OOAWG,p. 164ff
h is used in the older texts only in ilhn,
9 l ~ h esign -
4:12. With von Brandenstein, ChRT, p. 558, n o 16, it is
best taken as a mistake for -i . In his discussion of the
orthography of' the alphabetic texts (~gariticaV, 1 1 1 , C .
Le hourrite de Ras Shama, 1 . Ecriture, $ I ) , Laroche does not
mention this occurrence. Hence it may be that the collation
of hl'le Herher, to be published in Ugeritiia V , has changed
the reading. Besides this, it occnrs Qnce i n brokea csntext
in 261:25 (see Laroche, foc. e.).
9 2 ~ h i srefers to the regular -
?-sign ( ) not the
?.
i-sign which occasionally represents -
931, the Hurrian texts the scribe was not always care-
ful to write -
t in such a manner a s to distinguish it fromc.
-
In such cases it must be read as 2
-0 Cf.. C . H e Gordon, p
J
$ 4.18, and the sign list of Laroche, Uearitica V, Part 111,
signs 17 and 22. Apart from these occurrences it appears in
the Ugarit names C h a t and CAmmistanara, and in the obscure

- from the "mu%ilated and obscure" Hurrian passage in

word tcn
text 643 (line A 16).
9 4 ~ h esign L a p p e a r s only in the non-Hurrian cultic
term Dqt, and in the obscure words -
nqd and q
s
Jp These may
not be Hurrian.
9kf. C. H. Gordon, UM, '$5.2-5.5.
9 6 ~ f eC. 11. Gordon, UM, $5.8.
97~f.Laroche, Ugaritica V , 1 1 1 , C. $7.
%bi@.
9 9 ~ f . the remarks of Laroche, Ugaritica V, 111, C, $4.
 3G 3
CHAPTER I1 I
lThe three )aleph signs are used in the Burrian texts
but consistently only in initial position (cf. $ 3 . 1 2 . ) . This,
combined with the fact that dor~blingof consonants is a l s o
n o t orfbograyhica?ly indicated, is a strong indication that

thzse texts were written by scribes who were deeply ingrained

in the principles of consonantal orthography. It seems in-
conceivable that uative Zurrians would not have used the
vorrel signs more fully.

3 ~ h esame practice is found st N~ZII,cf. Uerkooz, I=,

4h;rther, thsre mas no sign for PI available since the

sign later used for had only the value 2 plus a vowel,
5 ' 11 1t
First noted by Bork, Die Biitannisprache, p . 14..
'siDie Xlitannispracha," p. 14.
7 The evidence is based upon Greek and Armenian tran-
scription~of Urartean geographical names, e.g. Urartean
TuEna is Greek @on--1.i-t; and Armenian T o s ~ ,Urartean Sups
h h
f s Gr eel< Y !,.
..-a y*] a d drmeni an Cop -k ifrom go$a-) , and

8 ~ h r r s , of the eightem bonsonants orthographically

distinguished by the classical syllabary, only seven of them
hzve a speciai sign for tfie CV syllable involving -e- and
only three have a special sign for the VC syllable involving

9 C f . von Soden, Grundr iss der Akkadischen Grammatik

-2
J 304
(An O r 33; itome: Pontifical Biblical Institute, 19521, $8b.
l0~f. the chart of the syllabary of the Mittanni Letter,
$2.1124. above. For examples see IH $20.
ll~partfrom the canvention adopted whereby W repre-
senfed &I and GC represented ma

12~ornetirnesdouble pleonastic vowels are found, e.g.

gu-lu-u-u-3a ML 1:83. There does not seem to be any morpho-
logical significance to such writings. Cf. a,$22, p. 18.
I3cf. If! $22. The fact that plEn6 writing is simply
an orthographic phenomenon in Urartean ( c f . the remarks of
Diakonoff, PSVX, p. 369f. j is a further indication in the
same direction.

c $6.443 below.
16cf. $ 6 . 2 below.
1 7
"It is this correlation between the doubling of several
p a r t 5 , c l e s and the presence or elision of the extra _a-vowel

which prohibits interpreting the alternation -=a-/-la--

in the pronominal associative in the manner that Goetze does
i n ':~ncliticPronouns i n 'rieal~rian,"JCS 2Clg48): 26.1-263. Cf'.

g 9.325.
18speiser's suggestion ( I B $88) that accentual conditions
were the determining factors is quite plausible as an expla-
nation of the presence or lack of the +vowel, bat it can
hardly account for the doubling or loss of doubling of the

19cf. E. H. Sturtevant, A Comparative Grammar of t h e

3 30 5
- (special Publications of the Linguis%ic
Hittite Language
Society of America, William Dwight Whitney Linguistic se-
ries; Philadelphia: Linguistic Society of America, 1933) ,
P. 46.
20~f.C. 8 . Gordon, Ugaritic hfanual, $4.4.
jg for -
21~f. ene "god.11 See C.-G. von Brandenstein,
" Z m Chur r i schen aus den Ras-Schamra-Texten," ZDhIG 91( 1937):
559.
22~hisdoes not explain the occurrence of -
Aam (166:52).
23~nemust note the spellings a. aa-wu,-ug-ga
u
- and

(cf. IH $34).
ISTAR-bu-ug-ga at ~o~hazkoi
2hhis symbol is used to represent the labial semivowel
in order to leave _w free to represent, in phonemic tran--.
scription, ambiguous orthographies which could be either the
fricative or the semivowel.
25~husthe word fa@- isconsistently spelled m-a@-ru
in the Mittanni Letter (1:60, 1:81, 2: 102, 4:111, and 4:113)
and at Nuzu (NB,
pp. 169-170),but appears both as wav-
and pabr- at ~oghazkoi[cf. von Brandenstein, 8(1939):
33fej, as pa-bi-ri-e rendexing Swrierian ~CG.G[A~i n ~ g S-H
.

Voc. 2:2 2 , and as paa9- at hiasi (with the same meta%hesis

involving 2 as Nuzrr erwi- versus hlL ewri-) .
2 6 t~ does not wholly account for it, however, for
there is a regularity in the orthographic pracfice of the
Akkad period. One set of signs is regularly used for the
stops, whereas in the later texts the usage is best de-
ll
scribed as "indiscriminate, no one set is in regular use
but rather both sets are freely used.
*;AS mentioned in $2.1234 (a) the orthography of this
letter is markedly similar to that of the Mittanni Letter in
other respects also. Carchemish is well within the.influence
of the lllittanni empire and it is distinctly psssible that
we have 1here.asample of official diplomatic practice.
2 8 t~ does not seem likely that this was written by a

Hurrian in the light of' the evidence no.ted above ( 9 2.11224)

for the Semitic authorship 0% the syllabic religious texts.
2 9 ~ which
t site the signs for voiced and voiceless
stops in the Akkadian texts are carefully distinguished.
The fact that the orthography of the Hurrian texts is iden-
tical with that of the Akkadian texts and that there are very
fen Hurrian personal naiiles in the blari %exes (those that do
occur being princes of out-lying city states) argues strongly
for the view that these were written by a Semitic scribe.
30~heSemitic origin of the scribe is far from demon-
strable. But it does seem more probable that this was
written for the purposes of learning Hurrian (the Akkadian
forms of fhe garera = Qubuiiu texts are well represented at
.
zgarif) rafher than S m r i a n or Akkadian (by a ~nrrianj Cf.
the following note.
31~herecan no longer be any doubt of the Semitic
nalionality of the scribes of these texts after the work of
Laroche in Ugaritica V where he has pieced together, from
the broken tablets, the full last line whjch gives the name
of the person for whom the tablet was written and the name
3 307
of the scribe. The line rtms as follows: annu zamagga
nitlcabli zaluzi ga DINGER'IES TB
-. r SU x, where x re-
presents a pgrsonal name. The Burrian half of the sentence
is unintelligible except for the first word annu "this,"
but the Past half; in AUcadian obviously means: "of the
gods, for so and so, written by (lit. hand of) so and so."
Four names are preserved of those for whom the tablets were
written, all clearly IIurrian: TapQilymi, PuQiyana, UrQiya,
and bmmiya. Two of the scribes names have been preserved,
both clearly Semitic: Ammurapi and Ipzali (cf. I p A l , E,
No. 2 2 0 ) . This makes the proposed Semitic nationality of
the scribes of the alphabetic texts and the U g . S-H Voc. much
more probable. Cf. $2.11224,
3 2 ~ fthese were written by a. native speaker of Burtian,
the very consistent "pattern" of the representation of the
stops would be inexplicable. The argument is admittedly
circular. Another indication that the scribe was Semitic
is the 'basic consonantal nature of the orthography. 1 % seems
inexplicable that a Hurrian would have made such limited use
of the vowel signs, cf. 8 3.12 above.
..CI

'J~his was first noted for the alnhabeticl

inateria!. from Tjgarit b y Friedrich, An Or 12(193j): 130ff. and
von Brandenstein, ZDMG 91(1937): 574. For comments on the Ug.
S-R Voc. see Thurea~-Dangin,Syria 1 2 ( 1931): 251ff , and for
the bfari texts, Ibid, RA 36(n939): 2 8 , altliough Thureau-
Dangin attempts to show from these texts that voicing was
phonemic .
3 30 8
3 4 ~ h eEarly Scribes of ~ u z i , "AJSL 57(1940): 162-187
and "Iiurrian Consonanta,l pattern," MSL 58( 194-1)
: 378-4.04-

35~tarnely,single stops are voiceless in initial posi-

tion, voiced in intervocalic position, when nost-vocalic in
final position, and when contiguous with the liquids and
nasals; whereas doubled stops are invariably voiceless.
3 6 ~ o rreferences to publicstions of the texts involved
and studies of the names, see the notes to $ 1-27 above.
2-
~iCf.$3.6 below.
%ndeed it is valid to ask whether the labial stop
exists at ali. However, the existence of the same pattern of
of 2 and b argues strongly on the
voicing in the distrih~~tion
posi.tive side. Cf. III$q8.
3 9 ~ f .$3.22 above.
4'~his failure to indicate doubled consonants ortho-
graphically, prevails throughout the alphabetic material, and
is also a feature of the Ugaritic texts, as is the case with
Semi tic consonantal orthograplzy'in general.
.-
4 ' ~ f . also ti-iZ-ni, Ug. Y-H Voc. 2:27.
42~f. a l s o (ut-9u)-ri-di, U g . 3 - 3 7 0 0 . 4: 16.
A ?'/ r i l l - -
Lf-
is refers to the 'riurrian names written by Akkadian

scribes from Babylonian sites, cf. $3.332 aboveo ES;"t' and BCP
refer to the articles " ~ a r Scribes
l ~ of Nuzi," lWSL 57(1940):
162-187, and "11urrian Consonantal pattern," A J S L 58( 1941) :
by Purves.
Ug. S-H Voc. 2: 12, is an
4-%he form zi-l~x-~~~na-ni-rva,

Akkadian loan-wnrdo This, in fact, demonstrates the correct

3 309
writing of the stops which is used in this vocabulary. (BA

is used, c f o I : 31)*
-
d5v0n tirandenstein, C i T , pp. 564-565, argues that jjnt
q.:Mff. equals a. Santa(%). This is to be read as w,
cf. C.
If. Gordon UM, p. 130. The final -t , which, after g cr 1 3 final
positi~ri,would violate the well-established Hurrian s t o p
pattern, is simply another indication of the correctness of
these tests.
d61n the light of i - i - i , Ug. S-H Voc. I:
which most contain the negative -&-, it seems thaf doubling
is not orthographically indicated in this text. Hence the
repeated Err-rn-ti-Qi 2:4 and la-r[i]-ti-@. 2: 5 can only
indicate a double A.
47~romattay "father." This appears invariably as
at-ta- in ML (1:87 etc.); at Nuzu ( c f . m, p. 207)~and at
[cf. Goetze, Lang I5( 1940): 1681.
~o~hazlcoi
d8~orthe single writing see $3.37 below.
49~01the-anomalous g/k/~sg~/ki" throne,'I see la $50

(d). Note that Diakonoff, PSVX, p. 379, now connects this

with the parent phoneme which appears in Urartean as 4.
Note again that the signs GI and GU in UL are not used t ; ~

differentiate the consonant, but the vowel.

50~orevidence in this same direction, cf. the dis-
cussion of Diakonoff, PSVX, ppo 374-3799 and especially the
table on pp. 378-379, where he compares the Hurrian and
Urartean stops.
51"~rrrrian
Consonantal att tern," AJSL 58( 1941): 402.
 5 2 ~ f .$6.4461 below. Rote particularly the form I<u~$T-
da, IJg. A-E Bil.:
- 16.
531. e . consonants that exhibit the pattern of voiced
voiceless allophones.
'?Fie seems, however, to say the opposite in $$77 and 79.
-
55~peiser (E $33, n. 61) , countering Thureau-Dangin
(w~liowould analyze the form as St!-a-at-ti plus the pronoun
- of the third yerson pltrral) , prefers to see in it the
-ba
first person nlural pronominal associative -ti(l)la- mith
haplogic loss of -ti-,"in view of the fact that 'they
together' is expressed by 3a- (at-) ta-a-al-la-(an) , !lit.
4-:62." Iiomever , this hypothetical elision of the -ti- in
tlae first example and the elnendatinlz in the second is un-
cecessary. Tile basic word is H-. i'ihen the enclitic
element - L a - is added, beginning mith a double consonant,
an anaptyctic -vowel is inserted to avoid the conjunction
of three consonants. Yowever , when the enclitic element
-tills- is added, no such anaptyctic vowel is needed and the
resulting doubled dental st09 becomes voiceless. This is
s-trong eviuence in favor of true etpaclogical dotrhling of
the stops in Hurrian, cf. .,. 3.9 below.6
5 6 ~ o ra sini la* tendency with doubled consonants in
the Akkadian texts from Mari see 11. Finet, L'Accadieli d~
lettres de M a d (~cadgmieGoyale de Belgique; Classe des
lettres et des sciences ~noraleset -=~olitiques;
hlernoires,
Tome LI; Brussels: iJalais des ~cad&uies,19561, $8 a-il.
5 7 ~ f~. n r v e s ,EB, p. 176.
3 31l
=a:,- does not preclude the possibility that the final
--Amis
si;csps axe giotta-Liizedas Speiser sugges'f 5 , kilt o n l y makes it

m c h less likely that this is what the Dilbat szri'bewas at-

tempting to represent.
59~heso-called beeadlcenha$ leblers. This is a feature
of Aramaic as well. Rere it occurs in post-vocalic position
also.
f
3 0 ~ ? must
; be noted that the Hebrews and the Brameans
originated in just those areas of North Syrian and Morth-West
3lesopotamia where IIurriaii penetration was particularly strongo
of
hlth~ngkdirect z-vidence is iacking, the close ELss~ciZti~Ii
the Hurrians with other Semitic gro-q~sas at Nuzu and .klalaQ .

renders a similar relationship between the Zurriazs zrid the

ancestors of the Arameans and Canaanites entirely within the
realm of possibility.
"CfO OAYdG, pp. 39ff.
52
What they represent phonetically is another natter,
see below.
f
S 3 ~ h eset of signs which later represented the AMcaia~.
7 ha6 not y c L eons i n t o u s e , z t leas$ n s t i n Iaose
eaphatic -
arcas tl;&t zsed the :Iurro-l:ittite syflaba~y.

659ee Speiser ' s renarks in 640.

56This word also incl~desone of the three occurrences
y in these texts, see $2.21 and note 94 thereto.
of the sign -
'7~ote that this wore also violates the phonetic rule
that initial stops are voiceless. It is very possible that
i t i s n o t Iiuzrian.
68
To conclude t h a t Semitic [s] a t Kuzz !imst have been
a voiced s i b i l a n t or an a f f r i c a t e froril the f a c t t B a t i t i s

rvritten with z - s i g n s , a s Speiser does i n $42, completely

overloo~cst h e Old Axcadia~ o r i g i n of the s y l l a b a r y , f o r t h i s
i s e x a c t l y the p r a c t i c e i n Aldrad ti:nes, and hence the =signs
were g o l ~ t a o n o t r s . The f a c t t h a t t h i s i s a11 orthographic phe-
nomenon i s shown by Purvesl demonstration t h a t t h e f i r s t gen-
e r a t i 0 3 of s c r i b e s a t ITtrzu who xvere Alclcadians used e x a c t l y
t3.e same p r a c t i c e . This can only rnean t h a t the s c r i b e s were
s t i l l using GAk2c orthographic p r a c t i c e s i n t h i s p e r i p h e r a l

area, Note a l s o the v a r i a n t s p e l l i n g s a t Nippzr of names

which a r e s p e l l e d w i t h 2-signs a t Nuzu, c f . I=, p a 397f
917
note the remarks of Turves t o the same e f f e c t i n
-
m,
p?. 397-400-

7 r ~ npi-su- (NL 1:79, e t c . ) and p i - s a - (:iL 4 9 , e t c . )

fromm- I1
r e j o i c e , I t and Qi-sz-u-Q-
&
(JIL 3:85, e t c . ) f r o n

B i SUQ- vex. 11
"

t e za-a-iu-ia-e i , 4: 4 . 1 , za-XU-a-ma-a- in-an ( , i ~

4: 105j , za-ar -ra-ma-a-an (iiL 1: 89) , zTI-,uan

0
2: 11 , 3: 16, e t c . ) .
-l
I&-zU- ( ~ I L4:40,45,46), pa-zi-i-ma-an ( l i L 2:9€3, 101),

etc.
7I -In
A se-e-ni-ijv-mrr-u-rrz-zi
P (liL 3: 43) . This satne saf f i x
i s a l s o lmovm from Nuzu.
7%ee a l s o the Lexiyue h o u r r i t e o f Laroche i n U a a r i t i c a
3 31 3
-1f3 r T C - i
I ~-. u P ,p. 33$.
-- The na:ne Si-ee a l s o occurs a t i,:iypur.
This saggests t h a t ;he co;xnon name Zi<?e a t Nazu was Sike.
-
Zrrt Zire does not occnr a t i'lrrztr with any other naae elements
t k a t are demons-trably K~rrrian. Cf. p. 277.
771ndividual instances a t ::ari s u s t be used with c a ~ ~ t i o n
;or they a l l occur i n t a b l e t f i v e jy'nich i s a t y p i c a l i n other
iespects also* I t i s p o s s i b l e t h a t a given instance might
represent S e n i t i c h e a r i l g of the voiced axd v o i c e l e s s a l l o -
pllones of the Zarrian d e n t a l f r i c a t i v e , c f . $3.513 below.
C

"Cf. the remarks of Laroche, U e a r i t i c a V, I I I , C , $3.

7 9--
a Afdote, however, the r e s e r v a t i o n s expressed i n $3.43.
8 0 ~ h i si s not suggested by t h e phonetic q u a l i t y of -
9,
f o r a l l the evidence of co;nparative Senzitics p o i n t s t o the
11
f a c t t h a t t h e so-called enpbatic" consonants i n the Semitic
iangaages a r e v e l a r i z e d or "backedfTconsonants.
he TJgaritic value of t h i s l a t t e r s i g n had n o t been
recognized when Ifi nas written. See C. Ii. Gordon, 'JE.i, $5.2,
a2d $5.3; and E. A. Speiser , 11 A 6 o t e on A I p l ~ a l ~ e t i rigi
c ins,"

sASOI< 121 ( ~ e b . 1951): 17-21,

8 2 ~ h eeviclenca i s based on coiq~,nrisonsbetween d i s -

r name e l e ~ n e n t sw r i t t e n
t i n c t i v e i - l ~ rian W i t h 5 at ~ , ; L I Zand
~ the
same elements t ~ r i t t e nwith z in i d e n t i c a l names a t the i ~ k k a c l -
ian s i t e s . Purves a l s o includes t h e exanplcs with z a t biari,
but t h i s is problematicalo I t i s d i f f i c u l t t o say, r:?ithout
some c o n t r o l , t h a t these a r e not examples of the voiced a l l o -
?hone of the IIxrr iax Cs phsnezne.
 "~f. r'j.net, L'Accadien des l e t t r e s de iiari, $ 8 a-d.
55Cf. the l i s t i n Clay, PCTC?, p. 34f.

86m, p. 383ff. and i a , p. 236.

8 7 ~ h esign - -
ii a l t e r n a t e s with the s i g n i n the repre-
s e n t a t i o n of the voiced f o r m of t h i s pheneme, s e e b s l c ? ~ .
- 38I n U g a r i t i c a V Laroche uses Z i n h i s t r a n s l i t e r a t i o n

f o r both a- and 3 . In ? a r t 1 1 1 , C , $2, he n o t e s t h a t t h e s i g n

-s
Y
is consta~ti n i n i t i a l position, citicg "m,@, e t z . "
However, t h e o l d t e s t , '~f,,l 106 (13erfiier's ~ o 167)
. clearly

- i n A:
g i v e s 11i:-k_d 5,7. I have not seen the collatecf facsim-
i l e s of 3.1lie Eerdner t o be published i n p x a r i t i c a v -- . I -i;
would appear t h a t her c o l l a t i o n now shows t h i s t o be a 5-
s i g n and. not n g-sign.
-
-
8 9 ~ ri s i t m tl? See t h e preceding note.
?O~arochea l s o c i t e s Zren ( 2 7 8 ~ 6 )an& Z r i e (278:4).
These, however, very probably should go w i t h t h e ?receding

-
em i n each case, i n s p i t e of the word d i v i d e r . This would
give a f o r m -
en&-, i .e. en-na-Qura- " w i t h t h e gods" t o go
w i t h the preceding forms a t , ' ~ Z r - a , i.e. aQ$u-na-Qura-ina
..
"with t h e ones on high," a11d trnZr-m, i - e . turi-aa-Qura-ma
11
with the ones (~110 a r e ) lotv." Kote t h a t t h e s e forms a r e
written a-tt . nZrm a n l r - 7 9 . rm, showing t h a t
---
the word
d i v i d e r s i n t h i s passage are placed i n c o r r e c t l y , ( s o Laroche) .
Z'he passage then r e a s , following the p a r a l l e l i s m noted by
i a r o che : 1 eZn -- 1 Burn
 en ms -- El ms
9 i ~ h eonly other example of 3 used f o r - c i t e d by

-
Laroche is the divine name U9hr which equals %/I ?@am,
which appears i n 50:7 (f~erdner's 172: 11). ITote, however,
t h a t the name i s n o t Hurrian. Laroche nentians ic "2eshercbes
SUE l e s aoms des diercr h i t t i t e s , " @
& 7 fast. ~ 4 6 ( 1 9 ~ 6 - - ~51
7):
t h a t the Burr ians borrowed t h i s member of their piinthe~n

s c r i b e ' s choice of 5 i n t h i s naie. Note t h a t the name a l s o

occass i n Ugaritic t e x t s .
tl
9 2 ~ f 13.
a L. Ginsberg and B. >!aisler, Semitized I I u r r i m s
i n Syria and ~ a l e s t i n e , "JPOS ld(1934): 243-267, esp. p a 250.
" ~ f . fga-zi-ib-hz--zu-m - a t Chagar Bazar , ( c , p.
34) , with the common naze elements rJaZib- and lCix31Q a t Nuzu.
4'

Cf,
I
A-we-e3-mu-zi (m,p e 386, n. 4-),
a t Chagar Bazar ,
with the common elements a- a t I ; r a z ~ ,(m,p. 235f .) ; a f t e r

-r c f . Se-er-zi-ya at Kippur, (PPTCP, y. 1131 and m, p. 287) 9

with Serliya a t I!uza, ( mpy -

a 256) ; a f t e r n cf. f~rr-m-zu-
f
pa-ya a t Chagas Razsr, (my p. 387) , w i t h Srmi%uria?raa t
-z- .4.-.-
y. 259) ; a361 En-zrr-uz-ri a t Kuzw, (m,p. 259)
gL~oa
r suggestion a s t o tse cause of t h i s see 3.53.
0
c -, . 371.
96Gelb argues t h a t the 2-signs were pronounced & ( cf .
0&JG
- 9 P o 34) , and arsues f o r a pronmciation o f the &signs
" i n the directiaa~of Arabic 3
- , nerhaps not i n !viesopo%amia
proper b u t an outlying region," (OAYG, p a 37). H e very
plausibly explains the change i n the use of the signs in the
3 316
Old Babylonian period not only by the phonetic shifts i=
AMradlian bir-t also by those that took place in Sumerian ( O A ~ V G ,
pp. 3 9 f f . ) . Goetze, along with the majority of scholars,
argues for an 2-sound, probably $, for the 2-signs in Old
B&%yfs?iiian,Ccf . " ~ n eSibilaats of old Babylonian,':@ 52
( 1958) : 1481.

97~aroche,Ugaritica V , I. No. 17.

981'cocmentde fofida.tioz hnrriie ," p. IG.
9 9 ~ h eemphatic set ?I and S U had not yet come into use.
100~owever,the fact that they "heard" a voiced and
voiceless variation might have led them to choose 4
-- a~dl_O
-
even if the sound was close to g. Note the occasional use
of 5 for - c.
lQlcan we be sure, as Speiser states, that proto-
Semitic [A] was an inter-dental spirant?
IQ21 cannot agree with Prof. Speiser that the Egyptian
rendition of TeH3ub as T I ' - s u - - makes it unlikely that
Hurriztn J (using his transcription) was an interdental
spirant, (m$ 4 6 ) . \hat other sound would they have used
- sound?
since they possessed no 3 Purves similarly mis-
construes the evidence in snggestinq that 3
..-
had more of a
sibilant than dental character becaus3 of the variant
writings of the voiceless variant of the Hurrian phoneme by
Nippur scribes as g 9 p. 389, n. 61,
lo3cf. W . F. Albright, The Vocalization of the Egyptian
Syllabic Orthagraphx (American Oriental Series, Vol. 5: New
Haven: American Oriental Society, 1934), X I V D No. 6 , p. 56.
3 317
For occurrences in Egyptian texts see S. Sauneron, " ~ forme
a
ggyptienne drr nom ~egub,"Bulletin de 1'Ilastitut Francais
dlArchaeologieOrientale du Caire 51(1952): 57-59.
"41 t cannot be concluded that the second 2 also rep-
resents the labial fricative as does Speiser [=$44 (d)]
since it cannot be established for certain that post-vocalic
stops are voiced. On the contrary all the evidence points
to the fact that homogeneous consonant clusters are voice-
less. In this case the alphabet would have used g for either
the fricative or the stop.
t seems precarious to adduce hlL be-en-ti ( 1: 10j9
2:5, 2 : @ ) as a variant writing @f this word, since both
occur at Nuzu and at ~o~hazkoi.As
pent- and ~ant-/~ant-
Purves notes (NJN, p . 144), it hardly seems possible that
they could be variants in the same dialect. Further, although
the alternation want-/-pant- is well attested, no variant
spelling of pent- with 3 is I m o ~ mto me. The ML form be-en-

-
ti is evidence i n the same direction, for every certain ex-
ample of the labial fricative in initial position in BTL is
m z i t t e l i with E, cf. $3,6 3 below. Botvever, on the other side
of the ledger, the name of the well-known king of -burru,
Bente-Slna is written m ~ [cf. ~C.-G. von
~ Brandenstein,
. ~ ~
"2un1 Churrischen Lexikon," SF. 12(1940): 99-103, and E.
Weidner , ~o~hazkbi-s
tudien 9 (brsg. von Gtto Weber ; ieipzig,
1923) , p. 126, n. 31. Now ZAG as a Sumerogram can be imittu
"right" (cf. Deimel, &, NO* 332.14). This would seem to
argue strongly for the equation of pent- and *ant-/want-,
3 318
particularly since Laroche has deaonstrated that ivetnt- af
means "right bandtt[@ 54(1960): 1921.
~o~hazlc6i However,
pent- in the blittanni Letter clearly means something like
"to be well, good" (ML 1:103). Can there be some connection
I1
ir: B s r r i & ~ bz';ween to be r i g h i ; , well, good" and "right hand"?
lo61n jlJ $53,pp. 44, Speiser says: "They were independ-
cnt phonemes, and not positional variants as is the case with
the stops, because both are attested initially as well as
rnedially." I cannot find a single instance where Cv] can be
established initially. C f . also Burves, m yp. 395.
1°7perhaps sri tten differently than the first person
pronominal suffix because length is secondary'? Cf. $6.432.
Speiser's conclusion here that -if plus fa- becomes the
doubled voiceless stop seems inexplicable to me. Cf'. IH,
p. 43 and 82.
lQ8cfeg4.55 and 6.4451 below.
lo9~heform Panti- for fant- listed in the table comes
from one of the Bklzadian scribes in the first generation at
Nuzu. Occasionally variant writings with accur at Nuzu,
but they are rare.
ll'see note 107 above,
"'1-t remains possible, of course, that these are
initial 2-vowels.
Ii2g,te -
.that 3hc riiot written ~&-r-~'lto
seeiiin the
Mittanni Lefter occurs not only as at ~ n ~ b a z k g [cf.
i
Laroche, 54(1960): f193ff.1 but also as bur in the form
bu-u-ri-ip-pa-ag 932 19 1: 3 7 , 2:9 [spud Laroche,
3 319
54(1960): 195, n o 41. One also finds it in such names as
\Vur-Senni , 'IVur-Teya,\Yur-TeSgub 2% NUZU. Now the name PUP-
--
Tirwi also occurs, Since Tirwi is a divine name it remains
possible that this is a variant wrifing of a root fur-.
Xote Pand- at XUZU beside the usual Wand-, Perhaps wrcrukli/
puruQli "south, southern" fits here. Note also E- "thor.? in
IiL but b & - e ~at Boghazkoi.
'l3cf0 C. H. Goidon, , $ 1 , and go he N e w Amarna
~ablets,"Or 16(1947): 6. The forms mu-~e-el-bu-6
and even
mu-~e-el-6also occur.
lldThis refers to Laroche, "~echerchessur les noms des
dieux hittites," A= 7, fasc. 46(1946-47): 7-139.
ff
'15cf. E o von Schuler, "~urritischeNornina Actoris,

-
RHA 19 fasc. 68(1961): 2 0 f . , and p - 2 3 , n. 17.
ll6See the word list of Laroche in Ugaritica Y e
"7~he form gGQp (l&i 4:61) is problematical for it
also appears as s h and even as be@-- at ~o~hazkoi.
'l8The divine name osQrd, ( 5 0 : 7 ) , which is syllabic
do~/~~l-pra
canna% be cited as evidence because of its Semitic
origin {cr. Laroche 3XDB, p. ji). I i o t e tkdt it appears in

this sailie form in a Ugaritic text (1:13),

$6.46 below and
119~f. 111 $58.
120~urves, m , p. 397, suggests the for111a?i-t?i-ug-he-na
(a
27 3 1 2 However, the cumbination -3-appears
elsewhere with fair f reque~icywithout assimilating.
121~hatthis should be the case with just these conso-
nants fits very well with their highly resonant nature, arid
provides presm~ti-tre
evidence in favor of the correctness of
the positional voicing of the stops and fricatives set forth
above,

123~xceplfor the agentive -Mywhich forms its plural

like -La, e.g. -QuQQ. Rowever, this is due to the fact that
in form it is a doubled consonanf and not consonant plus
vowel as are t'ne o-i;ner relational particles*
12'Clf. $4.8 below.
12%he circle below the liquid indicates that it is
vocalic or syllabic.
126 For exanples see E. von Sclluler , ( I
Burritische ITomina
Actoris,I t RIfA 19 fasc. 68(1361); 20f.
l q ~ h i s construction would perhaps neigh against the
hypothesis of C. H. Gordon and E. ;I. Lacheman in "The Nuzu
!;fenology," Arch Or 10f 1933) : 53, that the month 3eQalu at Nrnzu
is a;l inclusive term embracing both 3eQalu Ha '
1f and ge9alu
Sa %ergale It would rather suggest that it is a variant of
the nonth --
3eQlu. Ho~uever,note that neither - Sa d ~ l i
gegalu ---
nor lebalo F;a '?:exgal exhibits a variant writing with gehlu,
and this worrld. involve three month names based on the same
element Se~(a)lu "pure, purity*"
12;3~notberstriking confirgmtion of this xo~vcomes from
the new alphabetic texts from Ugaxit. In 644: 9,lo occurs the
forms -
tzp and -
t-tpn. Laroche notes in his discussion of the
text in Ugaritica V thzk the divine name Te3zerb is required
by a parallel passage, 643 A: 17. lrow a -riolates the pattern
3 321
of voicing with the stops, witnessed by the form -
tsb which
occurs some tmen%y-two fimes in these t e s t s . The form can
only represent the assimilated labial fricative of the
genitive suffix -re, i.e. TeQ0ob-fe i~e00ob-be>TeQQoppe.
The doubled stop resulting from the assimilation of the
labial fricative becomes voiceless. Note the form "~e-e-
e ~ - ? ? u - u - ~ x p - pin
~ h-IL 2 : 7 7 , whichrepresents exactly the same
form. 5:1t preserves the doubled consonanto This is the
strongest possible evidence for the interpretation of these
double writings as representing consonantal lengtho
129~fo$3.18 above.
1301t remains an outside possibility that the double
writing represents a stop phonene that differs from the an-
doubled variety by some other phonetic quality than con-
sonantal length, such as aspiration (as is suggested, e . g .
by I. 11. Dialconoff, PSVX, p. 598) , however, two factors weigh
heavily against this. First it does not explain how Akkadian
scribes would also represent these same phonemes by double
writing, nor why %he product of assimilation is written double,
both by Hurrian scribes and by Semitic scribes. Secondly,
the three fricatives of Hurrian, P~bial,dental and velar,
all exhibit this same phenomenon of the doubled consonant
being voiceless. It is hard to see what phonetic quality
could be common to both stops and fricatives. Hence it must
be concluded that the double ~vri ting rep~esents consonanfa1
length.
 his can be assumed for the nominal froin the fact that
this assimilation is found with the verb, see below,
2
- in AfL 1:14, cited by
The forin gur-ru-u-be-ni-e-Qe-wa
Speiser in IH 61, must certainly be a misprint in K U D for
-ni-e-wee Friedrich's l i o t s "mit Kn, I nach Koll. I t must refer
to the change of ST in Schroeder's copy to PI (i.e. IW).
3 ~ h eform antn-uactta cited by Speiser is an example
of the dative not the genitive , cf. $6 04452 9

k h e r e is no possibility of this condition existing

w i t h the intransitive verb, for the vocalic class marker in
affirmative forms of intransitive verbs is already -2-,
see $7.43.
5 ~ c h r ereads AN instead of AS. Friedrich, KASD, p e q,
se 4,notes that the sign is II
etwas ver~ischt,"but J.b. I has
AS'. The contest demands that the sign be AS. If it is APJ or?
the tablet it is a scribal e r r o r *
P
Dm,? 1 ,
..
,,
a L-- ~
<u,rvn~uuy
~ ~
2(i948):
,---I t256, n o
~ .n ~ ,

- single writing occurs %Then the following

?With -Ila- -an
is written with single -2-, i.e. - rather than -a-an (see
-an
$3.113) , but this has nothing to do with the presence of the
agentive suffis preceding.
8 ~ h e-&- genitive srrff ix is added directly to the final
consonant of consonant stems, t v i t'nout any secondary vowel, for
note how it assimilates to the labial stop in TeQQop, see
$4.54 below.
4-5 32 3
0
/For a criticisn of Goetze's inclusion of place names
in uE;-Tse as examples of this phenomenon, see $6.4441 (f) and
note 67 thereto.
l%or another possible example of this same phenomenon,
see $4.58 below.
l l ~ o rother examples see $3.83.
1 2 ~ h eform W
'[~
- ]u-mi-i-ni-iv-wa-di l-la-a-an (ML 4:
114) is not necessarily opposed,

l ~ h eidentification of separate Hurrian words is, in

general, no problem since the scribe usually left a pro-
nounced space be-tween the ;v~rds. Compare the hlittami Let-
ter for instance with fhe Ug. A-H Bile where lack of spacing
creates difficulties in the in%erpretation.
2 ~ a tis those morphemes whose primary function is to
modify the meaning of the soot rather than express its re-
lation to the other words of the clause or sentence.
'~t is a possibility, however, that roots can be used
as root complements. Note the -m-element of pis-ant-
"rejoice about" and the deictic nominal root anti- 'Ithis" ;
and the verbal root complement -%- ~hiclzhas been inter-
1I
preted as a "factitive" or causative" element and the ver-
bal root x- give,
!I 11

-.
4 ~ fI H 5693-97.
q I ba2vs Gispensed with the term "free1'
roots since they never stand alone.
'%'he fact that many verbal roots do not appear as
norninals and vice versa need only be due to the limited amornit
of Hrxrrian we possess.
6
Being, in fact, the only appendage possible with the
particles.
7cf . note 2.

%he limitat inns of applying I'conventional" grammatical

categories to Harrian are most evident here. Hurrian expresses
the prepositional relationship by relating two rnorphologicall~
identical n~rninalsk~iththe proper "relational" or II
case" suf-
fixes to bring out the nuance of thought desired, e.go at-ta-
i-i-wa e-ti-i-ta (!JL 1:106), i.e. -
attay-i-fa eti-i-fa, "fa-
..
ther-his-for person-his-to,11 i.e. "for the sake of his father. l I
2
Cf. IH $99. E.g. lcuro again, in return, functions
11 t1

as a particle; in T I - u - - (EIL 4:42) it appears as a nominal ;

and in gu-ru-u-a-[gal (ML 1: 45) it appears as a verbal ; simi-
I1
--
l a r l y 8uWio furthermore, moreover1' is a particle, while
11
Bukkanne is a nominal; and finally note naQQ- to send, dis-
patch," pa0Qithi- 11 envoy" and paQQi$i- 11
shipment. )I
3~peiser, S/ 104, has noted that stems which only show
a writing with -A, all include ambiguous signs (cf. $3.113).
Hence it seems simplest to regard these as g-stems until
clear proof of an &-stem is attested. However, when such
proof is lacking an 1-vowel will be used.
4~arochenotes the form 3eni = AMc. = SES in Tig.
Quad. Voc. 135 obv. 19 (cf. U~ariticaV , Part I , No. 21, and
G 325
suggests"". . 1' onomastique en .-len(n)
- -i suggere plutat ,
c o m e le prksent vocabulaire , TXI th&me 3eni .
11
However, the
forms on which gens- is based are not capable of being ex-
plained in any other way. The second person pronominal suf-
fix is added to the stem vowel (of. $6.433) and hence the
form Qena-f-u@ ( 9 1 ~1:84) versus ga0Qithe-f-IN (BIL 1:72 e t c . 1
V

argues strongly for an a-stem vowel, Oena-. Note also Qala

"daughter" (hlL 1:47, 3: 35,37,104) vs. aha-f-an ( ~ I L1: 51,
4:93) "and thy daughtern and gal-iff- "my daughtern (ML
-
3 : 7 6 , 9 0 ) . The form -3enni of the onomasticon is best re-
garded as Ben+ne (for the elision of the 2-stem vowel, see
$~.P2l), c f . w, p. 255. Hence the form in the Ug. Quad.
Voco must be regarded as tnusrral,
'see Lsroche, Unaritica V, I, No. 7, where it equals
Ug. garitmil(Quad. Voc. 130 3:18).
6 Ibid 3 No. 5, where it equals Aldc. e q [ . l r ~ aand Ug.
SadCu] .
C
[Qr~ad.Voc. 130 3: 11) .
hat Yne stem vowel is definitely -g can be seen Prom
the form el~-ri-eJ-nCL-&J-u~, (biL 3:48) Note the eqmtions

-
ewri = i'Lk1c. bglu = Ug. b a q u , (130 3:13-14), but ewir-ni =
Sarrum = Ug. zallm ( 1 7 7 2: 32-33) in Laroclie, Ggaritica
&,&.
v, I , KO. 6 *
8~ompareUrartean ti- to speak, tiya- "word," see
1f 1I

--
Dialconoff, PSVX, p. 382.
9 ~ f .Laroche, "gtudes hourrites ," @ 54( 1960) : 189-132.
10dpeiser, -
IH @105 and 2 8 , lists this as a "nominalized
preposition." The morphology of IIuxrian is strictly against
6 326
II
such a divisio2 for prepositioms" have no morphologically
seaatate existence in EIurrian, Cf $ 6 0 ~ 6 2 . aather~as the

occurrence of the word in its root meaning in the Ug. A-H

Bil. has shorn (cf. Laroche, PRU 111, p~ 315) it is a
11
prepositionalized nominal" or better a nominal whose most
cormon fmctisn is f o eqxess the relationship ustmlly re-
served to prepositions An other languages. See now eti-ta =
~~l&. a,na = Vg. -
l e y tTg, Quad. VOC.. apud Laroche, Uaaritica V,
I, NO. 24,
''see ibid., So. 10, where isten = A?&. and Ug. analm
(~uad.Voc. 130 3: 12).
12See iki-ta = ~ g hi
. ( ~ g Quad.
. ~ o c . 130 3:5-6). For
this word as it occurs in the U g , S-H Voc. 2:127-128 where it
equals Swm. sB, and P:3-11, 2:30 where it equals Sum. Sk " t o , "
see Laroche, Ibid., No. 24.
'%ate Urartean l.~/~urs''slave, 1I
cf. Dialconoff, PSVX,
p. 373.
%.bus Ug. a - "end" eqirals Bogh. alummi- "last" ;
Ug. Iiu3aQ eqtxals Bogh. I<U~.X$, Ug. S-li VQC. --
1: 31 ki-ba-gu
wo~xldequal Bogh. and Rlif . ki-bu-8a; Ug. (and M U ~ = ) K
--w-u r w e
ey.Jals Bogh. Kumarbi, etc., cf. Lar~che,Xh 54(1960) ; 189

151 t is possible that uQtanni = Aldc. ef l u = DUM in Ug.

Uuaa. VOC. 1 3 2:2A is a diphthong stem due to the form
rxgtae at Bogkr., cf. Laroche, Ucraritica V, Part I , No. 314.
It is also possible that x- is correct rather than a for
,!I see
the "prepositional" nominal which means "~resence
 16Note nos the form ~a-;-ru-gi-$i "earthen" a t iilala@,
--

P a r t 3, D a s s u b a r h s c ~ e3 o r t f u r ' i c h ' ," A n Cr 12.1935):

131-135.
I g ~ o rthe e l i s i o n of t h e agentive -= before -=,
- t i l l a s an8 -&a, c f . $4.4.
20,.
s e e Speiser , " A N e w kIurrian Pronoruinal ~ o r m , "JAOS
6 0 i i 9 4 0 ) : 254-357.
21
C f e Laroche, U e a r i t i c a V , I , No. 10.
2 2 f~u l l treatment of ant- has been given by Friedrich,
If
Zwei c h r r r r i t i s c h e ~ r o n o m i n a , "A= 5 f a s c . 35(15)39): 98-102.
2 311
Zwei ~ h ~ r r r i t i s c hPronomina,"
e R a 5 f a s c . 35(1939):
9 3-98
forms i n -ar-ae
2q7~he c i t e d by Speiser a r e b e s t taken
a s examples of the jrrssive s u f f i x -ae, see 87.46321 5 .

34~@s-.
, p. 1$8f Besides the form s a r a e c i t e d by Draff -
ltorn from Nuzu, i t now appears f r e q u e n t l y i n t h e Linear A t e x t s
from Hagia T r i a d a , followed by b o t h t h e wheat and b a r l e y d e t e r -
minatives. Thus, note: sa-ra*wheat -
TIT 19: 2 , 28 A: 2 , 90: 1, 101: 3

102: 1 , 114 A: 1-2, 120: 1-2; sa-rg -

BT 28 B : 3 , 94 k:3, 99
A:l, 100:4, [from G . C a r a f e l l i , Le Emiarafi di Haghia Triada
i n Lineare A , (Vnlversidad de Salamanca: Seminario di F i l o -
l o g i a c l a s i c a , 1953) 1.
3 5 ~ b i d . , p. 192. 361bidayp, 166,
3 7 ~ o t ethe discussion of thesz terms i n E . yon Schuler,
" ~ w r r i t i s c h eXomina Actoris,'! 19 fast. 68(1961): 19-23,

and c f . the l i s t of such terms t h a t occur i n the 81alaQ

t e x t s i n Draffkorn, HEW, p. 217,
or -
taiali equals
I1
ermrrch" see X. Le;;y, "?-iisceIlanea
IXuziana, 11 NS. 28(1959): 12A. However, note now t h a t t a l i -

-
e w a l s iggu "wood" i n Ug, Q ~ a d eVOC. 130 3: 2 (Laroche,

-
Ugaritica V , I , 30. 25).

'?~f. -
I B $142. The f u n c t i o n of t h i s c l e ~ s n tfor the
c a s e s was f i r s t noted by Goetze, he Genitive of the I I u r r i m
?:oun, I1 & 5 fasc. 39(l9$0): 203r.
4'~he f ornl i n context i s mr i t t e n tr-n-mi-i-ni-im-ma-a3-

-
Y
sa.-&-an. The doubling of t h e -f- i s an orthographic pheneme-
non connected with t h e f o l l o ~ v i n gp a r t i c l e -%, c f . $3.113.
41rrhe t h i r d person i s not s o easy t o demonstrate be-
cause i t s s i n g u l a r , form i s not i ~ m e d i a t e l yapparent, cf.
$6.434 below. liowever , note the f o l i o r i n g p l u r a l s : t m v -
iyaQ " t h e i r t a b l e t s i ' (HL 3: 39,45) , zrrlcittart-iyaG " t h e i r '2':
(CTL4: 100) , Qi tur-iyaQ 11
t h e i r cur s e s ( 3 ) " ( I C 27
~ $2 obv. 23)
Caprxd Goetze, &
A 5 f a s c . 39(1940): l98!, n. 321.

4 2 ~ ge e n i t i v e -fe becomes -fa before -==

4 3 ~ o rt h e l'genitive-genitive" p r e p o s i t i o n a l phrase s e e
$6.4442 (b) 0

&perhaps t h i s form i s w r i t t e n w i t h -=because the

-
an represents syllabic g rather than the syllable -a,This
is not the connective because of the preceding . . .]a-ano
$5-,
- m e term "zero-suffix" is a better designation than
11
stem-form" because it frequently appears with a pronominal
11
suffix and is then, strictly speaking, no longer the stem-
f orrn" of the nominal.
4 6 ~ f .Messerschmidt , "hii tanni-~tudien,
11
pp. 3-8; Bork,
11
- p.
" ~ i ehlittamispfache, p. 46; and see Friedrich, BChG, 7,
n. 1.
11
47~hi:swas first noticed by Goetze in The a-form of
the Hurrian n'o~.m,'~JAOS 60(1940): 217-223. IIotvever, Goetze,
nonetheless, still regards this -2 as the suffix of the

48~or a more complete discussion of the associative

predicative particle -2, including seasons why it cannot be
taken as a relational suffix, see $9.2.
4911.1phonemic norifialization the associatives will be
separated from the ~vovsrds to ~irkici~
they are attached by plus
signs (+) , while suffixes will be indicated by dashes ( - ) .
11
5'~he grammatical terms subject" and "object" are
avoided here intentionally for reasons that will become
obvious as we proceed.
51~hisis discassed in detail in 111, $194.
52~hishas been transla3ed with an English passive
construction to bring out the cha~acterof the Hurrian con-
struction. Since this is the ortiy tvay Harrrian can express
the coi~structionwith a transitive verb and both logical sub-
6 330
ject and object, it is.the equivalent of the English active
construction and ought to be translated SO, i.e. "my brother
requesfed a Wife. 11
53r~heseterms were first applied to IIurrian by Spciser,
who established beyond cavil the passival force and nature
of the transitive verb, cf. J
Z
I $246.
541%r full discussion see $$7-43 and 7.48.
5 5 ~ h eallomorphic forms of the suffix are listed and
separated by the sign -.
56~1thoughvoicelessness, however, was-retained. This
is seen from the invariable use of 2 in final position at
Ugarit.
57The double labial fricative -a-is always written
double in final position and hence did not lose its gemina-
tion. Bowever, in the writing -iw-v13 used for this fricative,
the final vowel is non-distinctive where such would not be
the case in atteqting to write a double g , i.e. &, &, 3
J
or & would have indicated a sqerf luous vowel. For this
reason it remains possible that the final -8 represents a
double sound.

5 9 ~ o rthe Dgaritic writings see now Laroche in U.gar.aritica

V , Part 111. Note the following: NO. 2 offering to El, (text
274-1 , en al-g e [clamrm en ugr tw 'm3tmrw, which is in
transcription ene AlaQiyaQe ene Amurri-fe ene Ugarit-fe
C
Amistamru-fe, i.e. "the Alasiyarn god, the god of the west
11
(or ~tnurru), the god of Ugarit, of C~nnnistamru, and compare
6 331
?mrb(nd) ,( ~ g Alph.
. 261: 14, 2-74: 4) with lmrw(nd) , (ugo Alpbe
254:5, l72:l ? ) .
60~peiser, in IH $151, hesitates to posit ~ i lsince the
hiittarmi Letter regularly uses -w-. However, the great
regularity of hiittzzini cfthcgr=~-phy the fact that, in
almost every case in which we can be c e r t a i n , writixgs with
-
-iv- correspond to [f], argue strongly for the labial fricative.

-
6 1 ~ n dhence it is homographic with the dative suffix -fa.
In most cases the contest clearly indicates which is meant.
However, these are few cases where ambiguity exists.
62
For the establishment of the third sing. pronominal
suffix in greater detail, cf. $6.434.
63Speiser' s assumption that it represents the doubled
stop (
IlJ $82) seems inexplicable, for there is no reason for
the fricative to shift to the stopo This is a different

- - u ~(ML
thing than %.-e - e - e ~ - ~ .u -~~2 : 77) for liere the fricative

has assimilated to the final stop of the name,

6%he second person singular pronominal suffix, written
- in final position, tvould be voiced since it is a "pattern"
-ib
consonant and is in word-final position. C'f. the labial stop
in word-final position in Te38ub.
65~f. Laroche, uearitica V , 111, A , No. 6.
6 6 ~ h eword is rmlmotm.
67~or this suffix in place names see A. Goetze, f I Hurrian
Place N m e s in -9('5)e," i~ Festschrfff Johannes Friedrich zr_m
-.

-65 Gebrrrtstag (IIsgbn. von IZ. von Kienle, A. I~loortgat,H e Otten,

E . von Schuler , und W e Zaumseil ; I-Teddelberg: Carl Winter, 1959) ,
G 332
pp. 195-206.
6 8 ~ nthe article cited in the previous note, p. 195,
Goetze includes several forms in ug-ge as examples of geni-
If 11
tive forms witbout the plural article. However, the fact
%hat these are written with double -33- and that they do not
carry the suffix - ~,awhereas the forms are always writ%en
with single -S- - when the -= occurs, shows that these must
be taken as abstracts formed with the suffix -&, ssc $6.5.

69~or ewir-ile and presumably also e~vre-nneas "king"

see Ug. Quad. Voc. Py 2 32-33 where emir-ne equals kkk.
.?!arm and Ug. malkcr, whereas emri in I. 30 3: 1 3-lAr equals
AH;. bi3lu and Ug. baclu (cf. Lasoche, Uaaritica V, I, No. 6 ) *
he exact force of these words is hard to assess, but
they do not affect the general sense of the passage.
7 l ~ h i sphrase is most likely the Hurrian equivalent of
the Hittite idalus memisas "malicious gossin," a common topic
of Hittite treaties, cf. Goefze, JCS 2(19~8): 264. -
72~peiser's interpretation of the -= of these forms
, 1 is tied up with his view of this suffix as an
11
attributive" s u r f ix which r e i a f e s the modifier to the he*
noun, c f . $6.4521 below.
7 3 ~ ~ .$69 an3 128.
7 4 ~ f . "8tnaes hourrites," 54.f1960): 189ff.
751n $234, Speiser sets up a special use of the
genitive with the verb m- I1
rejoice" on the basis of the
form an-du-6-e- (hiL 2:63). This cannot be substantiated, cf.
$6.4452(a) below.
 76Cf'. $7.41 (1) below, and. Laroche, 54(1960]: 199-
201. Laroche very plausibly suggests the root fahr> farre
-i71n passage (2) Speiser concludes that the form antu-
Jp+tta- could be either genitive or dative since the vowel

-e frequently becomes _a before the pronominal associative -SO

However, this vowel change seeas fs take place oraly m i - k h the
stem vowel, cf. $4.24. Note that it does not happen with
the 8-vowel of the suffix -nee
78L&, p. 200, n. 5.

tably conf;ains the pro~~olriinalassociative -=a as Fr iedr ich

supplies in ICASD, p. 17.
"1n -
PnU 111, p. 6 , n. A Laroche explains inrEs-

on the analo,g of the forms -%li versus u&ulio Bowever,

-
the u-vowel in the latter form is due to the syllabic I: which
follows, cf. $3.83 above. The 2-vowel of lnr3c@u is simply
the connecting vowel between the consonant and fhe airective
suffix.
81~iowever, the form So-e-ni-iw-vrd-ta occurs some nine
times never with any vowel expressed.
8 2 ~ v e nafter the senivowel p, cf. a-ta-1-ta (5:5) at

8 3 ~ h i sis clearly shown by the forms B&&t kdlrtCt1 in

8 4 ~Bo not see rrhy Prof. Laroche vocalizes this with

an -
a-vowel. Cf. his remarks md.er Part 111, C , $ 1 3 . A
stative does not seem to fit the context at all. The forms
in m a epg3u at Nuzu are either examples of the M.dcWian
accx~sativeafter en63n or the Harrian stative, cf. u,
$ 172.
85~asides the following two, an exam2le occurs in hiL
4-46-47, but the verb is too obscure for analysis.
86~i'm a 19:61-64; 20:52,55, 26:42, 27:28 etc.
97~his is further evidence that these are specialized
11
uses of ordinary nominals rather than being nominalized
prepositions" as per Speiser, $128. Cf. the remarks of
Laroche to the same effect in 111, p~ 315. This also
makes the agglutinative structure of Hurrian manifestly
evident.
8 8 ~ f the remarks in $6.4442 above.
'$1, this means SarrF;ln, of Nineveh, as the context
almost d e ~ a n d,
s one mould expect Minua-f e-ne-fa.
90~orthis reading ra.ther than the -& of Friedrich,
IiASD, p. 9 , see Speiser, la hone tic blethod in fiurrian Ortlio-
graphy," Lang. lG(lgq.0): 3 2 5 , n. 26.
9'~ie hiitannisprache, p. 48.
0 25peiseri
, s interpretation in $154(b) that the -=
-
in the forms eQe-ne-ra Qawuru-nne-ra ( h l ~ 3: 100f .) is used
im the derived sense of "like" may well be correct, but the
interpretation of the immediate phrase is too problematical
(1
and mcertain to be sure, Speiser states t1'iat it is plain
from the context that the wealth of the Egyptiac ruler is
said here to be as extensive as heaven and earth." This is
not plain %o me at al'l for the subject under disc~ssion.is
a golden statue of or for TtGratta (%I-u-svd, line 9 9 ) which,
it is said, should be large (tmn-o-l-ewa, line 100).
1

9 3 ~ f .von Brandenstein, C M T , p . 571, n. 1. Speiser

does sot point out that this form is parallel to al-la-ni

heavens." Now the latter form is identical with the plural

11
of the dative and could suggest a "dative of location. How-

ever, the singular form in -ya precludes such a treatment.

Further, note that clear dative singular forms never carry
this meaning.
-i
34~peiser ' s interpretation of the form Kun?da-a-~?$-r -
a-a-an-ni - - ( h l ~ 3:7), as being an example of
the 1ocative , i.e. Masri-ya-(n)ne "land -
in (=of) ~ g y p t "
C
u $137 l(c)l is extremely forced. \Ye need also to account

- beside the homonyln h'iizir-.

for the form hiagr- The clue is
given by the fact that in each unbroken context where
Efagriyanni occurs it parallels Purwoge "Xurrian,1 I viz. hlL
2:69,71; 3:7,ii7; 4:128. ( I D two occurrences, XIL 4:97 and 105,
the context is broken) . Obviously, then blasriyanni is best
interpreted as an adjective like gurswoQe. As to i%s fornr,
the answer has been suggested by E. von Schuler in "~urritische
iu'omina Actoris,I t 19 fasc. b8(1361): 22, n. 7, where he
says 11 Darf man deshalb ein barbarisch ( ? ) -akkad. Gentiliz
Migriaju ansetzen?" In the light of the above parallel in
usage between bfasriyanni a ~ YurwoQe
d he is right. That it is
built on a gentilic is fully verified by contrasting.the usage
of the variant form lfizir- f Egypt
1 I1
Compare the following:
 ( f ) 8urwoQe-ne-fe INRo(mi?n-ne-fe - (IIL
e~vCre-nine
I1
2:72) Hurrian-one-of land-one-of lord-one(? ) " i.e.
11
"the king of the land, the Surrian one.
(2) MaHriya-me-fe ~~'~o]rnin-ne-~e
eCwre-nnle
( L 2 : ) , ~~yptian-one(?) land-one-of lord-one(?) ,11
11
-of
11
i.e. "the king of the land, the Egyptian one.
( 3 ) q u ~ r a Ctt++an] l'UR~urwo~eewir-ne hi^ 4:127),
11
Tugratta (is) the Burrian king*
(4)m~muriya+an m ~ ~ a ~ cya-n]ne
ri ewir-ne (XL 4:128),
I1
"~mmuriya(is) the Egyptian lord.
with:

II
Ximuriya, by the lord of Egypt.
Note that when Kizir- is used, it must be placed in the
genitive case aad the 11 phrasal" relational suffixes axe at-
tached to it by aeazs of the anaphoric suffix -=, as with
any other nominal. Holvever , the form MaSr isanni para1lels
the adjectival form completely.
I mould only question von Sch-rrler'sbasic form hiisriiiju.
h~agriyanni is rather a Hurrianized Akkadian gentilic in &
(cf. von boden, GIU;, $56q, and for Old Akkadian, ~ e l b , m,
p a 156) , i .e. - 11
~iqrzyuCcf. Jensen, Grundlagen fur eine
Entzifferung der (hatischen oder) cilicischen(?.) Inschriften,"

-
ZDMG 48(1894): 4391. To this Aldcadian gentilic the Burrian
ending -- is added, by means of the connecting vowel _ae
I canndt explain' the'_a-votvreh in the first syllable.
6 3 37
95~n $207 and 235 Speiser treats this form and the
form t[i-w]i[-i-yla-[an] in line 104, (which he himself es-
tablished as the correct sumplementation, see a,p. 173,
n. 280) as datives. In formneither one can be. Speiser also
interprets e-ti-iw-wa , ML 3: 91, as a dative (
IFJ 4 235) and
even reconstructs 31L 3: 11.5 as du-ru-bi-iw-wa eti-ta? These
forms cannot be dative either.
96 If only one such form occ-ared, we might assume
C
scribal omission of the g-sign, but this cannot be done for
three separate cases, two of which clearly require a locative
force.
V ~ h eforms in -= in purely Hittite contexts at
h i Laroche, @ 54(1960): 19-71 are inexplicable
~ o ~ h a z ~[cf.
to me.
98~he form -2 posited by Speiser from the writing -di-e
in the tIg. S-B Voc. is to be deleted; -di-e is the contraction
of efi- "person" with the preceding word, c f e Laroche,
54(196!3) : 198, and especially now U~ariticaV, 1, No. 24.
99~heword palt- is s nominal built by adding the root
c o ~ ~ l e m e s-3t f o t h e r o o t -
It
pal- "'mom" ( c f . kelt- well-being,
he a I t-n" kel- "-please, satisfy1i
- ) . In this ccnfext the meaning

appears to be something like "aathentic. 11

lo0T'his is not an example of the compound -wa
- form to
be discussed below. The -@- is part of the stern of this word,
cf. BiyaroQQe (BIL 3:93), which is not adjectival. This has
been explained as a. borrowing from AIrh:. ~ur%qu [cf. Albert
.,

Cuny, ?Ib7.
..,itamian Qiarowe (:or?: - I (1930): 135-188)1,
," RRA
5 3 38
b u t as t h e Greek i?a;t4+i: and Hebrew ')iiiishow t h e word Was in-
;\. . >

t e r n a t i o n a l , hence i t s o r i g i n is uncertain,
l o l ~ o r t h i s meaning see N . Van Brock, a 17 fasc. 6 5
( 1 9 5 3 ) : 117-i&.
1°%ote a l s o ~ i l a ~ (XL
t ~4:66),
~ ~ aQ e Q e l l a l @ a + t i l l a t

-
an (LIL 4: 121) , ur-iurpu08uljQa (hiL 3: 35) , and naQull-irnpu88ngl3a
(hlL 3: 9 4 ) .
"?Row t h i s form d i f f e r s i n meaning from those ending

i n -impu-88-u@-a remains t o t a l l y obscure. Eofe a l s o t h e

nominals ending i n -2-
cf. $6.4614.
I 0 k f . Ill, $156. This, however, i s not a b s o l u t e l y
c e r t a i n f o r the ftmction of t h e ubiquitous -(n)n- i n KL i s
s t i l l far from c l e a r .
lo5F'or t h i s meaning of m- see 19: 24 " d ~ ~ t ?Ia r
d.~manum lei libbi-Su 3a ZQiya lirnesgelgi "may I S t a r
11
and Auan make her l i k e the h e a r t of my brother.
Io6cf. a l s o I:L 3: 33-34.
''?This cannot be g e n i t i v e f o r i f i t were t b e ending
- of the "head" noun would have t o be repeated on the
-m,a
modifiers. Cf. $6.4521 A , and note example (1) above.
"'~t t h i s d a t e F r i e d r i c h was using t h e term " ~ u b a r g i s c h e "

f o r t h e liii~guage. S h o r t l y a f t e r he adopted the term

tI
~kaurritische."
lQ9"ein suff ixanreihendes -ne,ll dn Or 12( 1935) : 127.
I!
"'The connotation meant here i s that of single, indi-
vid'al." I t i s not yet c l e a r whether t h i s s u f f i x a l s o bore
I1
t h e meaning of the number one" i n Elurrian. A ~ s i o r it h e ex-
6 339
pectation would be in the negative since the other n-mbers
in Htrrrian are separate nominal roots ratherthan suffixes
or particles, cf. $6.24.
'"BY "nominal phrase" is meant a nominal plus its geni-
tival or adjectival modifiers.
"*see note 109 above.
t is this which precludes their being "attributional"
suffixes as per Speiser, cf. below.
ll4.~orthe allomoxpl~ -= -
of the genitive suffix -fe
see $6.4441 (b).
115.For this derivational use of -= see $6.4522 belm.
116For this meaning see now Laroche, U ~ a r tica
i V, Part
111, Section A , Text 1, notes to line 3 .
'I73ee note 115.
l18see note 115.

I'*' c m do nothing with the words immediately preceding

121gll the contexts in which this word appears fit some

such neaaing as t l ~ i s .
122
For the comparative use of the associative fa;n, see
$9.8 below.
123~aroche,Ugaritica V , Part I, No. 6.
124This rtakes it very plausible that the person called
-7
:i , in 11 Sam. 24: 16 ( -1 17 k
4- elsewhere) is actually
the king of Jerusalem and not merely the governor or mayor. Note
the definite article on the namei For another instance in which
this same word was misunderstood as a personal name by the
Assyrians, see A. L. Oppenheim, " ~ n eglose hwrrite dai~sPes
Amales de Tiglath-Pbalasar I ," 5( 1939-1940): 111-112.
12580te the exmples cited by Speiser in $137 (4)
a~hichfhis now clarifies. Speiser, however, xses these in
support of his "attributive" interpretation of the saffix.
1 2 6 ~ t is significant to observe that the word gsrrr; is
not fotmd in hfL. The recognition that ervir-ne is the Hurrian

-
equivalent of Sarru 11 kingn shows that "srrrn is an Akkadian
loan word in Hurrian.
X 27 She is not mentioned by name.

128F'or this relational use of the plrrral -= see

$6.4531 below.
1291n $133 Speiser transliterates this as gar-ra-

-
as-Hi-8i-bi-na-iCu-uS]. hlobvever , the sign after 2 is cer-
tainly not Bo If the small horizontal wedge in the upper
left corner, show by the encircling dotted lines to lie in
a broken surface, is ignored, it is a perfectly good for
this tablet. The scribe of this tablet was exceptionally
carzfess. r o t s , i n the line iiilri~ediatelyshove: gar-ra-az-
V
si<-&i-ni)-bi-na-8u-ul e-eb-ri-is (-3i)-Qi-ni-bi-na-Hc-uL ,
130~f.the preceaing note.
1 3 1 ~ similar
0 ~ uses of the suffix -& in the hlli ttanni
letter, c f . $6.46612 A b e l o w .
132~ora more detailed explanation of this see $6.4521
above
O X translation see the renarks under the root
I ~ ~ F this
complement -art-,$ 6 . 3 (2).

'34~ue t o the f i n a l -2 preserved i n t h i s ruord, and

t h e lack of any -=p l u r a l , I would suggest some word ending
i n c o l l e c t i v e - a r t i - here.
1 3 5 ~ e enote 116 above.
13%oetze makes this t h e c e n t r a l f a c t of h i s i n t e r -
? r e t a t i o n t h a t these s u f f i x e s a r e definits articles, c f . =

11
iffa8-(f)e+n %!e$~up-~e d~manu-qe, i.e. of our gods, of
," (IiL 2: 77)
Te$Eub (and) of ~ m o n . Note t h a t two 8.mrds pre-
vious t o t h i s passage occurs DIxGxfi O~E'e-e-ni-iw-\rs-~n-u~
without t h e -*sui'fix. I t could be considered a s - s i g n i -
-
f i c a n t t h a t hen the -na i s present a s i n l i n e 77, the s c r i b e
w r i t e s the determinative simply DINGBi?, but when the -= i s
not used, as i n l i n e 76, the s c r i b e f e e l s i t necessary t o

en-na-QUO i n hiL 1:78 and 4.: 117 makes t h i s dsubtktfl.

The other occrrrrences a r e f omcl i n iiL 4: 115f. : inu+me+

gu-tan-ni-iw-wa-a5 . .l-li-it-ta,
sa.-a-+z-x
Y
" froal thy gods our
f o r t u n e s ( ? ) (a.nd) our f a t e m i l l be requested." I n en-n(a)-
if-tan the -= obvior~slymust r e f e r t o nrmber. So a l s o i n

- and possibly i n ~ u t a - m ( a-)i f f a @ , bat t h i s

elj jar-n(a) -iffaQ
i s ~ m c e r t a i ndue t o the ambiguity about the f o r m s i n -m.
 --
The forms rna-ka-a-an-ni-iw-via [. . 81 (ILL 2: 15) and ma-ka-a-

--
an-ni-iw-1n.x-6-rm-na (1dL 2: 54) are problenlatical The word
appears a s makanna i n the p l u r a l i n XL 3: 58, but i t h a s been
very p l a u s i b l y i n t e r p r e t e d as a borrowing from Vedic magha-
"wealth, g i f t , " Ccf. H. Kronasser, Etymoloaie der hethitischew
Barrassczmite , 196 3 ) , p. 14.51, and
Spfacbe (-fiiesbaden: Q?;t=
hence take t h e s u f f i x --, p l u r a l -=a, as i s common with
foreign words borrowed by the Btrrrians, e.g. hfa3riyame, c f .
the rexarks of von Schuler "11urritische Nonriila ~ c t o r i s , "
1u-a i g f a s c . 68(1961): 19-23*
7

1 3 8 ~ o rthe c o l l e c t i v e f o r c e of a r t - see $6.3 (2) .

1 3 9 ~ h eg r e a t r e g u l a r i t y of the overt expression of t h e
p l u r a l i n most Zuropean languages must n o t lead 3 s astray
here. Other languages do not share such a f e a t u r e . Thus

t h e s i n g n l a r form of the Hebrew noun is f r e q u e n t l y used w i t h

numbers above one, t h e p l u r a l form a p p a r e n t l y * b e i n g deemed
s 7 q e r fluaus is such a c o n t e x t , e . g . ;-I x5:I
..
.= ~
. .. j 3 3- 2... t
( .
--
?J' i
0

I .
:?, Esther I r I .

t r a n s l a t i o n caiil only B e p e r i p h r a s t i c s i n c e we
140~y
have no way i n English t o make a crualitative a d j e c t i v e out of
I1
the norm "brothers.
ld1see &XJ $158, and F r i e d r i c h , An Or 12(1935): 122-128.
' q 2 ~ f =$3.7 above.
143111e voiced l a b i a l s t o p b before the 4 i s unrrsual and
probably r e f l e c t s a non-Burrian o f i g i n f o r the word,
l u ~ fLaroche,
. U e a r i t i o a V , III, A. Textes, 2 . , n o t e s
t o l i n e s 6-7.
 1 4 - 5 ~ o rother examples see Friedr i c h , A n Or 12( 1935) :
122ff.
.
1 4 6 ~ f Fxiedrich, An Or 12( 1935) : 124..
' 4 7 ~ . the remarlrs of s p e i s e r i n $56, p. 47, and more
r e c e n t l y Laroche, Ugaritica V, 1x1, C, $ 9 .
1 A 8 ~ f .Friedrich, An Or, 12(1935): 121ff.

1 4 9 ~ e eDrafflcorn, i a , p. 156.
150~rafflcorn, m, p. 159.
l5'Cf. Speiser, IB 457, and F r i e d r i c h , iln O r , 12(1935):
l23ff
1 5 2 ~ e eLaroche, U e a r i t i c a V, 111, C , $9. I t cannot be
vocalized pabanQe, however, f o r t h a t s p e l l i n g would have been
w r i t t e n pbng, due t o the voicing of the f r i c a t i v e a f t e r the
nasal 11. The form papnawe i s p r e f e r a b l e i n t h e l i g h t of
pap-ni, cf. -
IB $63, and $4.21.
I5%ee Draffkorn, EXA, p. 165. Eote the i n t e r e s t i n g
len ~~6
Sa XTjn hli-ta-an-ni -
@ a - n i - a - a ~ - ~ ($A T 135: 11) , "one
11
Wanean
,. man from ( o r o f ) BLittanni.
154~SS 14 589: 13. Note a l s o the use of til-nrr a s a
heart-sl~apedv e s s e l , cf. Draffkorn, m. p. 208f
155rfiere is no observable difference here between -&
m d -ma.- I n f a c t , n o t e the .two forlils ur-impn-QQ-~?&-a and
nab-ull-iqu-9Q-oba alongside one another. i n hlL 3: 95-96 (m-
less t h i s is scribal error?) .
15~=riticaV, 111, A. Textes, 2., notes t o l i n e s 14-
6 344
lS8~he izot that it is regularly followed by Q3.XCA.B~W
I1
bronze1' [once by GIS , 11 wood,11 cf . yon Brandenstein, 46:
3 9 , n. 11 need only prove that it had become a general term
for some type of container . Compare also the words Quburnu
I' flask," Quburtu "beer vat ( 7 ) ," and Quberu " large vat for
beer" in Alrlcaiiian from the OAldc period on, tvhich may be
Hrrrrian loan words, cf. 6, pp. 219-220. This suggests
11
that &br&be might be the general Hurrian term for vessel,
jug,II or I7
container," but this is problematical in the light
of its specialized use in the ritual texts*
1 5 9 ~ f von Brandenstein, ChRT, p. 563, n. 1, and Laroche,
nma, P. 57.
/

loosee Drafflcorn, , p. 203.

1611bid., p. 176. For the identification of the word
in 1111, see Opitz, 37(1931) : 104ff.
162Ibid., p. 198f.

.
1 6 3 ~ f Speiser, $160 and Friedrich, "~hurritische
\c

adjektiva auf -uzzi ," i\TS ll(1942) : 350-352.

164Cf. the remarks of Laroche in @ 54(1960) : 188, n.

5, and in Uaaritica V, I , KO. 28.
l6'~his, hovever , is doubtful. The example involves
the sign RI , which could just as well be read re and be Fzln

example of Bye.
156~lote,however, the differencc between the verbal
elements -aand -%- in the hlittanni Letter, cf. $7.46321
B apd C4
/-

' ~ ~ ~the
o rjustification for this see $3.322 above.
 168~he comparison of mannu-?at-ae OIL 4: 59) and niru-
pat-ae (hfL 4:5,6) with paltu-pat-e ( h l ~ 3:48) proves nothing

for the latter is in wholly uncertain context.

169.This was post~xlatedin the beginniri,~of Hurkian

liWA(e)~ 4
studies, cf Messerschmidt, "~itanni-~trxdien,"

17*X'he force here is a little hard to assess. In Ug.

S-H Voc. 2:20 nir-ae is given as the equivalent of Smerian

SIG which is Akkadian damqu !I qualified, able, f i f " %hen re-

5
ferring t e men, ar,d I I fine, mblemished, in good condition"
when referring to animals. Perhaps the force here then is
not so much the manner of sending as the condition of the
sending, i.e. with many gifts and well cared for,
I7'T.he reference is to the envoys of both kings.
1 7 2 ~ f *Qpeiser, J A O S 74(1954): 25, anti Friedrich, "Zu
den churr i-tischen ~ahlwerten,"RfQ 17( 1954-56) : 368.
'7%garitica. V, I, No. 28.
l7hote also the form geltae at Alalab, descriptive of
chairs, Q 435:9, cf. Draffkosn, &A, p . 166.

l i 5 T h e form ugae in U g . 3-ii Yoc. 2: 25 is too obscure

to base upon it the conclusions which Speiser does in

$166. -
The equation uBae equals iba% is very problematic
siace there also exists a reading aiiai& (cf. Landsberger,
biSL V, p. 52, no-tes) . However , the fact tha% both these
forms are subjunctive suggests (as Laroche notes, op. -
cit.)
that u3ae is "adverbial" here.
176~feUgaritica V , I , No. 28.
 '77~he form i s w r i t t e n tu-6-rrr, but the &sign i s
given as the equivalent of a l p h a b e t i c Q i n t h e t a b l e t of
alphabet i c - s y l l a b i c correspondences published i n &
5
3J I1 ,
No. 189, g. 201-203. The form Iuhru caa only be a norm, c f .
Heb. -
\

1781i:
* <
>
L
,T">;?&
7 'T: l- -
ttwhr-.

QzQar-ae, tatazr-ae.

1 8 0 ~ h cd i f f i c i r l t y of t r a n s l a t i o n i s due t o the f a c t
that we have n= Englf sh noun t b t correspcnds %a fhis forrc.
The c l o s e s t form i s t h e gerund "loving one a n o t h e r , being
, g o d ,I 1 as used with i t s n o r n i ~ a lforce. A close parallel

i s the Semitic i n f i n i t i v e , which i s r e a l l y a v e r b a l noun of

t h i s same type.
1 8 1 ~ f .$3.111.
IB2Siee the remarks of Speiser, $172, and Laroche,
Ugaritica V , 1 , NO. 12. Tbere are a l s o a few occurrences
of the w r i t i n g x-um e j % u at Nuzu i n place of t h e more coImon

i a 3 ~ f . Laroche, U g a r i t i c a V , P a r t I , K O . 1.
18A~bid., Ao. 21. For the f o r c e of I1
p r e s e r v e , keep
- see C. IL. Gordon, UM, $ 9 . 5 0 -
a l i v e " f o r the D-stem of pwy
1 8 5 ~ b i d ., No. 23.
1 8 6 ~ b i d . 9No. 23.
1 8 7 ~ b i d . , Eio. 33.

1 8 9 ~ o r these forms see C. N. Gordon, p D T , $4.13, and

G 347
CA-Q 5, pp. 201-225, and von Soden, LTJBy p * 225.
the lists in -
. fight," from the W a d i a n
190, . g o tidukamma epGgu .
"to

W O ~ &t i d h "fight, battle."

191~.gQ 3ar-raa9-Zi (KUB 27 1 2: 3 ) , 11
kingshipn; Zi-ra-
as-ge (ML 4:34) , conform!' ; i l m y
11
( ~ g .alph. 261: 6) which
e q ~ a P ss y l lat~icen~nna3"s-ya ( cf . Laroche, Ugari tica V, II I ,
Text 1, notes to lines 4-51 .
l9?Eog. dam-aar-3i at Nuzu (cf. Speiser, U S O R 16, p.
~22f.). This might be better t8ken, however, as an ideogram
plus phonetic complement in the l ight of dam-qar-ra-as-gi

~ o ~ h a z l s ii.e.
, ~ i - U ~ . ~ d= i dadcarreZEi.
l ~ ~ The form -per= at
Ugarit (64.4: 13, 11; cf. Laroche, Ugaritica V , 1 1 1 , Text 6
notes to line 1) may reflect fa&Qe-ne-Q, with the frica-
tive voiced due t o syllabic 2. Compare also z a l a d i (ML 3:
77ff .) , and btr-uk-Ze, following SmGA-& at Alalag (AT 15:
11) , cf. Draffkorn, m, p. 180.
1 9 3 ~ tNnzu the form erwiQQe- occurs with the force of
11
rights pertaining to the liing,I 1 cf. Ko~chalcar, qS(l950):
2 0 9 , n. 80, a x d Speiser, AASOR 10, p . 14, n o 28*
194~ee $6.4531 above for the use of these hvo terms.
195~ormdat Xuzrr in -
attaS3igu (JEN 641: 29 and 256:7).
19%ee Laroche, Ugaritica V, I , No. 14.
197~he exact force of this term is difficult to set
down due to a variety of uses at ~ o ~ h a z k G iNITZU,
, and AlalaQQ
For a detailed stt~cly see h'. Van Broclr, "Substitition retweile,11
A= 17 fasc. 65(1959): 117-1460 See also Draffkorn, =A,
p. 186f.

198~or references see

% P.-
a 2, p. 35.
lYY~orHiduri
11
maiden" see Goetze, a 5 fasc. 39
-i, p. 325.
(1940): 199; n, 46, and Friedrich, E
200
-
AT 15:12, cfo Draffkorn, w , p. 180. In the light.
of the borrowing of both 3zngu "priest" and Sntu "priestess" -
by the Hurrl&ns, this can probably be read .%nZcaQQe, cf.
Laroche, Etudes hourrites ," &
J 54( 1960) : 192f.
g go. 3-a
* 0 1 ~ ~ ~ yoc, 4: 23 r~heiere6-pa-da-Si pur! -li-ni-
:ranslates Smerian EGIR . f a For the root x- It
rear,
11
cf Y

- N 3 25( 1956) ; 1-
203~eeSpeiser , " ~ u z i1:arginalia," Or
4.
204~his, apparently, is what has led Laroche and others
to call this a "participle. 11 Being a nominalized verb, or
verbal nominal, many of its uses do overlap those of the
Semitic or Indo-Europea~participle, but it is also signifi-
cantly different, It can carry agentive suffixes and hence
be "inflected" for person, something which is foreign to the
nature sf the participle, Hence it seems best to call it
simply s tI
verbal nominal,11 or " denominalized verb" rather
than using specific terminology from another language group.
*''~hese cas be intexpreted in two ways: the n o m t i w e -

-
nz could be regarded as the subject and the rest of the clause
6 -7 3-49
as i$s modifier. However, tiwe-na i s a l s o t h e goal of the
nominalized verb p r - i y a - Q Q e - n a , and hence the \vhole c l a u s e ,
agentive, goal, and nominalized verb, ca.n be taken as fhe
subject. The l a t t e r seems p r e f e r a b l e f o r Tugratta i s not
saying 11
something t v i l l be done, t t but s p e c i f i c a l l y " those
11
things d e s i r e d by my brother. The sitzratisn i s analogous
t o e s s e n t i a l and non-essential clauses i n English, The same
colment balds t r u e f o r t h e forms t h a t function as t h e goal i n
the examples t o follow,
* ~ ~ c example
f, ( 2 ) rmder a. above.

2 0 7 ~ f $6.&+92 (a)above.

CIIAPTER VII

l ~ x s c t tlh~e same type of root-comlement e x i s t s i n

Urartean. In f a c t , almost every one of the root-complements
f as r i d e n t i f i e d i n Hurrian occur a l s o i n Urartean ( s e e
tl~t~

the l i s t i n I. hi. Iliakonoff , " A Comparative Survey of the

i1
EIurrian and Urartean Languages, PSVX, p . 397f n - 60)
The problem of t h e i r meaning i s j u s t as uncertain i n Urartean
as i n Ilurr i a n , unfortunately. Thus , note qabq-ar-ul- , qabq-ar-
(a)g - n l - , axd qabq-sg-, a l l of tvkiich are simply t r a n s l a t e d
1I
t o l a y s e i g e t o , t o beleaguer. 11

2 ~ s r o c h esuggests [ i i ~5.4(1960): 2001 t h a t this might

-+

be comected with the verbal soot 9- i n blL 2 : 100 and B-

i n Ug. A-H B i l e : 15, 18. Although teg- and - tab- a r e very
p o s s i b l y v a r i a n t w r i t i n g s of the same r o o t , i t i s very haz-
ardous t o connect them with the root i n question iz view of
7 350
.*.,>
the consistent writing ti-i- in BTL,
3~1sthe consistent writing gi-
- in KL (which requires
an -
e-vowel, see 59-12) and the writing gi-e- in Ug. A-X oil.:
1 sho~?,the vowel is g and not A.
4~aroche notes the variation between ki-wnmi of the Ug.
Quad. Voc. (130 3: 10, 'cf. Ugaritica V, I, ?To. 29) ar,d ki-ba-
3u = S u m , [IW].G&~ \?Sich is Aldcadian i 3 l -"he glaced."
7
The
11
nominal & occars in Ug. A-H Bil.: 1. Laroche suggests le
radical, en r6alit-6&&- donnerait, par reduction, lciv-mi )
ki~nwfii This is strengthened by the change of the genitive
-fe
- to -Eafter a 2-vowel (cf. $6.441) and the elision of
the labial fricative affer the dental fricative in the geni-
tive and dative plurals (cf .$$6.441 . and 6.4451) . It would
appear that ki-ummi represents keypami and that the labial
fricative could elide when word final ( cf the nominal &-) .
5Cf. Laroche, 111, p. 1 , and Ugaritica V, I , Ke,
29.

7 ~ f .Speiser, JAOS 59(1939): 320ff.

Befa C. ii. Gordon, Ull, $4.17, 5 0 . 175.
9cf. Friedrich, a 5 fasc. 351 1939) : 101 and Speiser ,

'OC~. von ScXuler, = 19 fasc. 68(1961): 21 and C. 1%.

Gordon, m, $4.17, KO. 47.
''sf. $223.

l2XInless, perhaps, this represents the element -it(o)

(cf. $7.46321 A. 2.) in rvhich the -&- has elided for some
reason.
13~assiblyfrom the root bi8m- lolorm from i3oghazkZi
(cf, Goetze, I D 5 fasc. 35(1939): 104-, annd Laroche, J a
-
2(1348) : 121,Ugaritica III, p. 118ff .) . The writing @--=
im-tw probably represents DiQrpt- with syllabic or vocalic _me
%or the form ilmi- at ~oghazlcai,see Laroche, J B
2(1948): 119. Laroche connects this with el(a)m-
- -- in PRU

1 -
5 ~ Vol.
~ , 7, under iliurtmm~ais to be corrected
in the light of this.

'8p;ote that. the forn is a negated jussive. \mile a

past tense is not impossible on a jussive form, it is highly
rmlilrely. To this effect, oo%e or: page 183 of u,that
Speiser translates this very form as "may I not be refu~ed(3)~"
- $183 (b).
171n,
2 0 ~ h eonly forn opposed is utt-aQt-it-en (ML 3:80).
Speiser also lists several possible examples from 13oghazk6i
and nfari, e.g. arp-aQt-, aQg-aQt- , gag-aQt- , and Qaz-aQt-
CE $183 (all.
'I~he vowel quality cannot be assumed to be -2- on
the basis of the word kepan-01-oQt-a-QQe-na (ML 3: 59), as
does Speiser in IH, p o 145, n. 227, In view of the principle
of vowel harmony here established, it is likely that both
o- and 2-vowels are represented by the ambiguous cmieiform
-
signs.
7 352
2 2 ~ h es a w root-courplenent e x i s t s i n Urartean where i t
11 11
exhibits t h e same vocalic harmony, note: am-a,%- burn away,
as&-agt- "arrange, bring i n order ( r i t u a l s e n s e ) , nul-ugt-
"take possession, grasp, seige, 11 sul-uSt- 11
p r o s t z a t e ,I' -
Zid-

-
i3t- " b u i l d , " ul-u2?t- "precede, 'It e t c , see Dialconoff, "A
II
Comparative Survey ef the H n r r i a ~arrd g r a z t e a n Languages,
PSVX, p. 3981 n. 60 .
2 3 ~ h eform ar-om-a.08-a-i-Qa (ML 4: 13) a l s o suggests
a root-compBennent -*- since it here precedes the lmo~m

2 4 ~ nb o t h these fares a p a s t tense is r e w i r e d by the

context.
25~hat -*- was a past-tense s u f f i x has been recognized
since ehe e a r l y s t u d i e s of Hurrian, cf. the remarks of Speiser
in fj 181, and n. 220. The recognition o f -@- as a past
tense indicator i s clue t o Speiser i n &I$181.

s notes, t h i s is t r u e of a l l the instances of

2 G ~he
agent s u f f i x e s o f 1 s t and 2nd person-
*?The context i s not c l e a r enough t o say whether or not
un-oQ-a i s p a r a l l e l witB tan-&-a, ( a clezr t r a n s i t i v e verb
" done-~ast.-by-him" ) , and hence i s governed by t h e agent ive
phrase "by thy b r o t h e r , Nimuriya, the lord of ~ g y p t . " If
i t is p a r a l l e l , then g - must here have a fransitioe meaning
( c f . KEI, p. 143). Hawever, if the -I= on n'UOimiliene-fe-ne+
--
mail must be taken as a sentence connective then i t cannot be
governed 5y the agentive construction. T h i s i s the preferable

construction but i t remains uncertain, for good sense cannoj;

yet be made of the passage* The same interpretation sug-
gests itself for faQr-oQ-a in hlL 1:60 in the light of the
. . .I-et-a at the beginning of line 61.
28~or examples cf. IIJ, p e 143.
2 9 ~ h efor;;: iii-du-r i-ye-nS Qu-ug-ta, cited by Speiser

in ILi, 1435 ISc e r t a i n l y not; a case in p9i=fe TBe e ~ d i s g

-i-ya-ag is clearly an example of the 3rd person plural pos-

-
sessive suffix -iyaQ. The agentive suffix is regularly a-
ded to a word enciing ir; & coiiuonant by the use of a 2-con-
necting v o ~ e l(cf. 96.a-31) . This is greatly strengthened
by the possible interpretation of Qituri- as a nominal
meaning $1
girl" by Goetze [KHA 5 fasc. 39(1940): 199, n. 4-61,
although a better interpretation might be to connect ~ o ~ h a z k b i
3iduri- with Ugarit 5idar-ni It
curse" (cf . Laroche, Ugaritica
V, I , No. 17) under the well known equivalence of Ugarit -2-

30
From the new Ug. Quad. Voc., where ugtami equals
-
i1M~. e$lu "youth,11 u0t-an- can now be plausibly explained
as a causative [-an-, cf. 67.42 (1)1 meaning "make youthful"
or the like. This accords well with the form aQt-&ar-iffa@-a
"for otrr ?," built on the root aQte- II wife. 11
'l~or the spelling - i ~ - n a= if-fz, see $ 6 . ~ 5 1 .
3 2 this
~ meaning,
~ ~ as a loan word from Vedic sagha
I1
riches, gift," see Kronasser, m, 7. 145.
3 3 ~ oit ~ f a stalcen by Speiser, El, $183 ( c ) .
%.his is par-titularly possible if the force of -@-I
-oat- vs. -et-/-ett-
- - -- is perfective vs. iqerfective rather
than past vs. future.
35~:re to their usage -*- would have to express some
force vhich is most sui-tableto transitive verbs in both
srrbject-action and agentive construction but can also be
used on occasion with intransitive verbs, and -oef- mould
have to express a force which is most suitable t o intransi-
tive verbs but \y3ic-h can be used on occasion with transitive
verbs in agentive construction. If this should be necessitat-
ed by i'rrrther evidence, it is most diff icrxlt to assess i.'lzat
'

this force is. I have tried to reconcile some t m e of ver-

bal action, say ~ ~ m c t i l i aversus
r continuing or stative, etc.,
with the occurrences of these tense suffixes without success.
9L
2ulls, for exangle, several verbs can do in English,
11
e.g. return."

3: 99), kat-ill-et-a-(llL 2: 50,102; 4: 21), Bar-ill-et-a (XLL

A: 124), fur-et-a- (ML 3: 13,15,15,61; 4:39,47) J, x-et-a- (arL
1: 106) , gaQQ-st-a (biL 4:56) etc,
3S~peiser,511 $182, lists this as an example of an in-
transitive. , it contains the causative root-conple-
l-iov~ever
inent , construes traith the
-a- agentive in 14L 3: 8, and has
plausibly been interpreted by Laroche as meaning "make h o ~ m ,
s"nnvr" Cr?i'; -
B R 5441960) : 2003 .
11
3911he term subject-action construction" has been
coined instead of s-peiser's "actor-action cons-krtrc-bion'' since
the gramlatical sub ject of this form of the verbal is not
limited to the actor or logical subject, but may also be the
7 355
goal or logical object, see the renarks rmder $70480
401~hatremains is illustrative , however. The immediately
preceding context states: "this is the word which TTas requested,'
so let it be known by my brother.11 The text the= goes on:
"since . . . will be specifically communicated (kat-ill-eB-
a+marnan), . . is xot, so let it no% be heeded by my bro-
.
-i;her 11
3

4 1 ~ fthe m e a ~ i n g thus Far determined for this verb

and for w- in the next example are correct, it vionld seem
that passive translations are required by fhe context. This
sakes it difficult to regard them as having in-cransitive

meanings when appearing with a final 2-vowel.

4 2 ~though
1 the rne3i;j.n; "bull of the weather-god" estabil
lished by Schroeder C~rchivfur ?Leilschriftforsch~ing2(1924):
701 a~diEbeling [hKS. 23(1954): 1261 c o u l d plarrsibly T i t
this context, it fits the contest very poorly in ML 3: 6 7 ,
where the identical form 5e-e-ir-ri-e- occvrs.
431?or discussion see $7-4511.
'T'or discussion see $7.4512. The function of this
s u f f i x could not be seen clearly tvhe~Speiser wrote and be
tentatively identified it as a "state" suffix.
4 5 ~least
t in the Llittanni Letter. :iowcver, the two
forms liapakka and taQakka from Ug. A-11 Ril. raise the ques-
tion of an a-vowel before -&-. The forms function as
nominals in this doctment, however, and hence cannot over-
throw %the ~ m i orn
f practice of iifL without clearer evidence
as to their nature.
7 3.56
d61?or purposes of identification we shall call this
"agentive construction.11
47cf. $86.442 and 6-4-43.
'%his term is used in order to differentiate these
forms from the negative verbs in which different vowels
characterize the intransitive class.
- does not affect the con-
49~he root-complement -;rkar-

5 O ~ h eexistence of this 1-vowel on the verbal in

agentive colilstructio~bas not heretofore been recogriized.
It appears in the third person present forms not only in
i7iL ta-a-ni-a (JZL 3: 81) 1, but also at ~ o ~ h a z k oin
i the

.- 8 61 rev.
form ka-ti-ya (1~~33 7), which shows that it cannot
be analyzed a$ tan-ya or kat-ya [as does Goetze in Lane;. 16
( 1940): 125-140, particu?ar?y p. f 291 but represents tan-i-:fa
and kat-i-ya, The same conclusion is clearly seen from the
phrase b6-e-eg- na-li-u ( I B ~ IT1 39 1: 3 5 , cf. Laroche,
111, p d 323) which shows the same v c i ~ e lwith the second pes-
son agentive suffix, ioe. fe-8 pal-i-o, 1 thee-by Imo~vn-by-
9

thee*" The vowel elides, hornever, before the first person

agentive suffix -%, as numerous writings in 91L shorn, e.g.
ta-a-ta-6, (BEL 1:75) . The existence of this characteristic
i-vowel in both the transitive constractions cormfs heavily
-
against ~oetze'
s interpretation of the &-form of type ( 2 )
of the paradigm (cf. below) as an independent form of the
verb.
5l''~heIlurrian verbal System:f t Lang, 16( 1940) : 125-
 5 d ~ h i swriting is very regular with the transitive
verbs. Note the following occurrences: aE-ukar-aQt-i-en
(ML 2 : 5 8 , 8 6 ) , DaQ-i-en- (AZL 1:113; 2:13; 3:40,4.2), naldr-i-en
(ML 4:42,51) , paQQ-i-en ( K L , pent-i-en
4:52,5~,57) ( ~ I L1:
lo?), - -
pukl-oQt-i-en ( l o l ~ 3:2j), supiyam-a$t-i-en ( h l ~ 3:72,88),
ans Bur-am-aQt-i-en (AIL 4:42,5~). Forms such as a-ri-en are
inconclusive since R I represents both -a-
and -re-. The
above list represents 20 occurrences without a single ex-
ample opposed.
5%ote also . .I-nak-ul-uQt-e- (ML 2: 24) and Bupl-
ul-u0t-e- (ML 2:23), both parallel to pete0t-e; trrpp-e (ML
2:138), and furt-en ( h 4 ~ 3:74). One must also note the fcrrrn
p&-?;e-e3-ti-e-na-an (ML 3: 34), which does not necessarily
count against the interpretation since the intransitive vo17eP
shoukd be -2- or -g-.
56~hisvowel probably should be talien to be -2- due
t c She vaazl harmony in the forns 1~5.TzbSake -
-1- and -2-,
e.g. pal-i-kki (ug. A-H Bil.: 18) and tab-a-kka (Ug. A-H
Bil.: 18).
57~his form has been chosen so as to contrast with
form ( 3 ) . For a form withou-t the perfect tense elemen't
-
-0- cf. kat-i-kki (ML 4-:17) and pal-i-kki ( U g o A-I-I Bile:
18) which equals A k k . 1% id$-ma, from which the negative
force of -&- %as first recognized.
 58~hisform is chosen because it is t h e only form
Which is clearly not jussive or cohorlative. 'Yne negative
element -=-is that used with agentive construction, as
I1 -
well as jussive" or "prohibitive,11 ci. $7.4511.
59~bisis further corroborated by ..thecornparative
study of I, hl. Diakonoff , "11 Comparative Survey of the
Flurrian and Urartean Languages," PSVX, in which he notes,
anent the verbal similarities: " 3) indicators of transitive-
ness and intransitiveness (13axr. -1- and. -5- or -g- respec-
- and -a-
tively; Ur. -u- - or - respectively) ,I1
-0- (Znglisb
summary, p. 601).
601,
~iood"is used here in f ts broadest sense. It in-
cludes all those nuances of meaning other than simple as-
sertion of fact, i.e. the indicative m o ~ d ,
61;ee &I $186, for references.
62~f. $186.
G 3 ~ h i sis suggested by the fact that the 2-vowel of
exampie ( 2 ) b e i m can be taken as %he 3rd agefftive
~SZSOII

suffix and by the form -uff of the negated first person.

is a bilabial phone and not ailabi'o-dentalphone as our

symbol [f I suggests.
6 5 ~ e e$6 -43 for the possessive suffixes.
66~onrpare
elso tan-08-i-uff (KL 2: 113) "I did not
do," QisuQ-oQ-i-uff (hiL 4 : 3 3 ) "I did not vex,!I g-J5!-i - IJ L~
A e -

----
u-ma+an "then I do not want him. I!
7
I 358
67For this neaning see nor Laroche, Uearitica V , 1 1 1 ,
Text 1, notes to line 3.
68~ee Laroche, pgaritica V, I , No. 11.
69The written form is -
P
<-we, ( o r perhaps U - ~ B - ~ ,I have
only had access to hi, Larcche' s normalization in Ugaritica

-V, I , $11, in which he gives the form as ~ u ) . Since 8

equals alphabetic .-h (i.e.'F, see PaU 11, Iio. 189, pp. 201-
203), the form represents ' b - w ~ which obviously nlust be
read ha~va .
70~he suggestion of hl. Laroche in 111 , p. 321,
- is the negative of 'ipr~hibitiom"
Lha-t -wa- while -&- is the
negative of "asertion" cannot be followed through due to the

-
recognition that -wa- negates indicative (or "assertive")
forms in sgentive construction (cf. $37.4511 above).
-(l1n most cases the writing'is ambisu
C- oas. The value
-
-0- is assumed due to the clear vowel harmony observed in
other forms, see below. ~peiser's attribution of a _n-vowel

proves nufhhg for the form is totally obscure both gram-

matically and semantically. Of. u,p. 8 3 , n. 43.
72rrhe only forms opposed are very obscure6 One finds
a - a -3a:
the form p u - u ~ - t & - ~ ~ u l r - k i - a - ~ a - = ~ - t m - ~ a - a - a l l (hiL
60). This is probably a nominal (although this is not cer-
tain since the form is so anomalous) and hence xay act
quite differently. - ~ - k k - i - ~ The form
Xote the ~mtrs~xal
men-a-kki is also a nominal ( n o z e mena- , ML 4:6i,6'3 and cf .
IH P o 84, n. 49).
-9
 7 3 ~ b eforms -i-ma- prececiing the pronominal as-
sociative~---, -tills-, and -*- are not violations Bat
represent the shift of A- to 2- before the p~onominalas-
sociative~,of. note 74 and $4.31. The forms in - i - k k - o m
represent a special case, see below.
7 4 ~ h e form tnann-o-lrlra+til(?)a- (ML ?:I?) and mann-o-
l&a+lla- ( 9 1 ~4:2) are not opposed, but examples of the change
of -
-0- - before the pronominal associatives.
to -a- Cf. manni
(EIL ~$:78~107)but mann-a+lla- (hfL 1:8,109; 2:81,121), man*-%
-
tta (ML 2:85; 3:63$65), and mann-a-i-fi~la( ~ I L4:l a g ) , cf.
$4.31 0

7 5 ~ sfar as can be ascertained, the base of this word

11
is a pure nominal form composed of the root tormi- need,
emergency" plus the s w f f i x -nn( i)-e This f s %be cpposite
situation to the forms in -i-lrk-onne and raises the pos-
- could be used to negate nominal forms
sibility that -kR-
or that nominal forms could become intransitive verbal bases
mi thout the add2 tion of any suffix ( torminn-o-ME-o meaning
"there is no danger"?).
76Ho~vever, the writing ul-lu- in ML 2: 104, along with

ul-li-wa-a-en in hiL 3: 95, which contrasts with u-u[-ul a-lu-

in hIL 3: 84, strongly suggest that these are two different
roots (possibly a-and m- ? ) . Ifote the contrast be-
tween n-u-r-
C # lt
to desire" and &J- 11
to occur, be resent .I1
77~aroche in III , p. 321, equates Jcao-a-lcka with
Mougayrol's doubtful reading 1% adirfa, and draws from this
..
equation the force II non fermge,I1 i.e. "d6couverte.It Bow-
ever, Speiser' s reading ma-a' -du rather than la-dir4-5 on
the basis of his prefo~ableinterpretation of the equivalent
Yurrian form te-a-la-an as tea + ll(1)a + ;tn "great+they+and,"
would appear to be correct [see JAOS 7 5 ( 1955) : 1651. Thus

the Hurrian phrase ka-ba-ak-ka pa-in-us-x must sender the

@
rest of the Aklcadian line: a1 gz-ka Y
sa-pa-fa-ma, HQW it

does this reaains for the pxesent uncertain.

the
7 8 ~ 0 ~ problem of voice in the Hurrian verb, see
$7.~3.
- 54!1960):
792, 194.
*'speiser is certainly wrong in analyzing the form as
tan + 02 + a + i + ma + "done-past-by-him-c%ass-marker-not- If

\,L,
p. in-
( T 3 711
i. The agentive -2 always comes after the nega-

tive as the forms -i-uff<-i-w(a)-a~ (correctly analyzed by

Speiser!) sho~s,
"~f. the rernarlcs in In $194.
82-,
bee $3.63.
8 3 ~ f 0Laroche, -
PXU 1 1 1 , p. 323. The form is found in
IBoT 2 39 1: 35. The second is cited by Speiser , $& $195(a).
841t is just barely possible that tli- ieqaisite verbal

form is to be found in the broken L a - ...Is two words

previous. This, at least, ends in the reqrrisite plural
suffix (or, preferably, the past tense suffix -a-
+ agentive
suffix - g ) , but the order is wrong*
8 5 ~g . d~e@~op-aOd ~ m a u - u (+l[
~ ) 1wa11-j tah-11-08-a-
@@e-na (hlL 2 : 65-66), % m e - @ ?~e(li)~a-(~)+ila+an lcat-ill-
et-a (h!L 4:21) , %el
- iya-8 ?,lane-~@+an lml-e t-a (hiL 4:q ),
ammat-iff-cQ attay-iff -nQ . . . liepan-01-oQt-a
- (BiL 3: 58-
59) 9 etc.
"~f. $6.4532 and note 32 thereto.
t7~riedrich in KASD reads liar-kut- both here and in
b?L /;: 120. The reading kar-Qa2- is required not only by the
more probable reading produced ( i .e. the In-own root-comple-
ment -*- rather than the mmattested -uft-) but also by
the form kar-~u-gac ...L 1 1 in a broken context
which also refers to the releasing of tne envoys of the
two rulers (hiL I: 114-115) .
'$irst deduced by Friedrich, BChG, p. 36f.
89The root-%- p l u s the root-complements -=t yeild
the meaning "faithful" both here and in IlL 4:112.
"SO also lurl-li (hiL 2: 12; 3: 49,51; 4:1) represents

(BIL 4:64) , and pal-la-i-gal-la-ma-an (ML 4:55) represent

C
1
a - i - 1 ; pi-pa-a-nu-ul 4 -r;l -li-e-wa-a-at-ta-a-an ( 1 3:

---
li-e-it-ta-a-an (hlL 4.: 10) represents @is*-01-( i) -1-e+ttwan
Sfrfhe fact that all three occur in parallel construction
in the s m e context, combined with the fact that the -11-
comes after the -3-negative in the third example, pre-
clude their being taken as the root-complement -=- as
Speiser does in -
19 $176 (9) (a), Mere he interprets Qa-Ha-a-

si-il-li-i-il-la-a-an (ML ~ : 2 9 )as from ha2 + az + i l l +

Y

ili + lla + an.

921n keeping wit11 his views of the so-called "partici-
pial" vowels, cf. a 66168-171 and see our remarlis in
V %, $7.47.
9 3 ~ f 0von Brandenstein, C M T , p. 559, n. 3 .
941'he whole srrbject of voice in the Hurrian verb is
discussed in f 7.48.
95rI'he for= &-su-6-~ul-li-e-i t-ta-a-an could be in-
terpreted as -
Qisnh-011-ett-wan (cf. tiQan-011-ett-a ML
3: 2 2 ) , but the context dentanas a. jussive aizc'l FL stxbject , mhi ch
..
can only be forrnd in the -=a "I."
'byhe form pent-i -en in ML 1: 10 3 has the compound
d d
agent: Qimike he-Q 1 Bmanu-(0)+1la+an $a8arrine-(~)+lla+

-
a However, in indicative forms compound subjects are
treated as singtrlar , cf. 67 .4525. I.%

97~ontrary to the view of Speiser, h184, who takes

*J

aQti- in line 21 as the subject.

--+
The srrbject is probably
ua-iff-u-{n)na-, but the csntext is somewhat obscure.
9 8 ~ eexamples cited in this discussion have been
numbsred consecutively for purposes of easy refecence in
the latex discussion.
en
.I Y 1I
Literally in the presence of - "
"O~iteiall~I 1 of. 11
T n I

i " L ~ f . makann-iff-[. . .] my
11
gifts," (line 15); "what-
ever tu~e-nahave been granted by my brother, whatever tmca-
IroQQe-nahave been granted by nly broCher," (lines 19~22) .
"Let them be satisfactoryt11 (peteet-e+lla+an), forms a fitting
conclusion to this subject. The forms are intransitives, so
the -&a- associative, 11 they,I I must form the subjecz.
'021)iscussed by Goetze, " A n unrecognized Hurrian ver-
bal form,II A= 5 fasc. 15(1939): 103-108, an6 Laroche "$tudes
hourrites," R-
i i 5.4.(1960) : 189.

10%exe occurs a comn~entin Hittite: nrr-Iran L>T.SISWR.

s sl.~TJhi SIB:- an Qalzai, "and he calls the offeror by his name. 1I
lo4F'or the jussive suffix -%- see $7.46321 (2) belo~7.
s

105see 89.9.
cz

lo6~oetze in RBA 5 35(1939) : 104ff., Laroche JCS 2

(1948): 120f. and @ 54( 1960): 189 suggest "stab1eY1'or
"massive" or "bri~iiant"for these tezms on the basis of
Hittite parallels.
lG7possibly related to m- "long, I1
see Goetze @&l

5 fasee 35(1939): 106, n. 19.

'08por this meaning of the wora, long suspected, see
Laroche, U~ariticaV, 111, A, Text 1, notes to line 3.
1°%'or n-fa zpi-ta "in front of" see Laroche @ 54
(1960): 189f.
"O~he xoot kaB1- is probably close in meaning to QeQl-
:I
pare,I1 since it is always found in the same context, cf .
Goetze, H L A 5 fasc. 35(1939): 106, n. 16.
'"i~ith secondary doubling of the -2- before -%- and

- ambiguity occurs, for this becomes a homograph of the

-man-
-
3rd person singular pronominal associative - m a (see $9.324) .
Only the context can de3crmine which is present and then am-
biguity still sometimes remains. A clear exanple of the
latter construction mitb the suffix -3--
is the folloving:

pa0Gi tp-iff- m a (HI, & 52-53) , "hfane+cop.+anil br other-my-

7 36 5
by also(?) s e n t - t r a n s o - jrrssive go-may-bhe-t-so envoy( s)-
~ y - w i t h , " i.eo "and l e t my brother send liane a l s o s o
11
( t h a t ) he may go w i t h m y envoys.
1120n1y a word of caution must he noted i n view of the
f a c t t h a t om evidence f o r these s r ~ f f i x e si s so limited. In
XiL we have only t h r e e examples of -%-, and only eight, \.vit4-r_

--
-ai

l l 3 s e e the conclrrsion by Speiser i n $193 i n favor o f

-ae/i-. I n I H $196, i n discussing the existence of t h i r d
person agentive s u f f i x e s with jrrssive forms, Speiser notes:
11
Eloreo~rer; forms which appear be
t , ~ s o ~ s t r t r ekvith
jassisre a ~ d
3 p. are found with -tn, andi, and -andin c139-901 as d i s -
t i n z t f roiii -e2. " IIomever , vbeil one examines the f oruis i n
q u e s t i o n , one finds t h a t the form i n -g ends i n -ai-me The
- is a clear
-ai-
11
jussivc" suff ir, so c i t e d by Speiser [$193
( g ) , and e s p e c i a l l y p. 159f .]. The forms i n -midi and -andin,
although s p e l l e d a n - t i and a n - t i - i n , could very e a s i l y con-
tiiin our -g- jrrssive s u f f i x i n view of the aabiguity in-
herent i n the i-vowel of t h e s y l l a b a r y ( see $ 3 . 111) . i'ihat
the -=- xould be I do no% 4~uio~v.
114-1n $196, Speiser i n t e r p r e t s kat-i-Mci (IIL 4: 17)
a s containing the -l/e jussive srxffix and s t a t e s that; 11
1 p.
i s beyond doubt." The opposite i s the caseo T h e sentence
i n question rzms:
f i ~ * r a + -la+an
1 Qurwe Q e n i f f-ta kat-i-ldci
and then continues: "~hotxldanyone communicate e v i l r e p o r t s
whatever concerning me or m y land t o my b r o t h e r , then l e t
 II
not my brother heed these words. Obvioersly t h e sentence i n
question l n r r s t say: "Zvil r e p o r t s a r e not being conmu~~icatecl
t o ray brother ."..
I n the same paragraph I'ie c i t e s an analogous form from
L30ghazk6i: a-ru-$-~i-il:-ki 59T2: 12).
( ~ ~ o This, l i k e m-
i-kJcF ; c a ~ no
l longer bear such interpretation.
ll5d'r i t t5n a-r i which could represent e i t h e r a r - i o r
ar-e. Besides t h i s form t h e r e occurs zrr-zi-la-ma-an in @
E

170: 11 VJhich i t ;
-
a gloss t o $ pa-ni-Su-nu $a-bat. The form
zn-zi- has p l a a s i b l y been i n t e r p r e t e d as a Burrian impera-
* l ~ . r edxe t o ille A1dc. imperative [see
~E~,~JZ ': -
IE y A / J
tq3@9 (i) , Hork,
(1932): 377, and F r i e d r i c l ~ ,5 Z W , p. 221, Kate t h a t i t
could j u s t as well be read as zu-ze.
1 1 6 \ ~ r i t t e nk u l - l i which could represent e i t h e r i m l - ( i ) - .

-
l - e ox kml-( i)-1-i.

''7Written @ a - g i - i - i - l i which could r e p r e s e n t &a@-i-1-e

or ha@-i-2-i.
l l 8 s o i t must be read, contrary t o t h e -a-
of Schr
and F r i e d r i c h , K U D , p. 27.
' ' g ~ h e r e a r c four occurrences of iQa-8 w i t h i n d i c a t i v e

1205'he very common i n t r o d ~ ~ c t o reyp i s t o l a r y formula of

ABdcadianana :I qibi-ma tmma Y s t r o n g l y suggests a simple

command here r a t h e r t W d ~a f i r s t person form.

121TJote h i -
-11- inparts t:le "in-
t e n t i o n a l " f o r c e t o t h e form i n t h i s i n t e r p r e t a t i o n , equiva-
11
l e n t t o our I m i l l do i t , 1 I
7 367
Ig23!he morpheme -a-
must Be so i n t e r p r e t e d . I t can-
n o t be an example of t h e v o l u n t a t i v e -11-because the pre-
ceding vowel \vowld have t o be -A- w i t h t r a n s i t i v e v e r b s ,
s examples (5) and ( 6 ) above.
conrpare the f o r ~ ~ il n i-Ience -a-
can only be the root-complement -a-
plus -i-P- which be-
comes -m- upon e l i s i o n of t h e -&- c l a s s marker.
1 2 3 ~ h eform ( o u t of context) could be i n t e r p r e t e d a s
-
QisuG-oll-ett-a+an ti@ax-031-ett-a AIL 3: 2 2 1 , but t h i s
(cf. -
leaves no subject t h a t aalres sense.
12%his ,st not be confused with tlie ayparent -e
prodnze2 by the negated form i n -en- above, i.e. -
-i-wa-en.
--.

12'a considerably d i f f e r e n t i n t e r p r e t a t i o n of these

comnhinations i s p r e s e n t e e by Dialconoff, P S U , p. @4f.
Since he c i t e s no corroborating evidence a p a r t f r o n Urart-
can p a r a l l e l s , h i s r e s u l t s a r e d i f f i c u l t t o a s s e s s . .

12'phe form tunp-o-1-ai+n (6fL 3: 26) i s too obscure i n

mealling t o a s s e s s . The form p&-te-e3-ta-i3 i s riln ortho-

gzanhic v a r i a n t of the adverbial -9-( cf . '$6.363) rather
than t h e verbal s u f f i x rmder discussion,

he meaning of t h e f i r s t condition expressed i s un-

:motvn .
It
I2'yhis seems t o be t h e f o r c e of -
urQ- t r u e " p l u s the
root-complement -m-t-.
3 0 ~ o rt h i s corroboratory or re-inf orcing use of "i;lav-
" t o be" see now Laroche, U n a r i t i c a V , I , $11 c .
I 3 l y h i s i n t e r p r e t a t i o n i s not c e r t a i n . The r o o t of the
7 368
word is clearly fur- 11
to see. 11
Interpreting the -a- as an
or thographic var ianf of the adverbial suffix -=-saggests
"manifestly, in sight. I1 In &
J 54(1960): 194, Larocbe, who
t1
here establishes the root meaning as to see," interprets this
form as an infinitive, or verbal substantive, and views
11 ii
Sirnige as its object, obtaining as men love to see the sun.
This makes less sense in view of the concltxsion to the corn-
11
parison: so we ought to love one another" am5 leaves the
ending -ai+n unacco7mted for.
13*~heform pa-ag-Eii-a-a-ma ( i l L 4:55) in the sentence
iil
SZaae+n A n - i f f -uQ naQQ-i-ya-ma could be cited here b ~ t
the context demands a negative. This :my be found in the
final -ma of the fortn, but this is problematical, see

47.4513-
133~hisabnormal word order is clue to the fact that
the sentence is subordinated to the preceding sentence, ex-
pressing a result clarrse.
136The passival character of the expression is pre-
served iu the translation in order to bring out the dif-
ference in construction.
I351t is for this reason that the form and the ccilstruc-
I1
tion rnust be labelled the subject-action" form and construc-
tion rather than the "actor-action" of Speiser. The subject
expressed is not necessarily the "actor" of the action, it
may also be the goal of the action.
 CHAPTER V I I I

l ~ o rt h e meaning of t h i s term see $5.3, and f o r t b i r

form ancl ftmction see chapter nine.
Z
cr. In Q q g .
3 ~g . W ~ r oI f again" v e r s u s iru-ru-rr-u- [gal (IiL 1:45) .
4s.g. Btr3rco " fnr ther , f u r therrnore ," but QtMcanni-

" f u t t ~ r e ! ? ) I.f
51f snch be the c a s e , i t probably means that t h e nominal
and v e r b a l u s e s of r o o t s that f u n c t i o n only a s p a r t i c l e s have
f a l l e n i n t o disx:se.
hXT
n o t e , f o r example, t h e Greel: p a r t i c l e s ii and wiand
the IIebrew 1 or 11. The f o r c e of p a r t i c l e s such a s these is
o f t e n such t h a t they can only be grasped a f t e r becoming
thoroughly f a m i l i a r ~ v i t hthe language.
fi 1.5.
c.l

(par t h e a l p h a b e t i c order see

--t i - see $8.5 ( 2 ) .
%or t h i s a s s e v e r a t i v e f o r c e o f a
9l)oes t h i s r e f l e c t a phonetic q u a l i t y i n i i n r r i a n f i )
i n the d i r e c t i o l r of [&I? A F ~ I ~ U , L I C S of
See the ---"-' Speissr , B,
p. 22.

'%he f o r c e flprocure" n i c e l y f i t s t h e t w o occurrences

of aranra-.
''see Larocbe, i > g a r i t i c a V , 1 , 1 1 for the general-
1I
a s s e v e r a t i v e use of %he verb rnai~n- " t o be.
layhe f u t u r e f o r c e comes from t h e previous verb.
1 3 ~ i i ef o r m a-we e -ya-ga c i t e d by Speiser i n $ 1 1 5 , may
y e t prove per-binent i n yroviug i t a nominal as Speiser asserts,
8 370
Ho~vever, i t camof be i n t e r p r e t e d and the w r i f i n g -me- can
represent both the f r i c a t i v e and fhe semivowel, so t h a t i t
may be* a d i f f e r e n t r o o t . Noite the liolninal --/-- ''front"
w e d p r e p o s i t i o n a l l y e l ~ c i d a t e dby Laroche, c f . uL54(1960):
189-192. nowever that tgay b e , we have l i s t e d i t h e r e a s a
p a r t i c l e on the b a s i s of our suggested i n t e r p e t a t i o n of it
as t h e "personal" r e l a t i v e c0rmterpar.t t o the imnper somsl
ya-/=- ( s e e 98.3) .
143ee Larocbe, m r i t i c a V , I , KO. 35.
'kee Glossary K O . 44-5).
,
Ib2Jote t h a t $ i s personal i n 'Jga>ritic, t h e i ~ 3 e r s o n a l
f orn being a ( s e e 331, Glossary No. b ~ g . ) . .
' 7 ~ e e Dialconoff, P S W , p. 380. liote that intervocalic

i n llurrian o f t e n has e l i d e d i n the Vrartean form, cf. the

remarks o f Diakonoff, loco a.
II
laT'he t e x t a c t u a l l y reads t h e i r " t a b l e t s , but the
possessive strf f i x i n i-iurriar: i s of tea usell -pleo:nas't ically
with a modifier, i.e. the 1-Erxrria.n phrase reads l i t e r a l l y
" t h e i r t a b l e t s of t h e i r dowries, of the ones of my s i s t e r -
relatious ."
'930 e l - a r t i - must be rendered here. For t h e a b s t r a c t
o r c o l l e c t i v e f o r c e of - a x t i - see Laroche, j l ( l 9 5 7 ) : 10.5,
YuSratta has just been zrging the Pharaoh t o procure and
read the t c ~ l ~ l e of
t s the doivries of h i s s i s t e r and his f a t h e r ' s
s i s t e r , both of whom went t o be w i v e s of the P h a r a o h ,
20
Or perl~apsI' large"? .
*%he r o o t s -
mazz9- and -
bar- a r e obscure.
 2% 1:
Peri1a-p~g-&Cd]-n-u-[Sa] fron -
ELI;- direct, gi~ide(?)"
:ier;ze, perhaps her c "convoyed, escor-tcd?"
2 3-.-
dese the cla~aseivhich forms fhe goal ( o r o b j e c t )
s t m d s f i r s t , with ima-kmwnin coming before the agent ( o r
s t ~ b j e c t jand the verb. This b r i n g s $0 mind the analogous

&----
- a-- I 5i-ra-Zn -- (ELI 19:17), "And
a$i-ya lii i3purrr
when ::v brother s e n t Xane h i s messenger." I s t h i s r r n u s ~ ~ a i
o r d e r due -i;o Ilurrian srrbst;rattm'?

25r?he meaning of B- i s ~dcnoivn.

26For t h i s translati011 of e l a r t i see note 1 3 a ~ ~ . ~ e -
'?FOE this f o r c e of t m n - see S p e i s e r , J A O S 5 9 ( 1 9 3 9 ) :
297.
%
' !he r e s t i s obscure.
r,
L 9 ~ e $7.4513
e f o r the negative f o r c e of -=.
3 0 ~ e eLandsberger, V , p. 61, e n t r y 1 3 1 , f o r the

reading.
31i'he i l l u s t r a t i o n s are nmbered consecutiveiy f o r
ease of reference i n the d i s c u s s i o n .
3 2 ~ o r~Gana. Que-ne = " a l t o g e t h e r , st a l l " see S p e i s e r ,

%'he term a c t u a l l y used w a s the "accusative" or "ob-

j e c t " c a s e , working from the viewpoint of an a c t i v e verb.
2ri'llese two are g r a i a t i c a i l y i d e n t i c a l i n iIurr ian. Our
9 37 2
l i n g r r i s t i c terminology l a c k s iX nazz f o r such a form. .:,
.re have
~ i e t r i a u s l yca'ileci i t t h e z e r o - s u f f i x form, b u t t h i s t e r c ~has
been avoided ::ere s i n c c this i s t h e v e r y p o i n t a t i s s u e : i s
i t a Zero-srrffix form o r i s i t a ;l-si:ffir ferny?

or the -!@- s u ~ e s t e Cby Z o e t z a , s e e the i l i s c r s s i o i l

L;-
.
- o t e t h e reclarks t o t h i s e f f e c t i n (3.113*
+
,

';'hiis, the passage hc b e g i n s h i s d i s c u s s i o n T ' J ~ $ ~ x ; EUIC!

which he colisider s " n o s t s i g n i f i c a n t , IiSL 11

4-:18-23, silm>ly

d o e s n o t c o n t a i n s u c h r e f e r e n c e s t o t h e second Terson, The

cad person s a f f i x e s
A II thy'' which Goetze a s s e r t s ( p . 264, n.
36) a r e i n t h e iIcrrria11 o r i g i n a l Eire a c t u a l l y g e n i t i v e s u f f i x e s .
The p o s s e s s i v e s u f f i x e s e x p r e s s e d on e a c h of t h e two occur-
II
r e n c e s of omini c o ~ < n l r y "are f o m d i n t h e -l(y)" h i s , "
11
i7!1i~h goes r v i t f i ' ' ~ b
y rother, i.e. t h e v'nole s e n t e n c e i s i n
t h e t;hirc? ??erso:~
~ ~ b d se h '
i'iminates ~ o e t z es srqmosed second

7
-
f:;oted by F r i e C r i c b , U C h G , p. 25, and S p e i s e r , &,

8See $,v9.42
'L
,-
and c.5 belosi.

' ~ h o agr cement be tiyeen t h e s e two approaches i s s t r ilcing

and argrres s t r o n g l y a l ~ a i n s G
t o e t z e ' s view of the -g- s u f f i x .
loifowever, f o r - L a - tilis can v e r y p l a u s i b l y be a t -
t r i b u t e d t o t h e need i n llurri%i t o e x p r e s s t h e p l u r a l i t y 0 2
t 5 e s r i b j e c t or g o a l , s e e $6.4532 and n o t e 112 t h e r e t o .
'''this form i s v e r y d i f f i c u l t t o e x p l a i n by G o e t z e ' s
view. Accorcling t o him the fornl -1lan r e s ~ ~ l et ist h e r from
the assir:?illation of a.11 ajientive s r r f f i x or from -x;acla+an
with e l i s i o n of the -2- znd assimilation of the -g- t o the
- producing
-1- -11-. :iote t h a t t h e a s s i m i l a t i o n of t h e 'li-
quids and n a s a l s i s r e g u l a r l y r e g r e s s i v e , c f . ,$4.6. Kow
neither ~f t h e z%ve interaro%ati~ns i s p ~ s s f b l ehere9 f a r
the a s s o c i a t i v e i s added t o the d a t i v e s u f f i x -E.
12zf. Laroche, U e a r i t i c s , I , Qllc.
1 3-
~ ~ 223( l o ) a j : 258.
14T'his i s an example of the word f i n a l form of -=-
t o be dliscr~ssedbelow. Eote t h a t i t cannot be a connective,
f o r the agent of the verb follows immediatelya f t e r .
t ' 55.
1 5 " ~ ! i t a n n i - ~ t u d i e n , p.
'%his observation precludes t h e p o s s i b i l i t y that the
f or31 -
na-he-ni-na-a11 f : i i 1: 9 3 ) , c i t e d by Speiser , con-tains
this narticle.
17gee U?. I 1 . : 18.
18i.he f a c t tilst ansamob- c a m o t mean "request" and the

a l t e r n a t e rendering i 3: ~$9-65. Here

comes from P:L
T u s r a t t a opens with the statement " I anzax~noG-'ed m y bro-
tiler ~nzchmore than m y f o r e f a t h e r s saying: . It I1
ilequest"
i s elinlinated not only by the meanil?g of t h i s sentence ( f o r
which see the p a r t i t i v e f o r c e of -m below), but a l s o be-
cause t h e f o l l o : ~ i n g e p e x i g e t i c a l d e s c r i p t i o n s e t s f o r t h the
f a c t that 11e perfosmed t e n f o l d what 11statama h i s grandfather
d i d f o r t h e Pharaoht s f a t h e r and what his f a t h e r d i d f o r the
.- -
vi~araoh. S o h i s opening statelment must be "promised" or the
9 374
1ilre . :,F,3 II
19'i'he phrase i---t--t i ili ad from god" i s tmasual b ~ t
note the i l ~ t e r p r e t a t i o iof
~ Iiotrgayrol, 1 1 1 , p . 312, that
t h i s money r e p r e s e n t s t h e b a i l or s e c u r i t y put UP by t h e
p a r t i e s t o t h e ordeal. It i s b e t t e r t o leave t h e s e c u r i t y
money i f t h e r e i s the s l i g h t e s t doubt as t o o n e ' s innocence
r a t h e r than expose oneself t o the t e r r i b l e judgement of the
god. The Xurrian -- "from" s t r o n g l y supports t h i s i n t e r -
pretation.
'?%'or a s i x i l a r rrse of the p a r t i t i v e with a verb " t o
. ,,. .'-
f e a r " note Arabic , a
,' ,-
2 ; '2 "to be a f r a i d of.
I1

2 1 ~ o ra s i m i l a r develop~nentnote the iiebrew ? -i-Ki'

e.g. ':].%?,:?
, -- .
= 7, .: ~ ; (- ~ s - t h e rur- : u.,- ) "iiiore
\
xe."
22-
f< 0-he p a r t i c u l a r l y -
EA 19: 32-43, ~vhere'YrGratta uses
tI
t h e phrase I1
i n c r e a s e , I t or I1
send," or make g r e a t more than
m y f a t h e r " some four times i n the space of ten l i n e s . Cf.

-
a l s o ZA 13: 60; 26: ~ 6 , 5 6 ;27: 12,105.
23~o;noaret h e A1d:aAiail l e t t e r s cf Tugrstta t o Ar?enophis
I;J where he reiilinc?~'the Pharaoh ad nauseam how generous h i s

Z A 27: 13-34; 2 9 : 12-54,

f a t h e r , 2~nenopliis 1 x 1 , i ~ a dbeen, cf. -
138-147.
i st also p o s s i b l e t h a t t h e jussive s u f f i x
2n-~ -.i-
i s p l u r a l i z e d by t h e -@- {CP. the p l u r a l f o r m of the in-
d i c a t i v e agentive s u f f i x e s , $7.4525) but t h i s i s precluded
----
hy t h e f orrn SaQaS-ill-ai-n-i+llacan
- (KL 42 2 3 ) hey w i 11
11
be heeded.
25
See 3. Lazoche RA 54( 1960) : 193ff.
 4.

26
C f . C. ii. Gordon, , 7 (47.7).
 II\rBEY OF FORl.IS CITED

A11 forms are cited as found in the text, whether in

transliteration or in phonemic trmscription. The alphabetic
order is that listed in 1.5, namely 5 , g, f , Q, 2, lc, 1, g ,
2, g , t, 8, r;, -
3 g9 , g , ly, x,5 . Do-zbling is considered
significant for alphabetic order. Those words that begin
with [ f ] or [TI] are listed under y tvl~eneverthe writing is
Exnbiguous. Forms in transliteration that begin with 3 or 2
-
are listed tmder (3, - q mith
2 is listed wit3 2, and - &8

A. Hurrian
- ( locative) 143-145
-a
- (stative) 145-148
-a
- (connecting vowel) 95
-a- 57
f~-ea-ab-e-li
- (verbal class marker)
-a-
194-197
-(ids (3rd p. sing. pose &
-
ah- 105% 107 a-gz-rr-P- 92, 127
suffix) 118 a-gu-u-a 3 2 , 133
- (nominal suffix) 166-170
-ae
-%- (verbal suffix) 223,
355 (no 112), 228

allay- 105, al-la-i 45, 31-la-

ni 335 (n. 93), a1 laQQe- 173
-
ai4-cl. 173
 ara1n- 130-1'31, 353 ( 3 , 10)
ar
- ara - i - enn - a+:aan
--- - - 35
n
i~ -
; . r l f n 3 ? - i - e l 1 - i + l fit;
~
12 ~~~~~

a r t a~caWe173
-
-
&at-i-106, 323,
- 1 - l a - - ,
3 q (a. 22),
t i - 1 - a r t e - 104, 325 !:I. 5)
Pa-ma-an 87,
antrl-ge-ne 135 - a r t i - 108f.
a n t n - q a + t t a 3 2 2 , 333?n. 77)
f
antu-~,re+inan 206 ar -c~u-LT~L-ILu 5.4.

a t i - 24-1
-ati+nin 253
itr- 323, 1 0 3
--- -t i - i ~ y - r v a - a s"3" ~;L?s
- a t t a r t i - 110
ax-et-a 354. (m 37) -
at-ta-a-az " 116
a-ri-e-ta
-- 208
-
a-r366(n.
a r - i - e n 357
115)
in. 541, ,217
a t t a 8 0 e - 170, 1 7 3
--
attay- 105, 309
a t - t a - i - i l p n a 7;i , 31, 11"
-
a - t o - i - t a 54, 333 1 , q p j
eni-ta 133
cl.,-l.,a
-- v-
$5 "
e - e ~ : ~ -nja-zu-rs
--- ! fC;y! 71)
 anna turwina enna aztuwiaaa ewre- 46, 104, 154, 325 (n. 7 )
= i-r'; t r b in attm 78 ewir-ni 332, 15.5, '274.
en-ne+fan 271 ewri , ewer-ne, e-bar-ni 82
e-e-en-ni-ib-dan 115, 116, emri-/ erwi- 34
341 ewre-!n)na-@ue 115
e-en-ni-da-an 294 en-zi-en-na-gu-nS115, 208,
de-e-en-zi-ir-ya-a~-ije-c-en 325
115, 341 (M- 137) ew[-ri-enIini 274
ew-ri-$3 4
enihaziziya 144 ew-zi-iw-w -3a-u!$ 115
ewr-iffa-8-110115
-
enta-
entwn 280 (n.
enda-n 7
entarmi 274

-
eti-91, 104$ 131, 325
(n. 10)
e-ta-la-an 244
e-ta-ni-u--an295
e-ti-i-e-e- 45, 118, 127
eti-is-(f ) e 127, 135
(e-di-)ki-ni 294
e-di-ni 294
i-ti-ib-ba-an 294, 117

e-ti-i-ta-ni-il-la-mas270 fe- 104, 126

eti+tann-%man 95 we-e-wa 102, 105, 118
e-ti-i-wa 118 = 333 (n. 59)
'

bg-2-25 356 !n. 50)

-
e0e- 104
eGe-ne-ra 334 (n. 92)
Lel-3e-na-3a-335 (n. 93) -
fur- 318
wa-r- 318
va-ri-e-ta 208
-
bur- 318
fur-et-a 354 (n. 37)
fur-i-'a-onne 88, 204, 275
-
f u r i - 142
furi-ta 14.2
BaQannipaQBa11 1
*$la-zi-ib-lru-zu-i@ 315
fur-im-Si-n 171
f g a - z i - i b - ~ i - r n i - ~ a67
-
furt-
furt-en 357 (n, 55) a a - 105
-ha/-&a
L 146, 337 (n. 1 0 ~ )

heme- 243, 244

Y

DattoRe 164
ha-tu-di -en 5 4

@-
Qa&rai QaSuleg = bar I3_dld
78
 --
i - (verbal class marker) 194-
bi0irn-tu- 184 138, 2 0 2 , 209
Bi8rn-t- 351 (n. 13)
-
-i-/-1(9)- (3rd p. sing. gos.
suffix) 117

Qiyarome- 337 (n. 100)

-
biyaroma- 111, 262

i-i-im-aa-ma-an 270

lp.rb6rn 36Sr (n. 158)

Quburnu 344 (n. 158)
guburtrz 344 (no 158)

-
inu- 239 267

irinnarti- 160
irk-am- 180

-. .
irn- my.-
O - ~ O88
e
-i 1.82
Bu-ug-La 353 (n. 29) irn-at)-ofi-i-ya-ma 205
"1---
r:aFFi =-
iri& 51 -
kat-- 192, 235
kat-et-aq 35.4 ( 37)
--
i-si 59 ~ra-te-o-ta-6 207
kat-i-Wrf 88, 337 (no 571,
-.I-sn-di-iE 59 203, 365 (n* 3Ll4.)
kat-i-la-onne 88, 204, 274-5
- - i t e n 210, 218 kat-i-1-ewa 210, 233
ka-f i-1%-e-w 230
- i t ( o ) - 212, 218-219 Icat-ill-et-a 354 (no 37)
k a t - i l l - e f t - a 183, 191
-
i t % -229, 275
i t t - i t e n 210, 217, 218
rcat-i-e 274
ka-a-ti-ga 356 (a. 50), 208
i t t -ai+mia+an 257, 26 3
i t t - 8 i + Q a ~ l , l a + a257,
~ 274 k a t e -
itt-o0t-wmB11 266 Iza-te-ni-xxre 275
*.
i t t -ar -+mi 27 5 kat-ripwan- 180, 187

i-i--d7ak- Llctr-lm-~a-ma-&n
--- 219 - 9 3 , 350 (n. 4)
ke-

-
iea-104, 106, 327 ( n o 18) -
keg-93, 130
ieiz-e 356 (n. 119)
-
k e l - 112

kika- 108
-
I r i r - 364 (n. 107)
kir-iBt- 185
-
kiQi- 108

(n. 3) mana Quene 108, 371'

E ; s ~ & - / K ~ s ~326 (n. 14)

ku-grr-bu-aa 136, 333 (n.

ma-a-ni-e-im-aa-ma-an 149
 -
mann-a+lla 360 (n. 74)
mann-aatta 360 (no 74)
-
-nn-/-n (associative predicative
sufFix) 217, 223, 252-253, 256
man-a+tilla 360 (n. 74)
nann+&n 95 - (nominal root comp~enent)
-n-
manni 8202, 360 (n. 74) 1.11
mann-o-lclca+lla+an 88, 350
(n.74 - 148, 157-162
-na-
mam-o-d+tila+an 88, 360
(no 74) nah-

mar isanni
mariyamarti+ia+an 87 naWnrQ0e 173
mardat-li 112 [= efn8k-u/ol-u/o~f-185
ma-ra-sa 59 Inak-ul-uQt-e- 357 (no 55) , 218

maSkx.@wli 112 natkibli 26

Icu41a-a-$8-ri-a-a-aaa-ni335 nihari 86, 153

(no 94) nibar-re- 86
nibar -ne- 156
maziri 105

-
niri-
nir-ae 167~169, 345 (n.
nir-i-0e 112
nir-00-ae 112
'77 nir-8-ae 112
niru-vat-ae 111, 345 ( n B
 n/ .
-nna 217, 304 ( n o ill), 255- u - i n - i - - - - a - 114
-- 257 gmu-Q-ai-i-ni -im-l'd8-a~-~a-
-
a-an 43
~ u J[u-]u-ai-i-ai-~w-;va
~ ~ -ai 1-
la-a-an 323
0
MU2u-u-mi -i-ni-iw-iBa-a-2-
ni-e 91, 118, 127
omin-na 86

pam- see fabr-

-
01i.- 104, 107

na-a-li-us-3e-ne-w[a 1 208
-
olob-
01-ob- 182
pal-i -ya-ma-e@e+man 205
pal-la-an, pal- i-l-aiaa 89
olob-ett-a 191 pal-la(-a)-en, pal-la-in, =
u-a-lu-z-4e-e-;va-a-t 5-la-an pal-la-i-gal-la-ma-=
2 30 pal-( i-) 1- 362((12. 90)
pal-( i-) l-ae-n 223, 228
-
-om- 193 l-ai-~-a+llwrnasl
omini- 86, 104 27 3-274
IEURn-u-mi-I-ni 10 3 , 335 pal%- 112, 377 (no 99)
n * 94) paltu-pat-e- 345 ( n o 168)
1-i-u-mi -=
-i -ni -i -ni -e 9 1
mi-i-ni-iw-;oa 114, p n t - see f a t -
pa-an-di -lc[u] 54
 <-e
peteQt-e 89
te-e3-te- 197
a-te-es-ti-e-na-an 357 (n. 55)
petegt-e+llatan 217, 215
--
net-eQt-ett-a 185. 191
peteot-ifen 210, 218

191, 133 nis-ant- 323, 181

pa-a-a5-3f-a-a-ma 368 (n. 132) pis-an&-bet- 185
paQQ-i-en 89
pa-a3-3u-n-ga 208 bi-ti-&i 295

P / \ ~ * S ~ ( Ygap$i
) 72, 317 (n. 104) ,
111, 165

-=-128-129 ptflcnu/okl-u/o@f
l- - 185
pekan- 247 aul?;l-set-i-en357 (n. 54)

peniburu 113 nurame 105, 326 (n. 13)

pur-ar-att-iff 109
pent-
be-en-ti 317 (n. 105) pmhll*uli 112
pent-i-en 357 (n. 5 ~ ) ,
 ( n o 72) -
tali- 105
p u t t -u-'&i - 20 3

- 141
-ra-

tadcaraQQ4i 173
dam-qar-8i 347
dam-qar-ra-a%% 347
dam-ki -ra-a-Zi 347

-
tan-

-
sil-
z i - i l - 60,
z i l i ~ ~ 60, l u 114- tan-i-ya 188
ta-a-ni-a 355 (2. 59)
tan-oQ-a 352 (n. 27)
ta-a-no- sa-a-n
Y &
4 3 , 20
fa-a-nu-a-5a-a-u 4.3
f an-oQ-i-l&a+t t a + ~ n a a

~ ~ i y a z -
su-ply-am-aQt- 185
s~wiym-aQt-i-en
"'
ar-• xl
357 (n. 54Gtar-iten
(n. 25)
218

-
tat-

=- 349 (n. 2)
ta$pTd<a 355 (ne "1 I
tat-as-We-na-Qura 143
f a - a - t i - a 208
taQ-a-&a 357 (YI. 5 G ) ,
L:J
-
tat-i-ya 196
tatkikar- 186
Ltlat- L-&Jax-irmu-0Qi?-ne-ra-
 tat--&amQ-i-Nci 203 ti$=-ul-om- i33
tat-mar-r- ( tat-dear-(i-) a-n~-u-lu-ma-a-a3-8e-
-
1- 214
-
ta-a-du-315-a-ar-ri-6-~vd 8?
"% ni 18
tat-'cflcar-(i-)r-ewa< taf- -
ti&g-rill-ett-a 191-192
~&ar-i-1-ewa89
-tat-mar-me 170 42-
-ti1 a a- 254, 261-262, 258,
-tills- vs. -tila- 43
t a t - w - ~ l -182

-
tea 111
te-a-la-an 361
teolae 111
teonae 111, 168
teari- 105 Ti3a-Di~nnluzi 283

telam-ae 167, 169

teona 111, 168

Te-gu-ha-ax1 64 tiwe- 104, 325 (n. 8)

TeQQw-aQ 330 ti-w[a-lal-la-a-an 87
dTe-e3-8u-ub-'a-dal 55 tiwe Burwe 132, 153, 263
TeQQub-fe > TeQQub-be > tiwe-na 159
TeQQm-~e129 tli-wlic-i-sla-Cad 337
d ~ e - e - e g - l ~ ~55,
- - 129
- (n* 95)

-
ttb-d 53355
-
ttbt = d~e-e-eg-~u-~a-ag
62
- 2549 255f,, 261-262, 260,
-tta-
262

tiban- t m - a r m 110
ti - i -ba-n- 41 Dumuzi 283
nrr
I,iQ-za-
A 3
LOU
ti&=-iten 218 tu-ni-ik-ki 54
ti&-an-011-ett-a 183
- tupe-na 363 (n. 101)
ti-i-y-nu--1-li-e-et-ta
18af
li?EFX!- -
Bar- 192, 270
tw~a-88e-na161 Oar-ill-et-a 183, 354, (n. 3 7 ) ,
% w P89,
-~ 357 ( n e 55) 193
t~p-0-kko88, 203 Bar-121-eft-a 183, 191-192
trnp-0-1- 210 [Qar-018-ima-Q@e 193
tupa-o-1-ai+n 367 (n. 126) l a 187,
twpu-pat-a- 111, 184 194
tuppakoQQe 111, 363 (n. 101) Za-ri-ti-bi 2 9 5 , 309

-
turi- 104 -
QaraQQe-be- 86
V
sar -ra-a8-Ei-Qi-bi-na-s[u-us]
turome 164 340 (n. 129)
sar -ra-ag-gi<ihi-no-bi-na-
u

furupaim-o-kko 203
Zu-US e-eb-ri-i3<-Si)-hi-
-2- (pluralizing morpheme) 185 .
ni -bi-na-3u-uZi 340 (c 129)

-
-8 (assocfative) 273-274 Sarru 340 ( n . 126)

-8- - (verbal agentive plural- Sar-tegSub

izing suffix) 205 -trttb 65
--
-8a- (dative plural) 133
( locative plural i&

-
Qaha- 104, 325
Bala-f-an 325 Sam-Zen 282
8a-a-la-na-an 117
aal-iff- 325

-
-tan: 305

Qamala- 86
Bawal-la 86
 -
Qin- 108

Q i n t a 108

8e-e-ni-iw-ma&-r ra-+an] s i - d i - i n 68
142

@ e n - i f f- u ( Q ) + l ~ a -89
w
se-e-ni -iw-wa-6-e 127 B i tur aQQe17 3
#
Ze-e-ni-iw-W-u-e-ni-e-w
-- Q i t u r i - 353 (n. 2 9 )
Y-1 Q i t u r - i a0 325 (n. 41)
3e-e-ni-iw-W-6-a 102, 132 gi-du-r:-va-as 353 29)
Qen-iff-qa+lPa+aii 259
Se-e-ni-iw-m-ta 333 (n. 81) 65

-
Qer- 355 (no 42)
3e-e-ir-ri-e- 355 (n.
-Sbn? 65 -
Bu-xu-ti-@ 235, 309
-- 584- 136
-a@t Qurwe 132, 153, 263
- 134
-at- - 185
~n/or~v-x/oQf
- 136
-8ta - 125
-0u%
-tars-d 173 -
- ~ ff- 200, 206-207
- 125
-ao- - 182
-ub-
- = -t 62
-33-
-
-Z/O&~- 182
- 9 8 , 332, 172-176, 193
-Q0e-
- e e - o ~ / ~ 193
a --&lu/i 112
-c$l~z = -378
8 a a l l a m 108 -@ulu 82

---
Gnzmlaman 107 - 186
-drar-
-
Que- 134, 107 -n/g- 186, 215
Q-Jbur-ni 94, 105 uliweru 105
Q a u r - r i 94
- u l ( l ) - 183
3x1-im-wa-an 296
-
ul-li-wa-a-en 360 (n, 76)
-
Qrika- 245
t1l-l~r-Qu-u~-~u-6-a).203
QMc- 240
- 171
--rn
~rilc-k&-ni -e-el-la-ma-an 87
- 170-172
-mne
Q-vXJc:o- 240
--
,a,-260
-
8-dcr-
- 5-ni-e-i t-ta 42
3~ikr- 58 -
W-a 19G
AgrIP 6 8 tm-a+lla 261
un-o-l&zwla+an 88, 261
Su-ki-si-te-se-:fa 258 un-oQ-a 352 (n. 271, 188
Q u l - i l - i Q t - 185 -u/onn- 215
Su--m-zu-na-sa 31 5 -
m f o - 24G-241
uxato+m&n 97, 265
-
-Qura 142-14.3 ,
-
unu- 241
Bar-am- 180 4 4
Bur-am-aQt- 185 u-a-r- see E-
Bar-am-aQt-i-en 357 (n. 54)
ur- (h-)
- see
d~~gara ,
ur-iinPu-~8-ir/o=
--- 87, 187,
194 193
-
uriwnpu88ngba
ur-o-l&o 88,
338 (n. 102)
203
-3-e 112
ur-0-1- 210
ur-o-l-ema 83, 214, 233
ur-om-o0t- 185
nr-om-03%-ewa 183
u r - o m - d o 183
ur-o-w-en 210
-2-te-e-iva-a-tan

- see -fe
0
-11-e
nrn-ar-i-mi 181
- see fa
-&-a

0
n-u-ra-u-3a-a3-ge-na-a-ma-
-
a-an 208
~arrr-au~a-08e-na-a&rz 266

---
utt-aQt-if-an 351 (n. 20), 218 pr-iya-QQe-na
6-6-sm!/znr-ki
349
292
-n0(Q) 124, 125
 fabr-
wah,r- see -

waif- see fant-

&-
wazula 255 (n. 3 2 ) zwlutrnume 171

-
we- see fe-

-
imr- see tfie f o l l o w i n g e n t r i e s
zzd. ftrr- al&u ep65a 172
\mr-t-en-i- 154 -
ana 325

LI
id8mal i-te-ma 234
-
idtr 202

Z i ~ e312

zil- see
p
u-
 C. Smerian
BAL 171
ma-a' -drr 36 1
rnSi~x?ta139
ma-mi-da 294

GAB 171

~ i i q r ? y r x 336

-
nabalkatum 171

nu-in-na-an-sum 295
SATGA 173

sk 171 +

SES 324
C~rrii].;A 248
ZAG 317

D. Ugaritic
" h a t 302
-"nt 309
-
"ttrt 138
 Ug. A-II B i l .

5 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 7 1 i : Q j . . . 0 . . e . . i 2 2 f .
6 . . ....... 139,272 i : ~ i . . ..... 158, 176
7 e e i r
17-
LA/ 1:71-73 . 175
7-8.. .. 173 1:74-75 a . 188

1 2 d~ . . . . . . . . 151
2:6
1:85 . .
36 . . . . . . 157
42 O ~ V .

Q 42 rev. 9 . . . . . . 156
1:89f. ..
. . 130 a:90. ..
27 42 rev. 15
q 4 . 2 r e v . 3.5. . . 1 cL
1:92f. .
18f. . . . . *-155
P:97 = e 5

2-7 @rev.
r ; l 4 2 : 6 . . . . . . . .159
1: 104--105

29 8 4:27f, . . . . . . . 221f.
1: 107-109
Sl: 114-115
 B I B L I GGiIAPl-fY

1. ril-!!=
ALL"
& r 4 +-i--.--:
itL* uv-lllll Lette1:

Facsi~i'le:
Schroeder , C. Die TontafePn von el-Amarna. (irorderasia-
t i s c h e ~chriftrdenlrmaleri2.3 Leipzig, 1915, Test
1T0, 2 0 0 .

Transliterations:
Knrtdtzon, J o A. (ed.) Die El-Amarlza Tafe1n mit X i o l ~ i t r-m ~ ;
m d Eslauterungen. lmmerkmg~nund Register bearb*
von Otto Vireber und E r i c h Ebeling. (Ir irorderasia-
t i s c h e B i b l i o t h e k , " 2. stuck.) 2 ilol,s. Leipzig,
1915$ Tesf Nc. 2d0
Fr i e d r i c h , J . K l e i n a s i a t ische ~~sachdenkmL'ler. (K:r G ~ z r v

Texte f u r Vorlesungen und t%ungen, hsgbn. v o n Hans

Rlercer, S. A, B. (eci.) The T e l l El-Amarna Tabletso 2 Vois.

Toronto: f\.lac:,iillall Co., 1939, Text N O . 24.

2, The Hurrian > l a t e r i a l from ~oghazlroi

Facsimiles:
von Brandemstein, C.-G. Kultische Texte i n h e t h i t i s c h e r a d
churrischer Sprache. Keilschr i f turl.mnden aus

400
 40 1
I3oghazkoi 27. Berlin: Staatliche Museen, Vorder-
asiatische Abteilung, 1934.
Ehelolf, 9. Kultische Texte vor~viegendin hethitischer,
churrischer und luvischer Sprache aus den Grabun~en
1931 rwd 1932, Keiischrift-rrrkundenaus Boghazk6i
32. Berlin: Staatliche hfuseen, Vorderasiatische
Abteilmg, 1942.
Jlarrian texts and passages are scattered through the
res-6 of the facsimile editions of Iiittite texts from ~o~hazkiii.
These are:
iceilschrifturkunden aus ~oghazkoi. Berlin: Staafliche Museem,
Vorderasiatische Abteilung. Vol. 1, 1921 to Vol.
37, 1953.
ICeilschrifteste aus ~oahazkoi. Vols. 1-4 in Y!issenschaftliche
~ e r o fent~ichtma
f der Deutschen Or ient-Gesellschaft
30(1916-231, Vols. 5-6 in WmOG 36(1921), Vols. 7 - 9

-
in \YVljOG 68-70(195~!,-1957).
King, L. Hittite Texts in the Cuneiform Character from ,Ta;blets
in the British hiusem. London: British hlusem
t zgyptfai~and Syrizji I ; i l t i q n i t i e s z l y ~ u .
~ e p ~ z ; ~ e nof T fin-

F ~ r r e r ,Z, Die ~oehazkhi-~exfe

in Umschrift. \Fissensc'naft-
liche ~er8ffentlichm.g der Deutschen Orient-Gesel1-

--
schaft A 1
-Pa and 42(1922-1926).
Goetze, A. Verstreufe ~oehazkoi-~este.Aiarburg, 1930,
Bozlc..,rrrt,
li., FiZ. I!., ~Cterbock,HeG. Istanbul arkeolojf
miizelerinde bulunan ~ogazlioytabletler inden seCme
mefinler. 3 vols. Is.t;anbul,1 3 4 , 1947, 1954.
Y a P l r a n , K. -
i1n1cara arkeolaji &zesinde bulunan ~oZazk6y
labletleri. Istanbul, 1948.
Laroche, E m "~ragmentsEittites de ~ e n s v eI,
I
2 dr5(195i) :
131-138, 184-194; 46( 1952): 4-2-50.
A classified list of the iirxrrian texts ancl passages in
the above works is fomd in:
Laroche, E. des textes hlttites I , I I , Langwes
"~atalogx~e

Friedrich.,J. Gleinasiatische ~prachdendmL1er. (Kleine Texte

41

fur Vorlesr.mgen rmd Ulbmzgen, hgbia. von R. Lietzxann,

No. 163.) Berlin: Walter de Gruyter, 1932, pp. 32-
35. ('very limited).
3. The Xlari Texts
Facsimile a ~ dtransliterations:
Thurearr-Dangin. F. "Tablettes hurrites provenant d.e Jl%ri, I!

-
3s 35(1933): 1-23.
ragti ti lent hourrite provenant de :,f%ri,'!@ 51
-7

Laroche, jl;.

I -.
UYZO:
r. r-\
i84-106.
4. The Mrxrriar; Btaterial from 'IJgarit
a. The Alphabetic TexLs:
Facsimiles:
Syria 10(1929), plates 64, 6 7 , 73, 74-,75.
Syria 12( 1931), p. 389.
Syria 15( 1 9 3 ~ pp.
) ~ 147-154.
Syria 20(1939), p . 126.
Xougayrol, J e Uaaritis V. ( ~ o yet
t published.)
Transliterations:
Gordon, .;( B e Uaaritic ItZanual, (Analects Orientalia 35.)
Jome: Fontifical Biblical Institute, 1955. Texts
4, 7 , 31, 34+45, 35i71, 50, 50, 61, 1.06.
11
vonBrmdenstein, C . 4 . ZunlCl~urrischenausderai2as-Scharma
Texten," ZDEIG 91(1937): 556-558. (Only test A of
-
L ~ Z) e

Herdner, A. U~ariticaV. ( ~ o tyet published; collated trans-

literations of tkre 'cexts found in %.)
11
Laroche, X. Docunients en langue hourrite provenant de itas
Sharmra. 1 1 1 Textes hourrites en cungiformes alpha-
bgtiques,1 1 xari tica V. !Plot yet published; contains
eight new tablets from the 24th. campaign in 1961.)
b. The Syllabic Texts:
Facsimiles:
11
Nougayrol, J . II Bilingue aceado-hourrite et Prextes hourritesen
Le Palais aoyal dlUgarit
--- 111. (~la~ches.)
Textes
accadfens et hourrites des archives est, ouesf et
centrales. Paris: Iaprimerie Eationale, 1355,
plates 107-103.
. Uearitica V. ( ~ o tyet published.)
---
Transliterations:
I?
Laroche, 3. Les textes hoarrites," Le Palais Roval dvUgarit

u . 9 PP. 325-335
. "~ocument
s en langue hourrite provenant de R a s
Shamra. 11. Textes hourrites en cmgifornes sylla-
 biques. 11 Ugaritica V. ( ~ o tyet published.)
c , The tiMcado-Eiurr ian I;i1i n p a l :
Facsfmi&:
Nougayrol, J. "Ilw Bilingue accado-hourrite et textes
,hourrites." Le Palais CcyaP d'ugarit; III.
( ~ l a n c l ~ e s . )Pasis: I m ~ r i m e r i eIqationale, 1955,
plate 106.

-Transliteration:
PSougayrol , J .
and
; Laroche, E. II
Le bi1ingt:e accado-houssitew C1

Le Falais Royal d'Uzarit 111. Paris: Imprimerie

Rationale, 1955, pp. 311-324,
d. The S~mero-Hurr
ian Vocabnlafy:

----
Facsimile and Tra~sliteration:
~hureau-&ngin, F. "iiocabulaires de Bas ~hanra,"Syria 12
(193;): 225-66,
-
Transliteration:
Friecirich, J. h~ioasiatische~nrachdenicrnglez. Berlin:
Yalter de Gruyter, 1932, pp. 14-9-35,
e. The U~~adrilingual
Vocabulary.
-
Facsimile:
1~o~rgayrol,
J. TJearitica V. (Xot yet published.)
Transliteration of selected entries:
11
Laroche, E. Documents en langue hor~rriteprovenant de Gas

Shmra. .
I Vocabulaire quadrilingue de ilas Shama:
la Colonne hoarrite. 11 Ugaritica V. (Rot yet pub-
lished.)
5 The Fotmdatior: Lim Inscription from UrkiS.
F a c s i n i l e and t r a n s l i t e r a t i o n :
---
Nougayrol .
, J , agd P a r r o t , A. " ~ doctment
n de fondation
h o u r r i t e , " @ 42(1948): 1-20.

6. Personal Names.
a. I n general:
Gelb, I . J . iirxr~iansand S ~ u a r i a i ~ s .( ~ t r x d i e si n Ancient
Oriental C i v i l i z a t i o n . No. 22.) Chicago: U n i -
v e r s i t y of Chicago P r e s s , ~BLM.
b. l?T,?z~r:
G e l b , I . J . , Pmves, P. !I., and IIacilae, A. A. Ntrzi Personal
Sames. h he University of Chicago Oriental I n s t i -
t u t e Prrblications, Vol. 57.) Chicago: The Tjniversity
of Chicago P r e s s , 1943.
I i e m e m , D. r l . [~evie'ivof Excavations at Nus, Volume V I I .
Economic and Social Documents, Selected and Tran-
scribed by Ernest d . achem man. ( ~ a r v a r dSemitic
S e r i e s , Volume 16) .I 17 fasc. 65(1959): 173-
177. his contains a l l the personal names from
t h i s volrme not i n ma)
Jankowsks, N.B. "Legal Documents from Arrapl-ja i n the Collec-
11
t i o n s of the USS2, i n Perecheazistskiy Sbsrnik:
Voprosg X e t t o l o g i i i : X u r r i t o l o ~ i i ( ~ k a d e a n i j a
N a a c Gruz inslro j SSi1, I n s i tut Jszykozizani ja. )
Irioscow: I z d a $ e l ' sfvo vosto8no j Literaftrry, 1961,
personal name l i s t , pp. 498-522,
c , Chagar Bazar:

G a d , C.J. "Tablets from Chagar Bazar axid Tell ~ r a k , ' !

 I L 7(29~$0):
~ 22-66.
d. T e l l Ta'annak:
TI
C;Txstavs, A. Die Personennamen i n de;z Tijntafeln von T e l l
11
~ a ' a m ~ e k ,Z e i t s c h r i f t des Dezt schen ~ a ~ k t i n + -
Vereins 50(1927) : 1-18, 51(1928) : 169-218.
e. Qatna:
8
B o ' t t ~ r o ,J . " ~ e isn v e n t a i r e s de Q a t ~ l a , :;ca
' 4.3(1949): 1-40,

li
- h t r e s f e x t e s de Q a f n a , " ~ . ( 1 9 5 0 ) :105-118.
1: 1I
V o c a b ~ ~ l a i rde
e Ua!na, j@ M(l05O): 119-122.

B . Stud-ies Bear inp: on Hurr i a n O r tho,.grax)hy,

" ."
Gra~milar, and Lexicogranhy.
1
A l b r i g h t , W.F. "?ilitannian nlaryannu, c h a r i o t w a r r i o r , ' and
the C a n a a ~ i t eand Egyptian ~ q u i v a l e n t ,"
s $fU 6
(1930-31) : 217-2?.
1I
Aro, J . Remarks on t h e Language o f t h e Alalakc Texts,"
-
AXI 17( 1956) : 361-365.
Berkooz, ?.:. The Nuzi Tjialecf of Aldcadizr~, (Lacgnage Disser-
tations 3 3 , ) Philaelphia: Lingaisfic SocieSy cf
~lrfierica, Tlniversity of P e n n s y l v a ~ i a , 1937.
~ h l F., If. Die Sprac&e-iisr - 4 n a ~ n a b r i e f e=it hesonderm
~ e r ~ c k s i c h t i ~des
m g Kanaanismen. Leipzig:
Druck von A ~ g u s tP r i e s , 1909.
Bork, F o Die hIitannispracheo ! ~ v A ( ~ ) Gl 4 / l - 2 , 1709.

--=. . I1
Studien zmn klitanni,
11
BfC 8(1932-33) : 308-14..
~ o t t k r o ,J. " ~ e isn v e n t a i r e s de ~ a t n a , "@ 3(1949): 1-40,
 4.Q7
137-215-
11
" d u t r e s t e x t e s de Q a t n a , i.;a u ( 1 9 5 0 ) : 105-;;8.
:1
de Qa$na, & u ( l 9 5 0 ) : 119-22.
"~ocabula.?;re
von .Brandensteir~, C , -G. Churr ischen aus den Ass-Sclaamra-
" ~ m
ext ten,^' -
ZlPhiG 91( 1 9 3 ) : 555-76.
-. in a r i s c h e s und e i n semitisches L e b ~ v o r tim
Churrfschen,'' -- Afs B 3 \ i ynqqi
j , ~ : 58-62.
/ Y

---
+

Chicago Assyrian Dictionary: The fissg-- Dictiouasv of the

O r i e n t a l I n s t i t u t e of the V n i v e r s i t y of Chicago,
ed. I . J . Geib, T. Jacobsen, fZ. L a ~ d s b e r g e r ,and
A, L. CpperAeim. The O r i e n t a l I n s t i t u t e of the
Tjniversity of Chicago and J ..T . Augustin, ~lsckstadt

Clay, A. T. Personal Names from C~meiforwI n s c r f ~ t i o c sof

the C a s s i t e Period. (Yale 0rie:ltal S e r i e s o S e -
!
searches 1 . I Xetv IIaven: Pale Zuiversi ty P r e s s ,
1912. >

Cross, 13. I=able Property i n the Nuzi Doc~mgents. ( ~ z e r i c a n

O r i e n t a l S e r i e s PO.) New IIaven: America1 O r i e n t a l
S o c i e t y , 2937.

Dirzkonoff, I .h3.. " A Comparative S ~ z v e yof the H u r r i ? a 2nd

 4.0 8

Urar tean Languages," Peredneaziatski,-i Sbornik:

,* ?@prosyX e Q f ~ l ~ ~3 iXin r r i f c ? o g f f . ( & ~ ~ ~ ~

Rar& Gruzinskoj S S 3 , I n s t i t u t ~ a z y k o z h a n i 2 2 , )
bioscow: I z d a t e l ' s t v o VostoEglo j Literafx~nrg, 1 9 6 ~
Draff'lcorn, i1.E. Ewrrians and Burrian a t A l a l a Q : A n Ethno-

l i n g u i s t i c ~ i n a l y s i s . Unp~?blis&ed
Ph.D. Disserta-
tion. Philadelphia: TJniversity of Pennsylvarzia,
1959.
F i n e t , A. LtAccadien des l e t t r e s de Blari. (iicadgmie 9oyale
de Belgique. Classe des L e t t r e s e t dcs Sciences
%;orales e t P o l i t i q a e ~ ~
Blernoires. Tome 51 .)
Bruxelles: P a l a i s des ~ c a d 6 r n i e s1956.
~
Fr i e d r i c h , J , Einfuhring i n s ~ r a r t g i s c h e * ( ~ s a m a t i s c h e rA b r i s s
und ausgewahlte Texte n i t sprachlichen ~ r l a u t e r ~ r n ~ e) i ? .
A I V A ( ~ ) G37/13, 1933*

. f1
Z m ~ubaraiscbenund ~ r atzischen,"
r i;Iiscellanea
O r i e n t a l i a d e d i c a t a Antonio Deimelo (Analects

Q r i e n t a l i a 12.) ilome: P o n t i f i c a l B i b l i c a l I n s f f $cite,

19350
. IXheine 5 e i t r a e e ztrr C h r r i t i s c h z ~S r m ~ a - t i l c .
h W R ( e ) ~ rif.2/2, 1939.
11
Der gegenwartige Stand rmseres IYissens von der
churr itischelz ~ p r a c h ,"
e Vooraziatisch-Egmtisch
Gezelschav ' E x Oriente L u x ' ," J a a r b e x i c h t No. 6 ,
1939.
. 11
Zwei c h u r r i t i s c h e Pronomina," 5 f a s c . 35
f 1339) : 93-ro2.
 409
11
Friedrich, J o "~hurritischeAdjectiva auf -ix~zi, NS.
( 1943) : 350-52.
. It
Die erste Gesamtdarstellung der churritischen
Gramatik,t I PJS, (1943): 199-225.

. 1:
Chrrrritisb-Ugaritisches und Churritisch-Luwisches,
11

11
..
~remlieFlexionsformen in hethitischen Textcn,"

.
-
;iH11 8 fascc 4(19dC?-4r3): 3-15.
in churritische Vort fkigtin (kigti)
~anfte]," k f ~15(1952): 66.
-- - Tragsessel,

Friedrich, J. Hethitisches Worterbuch. ICurzgefasste Kritische

Sammlung der deutungen hethi ti scher War tee (In6.o-
geraaaische Bibliothelc 2. ~eihe. IIsgbn. von Hans
Xrahe.) Heidelberg: Carl Vinter ~niversit&tsverla~,
1952.
. Hethi tisches ~6rterbuch. 1. ~rgamzunpshcf
t .
lieidelberg: Carl Winter ~niversitatsverla~,
1357.
. Bethi tisches \~;r terbuch. 2. &rg&zungshef to
Heidelberg: Carl Uinter ~niversitatsverla~,
1961.
II Zu den churritischen ~ahlmGrtern,!! 19 5 6 ) :
368-69.
GWcreiiZize, 'Th. V. "'lfile Alikado-Bittite Syllabary and the
-- 4& r J 9 11
Problem of the Origin of the Hittite Sur
Arch Or 29(1961) : $06-418.
Gelb, I. J., Turves, P . Ji., and hlac:?ae, A. il. iqrazi Perso@
?Tames. (The University of Chicago Oriental Insti-
tute Publi catiolzs, Volume 57 .) Chicago: The Uni-
 410
versity of Chicago Press, 1943.
S
-"
elb, I .J. 1I
Brxrrians at Xippwr in the Sargonic Period,1 I in
Festschrift Johannes Friedrich ztm 65 Geburtstag,
Ileidelberg: Carl SVinter r~?~iversit%f
sverlag, 1959,
pp. 18.3Li94.
. Old iY&adian ;!/ritin~and Gramar. (MaDerials for
the Assyrian Dictionary, Ro. 2. Second Edition,
revised and enlarged.) Chicago: University sf
-
Chicago Press, f9610
Ginsberg, H.L., and Biaisler, 3 . " 'sefnitised
-. Hwrrians in
Syria and ~alestine
,I' JPOS 14( 1934): 243-67.
Goetze, A. " ~ o n aObservations on Nuzu AIrlcadian," Lane. 14
(1938): 134-143.
. It
~'hunrecognizedI-Iurriai~
verbal form," =5 fasc.
35( 1939): 103-108-
. TO come' and 'to go' in Hurrian," Lang 15(1439):
215-20.
he Genitive of the ITurrian Norm, I I
$5 fasc.
I
&

r ..
[~eviewof Friedrich, T i rhleine ~eitragei u r Churriti-
schen Grammatik,"] L a ~ g16(1940) : 217-254.
"The Hrrrrim Verbal System,11 L a w 161190): 125-

140.
heview of E . Speiser, Introduction to Hurrian.]

- .
La;r,g19! 194.3) : 170.-1-76
 4; 1
1I
Goetze, Be E n c l i t i c -Pronorms i n 'i-I-i~rrias,"JCS 2(1948) : 255-
268.
. 11
I I u r r i a n d - '-hyin'," = 2 ( 1 9 4 8 ) : 137-138e
11
" H i t t i t e G o u r t i e s s and t h e i s T i t l e s , == 12 fasc.

54( 1952) : 1-14..

. h he S i S i l a r i t s of Q l d Babylonian, 1I
@ 52(1(358):
234-149.
. ;lT-
d r x r r i a ~P l a c e Names i n Ws l\ ws r e ,1 1 i n F e s t s c h r i f t
Johannes F r i e d r i c h z m 65 Gebnrtstaq, (hsgbn. von
2. von E i e n l e , lie Eloortgat, :I. O t t e n , E. uon
S c h ~ l e rurad Y/. ~ a t n s e i l . ) IIeidelbesg: Carl YJinter
~ ; n i v e r s i t a . t s v e r l a ~1959,
, i2p. 195-296.
[Seviem of von Soden, A k a d i s c h e s ~ a n d 1 ~ 6 r t e r b u c h ~
L a x 36( 1960) : ~ 6 3 - 4 7 0 .
-
11
Gordon, C'. 8. The Kames of the T::ont'cs or" the Krrzi Calendar ,"
i l i v i s t a d e f i l i S t n d i O r i e r l t a l i 15(193~1-):253-257.
. .-
"The Pronoun i n the 1Tuzi 'i'a'wiets," iGSL 51(1934):
1-21.

"iividence f o x t h e H o r i t e Language from 3uzi 9 11

BASOX 64iuec. 1936) : 23-28.
-
" ~ o u n si n t h e Kuzi T a b l e t s , " Gabyloniaca 16( 1936):

. lt~hD
e i a l e c t of the Kuzu T a b l e t s , "2XS . 7(1938):
32-63, 215-232.
. he R e ~ vAmarila T a b l e t s , 'I; -
OrIr'S. 16(1947): 1-21.
" ~ g a r i t i cManual. (Analects O r i e n t a l i a 35.) Eone:
-
r o n t i f i c a l B i b l i c a l I n s t i t u t e , 1355.
 4.1 2
11
Gordon, C.II., and lac he ins^;, E.1t. "The Kuzu :.ienology,
A r c h O r ?0(2338): 51-64.

Grxstavs, A. I1
Eigennarnen von roar jaantl-Le~ten,'! a=36( 1925 j :
297-302-
. "3er EIitanni-Stamm w- 'versprechen' , AfO
t1

8(1932-33) : 131-1320
. "!,!itanni-~a~neni n a i t a s s y r i s c h e n Texten a w s
Eappadokien," AfO 11I1336-37): 146-150.
I l a r r i s . Z. "A IInrrian A f f r i c a t e or S i b i l a a t i n X a s ~ h a m r a , " -. ,
JllOS 55( 1935) : 75-100.
Hroznf, 8. " ~ n eI n s c r i p t i o n de Ras Shamra en langue chrrrrite, 11
Arch Or d(1932): 118.
K a p a u t s i a ~ ,G.A. " ~ two
n socio-poli t i c a l terms i n the
Ancient Xear East;," 'Irestaik Drevney I s f o r i j .
Moscaa, 1?33, pp. 10-14.
- . he T r a n s l a t i o n of Elurr . Sarf-//Zarr-- as ' s e r v a n t ,
s l a v e ' on the ground of Arneniari and Georgian d a t a , 11
Vestnik Drevney I s t o r i x . Xoscow, l l q 5 1 , pp. 2~C-5-249.
Kronassez , Xeinz. Et;ynnolo,gie der IIethitiscfien Sprache.
Xeisbaden: Otto Barrossowitz, 1963.
I
Labat, 3 . LtiLklcadien de ~ o & a z - ~ $ i . Ztude sur la Langue
troxxvgs 8 Uoghaz-lcoi. Borderxx: L i b r a i r i e Delmas,
1932.
Lacheman, E. "2pigraphic evidences of the m a t e r i a l c u l t t ~ r e
of the Nuzians, tI i n S t a r r , R.F.S. -
Nuzi. Vol. I .
Cambridge: fIarvard University Press, 1939.
. Kuzi Geographical Names ," BASOH 78(Apri P , 194.0):
11
 A 13

18-23, Sl(Febrrtary, 1341) : 10-15.

:1
Laoheman X. at ?Tzzi,
" ~ o t eon tlze :rz'rrpd IJGX~LZ Bi'SOi? QS{A~Z~I
1942): 36-37.
Laildsbezger , B. Ilaf er i a l e n z m S w e r ischem Lexikon V. The
S e r i e s ffm-ra r t;2wbullu, T a b l e t s I-IV. Home:
P o n t i f i c a l B i b l i c a l I n s t i t u t e , 1957.
-- ?ae
Landsherger, B . , xallock,
a ~ d ~ . r . , " D ~ S Vocabular s -
X a t e r i a l e n n ~ mSrmerischen iexjliron I XI. ~icizs:
The P o n t i f i c a l B i b l i c a l I n s t i t u t e , 1755, pp. 47-87.
de Langhe, 2 : Les Textes de Has Shamra-[Jearit e t Penrs
iianports avec 1s EIiliec Biblique d ilAncien
Testament. 2 Vols. P a r i s : ~ e s c l g ede Bromrer,

1?45 -
Laroche, IS. "8echerches s n r l e s noms des d i e m h i t t i t e s , "
' 3T
A 4 7 Tasc. 4G(19L!.6-47): 7-139.
"TzEgub, IJebat e t l e u r cour," 2(1948): 113-
136.
iiecueil d l o n o m a s t i q ~ eh i t t i t e . P a r i s : Klincksieck,
i95r.
. 1
Onomas~iqueh i ~ t i t e :>idditions e t c o r r e c t i o n s , Z!

-
2iiA 1 3 f a s c . 57 ( 1955) : 89-106.
. .'Elements d ' h a r u s p i c i n e h i t t i t e , " A= 12 f a s c *
54( 1952) : 19-43.
. "Le p%?tl160n de YaziliP<aya," JCS 6(1952):115-123.
. " ~ bei l i n q u e accado-hoirrrite, 11
Le P a l a i s Royal
a 1 Tcxtcs accadielis e t h o u r r i t e s des
archives e s t , o a e s t e t c e n t r a l e s . P a r i s : Imprimerie
Laroche, E. I1
Les t e x t e s h o o r r i t e ~ ~- -
L "e P a l-
a i s itoval d l U g a r i f

~ h a ~ ? r a 1:e.aritlca
," V. (1ivailahle t o m e only i n
~tznrzginatedgklley p s o o f s throu2'iz %be courtesy or'

!,I. Lar oche .

1
)

Levy, 11. "5iiscePlanea N-c~ziana,

11
Q 1;s. 2!3(1959) : 1-25, 213-

129.
h i e n d e 1 s o h ~ ~ I . "The Canaanite Term f o r 'Free P r o l e t a r i a n 1 , t1

u- i ' a o ~83(0ct. 1 : 36-39.

. "Kew L i g h t on the &-guy" B-4SO;l 13g(Cct. 1955):

bIeyer , G.2. "Rsch e i n i g e 'b:itanni ' -??amen arrs aregem und

svarrior ' , Jahrb-~rch

-
I1
fur K l e i n a--s i-
a t i s c h e Forsch.mg
1 (1950-51) : 309-324.
h e A r rap1Ja-Nuz i ,'I
It
Oppenheim, A - L . Zrrr ~ s n ~ e s s ~ ? r a c
von
-
i ~ f oll! 1936-37) : 56-65.
"3as bedeutet i n den b u r r i t i s c h e n Pe~sonen-

. ' 11
Zu dell f remilspr c h i Per sonemamen ~ L T SNUZ i 'I
 . " ~ t u d i e nzu den nichtselni t i s c h e n Nuzi-Nanen, !I

-
iW0--7-1939): 23-39.
a
1t:rf
~ ~ l a % i eerts p r o f e s s i o n s Nnzi ," & (1939): 43-
51.
1I
Fne g l o s e h u r r i f e dans l e s Amales d e T i g l a t h -
Phalasar I ,"A= 5(1939019dr0): 111-112.
. 11
L e s s a y y o r t s e n t r e l e s nons de personnes des t e x t e s

capgadociens e t t?es t e x t e s de ~ u z i , "A= 5 f a s c . 33

P f e i f f e r , B . 3 and S p e i s e r , E.i?. One Hrmdred New S e l e c t e d

Nnzi Texts. (&nucal of t h e h e r i c a l Schools of
O r i e n t a l Zesearch 1 6 , ) Iien Haven: American O r i e n t a l
L

s o c i e t y , 1935-36.
Pcrrvits, P.9f. he E a r l y S c r i b e s o f Nuzi," 2 d S L 53(1941):
152-157,
I1
I<urr%anConsonantal P a t t e r n , " M S L 57(1941):
37 B-AOL~.
11
Sauneron, S. L a foxne egyptienne du nom ~ e & b , " B a l l e t i a de
1'Institut Francais d1arch6ologie O r i e n t a l e du

-
Caire 51( 1352) : 57-59.
von Schirler, E. ir
I-Iurritisclze Nomina A c t o r i s , I I 1
2
m
~ 19 f a s c .
68( 1961) : 19-23.
von Soden, W. rileview of K P N ] MF. 15(1945).:. 339ff.
- . C2eviem of H S ] KF* 15f1945): 335ff.
 416
I ,

von Sodec, W . @s iddcadische Sg' labar (ihalecta Orientalia

27.) iiome: Pontif ica? 9 i b l i c s l I n s t i t x t e , 1948.
. .U&adisches ~andw&terbnch. (Lief erungen 1-5. )
Vieshaden: O t t o ~ a r r a s s o l v i t z , 1959-63.
Speiser, X e d . "A L a t t e r of S a ~ ~ s h s h a t aand
r t h e Date of the
E;irlci& ~ a b l e t s , "JAOS 49(1929): 269-27 5.
. "Kotes t o r e c e n t l y published Nuzi ~ e x t s , "UTiIOS
55( 1?35) : 4 3 2 - 4 ~ $ 3 ~
-- . 1I
The L i n g c i s t i c Sul3stratm a t 3 u z i ," i ~ . . & S Q16
~~
( 1935-1936) , lppendix B , pp. 136-142,

" ~ o t e son IIurrian Phonology, 1I J M S 58(1938): 173-

201.
. 11
Progress i n t h e S t ~ r d yof t h e E i n r r i a ~Language, t1
BASOH 7 ~ ( i l p r i l1939): 4-7.
. " S t u d i e s i n 9 t r r r i a n ~ r a ~ m a r ,JUS
" 59(1339): 298-
324.
. "ii Eew IInrrian Pronominal Form," JABS 6 ~ ! l g 4 o j :
254-267.
honeti tic Blethod in Hurrian Orthography," Lang 16
!13~!.0): 319-34-00
. Introcft~ctiont o Hrrrrian. ( ~ n n u a lof the Aierican
Schools of O r i e n t a l Xesearch 20,) New Ilaven:
American O r i e n t a l S o c i e t y , P9A0-41.
. "IIurria-ns and Subarians," JKiS 68(194Sj: 1-13,
. 11
note on a l p h a b e t i c o r i g i n s , " BASOiI 121!Febo
1951) : 17-21.
. "llhe illalalch ~ a b l e t s , "J A O S 74f 1954) : 18-25.
 417
i s r E. 1 . "ticcadian Docmnents from 2 a s Shamra," JkdS 75
(1955) : 1.54-1.65~
. 11
Kuzi or ~:trzu," J.40S ?5(1955): 52-55.
11
i a r g i n a l i a , I1
~ u zV & NS. 25(1356): 1-23.
[ileviem of VoPs. j and 6 o f m.1 33(1$59):

47 5-479
A S i g n i f i c a n t New N i l l from Nuzi," -
lt
J@S Iq(igS3):
65-71.
S t e e l e , F.R. h he P o i n t s of t h e Compass i n ~ u r r i m , "J A O S
61 (1941) : 285-287.
Smairn, G. d Grammar of t h e Akkadian T a b l e t s Found a t Ugar i t .

. Unpublished Ph.D. dissertation. 'iValtham, Mass.: --

Brmdeis U n i v e y s i t y , 1962.

Thl:rea~-Dangin, F. " ~ a h l e t t erle Samarra, 11 Rd g ( l ~ l 2 ) :i-8.

-- a Le s g l l a b a i r e accadien. P a r i s : Paul G e u t h e r , 1926.

- l " ~ o c a b u l a i r e sde :<'\asS h a m a , " Syria l2(193l):
an r aL/
LC~-CUO

a " ~ n et a b l e t t e hilinque de Xas Sharnra," g 37

(1940) : 97-118.
11,.-.-
I , i a U ~ L Sh~1:rlti'eische Tragtaent des ~ i l ~ a m e s c h - ~ ~ o s , "

-
Z ~ L35( 1924) : 133-140.

Van Brock, N. 11
S u b s t i t u t i o n r i t u e l l e , 1l 17 f a s c . G ~ ( 1 9 5 9 ) :
117-14.60
11
V i r o l l e a t ~ d ,C. Les t a b l e t t e s c r m e i f ~ r m e sde ifishxif6-Katna, It

S y r i a 9 ( 1928) : 90-96.
l " ~ e st a b l e t t e s de ~ i s l n r i f 6 - ? a t n a , " S y r i a i i ( f y 3 0 ) :
311-3A2.
 416
11
TJirolPea~rd,C. "Les n o ~ w e l l e s% a b l a t t e s de Xas-Shzma, Syria
28{1951) : .22-56.
m1
I , 32 . r+le AIz~zI* Tablets. (Occasional 2tibi ications

of t h e 3 r i t i s f i I n s t i t r ~ t eof Archaeology i n hh~_liara

0 2.) London: 13ritisholinsti2ute of Archaeology,

1953.
. 1I
n f a r ~sf %he B l a i a k h Tablets,!'
~ ~ ~ q ~ l e m eCopies

-
JCS 8(1954): 1-30.

C. S t u d i e s Bearing on Hurrian Z i s t o r v , Culture and Chranolugy

A l b r i g h t , V.F. "'The Tforites i n ~ a i e s t i n e , " From t h e P ~ x a i ~ l i d s

t o Parrl. 3em Pork, 1735, ~ 2 4-24,
.

. II
Some Iniportant Recent Discoveries: ~ l p h a f a e t i c
Origins and t h e Idri.mi ~ t a t n e , "BASOD 118(lq50):

12-28.

. II
S t r a t i g r a p h i c Cc;nfirmation of the Low Iliesopotamian
~ h r o n o l o ~ y ,B"ASOR l @ - ( ~ e c .1956): 26-30.

Benedict, G.C. " ~ r a r t i a n sand ~ r r r r i m s , "J W S 8 0 ( ~ 9 6 0 ) :

100-104.
B i t t e l ,.:?I " X I I ~h e t h i t i s c h c oder arrch h r r r r i t i s c h e ~<xmst'?"
zs 49( 1.949): 256-290,
~ o h l ,B.l.I.Th. [ileview of Gelb, B] B i b l i o t h e c a Orientalis

3(1946): 116-119.
Chiera, E m , and Speiser , E. A. "A New F a c t o r i n t h e E i s t o r y

of the Ancient ~ a s,"

t AISOH 6 ( 192!*-25) : 75-92.
Contsnat~, G. La c i v i l i z a t i o n d e s LTittites e t des I I u r r i t e s

flu: Mitanni. P a r i s : Payot, 1848.

L
Dossin, G. I1
L e Vocabulaire cte Ntrzi S3.3 2559," g 4.2(1?4-8):
Feiler , : Y o *I7
. : ~ r r s i t ; l s c h eNamer?. i~ -:L13eifl=ttament,
C 11
-
Zr? i\TF.

11 (1939): 216-229.

~ i n l c e l s t e i n ,J'e J .
II
Sabarftr and Sxrbarians," JCS 9(1955):-
1-7
Forrer , E.O. a s~ dem
" ~ i n eGeschiohte d e s ~ 8 t t e r l c b ; n i ~ t m s

Ifatti-i%eiche,I 1 L!.hltraire de I : i r r s t i t u t de ~ h i l o l o ~ i e

e t d ' h i s t o i r e o r i e n t a l e s e t s l a v e s ~j(1936): 687-

'I13.
Gelb, I . S .
-
nzrrrians and S ~ ~ b a r i a s (. s t u d i e s i n dncien-t

Oriental Civilization?. ?To. 22.) Chicago: 'iTniversity

of Ghicago P r e s s , l944.,--...
. Light
"I??P?~%Y on Ilttrr i a n s and S~xbari a n s ," S t i ~ d i a
O r i e n t a l i s t i c i i n onore di Giorgio Levi Della Vida.

Vol. 1. ( 2 ~ b b l i c a z i c n id e l l ' i s t i t u t o per l l O r i e n t e ,

l i r e 52) Rorna: I s t i t r r t o per l l O r i e n t e , 1956.
Goetze, A. Xetl-riter , C h z r r i t e r , und dssyrer . (fiauptlinien

der v o r d e r a s i a t i s c h e n I<t11t1;ren\vicklung im II.

J a h r t a c s e n d v. Chr. G e b . ) Gslo: IT. Aschehong ar,d

n9 f
CO., 1
+y,O.

Xizzuwatna and tke aroblem of Bfttite G e o ~ r a ~ l ~ y .

(Yale O r i e c t a l S e r i e s . Xesearches 270. 22. ) New

Raven: --
Y a l e- yTni-rapci
uuA.,,,- t y P r e s s , lg,$O.

. [ ~ e v i e wof Gelb, s.1 JPTES 5( 1946) : 165-168.

. [ s e v i e a of 2 . T. OICallaghan, Arm Kaharaim.J

--
JCS 2(P94.8) : 305)-314-1-.
ri
The'Probfem of-Ghianology and E a r l y S i t t i t e
 420
~ i s t o r y , "B-GO3 122(1951): 13-25.
11
Goetzc, A. The Date of t h e I l i t t i t e R a i d on 13abylon," BdSOit
127(1952): 21-26.
. " ~ Old
n Babylonian I t i n e r a r y , " J C S 7(1953): 51-72.

- . " y u l i b a r of Duddrrl,
91
JESS 12(1953): 114-123,
11
a d H i t t i t e Chronology," BASOR 146(1957) :
~IalaQ
20-26,

. IC1einasien. 2nd. ed. (Handbuch der illtertumswissen-

schaft. 3. AbteiPung, P . TeiP, 3 . Band, 3. A b s c h n i t f ,

1. ~ n t e r a b s c h n i t t . ) ~ f 6 n c h e n :C. U. Beck, 1957.
. "On t h e Chronology df t h e Second K i l l e n i ~ mB e C O IyI
JCS l l ( 1 9 5 7 ) : 53-61, 63-73.
. ., .

~ < i t e r b o c k B.G.
, K ~ m a r b i . Mythen von c h u r r i t i s c h e n Kronos a w s
den h e t h i t i s c h e n Fragmenten z u s a m e n g e s t e l l t , h e r -
s e t z t und e r k l g r t . 6ew York-Zurich: Enropaverlag,
1946.
be H i t t i t e v e r s i o n o f the I I u r r i a n Itumarbi kiyths:
O r i e n t a l Forer.ulr,ners of f ~ e s i o d , " 52( 1948) :
123-134.
- "The Yr:zrian Eler;lent in t:?e Eiitfite E i i l p i z e , I t Jorrrnal
of World History 2C1954): 353-394-.
Hrsuda, U. "Wa33ukanni, UskiS, S u b a t - Z n l i l ," MBOG 90! 1958) :
22- 35

J e a n , Ch.-F. " ~ r i 3 e ndans l e s l e g t r e s de hlari, I r S e i n i t i c a 1

(3948) : 17-24.
Kantor , H.J [Lieview of A. l l o o r t g a t , Archaeologische For-
s c h r n ~ e nder I f . F r e i h e r x Ton Oppenheim-St i f tune i r n
 $2 P

nordlichen ?iIesopota,vien 1955. ~ o l n - 0 ~ 1 a d e nVest

:
deutscher Verlag, 19-57. ] 56i196'1) : 4 - 4 5 .
Ilitchen, K.A. S t x p p i l ~ ~ P i ~and
& %t h e Amarna Pharaohs. A Study
i n Xelative Chronology. Liverpool: U n i v e r s i t y
P r e s s , 1962.
--l e g
7-
i . "ZITXI Brief e i n e s ~ 5 n i v~ ~
s -Hanigalba*
2
e (13oT 1
3 4 j 9" O-r NS. 32(i963): 280-291.

Ki~pper,J.-He L e s Nomodes en ~ 6 s o ~ o f a m iaw

e remvs d e s r 6 i s
de hlari. ( ~ i b l i c t h & x ede Pa ~ a c u l t 6de Philosophie
e t L e t t r e s de l ' ~ n i v e r s i t 6de ~ i k ~ Fea ,s c i c u l e 1br2.)
Paris: ~ o c i ; t $ d'lfdition * u s U e l l e s ~ e t t r e s , "1957.
. " ~ ? o r t h e r i?,lesopotamia
i and ~yria," The Cambridee

Ancient R i s t o r y . 2ev. ed. of Vols. I and 11.

Canbridge: Cambridge U n i v e r i s t y P r e s s , 1963.
11
Labat, 2. Le rayonnement de l a langue e t de i ' g c r i t u r e
akkadiennes arz d e ~ ~ ~ i * emmi lel e n a i r e aTra12t n o t ~ e
r e , I 1 S y r i a 39(1?&2): 1-27.
~aassb~
3 ., The Shemshara Tablets. X Preliminary Report.

bieddelelser udgivee
(~rkaeologisk--kinstl~istoriske
at De-h I<onvelige
b
--
u a ~ s l c eVindenskabernes Selslcab.
Bind 4, n r . 3.) Copenhagen: 9!unksgaasd, 1959,
~ a e s s p f e.J.,
, and Kn-~dsen,E u K. "An Old Babylonian L e t t e r fro^
a 'IIurrian Environment, 11 &%
NF. 21(1963): 131-137.
Laiidsbesger , 3 . " ~ s s y r i s c h e~ o n i g s l i s t eund 'Drmkles
Z e i t a l t e r t ," JCS $11954): 31-45, 47-73, and 106-
1330
11
Levy, J. Influences E u r r i t e srnr ~ s r a e l , "2evue d e s $ t u d e s
? l o a r t g a t , A. Ar c h a e o l o g g c h e For scAungen der Freiherr
von Opsenlzeim-Stif tung i m n o r d l icilen S l e s o p o t a ~ ~ i e n
1955.
1.
Xoln-Opladen: Westdeatschef Ver l a g , 1957 .
O I C a i l a g h a n , R.T. -
Aram Saharaim. (Analects OrientaJirz 26.1
;tome: P o n t i f i c a l B i b l i c a l I n s t i ' t u t e , 1948.
. 11
New Light on t h e J I c r r i a n and I n d o - ~ r y a ~ S ~ b i o s i s
i n t h e j f i t m n i ~ ~ i n g d o m ,Actes
" due 21 ~ o n ~ r b s
International des Orientalistes (1?%~?
131-133.
:

Oppen3ein1, -4.L. It
d s s y r i o l o g i c a ? Gleanings 11 ," BAS03 93
( 1 9 ~ ) :16.
P a r r o t , A. "Acqcisit;ions e t i n g d i t s dr-r3!usc$e ~ T XLouvre. 5.
dnticpu'itgs ' n e s o p o t m ~ i e n n e s '," Sgr i a 31( 1754) :
11-13.
P a t r a t z , I:. G a s Bferd i n d e r F'r?hzeit. Xostock, l.338.
Pf e i f f e r , :!.II. "NZIZ~ md tlne f3t~rria11~:the Zxcavatiolss a t

Xxzi (iiirktil~,Iraq) and t h e i r c o n t r i b u t i o n %o 0t.m

I:
lmorvledge of t h e h i s t o r y o f t h e I l u r r i a n s , The
S;nithsoi?ian Report (1935) : 535-553.
II
aowton, I\[. F., Hayes, W . C . , and S t u b b i n g s , F. 11. Chronology.
'
Egypt; Western Asia; Aegean Bronze Age, I t
Cambridge i b c i e n t H i s t o r y . 3ev. ed. of Volso I
and 11. C a m r i d g e : Cambridge Z ? n i v e r s i t y P r e s s ,
:,962.
~chmglcel, 11. I i e i l s c h r i f t f o r s c h - r n ~imd a l t e Geschichte
 423
'Jorderasiens, drifter Abschitt , Geschiehte des
I

a?$eii Vorder as*. (~IELXIG~:IC.'der Ortectalistik,

herasgegeben von B e r told spGler. Zweit e r and. )

Leiden: E . J. Brill, i 9 j 7 .
Smith, S. The S t a t u e of Jdri-mi. (occasional Publications ~f
fhe British Inskltute QZ Azchaeology in ~ ~ a r a
KO. i .) London: British Institute of drchaeologg,
194fi.

- . 11
On 'I-Irrrriansand ~zibarians': A iieview Article,
1:

-
PEW 81{P949): 117-126.
-- . Ala!.al& and Chronoloey. London: Luzac and Co.,
1940
Speiser , %.A. Xesopotamian Origins. The basic population of
the Near East Philadelphia: University of Pennsyl-
vania Press, 1930.
. "@thnic Blovsmeqt's in the Near East in the Second
1-iilleaim-3 . C . ," BASOR 13( 1931-32): 13-54.
. It
Ar. Intrrxsive Hurro-Hittite Xiyth, 1I -
JAOS B /r-t
1942) :
L ~

$8-102,

tI I-Iurriansand Sxbariazs, 11 3AUS 6S(l9~*,8):1-13.

--. "On Some Articles of Armor and their Names," JdOS
7 N 1950): 47-49.

. C3evies of \Viseman,Statue of Idri-mi.] JAOS

71(1951): 151.
. "some Factors in the Collapse of Akkad," J A O S
 4.24.
72(a952): 9 7 - l ~ ~
Speiser, 3. A , "The IZ:lurr.i:-? Far-$icipaticn i n t h e C f ~ i l i ~ Z -
---. It
I
U~U,~:, sf kfesop- l a m i a , S y r i a and P a l e s t i n e , Jo~rna].
of Vorld H i s t o r y l(1953): 311- 327,
.-
'l'hieme, P. "The A r y z ~Gsds of tile 'litanni ~ r e a t i e ,:'s J U S
8o(ag6o) : : i ~ rd- a?! ~
rn ?

TTngnarj, A. --
S:maz ti-. ~ etz$s
i arrr Kul turgeschi cllte m d
VoPkerkunde i'zzderasiens. S e r l i n wid Leiytzig: de
Gruyter m d Go., 1936.
Vieyra, A:. h r ~ r r i t eax.1 nopn d ' U r i e
"~arall'sele! ' le B i t tite' ,71

aHa 5
- fast. 35 (1940): 113-116.

. & 51(1957): 83-102, 130-138.

"1Ztar de 1\;iniveY1'
V i r o l l e a u d , C. he S y r i a n Town of Xatna and the Kingdom of
hlitiznni ," Antiquity 3(1929) : 312-317.
:V isemax1 , D * J Q "some iispects of Ba5ylonian Izlf luence a t
AlafaQ," S y r i a 39(lp62) : 180-187.
., - ..
ll'nnll-v,,., L -
a" A Forgotten Kinndom. Baltimore: Penguin B Q O ~ S ,
1953.
Woolley: L . , Gadd, C . J . , and B a r n e t t , R.D. Al2lal&. Ax

account of the excavaxions a#%' f e l l stchanah i n the

Batay 1937-1949. (itepor t s of the ilesearch Committee
o f $he Socieey of the Antiquaries of London KO. 18*)
London: 1955.